Annotation of freem/texinfo.tex, revision 1.1
1.1 ! snw 1: % texinfo.tex -- TeX macros to handle Texinfo files.
! 2: %
! 3: % Load plain if necessary, i.e., if running under initex.
! 4: \expandafter\ifx\csname fmtname\endcsname\relax\input plain\fi
! 5: %
! 6: \def\texinfoversion{2024-02-10.22}
! 7: %
! 8: % Copyright 1985, 1986, 1988, 1990-2024 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
! 9: %
! 10: % This texinfo.tex file is free software: you can redistribute it and/or
! 11: % modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as
! 12: % published by the Free Software Foundation, either version 3 of the
! 13: % License, or (at your option) any later version.
! 14: %
! 15: % This texinfo.tex file is distributed in the hope that it will be
! 16: % useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty
! 17: % of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
! 18: % General Public License for more details.
! 19: %
! 20: % You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
! 21: % along with this program. If not, see <https://www.gnu.org/licenses/>.
! 22: %
! 23: % As a special exception, when this file is read by TeX when processing
! 24: % a Texinfo source document, you may use the result without
! 25: % restriction. This Exception is an additional permission under section 7
! 26: % of the GNU General Public License, version 3 ("GPLv3").
! 27: %
! 28: % Please try the latest version of texinfo.tex before submitting bug
! 29: % reports; you can get the latest version from:
! 30: % https://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/texinfo/ (the Texinfo release area), or
! 31: % https://ftpmirror.gnu.org/texinfo/ (same, via a mirror), or
! 32: % https://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo/ (the Texinfo home page)
! 33: % The texinfo.tex in any given distribution could well be out
! 34: % of date, so if that's what you're using, please check.
! 35: %
! 36: % Send bug reports to bug-texinfo@gnu.org. Please include a
! 37: % complete document in each bug report with which we can reproduce the
! 38: % problem. Patches are, of course, greatly appreciated.
! 39: %
! 40: % To process a Texinfo manual with TeX, it's most reliable to use the
! 41: % texi2dvi shell script that comes with the distribution. For a simple
! 42: % manual foo.texi, however, you can get away with this:
! 43: % tex foo.texi
! 44: % texindex foo.??
! 45: % tex foo.texi
! 46: % tex foo.texi
! 47: % dvips foo.dvi -o # or whatever; this makes foo.ps.
! 48: % The extra TeX runs get the cross-reference information correct.
! 49: % Sometimes one run after texindex suffices, and sometimes you need more
! 50: % than two; texi2dvi does it as many times as necessary.
! 51: %
! 52: % It is possible to adapt texinfo.tex for other languages, to some
! 53: % extent. You can get the existing language-specific files from the
! 54: % full Texinfo distribution.
! 55: %
! 56: % The GNU Texinfo home page is https://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo.
! 57:
! 58:
! 59: \message{Loading texinfo [version \texinfoversion]:}
! 60:
! 61: % LaTeX's \typeout. This ensures that the messages it is used for
! 62: % are identical in format to the corresponding ones from latex/pdflatex.
! 63: \def\typeout{\immediate\write17}%
! 64:
! 65: \chardef\other=12
! 66:
! 67: % We never want plain's \outer definition of \+ in Texinfo.
! 68: % For @tex, we can use \tabalign.
! 69: \let\+ = \relax
! 70:
! 71: % Save some plain tex macros whose names we will redefine.
! 72: \let\ptexb=\b
! 73: \let\ptexbullet=\bullet
! 74: \let\ptexc=\c
! 75: \let\ptexcomma=\,
! 76: \let\ptexdot=\.
! 77: \let\ptexdots=\dots
! 78: \let\ptexend=\end
! 79: \let\ptexequiv=\equiv
! 80: \let\ptexexclam=\!
! 81: \let\ptexfootnote=\footnote
! 82: \let\ptexgtr=>
! 83: \let\ptexhat=^
! 84: \let\ptexi=\i
! 85: \let\ptexindent=\indent
! 86: \let\ptexinsert=\insert
! 87: \let\ptexlbrace=\{
! 88: \let\ptexless=<
! 89: \let\ptexnewwrite\newwrite
! 90: \let\ptexnoindent=\noindent
! 91: \let\ptexplus=+
! 92: \let\ptexraggedright=\raggedright
! 93: \let\ptexrbrace=\}
! 94: \let\ptexslash=\/
! 95: \let\ptexsp=\sp
! 96: \let\ptexstar=\*
! 97: \let\ptexsup=\sup
! 98: \let\ptext=\t
! 99: \let\ptextop=\top
! 100: {\catcode`\'=\active \global\let\ptexquoteright'}% active in plain's math mode
! 101:
! 102: % If this character appears in an error message or help string, it
! 103: % starts a new line in the output.
! 104: \newlinechar = `^^J
! 105:
! 106: % Use TeX 3.0's \inputlineno to get the line number, for better error
! 107: % messages, but if we're using an old version of TeX, don't do anything.
! 108: %
! 109: \ifx\inputlineno\thisisundefined
! 110: \let\linenumber = \empty % Pre-3.0.
! 111: \else
! 112: \def\linenumber{l.\the\inputlineno:\space}
! 113: \fi
! 114:
! 115: % Set up fixed words for English if not already set.
! 116: \ifx\putwordAppendix\undefined \gdef\putwordAppendix{Appendix}\fi
! 117: \ifx\putwordChapter\undefined \gdef\putwordChapter{Chapter}\fi
! 118: \ifx\putworderror\undefined \gdef\putworderror{error}\fi
! 119: \ifx\putwordfile\undefined \gdef\putwordfile{file}\fi
! 120: \ifx\putwordin\undefined \gdef\putwordin{in}\fi
! 121: \ifx\putwordIndexIsEmpty\undefined \gdef\putwordIndexIsEmpty{(Index is empty)}\fi
! 122: \ifx\putwordIndexNonexistent\undefined \gdef\putwordIndexNonexistent{(Index is nonexistent)}\fi
! 123: \ifx\putwordInfo\undefined \gdef\putwordInfo{Info}\fi
! 124: \ifx\putwordInstanceVariableof\undefined \gdef\putwordInstanceVariableof{Instance Variable of}\fi
! 125: \ifx\putwordMethodon\undefined \gdef\putwordMethodon{Method on}\fi
! 126: \ifx\putwordNoTitle\undefined \gdef\putwordNoTitle{No Title}\fi
! 127: \ifx\putwordof\undefined \gdef\putwordof{of}\fi
! 128: \ifx\putwordon\undefined \gdef\putwordon{on}\fi
! 129: \ifx\putwordpage\undefined \gdef\putwordpage{page}\fi
! 130: \ifx\putwordsection\undefined \gdef\putwordsection{section}\fi
! 131: \ifx\putwordSection\undefined \gdef\putwordSection{Section}\fi
! 132: \ifx\putwordsee\undefined \gdef\putwordsee{see}\fi
! 133: \ifx\putwordSee\undefined \gdef\putwordSee{See}\fi
! 134: \ifx\putwordShortTOC\undefined \gdef\putwordShortTOC{Short Contents}\fi
! 135: \ifx\putwordTOC\undefined \gdef\putwordTOC{Table of Contents}\fi
! 136: %
! 137: \ifx\putwordMJan\undefined \gdef\putwordMJan{January}\fi
! 138: \ifx\putwordMFeb\undefined \gdef\putwordMFeb{February}\fi
! 139: \ifx\putwordMMar\undefined \gdef\putwordMMar{March}\fi
! 140: \ifx\putwordMApr\undefined \gdef\putwordMApr{April}\fi
! 141: \ifx\putwordMMay\undefined \gdef\putwordMMay{May}\fi
! 142: \ifx\putwordMJun\undefined \gdef\putwordMJun{June}\fi
! 143: \ifx\putwordMJul\undefined \gdef\putwordMJul{July}\fi
! 144: \ifx\putwordMAug\undefined \gdef\putwordMAug{August}\fi
! 145: \ifx\putwordMSep\undefined \gdef\putwordMSep{September}\fi
! 146: \ifx\putwordMOct\undefined \gdef\putwordMOct{October}\fi
! 147: \ifx\putwordMNov\undefined \gdef\putwordMNov{November}\fi
! 148: \ifx\putwordMDec\undefined \gdef\putwordMDec{December}\fi
! 149: %
! 150: \ifx\putwordDefmac\undefined \gdef\putwordDefmac{Macro}\fi
! 151: \ifx\putwordDefspec\undefined \gdef\putwordDefspec{Special Form}\fi
! 152: \ifx\putwordDefvar\undefined \gdef\putwordDefvar{Variable}\fi
! 153: \ifx\putwordDefopt\undefined \gdef\putwordDefopt{User Option}\fi
! 154: \ifx\putwordDeffunc\undefined \gdef\putwordDeffunc{Function}\fi
! 155:
! 156: % Give the space character the catcode for a space.
! 157: \def\spaceisspace{\catcode`\ =10\relax}
! 158:
! 159: % Likewise for ^^M, the end of line character.
! 160: \def\endlineisspace{\catcode13=10\relax}
! 161:
! 162: \chardef\dashChar = `\-
! 163: \chardef\slashChar = `\/
! 164: \chardef\underChar = `\_
! 165:
! 166: % Ignore a token.
! 167: %
! 168: \def\gobble#1{}
! 169:
! 170: % The following is used inside several \edef's.
! 171: \def\makecsname#1{\expandafter\noexpand\csname#1\endcsname}
! 172:
! 173: % Hyphenation fixes.
! 174: \hyphenation{
! 175: Flor-i-da Ghost-script Ghost-view Mac-OS Post-Script
! 176: ap-pen-dix bit-map bit-maps
! 177: data-base data-bases eshell fall-ing half-way long-est man-u-script
! 178: man-u-scripts mini-buf-fer mini-buf-fers over-view par-a-digm
! 179: par-a-digms rath-er rec-tan-gu-lar ro-bot-ics se-vere-ly set-up spa-ces
! 180: spell-ing spell-ings
! 181: stand-alone strong-est time-stamp time-stamps which-ever white-space
! 182: wide-spread wrap-around
! 183: }
! 184:
! 185: % Sometimes it is convenient to have everything in the transcript file
! 186: % and nothing on the terminal. We don't just call \tracingall here,
! 187: % since that produces some useless output on the terminal. We also make
! 188: % some effort to order the tracing commands to reduce output in the log
! 189: % file; cf. trace.sty in LaTeX.
! 190: %
! 191: \def\gloggingall{\begingroup \globaldefs = 1 \loggingall \endgroup}%
! 192: \def\loggingall{%
! 193: \tracingstats2
! 194: \tracingpages1
! 195: \tracinglostchars2 % 2 gives us more in etex
! 196: \tracingparagraphs1
! 197: \tracingoutput1
! 198: \tracingmacros2
! 199: \tracingrestores1
! 200: \showboxbreadth\maxdimen \showboxdepth\maxdimen
! 201: \ifx\eTeXversion\thisisundefined\else % etex gives us more logging
! 202: \tracingscantokens1
! 203: \tracingifs1
! 204: \tracinggroups1
! 205: \tracingnesting2
! 206: \tracingassigns1
! 207: \fi
! 208: \tracingcommands3 % 3 gives us more in etex
! 209: \errorcontextlines16
! 210: }%
! 211:
! 212: % @errormsg{MSG}. Do the index-like expansions on MSG, but if things
! 213: % aren't perfect, it's not the end of the world, being an error message,
! 214: % after all.
! 215: %
! 216: \def\errormsg{\begingroup \indexnofonts \doerrormsg}
! 217: \def\doerrormsg#1{\errmessage{#1}}
! 218:
! 219: % add check for \lastpenalty to plain's definitions. If the last thing
! 220: % we did was a \nobreak, we don't want to insert more space.
! 221: %
! 222: \def\smallbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\smallskipamount
! 223: \removelastskip\penalty-50\smallskip\fi\fi}
! 224: \def\medbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\medskipamount
! 225: \removelastskip\penalty-100\medskip\fi\fi}
! 226: \def\bigbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\bigskipamount
! 227: \removelastskip\penalty-200\bigskip\fi\fi}
! 228:
! 229: % Output routine
! 230: %
! 231:
! 232: % For a final copy, take out the rectangles
! 233: % that mark overfull boxes (in case you have decided
! 234: % that the text looks ok even though it passes the margin).
! 235: %
! 236: \def\finalout{\overfullrule=0pt }
! 237:
! 238: % Output a mark which sets \thischapter, \thissection and \thiscolor.
! 239: % We dump everything together because we only have one kind of mark.
! 240: % This works because we only use \botmark / \topmark, not \firstmark.
! 241: %
! 242: % A mark contains a subexpression of the \ifcase ... \fi construct.
! 243: % \get*marks macros below extract the needed part using \ifcase.
! 244: %
! 245: % Another complication is to let the user choose whether \thischapter
! 246: % (\thissection) refers to the chapter (section) in effect at the top
! 247: % of a page, or that at the bottom of a page.
! 248:
! 249: % \domark is called twice inside \chapmacro, to add one
! 250: % mark before the section break, and one after.
! 251: % In the second call \prevchapterdefs is the same as \currentchapterdefs,
! 252: % and \prevsectiondefs is the same as \currentsectiondefs.
! 253: % Then if the page is not broken at the mark, some of the previous
! 254: % section appears on the page, and we can get the name of this section
! 255: % from \firstmark for @everyheadingmarks top.
! 256: % @everyheadingmarks bottom uses \botmark.
! 257: %
! 258: % See page 260 of The TeXbook.
! 259: \def\domark{%
! 260: \toks0=\expandafter{\currentchapterdefs}%
! 261: \toks2=\expandafter{\currentsectiondefs}%
! 262: \toks4=\expandafter{\prevchapterdefs}%
! 263: \toks6=\expandafter{\prevsectiondefs}%
! 264: \toks8=\expandafter{\currentcolordefs}%
! 265: \mark{%
! 266: \the\toks0 \the\toks2 % 0: marks for @everyheadingmarks top
! 267: \noexpand\or \the\toks4 \the\toks6 % 1: for @everyheadingmarks bottom
! 268: \noexpand\else \the\toks8 % 2: color marks
! 269: }%
! 270: }
! 271:
! 272: % \gettopheadingmarks, \getbottomheadingmarks,
! 273: % \getcolormarks - extract needed part of mark.
! 274: %
! 275: % \topmark doesn't work for the very first chapter (after the title
! 276: % page or the contents), so we use \firstmark there -- this gets us
! 277: % the mark with the chapter defs, unless the user sneaks in, e.g.,
! 278: % @setcolor (or @url etc.) between @contents and the very first @chapter.
! 279: \def\gettopheadingmarks{%
! 280: \ifcase0\the\savedtopmark\fi
! 281: \ifx\thischapter\empty \ifcase0\firstmark\fi \fi
! 282: }
! 283: \def\getbottomheadingmarks{\ifcase1\botmark\fi}
! 284: \def\getcolormarks{\ifcase2\the\savedtopmark\fi}
! 285:
! 286: % Avoid "undefined control sequence" errors.
! 287: \def\currentchapterdefs{}
! 288: \def\currentsectiondefs{}
! 289: \def\currentsection{}
! 290: \def\prevchapterdefs{}
! 291: \def\prevsectiondefs{}
! 292: \def\currentcolordefs{}
! 293:
! 294: % Margin to add to right of even pages, to left of odd pages.
! 295: \newdimen\bindingoffset
! 296: \newdimen\normaloffset
! 297: \newdimen\txipagewidth \newdimen\txipageheight
! 298:
! 299: % Main output routine.
! 300: %
! 301: \chardef\PAGE = 255
! 302: \newtoks\defaultoutput
! 303: \defaultoutput = {\savetopmark\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}}
! 304: \output=\expandafter{\the\defaultoutput}
! 305:
! 306: \newbox\headlinebox
! 307: \newbox\footlinebox
! 308:
! 309: % When outputting the double column layout for indices, an output routine
! 310: % is run several times, hiding the original value of \topmark. Hence, save
! 311: % \topmark at the beginning.
! 312: %
! 313: \newtoks\savedtopmark
! 314: \newif\iftopmarksaved
! 315: \topmarksavedtrue
! 316: \def\savetopmark{%
! 317: \iftopmarksaved\else
! 318: \global\savedtopmark=\expandafter{\topmark}%
! 319: \global\topmarksavedtrue
! 320: \fi
! 321: }
! 322:
! 323: % \onepageout takes a vbox as an argument.
! 324: % \shipout a vbox for a single page, adding an optional header, footer
! 325: % and footnote. This also causes index entries for this page to be written
! 326: % to the auxiliary files.
! 327: %
! 328: \def\onepageout#1{%
! 329: \hoffset=\normaloffset
! 330: %
! 331: \ifodd\pageno \advance\hoffset by \bindingoffset
! 332: \else \advance\hoffset by -\bindingoffset\fi
! 333: %
! 334: \checkchapterpage
! 335: %
! 336: % Make the heading and footing. \makeheadline and \makefootline
! 337: % use the contents of \headline and \footline.
! 338: \def\commonheadfootline{\let\hsize=\txipagewidth \texinfochars}
! 339: \ifodd\pageno \getoddheadingmarks \else \getevenheadingmarks \fi
! 340: \global\setbox\headlinebox = \vbox{\commonheadfootline \makeheadline}%
! 341: \ifodd\pageno \getoddfootingmarks \else \getevenfootingmarks \fi
! 342: \global\setbox\footlinebox = \vbox{\commonheadfootline \makefootline}%
! 343: %
! 344: {%
! 345: % Set context for writing to auxiliary files like index files.
! 346: % Have to do this stuff outside the \shipout because we want it to
! 347: % take effect in \write's, yet the group defined by the \vbox ends
! 348: % before the \shipout runs.
! 349: %
! 350: \atdummies % don't expand commands in the output.
! 351: \turnoffactive
! 352: \shipout\vbox{%
! 353: % Do this early so pdf references go to the beginning of the page.
! 354: \ifpdfmakepagedest \pdfdest name{\the\pageno} xyz\fi
! 355: %
! 356: \unvbox\headlinebox
! 357: \pagebody{#1}%
! 358: \ifdim\ht\footlinebox > 0pt
! 359: % Only leave this space if the footline is nonempty.
! 360: % (We lessened \vsize for it in \oddfootingyyy.)
! 361: % The \baselineskip=24pt in plain's \makefootline has no effect.
! 362: \vskip 24pt
! 363: \unvbox\footlinebox
! 364: \fi
! 365: %
! 366: }%
! 367: }%
! 368: \global\topmarksavedfalse
! 369: \advancepageno
! 370: \ifnum\outputpenalty>-20000 \else\dosupereject\fi
! 371: }
! 372:
! 373: \newinsert\margin \dimen\margin=\maxdimen
! 374:
! 375: % Main part of page, including any footnotes
! 376: \def\pagebody#1{\vbox to\txipageheight{\boxmaxdepth=\maxdepth #1}}
! 377: {\catcode`\@ =11
! 378: \gdef\pagecontents#1{\ifvoid\topins\else\unvbox\topins\fi
! 379: % marginal hacks, juha@viisa.uucp (Juha Takala)
! 380: \ifvoid\margin\else % marginal info is present
! 381: \rlap{\kern\hsize\vbox to\z@{\kern1pt\box\margin \vss}}\fi
! 382: \dimen@=\dp#1\relax \unvbox#1\relax
! 383: \ifvoid\footins\else\vskip\skip\footins\footnoterule \unvbox\footins\fi
! 384: \ifr@ggedbottom \kern-\dimen@ \vfil \fi}
! 385: }
! 386:
! 387: % Check if we are on the first page of a chapter. Used for printing headings.
! 388: \newif\ifchapterpage
! 389: \def\checkchapterpage{%
! 390: % Get the chapter that was current at the end of the last page
! 391: \ifcase1\the\savedtopmark\fi
! 392: \let\prevchaptername\thischaptername
! 393: %
! 394: \ifodd\pageno \getoddheadingmarks \else \getevenheadingmarks \fi
! 395: \let\curchaptername\thischaptername
! 396: %
! 397: \ifx\curchaptername\prevchaptername
! 398: \chapterpagefalse
! 399: \else
! 400: \chapterpagetrue
! 401: \fi
! 402: }
! 403:
! 404: % Argument parsing
! 405:
! 406: % Parse an argument, then pass it to #1. The argument is the rest of
! 407: % the input line (except we remove a trailing comment). #1 should be a
! 408: % macro which expects an ordinary undelimited TeX argument.
! 409: % For example, \def\foo{\parsearg\fooxxx}.
! 410: %
! 411: \def\parsearg{\parseargusing{}}
! 412: \def\parseargusing#1#2{%
! 413: \def\argtorun{#2}%
! 414: \begingroup
! 415: \obeylines
! 416: \spaceisspace
! 417: #1%
! 418: \parseargline\empty% Insert the \empty token, see \finishparsearg below.
! 419: }
! 420:
! 421: {\obeylines %
! 422: \gdef\parseargline#1^^M{%
! 423: \endgroup % End of the group started in \parsearg.
! 424: \argremovecomment #1\comment\ArgTerm%
! 425: }%
! 426: }
! 427:
! 428: % First remove any @comment, then any @c comment. Pass the result on to
! 429: % \argremovespace.
! 430: \def\argremovecomment#1\comment#2\ArgTerm{\argremovec #1\c\ArgTerm}
! 431: \def\argremovec#1\c#2\ArgTerm{\argremovespace#1$ $\ArgTerm}
! 432: % \argremovec might leave us with trailing space, though; e.g.,
! 433: % @end itemize @c foo
! 434: % Note that the argument cannot contain the TeX $, as its catcode is
! 435: % changed to \other when Texinfo source is read.
! 436: \def\argremovespace#1 $#2\ArgTerm{\finishparsearg#1$\ArgTerm}
! 437:
! 438: % If a _delimited_ argument is enclosed in braces, they get stripped; so
! 439: % to get _exactly_ the rest of the line, we had to prevent such situation.
! 440: % We prepended an \empty token at the very beginning and we expand it
! 441: % just before passing the control to \next.
! 442: % (But first, we have to remove the remaining $ or two.)
! 443: \def\finishparsearg#1$#2\ArgTerm{\expandafter\argtorun\expandafter{#1}}
! 444:
! 445:
! 446: % \parseargdef - define a command taking an argument on the line
! 447: %
! 448: % \parseargdef\foo{...}
! 449: % is roughly equivalent to
! 450: % \def\foo{\parsearg\Xfoo}
! 451: % \def\Xfoo#1{...}
! 452: \def\parseargdef#1{%
! 453: \expandafter \doparseargdef \csname\string#1\endcsname #1%
! 454: }
! 455: \def\doparseargdef#1#2{%
! 456: \def#2{\parsearg#1}%
! 457: \def#1##1%
! 458: }
! 459:
! 460: % Several utility definitions with active space:
! 461: {
! 462: \obeyspaces
! 463: \gdef\obeyedspace{ }
! 464:
! 465: % Make each space character in the input produce a normal interword
! 466: % space in the output. Don't allow a line break at this space, as this
! 467: % is used only in environments like @example, where each line of input
! 468: % should produce a line of output anyway.
! 469: %
! 470: \gdef\sepspaces{\obeyspaces\let =\tie}
! 471:
! 472: % If an index command is used in an @example environment, any spaces
! 473: % therein should become regular spaces in the raw index file, not the
! 474: % expansion of \tie (\leavevmode \penalty \@M \ ).
! 475: \gdef\unsepspaces{\let =\space}
! 476: }
! 477:
! 478:
! 479: \def\flushcr{\ifx\par\lisppar \def\next##1{}\else \let\next=\relax \fi \next}
! 480:
! 481: % Define the framework for environments in texinfo.tex. It's used like this:
! 482: %
! 483: % \envdef\foo{...}
! 484: % \def\Efoo{...}
! 485: %
! 486: % It's the responsibility of \envdef to insert \begingroup before the
! 487: % actual body; @end closes the group after calling \Efoo. \envdef also
! 488: % defines \thisenv, so the current environment is known; @end checks
! 489: % whether the environment name matches. The \checkenv macro can also be
! 490: % used to check whether the current environment is the one expected.
! 491: %
! 492: % Non-false conditionals (@iftex, @ifset) don't fit into this, so they
! 493: % are not treated as environments; they don't open a group. (The
! 494: % implementation of @end takes care not to call \endgroup in this
! 495: % special case.)
! 496:
! 497:
! 498: % At run-time, environments start with this:
! 499: \def\startenvironment#1{\begingroup\def\thisenv{#1}}
! 500: % initialize
! 501: \let\thisenv\empty
! 502:
! 503: % ... but they get defined via ``\envdef\foo{...}'':
! 504: \long\def\envdef#1#2{\def#1{\startenvironment#1#2}}
! 505: \long\def\envparseargdef#1#2{\parseargdef#1{\startenvironment#1#2}}
! 506:
! 507: % Check whether we're in the right environment:
! 508: \def\checkenv#1{%
! 509: \def\temp{#1}%
! 510: \ifx\thisenv\temp
! 511: \else
! 512: \badenverr
! 513: \fi
! 514: }
! 515:
! 516: % Environment mismatch, #1 expected:
! 517: \def\badenverr{%
! 518: \errhelp = \EMsimple
! 519: \errmessage{This command can appear only \inenvironment\temp,
! 520: not \inenvironment\thisenv}%
! 521: }
! 522: \def\inenvironment#1{%
! 523: \ifx#1\empty
! 524: outside of any environment%
! 525: \else
! 526: in environment \expandafter\string#1%
! 527: \fi
! 528: }
! 529:
! 530:
! 531: % @end foo calls \checkenv and executes the definition of \Efoo.
! 532: \parseargdef\end{%
! 533: \if 1\csname iscond.#1\endcsname
! 534: \else
! 535: % The general wording of \badenverr may not be ideal.
! 536: \expandafter\checkenv\csname#1\endcsname
! 537: \csname E#1\endcsname
! 538: \endgroup
! 539: \fi
! 540: }
! 541:
! 542: \newhelp\EMsimple{Press RETURN to continue.}
! 543:
! 544:
! 545: % Be sure we're in horizontal mode when doing a tie, since we make space
! 546: % equivalent to this in @example-like environments. Otherwise, a space
! 547: % at the beginning of a line will start with \penalty -- and
! 548: % since \penalty is valid in vertical mode, we'd end up putting the
! 549: % penalty on the vertical list instead of in the new paragraph.
! 550: {\catcode`@ = 11
! 551: % Avoid using \@M directly, because that causes trouble
! 552: % if the definition is written into an index file.
! 553: \global\let\tiepenalty = \@M
! 554: \gdef\tie{\leavevmode\penalty\tiepenalty\ }
! 555: }
! 556:
! 557: % @: forces normal size whitespace following.
! 558: \def\:{\spacefactor=1000 }
! 559:
! 560: % @* forces a line break.
! 561: \def\*{\unskip\hfil\break\hbox{}\ignorespaces}
! 562:
! 563: % @/ allows a line break.
! 564: \let\/=\allowbreak
! 565:
! 566: % @- allows explicit insertion of hyphenation points
! 567: \def\-{\discretionary{\normaldash}{}{}}%
! 568:
! 569: % @. is an end-of-sentence period.
! 570: \def\.{.\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space}
! 571:
! 572: % @! is an end-of-sentence bang.
! 573: \def\!{!\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space}
! 574:
! 575: % @? is an end-of-sentence query.
! 576: \def\?{?\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space}
! 577:
! 578: % @w prevents a word break. Without the \leavevmode, @w at the
! 579: % beginning of a paragraph, when TeX is still in vertical mode, would
! 580: % produce a whole line of output instead of starting the paragraph.
! 581: \def\w#1{\leavevmode\hbox{#1}}
! 582:
! 583: % @group ... @end group forces ... to be all on one page, by enclosing
! 584: % it in a TeX vbox. We use \vtop instead of \vbox to construct the box
! 585: % to keep its height that of a normal line. According to the rules for
! 586: % \topskip (p.114 of the TeXbook), the glue inserted is
! 587: % max (\topskip - \ht (first item), 0). If that height is large,
! 588: % therefore, no glue is inserted, and the space between the headline and
! 589: % the text is small, which looks bad.
! 590: %
! 591: % Another complication is that the group might be very large. This can
! 592: % cause the glue on the previous page to be unduly stretched, because it
! 593: % does not have much material. In this case, it's better to add an
! 594: % explicit \vfill so that the extra space is at the bottom. The
! 595: % threshold for doing this is if the group is more than \vfilllimit
! 596: % percent of a page (\vfilllimit can be changed inside of @tex).
! 597: %
! 598: \newbox\groupbox
! 599: \def\vfilllimit{0.7}
! 600: %
! 601: \envdef\group{%
! 602: \ifnum\catcode`\^^M=\active \else
! 603: \errhelp = \groupinvalidhelp
! 604: \errmessage{@group invalid in context where filling is enabled}%
! 605: \fi
! 606: \startsavinginserts
! 607: %
! 608: \setbox\groupbox = \vtop\bgroup
! 609: % Do @comment since we are called inside an environment such as
! 610: % @example, where each end-of-line in the input causes an
! 611: % end-of-line in the output. We don't want the end-of-line after
! 612: % the `@group' to put extra space in the output. Since @group
! 613: % should appear on a line by itself (according to the Texinfo
! 614: % manual), we don't worry about eating any user text.
! 615: \comment
! 616: }
! 617: %
! 618: % The \vtop produces a box with normal height and large depth; thus, TeX puts
! 619: % \baselineskip glue before it, and (when the next line of text is done)
! 620: % \lineskip glue after it. Thus, space below is not quite equal to space
! 621: % above. But it's pretty close.
! 622: \def\Egroup{%
! 623: % To get correct interline space between the last line of the group
! 624: % and the first line afterwards, we have to propagate \prevdepth.
! 625: \endgraf % Not \par, as it may have been set to \lisppar.
! 626: \global\dimen1 = \prevdepth
! 627: \egroup % End the \vtop.
! 628: \addgroupbox
! 629: \prevdepth = \dimen1
! 630: \checkinserts
! 631: }
! 632:
! 633: \def\addgroupbox{
! 634: % \dimen0 is the vertical size of the group's box.
! 635: \dimen0 = \ht\groupbox \advance\dimen0 by \dp\groupbox
! 636: % \dimen2 is how much space is left on the page (more or less).
! 637: \dimen2 = \txipageheight \advance\dimen2 by -\pagetotal
! 638: % if the group doesn't fit on the current page, and it's a big big
! 639: % group, force a page break.
! 640: \ifdim \dimen0 > \dimen2
! 641: \ifdim \pagetotal < \vfilllimit\txipageheight
! 642: \page
! 643: \fi
! 644: \fi
! 645: \box\groupbox
! 646: }
! 647:
! 648: %
! 649: % TeX puts in an \escapechar (i.e., `@') at the beginning of the help
! 650: % message, so this ends up printing `@group can only ...'.
! 651: %
! 652: \newhelp\groupinvalidhelp{%
! 653: group can only be used in environments such as @example,^^J%
! 654: where each line of input produces a line of output.}
! 655:
! 656: % @need space-in-mils
! 657: % forces a page break if there is not space-in-mils remaining.
! 658:
! 659: \newdimen\mil \mil=0.001in
! 660:
! 661: \parseargdef\need{%
! 662: % Ensure vertical mode, so we don't make a big box in the middle of a
! 663: % paragraph.
! 664: \par
! 665: %
! 666: % If the @need value is less than one line space, it's useless.
! 667: \dimen0 = #1\mil
! 668: \dimen2 = \ht\strutbox
! 669: \advance\dimen2 by \dp\strutbox
! 670: \ifdim\dimen0 > \dimen2
! 671: % This is similar to the 'needspace' module in LaTeX.
! 672: % The first penalty allows a break if the end of the page is
! 673: % not too far away. Following penalties and skips are discarded.
! 674: % Otherwise, require at least \dimen0 of vertical space.
! 675: %
! 676: % (We used to use a \vtop to reserve space, but this had spacing issues
! 677: % when followed by a section heading, as it was not a "discardable item".
! 678: % This also has the benefit of providing glue before the page break if
! 679: % there isn't enough space.)
! 680: \vskip0pt plus \dimen0
! 681: \penalty-100
! 682: \vskip0pt plus -\dimen0
! 683: \vskip \dimen0
! 684: \penalty9999
! 685: \vskip -\dimen0
! 686: \penalty0\relax % this hides the above glue from \safewhatsit and \dobreak
! 687: \fi
! 688: }
! 689:
! 690: % @br forces paragraph break (and is undocumented).
! 691:
! 692: \let\br = \par
! 693:
! 694: % @page forces the start of a new page.
! 695: %
! 696: \def\page{\par\vfill\supereject}
! 697:
! 698: % @exdent text....
! 699: % outputs text on separate line in roman font, starting at standard page margin
! 700:
! 701: % This records the amount of indent in the innermost environment.
! 702: % That's how much \exdent should take out.
! 703: \newskip\exdentamount
! 704:
! 705: % This defn is used inside fill environments such as @defun.
! 706: \parseargdef\exdent{\hfil\break\hbox{\kern -\exdentamount{\rm#1}}\hfil\break}
! 707:
! 708: % This defn is used inside nofill environments such as @example.
! 709: \parseargdef\nofillexdent{{\advance \leftskip by -\exdentamount
! 710: \leftline{\hskip\leftskip{\rm#1}}}}
! 711:
! 712: % @inmargin{WHICH}{TEXT} puts TEXT in the WHICH margin next to the current
! 713: % paragraph. For more general purposes, use the \margin insertion
! 714: % class. WHICH is `l' or `r'. Not documented, written for gawk manual.
! 715: %
! 716: \newskip\inmarginspacing \inmarginspacing=1cm
! 717: \def\strutdepth{\dp\strutbox}
! 718: %
! 719: \def\doinmargin#1#2{\strut\vadjust{%
! 720: \nobreak
! 721: \kern-\strutdepth
! 722: \vtop to \strutdepth{%
! 723: \baselineskip=\strutdepth
! 724: \vss
! 725: % if you have multiple lines of stuff to put here, you'll need to
! 726: % make the vbox yourself of the appropriate size.
! 727: \ifx#1l%
! 728: \llap{\ignorespaces #2\hskip\inmarginspacing}%
! 729: \else
! 730: \rlap{\hskip\hsize \hskip\inmarginspacing \ignorespaces #2}%
! 731: \fi
! 732: \null
! 733: }%
! 734: }}
! 735: \def\inleftmargin{\doinmargin l}
! 736: \def\inrightmargin{\doinmargin r}
! 737: %
! 738: % @inmargin{TEXT [, RIGHT-TEXT]}
! 739: % (if RIGHT-TEXT is given, use TEXT for left page, RIGHT-TEXT for right;
! 740: % else use TEXT for both).
! 741: %
! 742: \def\inmargin#1{\parseinmargin #1,,\finish}
! 743: \def\parseinmargin#1,#2,#3\finish{% not perfect, but better than nothing.
! 744: \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
! 745: \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
! 746: \def\lefttext{#1}% have both texts
! 747: \def\righttext{#2}%
! 748: \else
! 749: \def\lefttext{#1}% have only one text
! 750: \def\righttext{#1}%
! 751: \fi
! 752: %
! 753: \ifodd\pageno
! 754: \def\temp{\inrightmargin\righttext}% odd page -> outside is right margin
! 755: \else
! 756: \def\temp{\inleftmargin\lefttext}%
! 757: \fi
! 758: \temp
! 759: }
! 760:
! 761: % @include FILE -- \input text of FILE.
! 762: %
! 763: \def\include{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\includezzz}
! 764: \def\includezzz#1{%
! 765: \pushthisfilestack
! 766: \def\thisfile{#1}%
! 767: {%
! 768: \makevalueexpandable % we want to expand any @value in FILE.
! 769: \turnoffactive % and allow special characters in the expansion
! 770: \indexnofonts % Allow `@@' and other weird things in file names.
! 771: \wlog{texinfo.tex: doing @include of #1^^J}%
! 772: \edef\temp{\noexpand\input #1 }%
! 773: %
! 774: % This trickery is to read FILE outside of a group, in case it makes
! 775: % definitions, etc.
! 776: \expandafter
! 777: }\temp
! 778: \popthisfilestack
! 779: }
! 780: \def\filenamecatcodes{%
! 781: \catcode`\\=\other
! 782: \catcode`~=\other
! 783: \catcode`^=\other
! 784: \catcode`_=\other
! 785: \catcode`|=\other
! 786: \catcode`<=\other
! 787: \catcode`>=\other
! 788: \catcode`+=\other
! 789: \catcode`-=\other
! 790: \catcode`\`=\other
! 791: \catcode`\'=\other
! 792: }
! 793:
! 794: \def\pushthisfilestack{%
! 795: \expandafter\pushthisfilestackX\popthisfilestack\StackTerm
! 796: }
! 797: \def\pushthisfilestackX{%
! 798: \expandafter\pushthisfilestackY\thisfile\StackTerm
! 799: }
! 800: \def\pushthisfilestackY #1\StackTerm #2\StackTerm {%
! 801: \gdef\popthisfilestack{\gdef\thisfile{#1}\gdef\popthisfilestack{#2}}%
! 802: }
! 803:
! 804: \def\popthisfilestack{\errthisfilestackempty}
! 805: \def\errthisfilestackempty{\errmessage{Internal error:
! 806: the stack of filenames is empty.}}
! 807: %
! 808: \def\thisfile{}
! 809:
! 810: % @center line
! 811: % outputs that line, centered.
! 812: %
! 813: \parseargdef\center{%
! 814: \ifhmode
! 815: \let\centersub\centerH
! 816: \else
! 817: \let\centersub\centerV
! 818: \fi
! 819: \centersub{\hfil \ignorespaces#1\unskip \hfil}%
! 820: \let\centersub\relax % don't let the definition persist, just in case
! 821: }
! 822: \def\centerH#1{{%
! 823: \hfil\break
! 824: \advance\hsize by -\leftskip
! 825: \advance\hsize by -\rightskip
! 826: \line{#1}%
! 827: \break
! 828: }}
! 829: %
! 830: \newcount\centerpenalty
! 831: \def\centerV#1{%
! 832: % The idea here is the same as in \startdefun, \cartouche, etc.: if
! 833: % @center is the first thing after a section heading, we need to wipe
! 834: % out the negative parskip inserted by \sectionheading, but still
! 835: % prevent a page break here.
! 836: \centerpenalty = \lastpenalty
! 837: \ifnum\centerpenalty>10000 \vskip\parskip \fi
! 838: \ifnum\centerpenalty>9999 \penalty\centerpenalty \fi
! 839: \line{\kern\leftskip #1\kern\rightskip}%
! 840: }
! 841:
! 842: % @sp n outputs n lines of vertical space
! 843: %
! 844: \parseargdef\sp{\vskip #1\baselineskip}
! 845:
! 846: % @comment ...line which is ignored...
! 847: % @c is the same as @comment
! 848: % @ignore ... @end ignore is another way to write a comment
! 849:
! 850:
! 851: \def\c{\begingroup \catcode`\^^M=\active%
! 852: \catcode`\@=\other \catcode`\{=\other \catcode`\}=\other%
! 853: \cxxx}
! 854: {\catcode`\^^M=\active \gdef\cxxx#1^^M{\endgroup}}
! 855: %
! 856: \let\comment\c
! 857:
! 858: % @paragraphindent NCHARS
! 859: % We'll use ems for NCHARS, close enough.
! 860: % NCHARS can also be the word `asis' or `none'.
! 861: % We cannot feasibly implement @paragraphindent asis, though.
! 862: %
! 863: \def\asisword{asis} % no translation, these are keywords
! 864: \def\noneword{none}
! 865: %
! 866: \parseargdef\paragraphindent{%
! 867: \def\temp{#1}%
! 868: \ifx\temp\asisword
! 869: \else
! 870: \ifx\temp\noneword
! 871: \defaultparindent = 0pt
! 872: \else
! 873: \defaultparindent = #1em
! 874: \fi
! 875: \fi
! 876: \parindent = \defaultparindent
! 877: }
! 878:
! 879: % @exampleindent NCHARS
! 880: % We'll use ems for NCHARS like @paragraphindent.
! 881: % It seems @exampleindent asis isn't necessary, but
! 882: % I preserve it to make it similar to @paragraphindent.
! 883: \parseargdef\exampleindent{%
! 884: \def\temp{#1}%
! 885: \ifx\temp\asisword
! 886: \else
! 887: \ifx\temp\noneword
! 888: \lispnarrowing = 0pt
! 889: \else
! 890: \lispnarrowing = #1em
! 891: \fi
! 892: \fi
! 893: }
! 894:
! 895: % @firstparagraphindent WORD
! 896: % If WORD is `none', then suppress indentation of the first paragraph
! 897: % after a section heading. If WORD is `insert', then do indent at such
! 898: % paragraphs.
! 899: %
! 900: % The paragraph indentation is suppressed or not by calling
! 901: % \suppressfirstparagraphindent, which the sectioning commands do.
! 902: % We switch the definition of this back and forth according to WORD.
! 903: % By default, we suppress indentation.
! 904: %
! 905: \def\suppressfirstparagraphindent{\dosuppressfirstparagraphindent}
! 906: \def\insertword{insert}
! 907: %
! 908: \parseargdef\firstparagraphindent{%
! 909: \def\temp{#1}%
! 910: \ifx\temp\noneword
! 911: \let\suppressfirstparagraphindent = \dosuppressfirstparagraphindent
! 912: \else\ifx\temp\insertword
! 913: \let\suppressfirstparagraphindent = \relax
! 914: \else
! 915: \errhelp = \EMsimple
! 916: \errmessage{Unknown @firstparagraphindent option `\temp'}%
! 917: \fi\fi
! 918: }
! 919:
! 920: % Here is how we actually suppress indentation. Redefine \everypar to
! 921: % \kern backwards by \parindent, and then reset itself to empty.
! 922: %
! 923: % We also make \indent itself not actually do anything until the next
! 924: % paragraph.
! 925: %
! 926: \gdef\dosuppressfirstparagraphindent{%
! 927: \gdef\indent {\restorefirstparagraphindent \indent}%
! 928: \gdef\noindent{\restorefirstparagraphindent \noindent}%
! 929: \global\everypar = {\kern -\parindent \restorefirstparagraphindent}%
! 930: }
! 931: %
! 932: \gdef\restorefirstparagraphindent{%
! 933: \global\let\indent = \ptexindent
! 934: \global\let\noindent = \ptexnoindent
! 935: \global\everypar = {}%
! 936: }
! 937:
! 938: % leave vertical mode without cancelling any first paragraph indent
! 939: \gdef\imageindent{%
! 940: \toks0=\everypar
! 941: \everypar={}%
! 942: \ptexnoindent
! 943: \global\everypar=\toks0
! 944: }
! 945:
! 946:
! 947: % @refill is a no-op.
! 948: \let\refill=\relax
! 949:
! 950: % @setfilename INFO-FILENAME - ignored
! 951: \let\setfilename=\comment
! 952:
! 953: % @bye.
! 954: \outer\def\bye{\chappager\pagelabels\tracingstats=1\ptexend}
! 955:
! 956:
! 957: \message{pdf,}
! 958: % adobe `portable' document format
! 959: \newcount\tempnum
! 960: \newcount\lnkcount
! 961: \newtoks\filename
! 962: \newcount\filenamelength
! 963: \newcount\pgn
! 964: \newtoks\toksA
! 965: \newtoks\toksB
! 966: \newtoks\toksC
! 967: \newtoks\toksD
! 968: \newbox\boxA
! 969: \newbox\boxB
! 970: \newcount\countA
! 971: \newif\ifpdf
! 972: \newif\ifpdfmakepagedest
! 973:
! 974: %
! 975: % For LuaTeX
! 976: %
! 977:
! 978: \newif\iftxiuseunicodedestname
! 979: \txiuseunicodedestnamefalse % For pdfTeX etc.
! 980:
! 981: \ifx\luatexversion\thisisundefined
! 982: \else
! 983: % Use Unicode destination names
! 984: \txiuseunicodedestnametrue
! 985: % Escape PDF strings with converting UTF-16 from UTF-8
! 986: \begingroup
! 987: \catcode`\%=12
! 988: \directlua{
! 989: function UTF16oct(str)
! 990: tex.sprint(string.char(0x5c) .. '376' .. string.char(0x5c) .. '377')
! 991: for c in string.utfvalues(str) do
! 992: if c < 0x10000 then
! 993: tex.sprint(
! 994: string.format(string.char(0x5c) .. string.char(0x25) .. '03o' ..
! 995: string.char(0x5c) .. string.char(0x25) .. '03o',
! 996: math.floor(c / 256), math.floor(c % 256)))
! 997: else
! 998: c = c - 0x10000
! 999: local c_hi = c / 1024 + 0xd800
! 1000: local c_lo = c % 1024 + 0xdc00
! 1001: tex.sprint(
! 1002: string.format(string.char(0x5c) .. string.char(0x25) .. '03o' ..
! 1003: string.char(0x5c) .. string.char(0x25) .. '03o' ..
! 1004: string.char(0x5c) .. string.char(0x25) .. '03o' ..
! 1005: string.char(0x5c) .. string.char(0x25) .. '03o',
! 1006: math.floor(c_hi / 256), math.floor(c_hi % 256),
! 1007: math.floor(c_lo / 256), math.floor(c_lo % 256)))
! 1008: end
! 1009: end
! 1010: end
! 1011: }
! 1012: \endgroup
! 1013: \def\pdfescapestrutfsixteen#1{\directlua{UTF16oct('\luaescapestring{#1}')}}
! 1014: % Escape PDF strings without converting
! 1015: \begingroup
! 1016: \directlua{
! 1017: function PDFescstr(str)
! 1018: for c in string.bytes(str) do
! 1019: if c <= 0x20 or c >= 0x80 or c == 0x28 or c == 0x29 or c == 0x5c then
! 1020: tex.sprint(-2,
! 1021: string.format(string.char(0x5c) .. string.char(0x25) .. '03o',
! 1022: c))
! 1023: else
! 1024: tex.sprint(-2, string.char(c))
! 1025: end
! 1026: end
! 1027: end
! 1028: }
! 1029: % The -2 in the arguments here gives all the input to TeX catcode 12
! 1030: % (other) or 10 (space), preventing undefined control sequence errors. See
! 1031: % https://lists.gnu.org/archive/html/bug-texinfo/2019-08/msg00031.html
! 1032: %
! 1033: \endgroup
! 1034: \def\pdfescapestring#1{\directlua{PDFescstr('\luaescapestring{#1}')}}
! 1035: \ifnum\luatexversion>84
! 1036: % For LuaTeX >= 0.85
! 1037: \def\pdfdest{\pdfextension dest}
! 1038: \let\pdfoutput\outputmode
! 1039: \def\pdfliteral{\pdfextension literal}
! 1040: \def\pdfcatalog{\pdfextension catalog}
! 1041: \def\pdftexversion{\numexpr\pdffeedback version\relax}
! 1042: \let\pdfximage\saveimageresource
! 1043: \let\pdfrefximage\useimageresource
! 1044: \let\pdflastximage\lastsavedimageresourceindex
! 1045: \def\pdfendlink{\pdfextension endlink\relax}
! 1046: \def\pdfoutline{\pdfextension outline}
! 1047: \def\pdfstartlink{\pdfextension startlink}
! 1048: \def\pdffontattr{\pdfextension fontattr}
! 1049: \def\pdfobj{\pdfextension obj}
! 1050: \def\pdflastobj{\numexpr\pdffeedback lastobj\relax}
! 1051: \let\pdfpagewidth\pagewidth
! 1052: \let\pdfpageheight\pageheight
! 1053: \edef\pdfhorigin{\pdfvariable horigin}
! 1054: \edef\pdfvorigin{\pdfvariable vorigin}
! 1055: \fi
! 1056: \fi
! 1057:
! 1058: % when pdftex is run in dvi mode, \pdfoutput is defined (so \pdfoutput=1
! 1059: % can be set). So we test for \relax and 0 as well as being undefined.
! 1060: \ifx\pdfoutput\thisisundefined
! 1061: \else
! 1062: \ifx\pdfoutput\relax
! 1063: \else
! 1064: \ifcase\pdfoutput
! 1065: \else
! 1066: \pdftrue
! 1067: \fi
! 1068: \fi
! 1069: \fi
! 1070:
! 1071: \newif\ifpdforxetex
! 1072: \pdforxetexfalse
! 1073: \ifpdf
! 1074: \pdforxetextrue
! 1075: \fi
! 1076: \ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined\else
! 1077: \pdforxetextrue
! 1078: \fi
! 1079:
! 1080:
! 1081: % Output page labels information.
! 1082: % See PDF reference v.1.7 p.594, section 8.3.1.
! 1083: % Page label ranges must be increasing.
! 1084: \ifpdf
! 1085: \def\pagelabels{%
! 1086: \def\title{0 << /P (T-) /S /D >>}%
! 1087: %
! 1088: % support @contents at very end of document
! 1089: \ifnum\contentsendcount=\pagecount
! 1090: \ifnum\arabiccount<\romancount
! 1091: \pdfcatalog{/PageLabels << /Nums
! 1092: [\title
! 1093: \the\arabiccount << /S /D >>
! 1094: \the\romancount << /S /r >>
! 1095: ] >> }\relax
! 1096: \fi
! 1097: % no contents in document
! 1098: \else\ifnum\contentsendcount=0
! 1099: \pdfcatalog{/PageLabels << /Nums
! 1100: [\title
! 1101: \the\arabiccount << /S /D >>
! 1102: ] >> }\relax
! 1103: \else
! 1104: \pdfcatalog{/PageLabels << /Nums
! 1105: [\title
! 1106: \the\romancount << /S /r >>
! 1107: \the\contentsendcount << /S /D >>
! 1108: ] >> }\relax
! 1109: \fi\fi
! 1110: }
! 1111: \else
! 1112: \let\pagelabels\relax
! 1113: \fi
! 1114:
! 1115: \newcount\pagecount \pagecount=0
! 1116: \newcount\romancount \romancount=0
! 1117: \newcount\arabiccount \arabiccount=0
! 1118: \newcount\contentsendcount \contentsendcount=0
! 1119:
! 1120: \ifpdf
! 1121: \let\ptxadvancepageno\advancepageno
! 1122: \def\advancepageno{%
! 1123: \ptxadvancepageno\global\advance\pagecount by 1
! 1124: }
! 1125: \fi
! 1126:
! 1127:
! 1128: % PDF uses PostScript string constants for the names of xref targets,
! 1129: % for display in the outlines, and in other places. Thus, we have to
! 1130: % double any backslashes. Otherwise, a name like "\node" will be
! 1131: % interpreted as a newline (\n), followed by o, d, e. Not good.
! 1132: %
! 1133: % See http://www.ntg.nl/pipermail/ntg-pdftex/2004-July/000654.html and
! 1134: % related messages. The final outcome is that it is up to the TeX user
! 1135: % to double the backslashes and otherwise make the string valid, so
! 1136: % that's what we do. pdftex 1.30.0 (ca.2005) introduced a primitive to
! 1137: % do this reliably, so we use it.
! 1138:
! 1139: % #1 is a control sequence in which to do the replacements,
! 1140: % which we \xdef.
! 1141: \def\txiescapepdf#1{%
! 1142: \ifx\pdfescapestring\thisisundefined
! 1143: % No primitive available; should we give a warning or log?
! 1144: % Many times it won't matter.
! 1145: \xdef#1{#1}%
! 1146: \else
! 1147: % The expandable \pdfescapestring primitive escapes parentheses,
! 1148: % backslashes, and other special chars.
! 1149: \xdef#1{\pdfescapestring{#1}}%
! 1150: \fi
! 1151: }
! 1152: \def\txiescapepdfutfsixteen#1{%
! 1153: \ifx\pdfescapestrutfsixteen\thisisundefined
! 1154: % No UTF-16 converting macro available.
! 1155: \txiescapepdf{#1}%
! 1156: \else
! 1157: \xdef#1{\pdfescapestrutfsixteen{#1}}%
! 1158: \fi
! 1159: }
! 1160:
! 1161: \newhelp\nopdfimagehelp{Texinfo supports .png, .jpg, .jpeg, and .pdf images
! 1162: with PDF output, and none of those formats could be found. (.eps cannot
! 1163: be supported due to the design of the PDF format; use regular TeX (DVI
! 1164: output) for that.)}
! 1165:
! 1166: \ifpdf
! 1167: %
! 1168: % Color manipulation macros using ideas from pdfcolor.tex,
! 1169: % except using rgb instead of cmyk; the latter is said to render as a
! 1170: % very dark gray on-screen and a very dark halftone in print, instead
! 1171: % of actual black. The dark red here is dark enough to print on paper as
! 1172: % nearly black, but still distinguishable for online viewing. We use
! 1173: % black by default, though.
! 1174: \def\rgbDarkRed{0.50 0.09 0.12}
! 1175: \def\rgbBlack{0 0 0}
! 1176: %
! 1177: % rg sets the color for filling (usual text, etc.);
! 1178: % RG sets the color for stroking (thin rules, e.g., normal _'s).
! 1179: \def\pdfsetcolor#1{\pdfliteral{#1 rg #1 RG}}
! 1180: %
! 1181: % Set color, and create a mark which defines \thiscolor accordingly,
! 1182: % so that \makeheadline knows which color to restore.
! 1183: \def\curcolor{0 0 0}%
! 1184: \def\setcolor#1{%
! 1185: \ifx#1\curcolor\else
! 1186: \xdef\currentcolordefs{\gdef\noexpand\thiscolor{#1}}%
! 1187: \domark
! 1188: \pdfsetcolor{#1}%
! 1189: \xdef\curcolor{#1}%
! 1190: \fi
! 1191: }
! 1192: %
! 1193: \let\maincolor\rgbBlack
! 1194: \pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}
! 1195: \edef\thiscolor{\maincolor}
! 1196: \def\currentcolordefs{}
! 1197: %
! 1198: \def\makefootline{%
! 1199: \baselineskip24pt
! 1200: \line{\pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}\the\footline}%
! 1201: }
! 1202: %
! 1203: \def\makeheadline{%
! 1204: \vbox to 0pt{%
! 1205: \vskip-22.5pt
! 1206: \line{%
! 1207: \vbox to8.5pt{}%
! 1208: % Extract \thiscolor definition from the marks.
! 1209: \getcolormarks
! 1210: % Typeset the headline with \maincolor, then restore the color.
! 1211: \pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}\the\headline\pdfsetcolor{\thiscolor}%
! 1212: }%
! 1213: \vss
! 1214: }%
! 1215: \nointerlineskip
! 1216: }
! 1217: %
! 1218: %
! 1219: \pdfcatalog{/PageMode /UseOutlines}
! 1220: %
! 1221: % #1 is image name, #2 width (might be empty/whitespace), #3 height (ditto).
! 1222: \def\dopdfimage#1#2#3{%
! 1223: \def\pdfimagewidth{#2}\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
! 1224: \def\pdfimageheight{#3}\setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}%
! 1225: %
! 1226: % pdftex (and the PDF format) support .pdf, .png, .jpg (among
! 1227: % others). Let's try in that order, PDF first since if
! 1228: % someone has a scalable image, presumably better to use that than a
! 1229: % bitmap.
! 1230: \let\pdfimgext=\empty
! 1231: \begingroup
! 1232: \openin 1 #1.pdf \ifeof 1
! 1233: \openin 1 #1.PDF \ifeof 1
! 1234: \openin 1 #1.png \ifeof 1
! 1235: \openin 1 #1.jpg \ifeof 1
! 1236: \openin 1 #1.jpeg \ifeof 1
! 1237: \openin 1 #1.JPG \ifeof 1
! 1238: \errhelp = \nopdfimagehelp
! 1239: \errmessage{Could not find image file #1 for pdf}%
! 1240: \else \gdef\pdfimgext{JPG}%
! 1241: \fi
! 1242: \else \gdef\pdfimgext{jpeg}%
! 1243: \fi
! 1244: \else \gdef\pdfimgext{jpg}%
! 1245: \fi
! 1246: \else \gdef\pdfimgext{png}%
! 1247: \fi
! 1248: \else \gdef\pdfimgext{PDF}%
! 1249: \fi
! 1250: \else \gdef\pdfimgext{pdf}%
! 1251: \fi
! 1252: \closein 1
! 1253: \endgroup
! 1254: %
! 1255: % without \immediate, ancient pdftex seg faults when the same image is
! 1256: % included twice. (Version 3.14159-pre-1.0-unofficial-20010704.)
! 1257: \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14
! 1258: \immediate\pdfimage
! 1259: \else
! 1260: \immediate\pdfximage
! 1261: \fi
! 1262: \ifdim \wd0 >0pt width \pdfimagewidth \fi
! 1263: \ifdim \wd2 >0pt height \pdfimageheight \fi
! 1264: \ifnum\pdftexversion<13
! 1265: #1.\pdfimgext
! 1266: \else
! 1267: {#1.\pdfimgext}%
! 1268: \fi
! 1269: \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 \else
! 1270: \pdfrefximage \pdflastximage
! 1271: \fi}
! 1272: %
! 1273: \def\setpdfdestname#1{{%
! 1274: % We have to set dummies so commands such as @code, and characters
! 1275: % such as \, aren't expanded when present in a section title.
! 1276: \indexnofonts
! 1277: \makevalueexpandable
! 1278: \turnoffactive
! 1279: \iftxiuseunicodedestname
! 1280: \ifx \declaredencoding \latone
! 1281: % Pass through Latin-1 characters.
! 1282: % LuaTeX with byte wise I/O converts Latin-1 characters to Unicode.
! 1283: \else
! 1284: \ifx \declaredencoding \utfeight
! 1285: % Pass through Unicode characters.
! 1286: \else
! 1287: % Use ASCII approximations in destination names.
! 1288: \passthroughcharsfalse
! 1289: \fi
! 1290: \fi
! 1291: \else
! 1292: % Use ASCII approximations in destination names.
! 1293: \passthroughcharsfalse
! 1294: \fi
! 1295: \def\pdfdestname{#1}%
! 1296: \txiescapepdf\pdfdestname
! 1297: }}
! 1298: %
! 1299: \def\setpdfoutlinetext#1{{%
! 1300: \indexnofonts
! 1301: \makevalueexpandable
! 1302: \turnoffactive
! 1303: \ifx \declaredencoding \latone
! 1304: % The PDF format can use an extended form of Latin-1 in bookmark
! 1305: % strings. See Appendix D of the PDF Reference, Sixth Edition, for
! 1306: % the "PDFDocEncoding".
! 1307: \passthroughcharstrue
! 1308: % Pass through Latin-1 characters.
! 1309: % LuaTeX: Convert to Unicode
! 1310: % pdfTeX: Use Latin-1 as PDFDocEncoding
! 1311: \def\pdfoutlinetext{#1}%
! 1312: \else
! 1313: \ifx \declaredencoding \utfeight
! 1314: \ifx\luatexversion\thisisundefined
! 1315: % For pdfTeX with UTF-8.
! 1316: % TODO: the PDF format can use UTF-16 in bookmark strings,
! 1317: % but the code for this isn't done yet.
! 1318: % Use ASCII approximations.
! 1319: \passthroughcharsfalse
! 1320: \def\pdfoutlinetext{#1}%
! 1321: \else
! 1322: % For LuaTeX with UTF-8.
! 1323: % Pass through Unicode characters for title texts.
! 1324: \passthroughcharstrue
! 1325: \def\pdfoutlinetext{#1}%
! 1326: \fi
! 1327: \else
! 1328: % For non-Latin-1 or non-UTF-8 encodings.
! 1329: % Use ASCII approximations.
! 1330: \passthroughcharsfalse
! 1331: \def\pdfoutlinetext{#1}%
! 1332: \fi
! 1333: \fi
! 1334: % LuaTeX: Convert to UTF-16
! 1335: % pdfTeX: Use Latin-1 as PDFDocEncoding
! 1336: \txiescapepdfutfsixteen\pdfoutlinetext
! 1337: }}
! 1338: %
! 1339: \def\pdfmkdest#1{%
! 1340: \setpdfdestname{#1}%
! 1341: \safewhatsit{\pdfdest name{\pdfdestname} xyz}%
! 1342: }
! 1343: %
! 1344: % used to mark target names; must be expandable.
! 1345: \def\pdfmkpgn#1{#1}
! 1346: %
! 1347: % by default, use black for everything.
! 1348: \def\urlcolor{\rgbBlack}
! 1349: \let\linkcolor\rgbBlack
! 1350: \def\endlink{\setcolor{\maincolor}\pdfendlink}
! 1351: %
! 1352: % Adding outlines to PDF; macros for calculating structure of outlines
! 1353: % come from Petr Olsak
! 1354: \def\expnumber#1{\expandafter\ifx\csname#1\endcsname\relax 0%
! 1355: \else \csname#1\endcsname \fi}
! 1356: \def\advancenumber#1{\tempnum=\expnumber{#1}\relax
! 1357: \advance\tempnum by 1
! 1358: \expandafter\xdef\csname#1\endcsname{\the\tempnum}}
! 1359: %
! 1360: % #1 is the section text, which is what will be displayed in the
! 1361: % outline by the pdf viewer. #2 is the pdf expression for the number
! 1362: % of subentries (or empty, for subsubsections). #3 is the node text,
! 1363: % which might be empty if this toc entry had no corresponding node.
! 1364: % #4 is the page number
! 1365: %
! 1366: \def\dopdfoutline#1#2#3#4{%
! 1367: % Generate a link to the node text if that exists; else, use the
! 1368: % page number. We could generate a destination for the section
! 1369: % text in the case where a section has no node, but it doesn't
! 1370: % seem worth the trouble, since most documents are normally structured.
! 1371: \setpdfoutlinetext{#1}
! 1372: \setpdfdestname{#3}
! 1373: \ifx\pdfdestname\empty
! 1374: \def\pdfdestname{#4}%
! 1375: \fi
! 1376: %
! 1377: \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\pdfdestname}}#2{\pdfoutlinetext}%
! 1378: }
! 1379: %
! 1380: \def\pdfmakeoutlines{%
! 1381: \begingroup
! 1382: % Read toc silently, to get counts of subentries for \pdfoutline.
! 1383: \def\partentry##1##2##3##4{}% ignore parts in the outlines
! 1384: \def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{%
! 1385: \def\thischapnum{##2}%
! 1386: \def\thissecnum{0}%
! 1387: \def\thissubsecnum{0}%
! 1388: }%
! 1389: \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
! 1390: \advancenumber{chap\thischapnum}%
! 1391: \def\thissecnum{##2}%
! 1392: \def\thissubsecnum{0}%
! 1393: }%
! 1394: \def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
! 1395: \advancenumber{sec\thissecnum}%
! 1396: \def\thissubsecnum{##2}%
! 1397: }%
! 1398: \def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
! 1399: \advancenumber{subsec\thissubsecnum}%
! 1400: }%
! 1401: \def\thischapnum{0}%
! 1402: \def\thissecnum{0}%
! 1403: \def\thissubsecnum{0}%
! 1404: %
! 1405: % use \def rather than \let here because we redefine \chapentry et
! 1406: % al. a second time, below.
! 1407: \def\appentry{\numchapentry}%
! 1408: \def\appsecentry{\numsecentry}%
! 1409: \def\appsubsecentry{\numsubsecentry}%
! 1410: \def\appsubsubsecentry{\numsubsubsecentry}%
! 1411: \def\unnchapentry{\numchapentry}%
! 1412: \def\unnsecentry{\numsecentry}%
! 1413: \def\unnsubsecentry{\numsubsecentry}%
! 1414: \def\unnsubsubsecentry{\numsubsubsecentry}%
! 1415: \readdatafile{toc}%
! 1416: %
! 1417: % Read toc second time, this time actually producing the outlines.
! 1418: % The `-' means take the \expnumber as the absolute number of
! 1419: % subentries, which we calculated on our first read of the .toc above.
! 1420: %
! 1421: % We use the node names as the destinations.
! 1422: %
! 1423: % Currently we prefix the section name with the section number
! 1424: % for chapter and appendix headings only in order to avoid too much
! 1425: % horizontal space being required in the PDF viewer.
! 1426: \def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{%
! 1427: \dopdfoutline{##2 ##1}{count-\expnumber{chap##2}}{##3}{##4}}%
! 1428: \def\unnchapentry##1##2##3##4{%
! 1429: \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{chap##2}}{##3}{##4}}%
! 1430: \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
! 1431: \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{sec##2}}{##3}{##4}}%
! 1432: \def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
! 1433: \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{subsec##2}}{##3}{##4}}%
! 1434: \def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% count is always zero
! 1435: \dopdfoutline{##1}{}{##3}{##4}}%
! 1436: %
! 1437: % PDF outlines are displayed using system fonts, instead of
! 1438: % document fonts. Therefore we cannot use special characters,
! 1439: % since the encoding is unknown. For example, the eogonek from
! 1440: % Latin 2 (0xea) gets translated to a | character. Info from
! 1441: % Staszek Wawrykiewicz, 19 Jan 2004 04:09:24 +0100.
! 1442: %
! 1443: % TODO this right, we have to translate 8-bit characters to
! 1444: % their "best" equivalent, based on the @documentencoding. Too
! 1445: % much work for too little return. Just use the ASCII equivalents
! 1446: % we use for the index sort strings.
! 1447: %
! 1448: \indexnofonts
! 1449: \setupdatafile
! 1450: % We can have normal brace characters in the PDF outlines, unlike
! 1451: % Texinfo index files. So set that up.
! 1452: \def\{{\lbracecharliteral}%
! 1453: \def\}{\rbracecharliteral}%
! 1454: \catcode`\\=\active \otherbackslash
! 1455: \input \tocreadfilename
! 1456: \endgroup
! 1457: }
! 1458: {\catcode`[=1 \catcode`]=2
! 1459: \catcode`{=\other \catcode`}=\other
! 1460: \gdef\lbracecharliteral[{]%
! 1461: \gdef\rbracecharliteral[}]%
! 1462: ]
! 1463: %
! 1464: \def\skipspaces#1{\def\PP{#1}\def\D{|}%
! 1465: \ifx\PP\D\let\nextsp\relax
! 1466: \else\let\nextsp\skipspaces
! 1467: \addtokens{\filename}{\PP}%
! 1468: \advance\filenamelength by 1
! 1469: \fi
! 1470: \nextsp}
! 1471: \def\getfilename#1{%
! 1472: \filenamelength=0
! 1473: % If we don't expand the argument now, \skipspaces will get
! 1474: % snagged on things like "@value{foo}".
! 1475: \edef\temp{#1}%
! 1476: \expandafter\skipspaces\temp|\relax
! 1477: }
! 1478: \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14
! 1479: \let \startlink \pdfannotlink
! 1480: \else
! 1481: \let \startlink \pdfstartlink
! 1482: \fi
! 1483: % make a live url in pdf output.
! 1484: \def\pdfurl#1{%
! 1485: \begingroup
! 1486: % it seems we really need yet another set of dummies; have not
! 1487: % tried to figure out what each command should do in the context
! 1488: % of @url. for now, just make @/ a no-op, that's the only one
! 1489: % people have actually reported a problem with.
! 1490: %
! 1491: \normalturnoffactive
! 1492: \def\@{@}%
! 1493: \let\/=\empty
! 1494: \makevalueexpandable
! 1495: % do we want to go so far as to use \indexnofonts instead of just
! 1496: % special-casing \var here?
! 1497: \def\var##1{##1}%
! 1498: %
! 1499: \leavevmode\setcolor{\urlcolor}%
! 1500: \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}%
! 1501: user{/Subtype /Link /A << /S /URI /URI (#1) >>}%
! 1502: \endgroup}
! 1503: % \pdfgettoks - Surround page numbers in #1 with @pdflink. #1 may
! 1504: % be a simple number, or a list of numbers in the case of an index
! 1505: % entry.
! 1506: \def\pdfgettoks#1.{\setbox\boxA=\hbox{\toksA={#1.}\toksB={}\maketoks}}
! 1507: \def\addtokens#1#2{\edef\addtoks{\noexpand#1={\the#1#2}}\addtoks}
! 1508: \def\adn#1{\addtokens{\toksC}{#1}\global\countA=1\let\next=\maketoks}
! 1509: \def\poptoks#1#2|ENDTOKS|{\let\first=#1\toksD={#1}\toksA={#2}}
! 1510: \def\maketoks{%
! 1511: \expandafter\poptoks\the\toksA|ENDTOKS|\relax
! 1512: \ifx\first0\adn0
! 1513: \else\ifx\first1\adn1 \else\ifx\first2\adn2 \else\ifx\first3\adn3
! 1514: \else\ifx\first4\adn4 \else\ifx\first5\adn5 \else\ifx\first6\adn6
! 1515: \else\ifx\first7\adn7 \else\ifx\first8\adn8 \else\ifx\first9\adn9
! 1516: \else
! 1517: \ifnum0=\countA\else\makelink\fi
! 1518: \ifx\first.\let\next=\done\else
! 1519: \let\next=\maketoks
! 1520: \addtokens{\toksB}{\the\toksD}
! 1521: \ifx\first,\addtokens{\toksB}{\space}\fi
! 1522: \fi
! 1523: \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
! 1524: \next}
! 1525: \def\makelink{\addtokens{\toksB}%
! 1526: {\noexpand\pdflink{\the\toksC}}\toksC={}\global\countA=0}
! 1527: \def\pdflink#1{\pdflinkpage{#1}{#1}}%
! 1528: \def\pdflinkpage#1#2{%
! 1529: \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]} goto name{\pdfmkpgn{#1}}
! 1530: \setcolor{\linkcolor}#2\endlink}
! 1531: \def\done{\edef\st{\global\noexpand\toksA={\the\toksB}}\st}
! 1532: \else
! 1533: % non-pdf mode
! 1534: \let\pdfmkdest = \gobble
! 1535: \let\pdfurl = \gobble
! 1536: \let\endlink = \relax
! 1537: \let\setcolor = \gobble
! 1538: \let\pdfsetcolor = \gobble
! 1539: \let\pdfmakeoutlines = \relax
! 1540: \fi % \ifx\pdfoutput
! 1541:
! 1542: %
! 1543: % For XeTeX
! 1544: %
! 1545: \ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined
! 1546: \else
! 1547: %
! 1548: % XeTeX version check
! 1549: %
! 1550: \ifnum\strcmp{\the\XeTeXversion\XeTeXrevision}{0.99996}>-1
! 1551: % TeX Live 2016 contains XeTeX 0.99996 and xdvipdfmx 20160307.
! 1552: % It can use the `dvipdfmx:config' special (from TeX Live SVN r40941).
! 1553: % For avoiding PDF destination name replacement, we use this special
! 1554: % instead of xdvipdfmx's command line option `-C 0x0010'.
! 1555: \special{dvipdfmx:config C 0x0010}
! 1556: % XeTeX 0.99995+ comes with xdvipdfmx 20160307+.
! 1557: % It can handle Unicode destination names for PDF.
! 1558: \txiuseunicodedestnametrue
! 1559: \else
! 1560: % XeTeX < 0.99996 (TeX Live < 2016) cannot use the
! 1561: % `dvipdfmx:config' special.
! 1562: % So for avoiding PDF destination name replacement,
! 1563: % xdvipdfmx's command line option `-C 0x0010' is necessary.
! 1564: %
! 1565: % XeTeX < 0.99995 can not handle Unicode destination names for PDF
! 1566: % because xdvipdfmx 20150315 has a UTF-16 conversion issue.
! 1567: % It is fixed by xdvipdfmx 20160106 (TeX Live SVN r39753).
! 1568: \txiuseunicodedestnamefalse
! 1569: \fi
! 1570: %
! 1571: % Color support
! 1572: %
! 1573: \def\rgbDarkRed{0.50 0.09 0.12}
! 1574: \def\rgbBlack{0 0 0}
! 1575: %
! 1576: \def\pdfsetcolor#1{\special{pdf:scolor [#1]}}
! 1577: %
! 1578: % Set color, and create a mark which defines \thiscolor accordingly,
! 1579: % so that \makeheadline knows which color to restore.
! 1580: \def\setcolor#1{%
! 1581: \xdef\currentcolordefs{\gdef\noexpand\thiscolor{#1}}%
! 1582: \domark
! 1583: \pdfsetcolor{#1}%
! 1584: }
! 1585: %
! 1586: \def\maincolor{\rgbBlack}
! 1587: \pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}
! 1588: \edef\thiscolor{\maincolor}
! 1589: \def\currentcolordefs{}
! 1590: %
! 1591: \def\makefootline{%
! 1592: \baselineskip24pt
! 1593: \line{\pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}\the\footline}%
! 1594: }
! 1595: %
! 1596: \def\makeheadline{%
! 1597: \vbox to 0pt{%
! 1598: \vskip-22.5pt
! 1599: \line{%
! 1600: \vbox to8.5pt{}%
! 1601: % Extract \thiscolor definition from the marks.
! 1602: \getcolormarks
! 1603: % Typeset the headline with \maincolor, then restore the color.
! 1604: \pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}\the\headline\pdfsetcolor{\thiscolor}%
! 1605: }%
! 1606: \vss
! 1607: }%
! 1608: \nointerlineskip
! 1609: }
! 1610: %
! 1611: % PDF outline support
! 1612: %
! 1613: % Emulate pdfTeX primitive
! 1614: \def\pdfdest name#1 xyz{%
! 1615: \special{pdf:dest (#1) [@thispage /XYZ @xpos @ypos null]}%
! 1616: }
! 1617: %
! 1618: \def\setpdfdestname#1{{%
! 1619: % We have to set dummies so commands such as @code, and characters
! 1620: % such as \, aren't expanded when present in a section title.
! 1621: \indexnofonts
! 1622: \makevalueexpandable
! 1623: \turnoffactive
! 1624: \iftxiuseunicodedestname
! 1625: % Pass through Unicode characters.
! 1626: \else
! 1627: % Use ASCII approximations in destination names.
! 1628: \passthroughcharsfalse
! 1629: \fi
! 1630: \def\pdfdestname{#1}%
! 1631: \txiescapepdf\pdfdestname
! 1632: }}
! 1633: %
! 1634: \def\setpdfoutlinetext#1{{%
! 1635: \turnoffactive
! 1636: % Always use Unicode characters in title texts.
! 1637: \def\pdfoutlinetext{#1}%
! 1638: % For XeTeX, xdvipdfmx converts to UTF-16.
! 1639: % So we do not convert.
! 1640: \txiescapepdf\pdfoutlinetext
! 1641: }}
! 1642: %
! 1643: \def\pdfmkdest#1{%
! 1644: \setpdfdestname{#1}%
! 1645: \safewhatsit{\pdfdest name{\pdfdestname} xyz}%
! 1646: }
! 1647: %
! 1648: % by default, use black for everything.
! 1649: \def\urlcolor{\rgbBlack}
! 1650: \def\linkcolor{\rgbBlack}
! 1651: \def\endlink{\setcolor{\maincolor}\pdfendlink}
! 1652: %
! 1653: \def\dopdfoutline#1#2#3#4{%
! 1654: \setpdfoutlinetext{#1}
! 1655: \setpdfdestname{#3}
! 1656: \ifx\pdfdestname\empty
! 1657: \def\pdfdestname{#4}%
! 1658: \fi
! 1659: %
! 1660: \special{pdf:out [-] #2 << /Title (\pdfoutlinetext) /A
! 1661: << /S /GoTo /D (\pdfdestname) >> >> }%
! 1662: }
! 1663: %
! 1664: \def\pdfmakeoutlines{%
! 1665: \begingroup
! 1666: %
! 1667: % For XeTeX, counts of subentries are not necessary.
! 1668: % Therefore, we read toc only once.
! 1669: %
! 1670: % We use node names as destinations.
! 1671: %
! 1672: % Currently we prefix the section name with the section number
! 1673: % for chapter and appendix headings only in order to avoid too much
! 1674: % horizontal space being required in the PDF viewer.
! 1675: \def\partentry##1##2##3##4{}% ignore parts in the outlines
! 1676: \def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{%
! 1677: \dopdfoutline{##2 ##1}{1}{##3}{##4}}%
! 1678: \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
! 1679: \dopdfoutline{##1}{2}{##3}{##4}}%
! 1680: \def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
! 1681: \dopdfoutline{##1}{3}{##3}{##4}}%
! 1682: \def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
! 1683: \dopdfoutline{##1}{4}{##3}{##4}}%
! 1684: %
! 1685: \let\appentry\numchapentry%
! 1686: \let\appsecentry\numsecentry%
! 1687: \let\appsubsecentry\numsubsecentry%
! 1688: \let\appsubsubsecentry\numsubsubsecentry%
! 1689: \def\unnchapentry##1##2##3##4{%
! 1690: \dopdfoutline{##1}{1}{##3}{##4}}%
! 1691: \let\unnsecentry\numsecentry%
! 1692: \let\unnsubsecentry\numsubsecentry%
! 1693: \let\unnsubsubsecentry\numsubsubsecentry%
! 1694: %
! 1695: % For XeTeX, xdvipdfmx converts strings to UTF-16.
! 1696: % Therefore, the encoding and the language may not be considered.
! 1697: %
! 1698: \indexnofonts
! 1699: \setupdatafile
! 1700: % We can have normal brace characters in the PDF outlines, unlike
! 1701: % Texinfo index files. So set that up.
! 1702: \def\{{\lbracecharliteral}%
! 1703: \def\}{\rbracecharliteral}%
! 1704: \catcode`\\=\active \otherbackslash
! 1705: \input \tocreadfilename
! 1706: \endgroup
! 1707: }
! 1708: {\catcode`[=1 \catcode`]=2
! 1709: \catcode`{=\other \catcode`}=\other
! 1710: \gdef\lbracecharliteral[{]%
! 1711: \gdef\rbracecharliteral[}]%
! 1712: ]
! 1713:
! 1714: \special{pdf:docview << /PageMode /UseOutlines >> }
! 1715: % ``\special{pdf:tounicode ...}'' is not necessary
! 1716: % because xdvipdfmx converts strings from UTF-8 to UTF-16 without it.
! 1717: % However, due to a UTF-16 conversion issue of xdvipdfmx 20150315,
! 1718: % ``\special{pdf:dest ...}'' cannot handle non-ASCII strings.
! 1719: % It is fixed by xdvipdfmx 20160106 (TeX Live SVN r39753).
! 1720: %
! 1721: \def\skipspaces#1{\def\PP{#1}\def\D{|}%
! 1722: \ifx\PP\D\let\nextsp\relax
! 1723: \else\let\nextsp\skipspaces
! 1724: \addtokens{\filename}{\PP}%
! 1725: \advance\filenamelength by 1
! 1726: \fi
! 1727: \nextsp}
! 1728: \def\getfilename#1{%
! 1729: \filenamelength=0
! 1730: % If we don't expand the argument now, \skipspaces will get
! 1731: % snagged on things like "@value{foo}".
! 1732: \edef\temp{#1}%
! 1733: \expandafter\skipspaces\temp|\relax
! 1734: }
! 1735: % make a live url in pdf output.
! 1736: \def\pdfurl#1{%
! 1737: \begingroup
! 1738: % it seems we really need yet another set of dummies; have not
! 1739: % tried to figure out what each command should do in the context
! 1740: % of @url. for now, just make @/ a no-op, that's the only one
! 1741: % people have actually reported a problem with.
! 1742: %
! 1743: \normalturnoffactive
! 1744: \def\@{@}%
! 1745: \let\/=\empty
! 1746: \makevalueexpandable
! 1747: % do we want to go so far as to use \indexnofonts instead of just
! 1748: % special-casing \var here?
! 1749: \def\var##1{##1}%
! 1750: %
! 1751: \leavevmode\setcolor{\urlcolor}%
! 1752: \special{pdf:bann << /Border [0 0 0]
! 1753: /Subtype /Link /A << /S /URI /URI (#1) >> >>}%
! 1754: \endgroup}
! 1755: \def\endlink{\setcolor{\maincolor}\special{pdf:eann}}
! 1756: \def\pdfgettoks#1.{\setbox\boxA=\hbox{\toksA={#1.}\toksB={}\maketoks}}
! 1757: \def\addtokens#1#2{\edef\addtoks{\noexpand#1={\the#1#2}}\addtoks}
! 1758: \def\adn#1{\addtokens{\toksC}{#1}\global\countA=1\let\next=\maketoks}
! 1759: \def\poptoks#1#2|ENDTOKS|{\let\first=#1\toksD={#1}\toksA={#2}}
! 1760: \def\maketoks{%
! 1761: \expandafter\poptoks\the\toksA|ENDTOKS|\relax
! 1762: \ifx\first0\adn0
! 1763: \else\ifx\first1\adn1 \else\ifx\first2\adn2 \else\ifx\first3\adn3
! 1764: \else\ifx\first4\adn4 \else\ifx\first5\adn5 \else\ifx\first6\adn6
! 1765: \else\ifx\first7\adn7 \else\ifx\first8\adn8 \else\ifx\first9\adn9
! 1766: \else
! 1767: \ifnum0=\countA\else\makelink\fi
! 1768: \ifx\first.\let\next=\done\else
! 1769: \let\next=\maketoks
! 1770: \addtokens{\toksB}{\the\toksD}
! 1771: \ifx\first,\addtokens{\toksB}{\space}\fi
! 1772: \fi
! 1773: \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
! 1774: \next}
! 1775: \def\makelink{\addtokens{\toksB}%
! 1776: {\noexpand\pdflink{\the\toksC}}\toksC={}\global\countA=0}
! 1777: \def\pdflink#1{\pdflinkpage{#1}{#1}}%
! 1778: \def\pdflinkpage#1#2{%
! 1779: \special{pdf:bann << /Border [0 0 0]
! 1780: /Type /Annot /Subtype /Link /A << /S /GoTo /D (#1) >> >>}%
! 1781: \setcolor{\linkcolor}#2\endlink}
! 1782: \def\done{\edef\st{\global\noexpand\toksA={\the\toksB}}\st}
! 1783: %
! 1784: %
! 1785: % @image support
! 1786: %
! 1787: % #1 is image name, #2 width (might be empty/whitespace), #3 height (ditto).
! 1788: \def\doxeteximage#1#2#3{%
! 1789: \def\xeteximagewidth{#2}\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
! 1790: \def\xeteximageheight{#3}\setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}%
! 1791: %
! 1792: % XeTeX (and the PDF format) supports .pdf, .png, .jpg (among
! 1793: % others). Let's try in that order, PDF first since if
! 1794: % someone has a scalable image, presumably better to use that than a
! 1795: % bitmap.
! 1796: \let\xeteximgext=\empty
! 1797: \begingroup
! 1798: \openin 1 #1.pdf \ifeof 1
! 1799: \openin 1 #1.PDF \ifeof 1
! 1800: \openin 1 #1.png \ifeof 1
! 1801: \openin 1 #1.jpg \ifeof 1
! 1802: \openin 1 #1.jpeg \ifeof 1
! 1803: \openin 1 #1.JPG \ifeof 1
! 1804: \errmessage{Could not find image file #1 for XeTeX}%
! 1805: \else \gdef\xeteximgext{JPG}%
! 1806: \fi
! 1807: \else \gdef\xeteximgext{jpeg}%
! 1808: \fi
! 1809: \else \gdef\xeteximgext{jpg}%
! 1810: \fi
! 1811: \else \gdef\xeteximgext{png}%
! 1812: \fi
! 1813: \else \gdef\xeteximgext{PDF}%
! 1814: \fi
! 1815: \else \gdef\xeteximgext{pdf}%
! 1816: \fi
! 1817: \closein 1
! 1818: \endgroup
! 1819: %
! 1820: % Putting an \hbox around the image can prevent an over-long line
! 1821: % after the image.
! 1822: \hbox\bgroup
! 1823: \def\xetexpdfext{pdf}%
! 1824: \ifx\xeteximgext\xetexpdfext
! 1825: \XeTeXpdffile "#1".\xeteximgext ""
! 1826: \else
! 1827: \def\xetexpdfext{PDF}%
! 1828: \ifx\xeteximgext\xetexpdfext
! 1829: \XeTeXpdffile "#1".\xeteximgext ""
! 1830: \else
! 1831: \XeTeXpicfile "#1".\xeteximgext ""
! 1832: \fi
! 1833: \fi
! 1834: \ifdim \wd0 >0pt width \xeteximagewidth \fi
! 1835: \ifdim \wd2 >0pt height \xeteximageheight \fi \relax
! 1836: \egroup
! 1837: }
! 1838: \fi
! 1839:
! 1840:
! 1841: %
! 1842: \message{fonts,}
! 1843:
! 1844: % Set the baselineskip to #1, and the lineskip and strut size
! 1845: % correspondingly. There is no deep meaning behind these magic numbers
! 1846: % used as factors; they just match (closely enough) what Knuth defined.
! 1847: %
! 1848: \def\lineskipfactor{.08333}
! 1849: \def\strutheightpercent{.70833}
! 1850: \def\strutdepthpercent {.29167}
! 1851: %
! 1852: % can get a sort of poor man's double spacing by redefining this.
! 1853: \def\baselinefactor{1}
! 1854: %
! 1855: \newdimen\textleading
! 1856: \def\setleading#1{%
! 1857: \dimen0 = #1\relax
! 1858: \normalbaselineskip = \baselinefactor\dimen0
! 1859: \normallineskip = \lineskipfactor\normalbaselineskip
! 1860: \normalbaselines
! 1861: \setbox\strutbox =\hbox{%
! 1862: \vrule width0pt height\strutheightpercent\baselineskip
! 1863: depth \strutdepthpercent \baselineskip
! 1864: }%
! 1865: }
! 1866:
! 1867: % PDF CMaps. See also LaTeX's t1.cmap.
! 1868: %
! 1869: % do nothing with this by default.
! 1870: \expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1\endcsname\gobble
! 1871: \expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1IT\endcsname\gobble
! 1872: \expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1TT\endcsname\gobble
! 1873:
! 1874: % if we are producing pdf, and we have \pdffontattr, then define cmaps.
! 1875: % (\pdffontattr was introduced many years ago, but people still run
! 1876: % older pdftex's; it's easy to conditionalize, so we do.)
! 1877: \ifpdf \ifx\pdffontattr\thisisundefined \else
! 1878: \begingroup
! 1879: \catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char.
! 1880: \catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap
! 1881: %%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit)
! 1882: %%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit)
! 1883: %%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1-0)
! 1884: %%Title: (TeX-OT1-0 TeX OT1 0)
! 1885: %%Version: 1.000
! 1886: %%EndComments
! 1887: /CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin
! 1888: 12 dict begin
! 1889: begincmap
! 1890: /CIDSystemInfo
! 1891: << /Registry (TeX)
! 1892: /Ordering (OT1)
! 1893: /Supplement 0
! 1894: >> def
! 1895: /CMapName /TeX-OT1-0 def
! 1896: /CMapType 2 def
! 1897: 1 begincodespacerange
! 1898: <00> <7F>
! 1899: endcodespacerange
! 1900: 8 beginbfrange
! 1901: <00> <01> <0393>
! 1902: <09> <0A> <03A8>
! 1903: <23> <26> <0023>
! 1904: <28> <3B> <0028>
! 1905: <3F> <5B> <003F>
! 1906: <5D> <5E> <005D>
! 1907: <61> <7A> <0061>
! 1908: <7B> <7C> <2013>
! 1909: endbfrange
! 1910: 40 beginbfchar
! 1911: <02> <0398>
! 1912: <03> <039B>
! 1913: <04> <039E>
! 1914: <05> <03A0>
! 1915: <06> <03A3>
! 1916: <07> <03D2>
! 1917: <08> <03A6>
! 1918: <0B> <00660066>
! 1919: <0C> <00660069>
! 1920: <0D> <0066006C>
! 1921: <0E> <006600660069>
! 1922: <0F> <00660066006C>
! 1923: <10> <0131>
! 1924: <11> <0237>
! 1925: <12> <0060>
! 1926: <13> <00B4>
! 1927: <14> <02C7>
! 1928: <15> <02D8>
! 1929: <16> <00AF>
! 1930: <17> <02DA>
! 1931: <18> <00B8>
! 1932: <19> <00DF>
! 1933: <1A> <00E6>
! 1934: <1B> <0153>
! 1935: <1C> <00F8>
! 1936: <1D> <00C6>
! 1937: <1E> <0152>
! 1938: <1F> <00D8>
! 1939: <21> <0021>
! 1940: <22> <201D>
! 1941: <27> <2019>
! 1942: <3C> <00A1>
! 1943: <3D> <003D>
! 1944: <3E> <00BF>
! 1945: <5C> <201C>
! 1946: <5F> <02D9>
! 1947: <60> <2018>
! 1948: <7D> <02DD>
! 1949: <7E> <007E>
! 1950: <7F> <00A8>
! 1951: endbfchar
! 1952: endcmap
! 1953: CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop
! 1954: end
! 1955: end
! 1956: %%EndResource
! 1957: %%EOF
! 1958: }\endgroup
! 1959: \expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1\endcsname#1{%
! 1960: \pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}%
! 1961: }%
! 1962: %
! 1963: % \cmapOT1IT
! 1964: \begingroup
! 1965: \catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char.
! 1966: \catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap
! 1967: %%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit)
! 1968: %%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit)
! 1969: %%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1IT-0)
! 1970: %%Title: (TeX-OT1IT-0 TeX OT1IT 0)
! 1971: %%Version: 1.000
! 1972: %%EndComments
! 1973: /CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin
! 1974: 12 dict begin
! 1975: begincmap
! 1976: /CIDSystemInfo
! 1977: << /Registry (TeX)
! 1978: /Ordering (OT1IT)
! 1979: /Supplement 0
! 1980: >> def
! 1981: /CMapName /TeX-OT1IT-0 def
! 1982: /CMapType 2 def
! 1983: 1 begincodespacerange
! 1984: <00> <7F>
! 1985: endcodespacerange
! 1986: 8 beginbfrange
! 1987: <00> <01> <0393>
! 1988: <09> <0A> <03A8>
! 1989: <25> <26> <0025>
! 1990: <28> <3B> <0028>
! 1991: <3F> <5B> <003F>
! 1992: <5D> <5E> <005D>
! 1993: <61> <7A> <0061>
! 1994: <7B> <7C> <2013>
! 1995: endbfrange
! 1996: 42 beginbfchar
! 1997: <02> <0398>
! 1998: <03> <039B>
! 1999: <04> <039E>
! 2000: <05> <03A0>
! 2001: <06> <03A3>
! 2002: <07> <03D2>
! 2003: <08> <03A6>
! 2004: <0B> <00660066>
! 2005: <0C> <00660069>
! 2006: <0D> <0066006C>
! 2007: <0E> <006600660069>
! 2008: <0F> <00660066006C>
! 2009: <10> <0131>
! 2010: <11> <0237>
! 2011: <12> <0060>
! 2012: <13> <00B4>
! 2013: <14> <02C7>
! 2014: <15> <02D8>
! 2015: <16> <00AF>
! 2016: <17> <02DA>
! 2017: <18> <00B8>
! 2018: <19> <00DF>
! 2019: <1A> <00E6>
! 2020: <1B> <0153>
! 2021: <1C> <00F8>
! 2022: <1D> <00C6>
! 2023: <1E> <0152>
! 2024: <1F> <00D8>
! 2025: <21> <0021>
! 2026: <22> <201D>
! 2027: <23> <0023>
! 2028: <24> <00A3>
! 2029: <27> <2019>
! 2030: <3C> <00A1>
! 2031: <3D> <003D>
! 2032: <3E> <00BF>
! 2033: <5C> <201C>
! 2034: <5F> <02D9>
! 2035: <60> <2018>
! 2036: <7D> <02DD>
! 2037: <7E> <007E>
! 2038: <7F> <00A8>
! 2039: endbfchar
! 2040: endcmap
! 2041: CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop
! 2042: end
! 2043: end
! 2044: %%EndResource
! 2045: %%EOF
! 2046: }\endgroup
! 2047: \expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1IT\endcsname#1{%
! 2048: \pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}%
! 2049: }%
! 2050: %
! 2051: % \cmapOT1TT
! 2052: \begingroup
! 2053: \catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char.
! 2054: \catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap
! 2055: %%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit)
! 2056: %%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit)
! 2057: %%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1TT-0)
! 2058: %%Title: (TeX-OT1TT-0 TeX OT1TT 0)
! 2059: %%Version: 1.000
! 2060: %%EndComments
! 2061: /CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin
! 2062: 12 dict begin
! 2063: begincmap
! 2064: /CIDSystemInfo
! 2065: << /Registry (TeX)
! 2066: /Ordering (OT1TT)
! 2067: /Supplement 0
! 2068: >> def
! 2069: /CMapName /TeX-OT1TT-0 def
! 2070: /CMapType 2 def
! 2071: 1 begincodespacerange
! 2072: <00> <7F>
! 2073: endcodespacerange
! 2074: 5 beginbfrange
! 2075: <00> <01> <0393>
! 2076: <09> <0A> <03A8>
! 2077: <21> <26> <0021>
! 2078: <28> <5F> <0028>
! 2079: <61> <7E> <0061>
! 2080: endbfrange
! 2081: 32 beginbfchar
! 2082: <02> <0398>
! 2083: <03> <039B>
! 2084: <04> <039E>
! 2085: <05> <03A0>
! 2086: <06> <03A3>
! 2087: <07> <03D2>
! 2088: <08> <03A6>
! 2089: <0B> <2191>
! 2090: <0C> <2193>
! 2091: <0D> <0027>
! 2092: <0E> <00A1>
! 2093: <0F> <00BF>
! 2094: <10> <0131>
! 2095: <11> <0237>
! 2096: <12> <0060>
! 2097: <13> <00B4>
! 2098: <14> <02C7>
! 2099: <15> <02D8>
! 2100: <16> <00AF>
! 2101: <17> <02DA>
! 2102: <18> <00B8>
! 2103: <19> <00DF>
! 2104: <1A> <00E6>
! 2105: <1B> <0153>
! 2106: <1C> <00F8>
! 2107: <1D> <00C6>
! 2108: <1E> <0152>
! 2109: <1F> <00D8>
! 2110: <20> <2423>
! 2111: <27> <2019>
! 2112: <60> <2018>
! 2113: <7F> <00A8>
! 2114: endbfchar
! 2115: endcmap
! 2116: CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop
! 2117: end
! 2118: end
! 2119: %%EndResource
! 2120: %%EOF
! 2121: }\endgroup
! 2122: \expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1TT\endcsname#1{%
! 2123: \pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}%
! 2124: }%
! 2125: \fi\fi
! 2126: %
! 2127: % This is what gets called when #5 of \setfont is empty.
! 2128: \let\cmap\gobble
! 2129: %
! 2130: % (end of cmaps)
! 2131:
! 2132:
! 2133: % Set the font macro #1 to the font named \fontprefix#2.
! 2134: % #3 is the font's design size, #4 is a scale factor, #5 is the CMap
! 2135: % encoding (only OT1, OT1IT and OT1TT are allowed, or empty to omit).
! 2136: % Example:
! 2137: % #1 = \textrm
! 2138: % #2 = \rmshape
! 2139: % #3 = 10
! 2140: % #4 = \mainmagstep
! 2141: % #5 = OT1
! 2142: %
! 2143: \def\setfont#1#2#3#4#5{%
! 2144: \font#1=\fontprefix#2#3 scaled #4
! 2145: \csname cmap#5\endcsname#1%
! 2146: \ifx#2\ttshape\hyphenchar#1=-1 \fi
! 2147: \ifx#2\ttbshape\hyphenchar#1=-1 \fi
! 2148: \ifx#2\ttslshape\hyphenchar#1=-1 \fi
! 2149: }
! 2150:
! 2151: % Use cm as the default font prefix.
! 2152: % To specify the font prefix, you must define \fontprefix
! 2153: % before you read in texinfo.tex.
! 2154: \ifx\fontprefix\thisisundefined
! 2155: \def\fontprefix{cm}
! 2156: \fi
! 2157: % Support font families that don't use the same naming scheme as CM.
! 2158: \def\rmshape{r}
! 2159: \def\rmbshape{bx} % where the normal face is bold
! 2160: \def\bfshape{b}
! 2161: \def\bxshape{bx}
! 2162: \def\ttshape{tt}
! 2163: \def\ttbshape{tt}
! 2164: \def\ttslshape{sltt}
! 2165: \def\itshape{ti}
! 2166: \def\itbshape{bxti}
! 2167: \def\slshape{sl}
! 2168: \def\slbshape{bxsl}
! 2169: \def\sfshape{ss}
! 2170: \def\sfbshape{ss}
! 2171: \def\scshape{csc}
! 2172: \def\scbshape{csc}
! 2173:
! 2174: % Definitions for a main text size of 11pt. (The default in Texinfo.)
! 2175: %
! 2176: \def\definetextfontsizexi{%
! 2177: % Text fonts (11.2pt, magstep1).
! 2178: \def\textnominalsize{11pt}
! 2179: \edef\mainmagstep{\magstephalf}
! 2180: \setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
! 2181: \setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT}
! 2182: \setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
! 2183: \setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1IT}
! 2184: \setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
! 2185: \setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
! 2186: \setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
! 2187: \setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT}
! 2188: \font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep
! 2189: \font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep
! 2190: \def\textecsize{1095}
! 2191:
! 2192: % A few fonts for @defun names and args.
! 2193: \setfont\defbf\bfshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1}
! 2194: \setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT}
! 2195: \setfont\defsl\slshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1}
! 2196: \setfont\defttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT}
! 2197: \def\df{\let\ttfont=\deftt \let\bffont = \defbf
! 2198: \let\ttslfont=\defttsl \let\slfont=\defsl \bf}
! 2199:
! 2200: % Fonts for indices, footnotes, small examples (9pt).
! 2201: \def\smallnominalsize{9pt}
! 2202: \setfont\smallrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
! 2203: \setfont\smalltt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT}
! 2204: \setfont\smallbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1}
! 2205: \setfont\smallit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT}
! 2206: \setfont\smallsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
! 2207: \setfont\smallsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
! 2208: \setfont\smallsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1}
! 2209: \setfont\smallttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT}
! 2210: \font\smalli=cmmi9
! 2211: \font\smallsy=cmsy9
! 2212: \def\smallecsize{0900}
! 2213:
! 2214: % Fonts for small examples (8pt).
! 2215: \def\smallernominalsize{8pt}
! 2216: \setfont\smallerrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
! 2217: \setfont\smallertt\ttshape{8}{1000}{OT1TT}
! 2218: \setfont\smallerbf\bfshape{10}{800}{OT1}
! 2219: \setfont\smallerit\itshape{8}{1000}{OT1IT}
! 2220: \setfont\smallersl\slshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
! 2221: \setfont\smallersf\sfshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
! 2222: \setfont\smallersc\scshape{10}{800}{OT1}
! 2223: \setfont\smallerttsl\ttslshape{10}{800}{OT1TT}
! 2224: \font\smalleri=cmmi8
! 2225: \font\smallersy=cmsy8
! 2226: \def\smallerecsize{0800}
! 2227:
! 2228: % Fonts for math mode superscripts (7pt).
! 2229: \def\sevennominalsize{7pt}
! 2230: \setfont\sevenrm\rmshape{7}{1000}{OT1}
! 2231: \setfont\seventt\ttshape{10}{700}{OT1TT}
! 2232: \setfont\sevenbf\bfshape{10}{700}{OT1}
! 2233: \setfont\sevenit\itshape{7}{1000}{OT1IT}
! 2234: \setfont\sevensl\slshape{10}{700}{OT1}
! 2235: \setfont\sevensf\sfshape{10}{700}{OT1}
! 2236: \setfont\sevensc\scshape{10}{700}{OT1}
! 2237: \setfont\seventtsl\ttslshape{10}{700}{OT1TT}
! 2238: \font\seveni=cmmi7
! 2239: \font\sevensy=cmsy7
! 2240: \def\sevenecsize{0700}
! 2241:
! 2242: % Fonts for title page (20.4pt):
! 2243: \def\titlenominalsize{20pt}
! 2244: \setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1}
! 2245: \setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1IT}
! 2246: \setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1}
! 2247: \setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1TT}
! 2248: \setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1TT}
! 2249: \setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1}{OT1}
! 2250: \let\titlebf=\titlerm
! 2251: \setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1}
! 2252: \font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled \magstep3
! 2253: \font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep4
! 2254: \def\titleecsize{2074}
! 2255:
! 2256: % Chapter (and unnumbered) fonts (17.28pt).
! 2257: \def\chapnominalsize{17pt}
! 2258: \setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep2}{OT1}
! 2259: \setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1IT}
! 2260: \setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1}
! 2261: \setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep2}{OT1TT}
! 2262: \setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1TT}
! 2263: \setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{17}{1000}{OT1}
! 2264: \let\chapbf=\chaprm
! 2265: \setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1}
! 2266: \font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep2
! 2267: \font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep3
! 2268: \def\chapecsize{1728}
! 2269:
! 2270: % Section fonts (14.4pt).
! 2271: \def\secnominalsize{14pt}
! 2272: \setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1}
! 2273: \setfont\secrmnotbold\rmshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1}
! 2274: \setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1IT}
! 2275: \setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1}
! 2276: \setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1TT}
! 2277: \setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1TT}
! 2278: \setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1}
! 2279: \let\secbf\secrm
! 2280: \setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1}
! 2281: \font\seci=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1
! 2282: \font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2
! 2283: \def\sececsize{1440}
! 2284:
! 2285: % Subsection fonts (13.15pt).
! 2286: \def\ssecnominalsize{13pt}
! 2287: \setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1}
! 2288: \setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1315}{OT1IT}
! 2289: \setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1315}{OT1}
! 2290: \setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT}
! 2291: \setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1315}{OT1TT}
! 2292: \setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1}
! 2293: \let\ssecbf\ssecrm
! 2294: \setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{1315}{OT1}
! 2295: \font\sseci=cmmi12 scaled \magstephalf
! 2296: \font\ssecsy=cmsy10 scaled 1315
! 2297: \def\ssececsize{1200}
! 2298:
! 2299: % Reduced fonts for @acronym in text (10pt).
! 2300: \def\reducednominalsize{10pt}
! 2301: \setfont\reducedrm\rmshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
! 2302: \setfont\reducedtt\ttshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT}
! 2303: \setfont\reducedbf\bfshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
! 2304: \setfont\reducedit\itshape{10}{1000}{OT1IT}
! 2305: \setfont\reducedsl\slshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
! 2306: \setfont\reducedsf\sfshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
! 2307: \setfont\reducedsc\scshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
! 2308: \setfont\reducedttsl\ttslshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT}
! 2309: \font\reducedi=cmmi10
! 2310: \font\reducedsy=cmsy10
! 2311: \def\reducedecsize{1000}
! 2312:
! 2313: \textleading = 13.2pt % line spacing for 11pt CM
! 2314: \textfonts % reset the current fonts
! 2315: \rm
! 2316: } % end of 11pt text font size definitions, \definetextfontsizexi
! 2317:
! 2318:
! 2319: % Definitions to make the main text be 10pt Computer Modern, with
! 2320: % section, chapter, etc., sizes following suit. This is for the GNU
! 2321: % Press printing of the Emacs 22 manual. Maybe other manuals in the
! 2322: % future. Used with @smallbook, which sets the leading to 12pt.
! 2323: %
! 2324: \def\definetextfontsizex{%
! 2325: % Text fonts (10pt).
! 2326: \def\textnominalsize{10pt}
! 2327: \edef\mainmagstep{1000}
! 2328: \setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
! 2329: \setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT}
! 2330: \setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
! 2331: \setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1IT}
! 2332: \setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
! 2333: \setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
! 2334: \setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
! 2335: \setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT}
! 2336: \font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep
! 2337: \font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep
! 2338: \def\textecsize{1000}
! 2339:
! 2340: % A few fonts for @defun names and args.
! 2341: \setfont\defbf\bfshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1}
! 2342: \setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT}
! 2343: \setfont\defsl\slshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1}
! 2344: \setfont\defttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT}
! 2345: \def\df{\let\ttfont=\deftt \let\bffont = \defbf
! 2346: \let\slfont=\defsl \let\ttslfont=\defttsl \bf}
! 2347:
! 2348: % Fonts for indices, footnotes, small examples (9pt).
! 2349: \def\smallnominalsize{9pt}
! 2350: \setfont\smallrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
! 2351: \setfont\smalltt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT}
! 2352: \setfont\smallbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1}
! 2353: \setfont\smallit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT}
! 2354: \setfont\smallsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
! 2355: \setfont\smallsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
! 2356: \setfont\smallsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1}
! 2357: \setfont\smallttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT}
! 2358: \font\smalli=cmmi9
! 2359: \font\smallsy=cmsy9
! 2360: \def\smallecsize{0900}
! 2361:
! 2362: % Fonts for small examples (8pt).
! 2363: \def\smallernominalsize{8pt}
! 2364: \setfont\smallerrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
! 2365: \setfont\smallertt\ttshape{8}{1000}{OT1TT}
! 2366: \setfont\smallerbf\bfshape{10}{800}{OT1}
! 2367: \setfont\smallerit\itshape{8}{1000}{OT1IT}
! 2368: \setfont\smallersl\slshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
! 2369: \setfont\smallersf\sfshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
! 2370: \setfont\smallersc\scshape{10}{800}{OT1}
! 2371: \setfont\smallerttsl\ttslshape{10}{800}{OT1TT}
! 2372: \font\smalleri=cmmi8
! 2373: \font\smallersy=cmsy8
! 2374: \def\smallerecsize{0800}
! 2375:
! 2376: % Fonts for math mode superscripts (7pt).
! 2377: \def\sevennominalsize{7pt}
! 2378: \setfont\sevenrm\rmshape{7}{1000}{OT1}
! 2379: \setfont\seventt\ttshape{10}{700}{OT1TT}
! 2380: \setfont\sevenbf\bfshape{10}{700}{OT1}
! 2381: \setfont\sevenit\itshape{7}{1000}{OT1IT}
! 2382: \setfont\sevensl\slshape{10}{700}{OT1}
! 2383: \setfont\sevensf\sfshape{10}{700}{OT1}
! 2384: \setfont\sevensc\scshape{10}{700}{OT1}
! 2385: \setfont\seventtsl\ttslshape{10}{700}{OT1TT}
! 2386: \font\seveni=cmmi7
! 2387: \font\sevensy=cmsy7
! 2388: \def\sevenecsize{0700}
! 2389:
! 2390: % Fonts for title page (20.4pt):
! 2391: \def\titlenominalsize{20pt}
! 2392: \setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1}
! 2393: \setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1IT}
! 2394: \setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1}
! 2395: \setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1TT}
! 2396: \setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1TT}
! 2397: \setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1}{OT1}
! 2398: \let\titlebf=\titlerm
! 2399: \setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1}
! 2400: \font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled \magstep3
! 2401: \font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep4
! 2402: \def\titleecsize{2074}
! 2403:
! 2404: % Chapter fonts (14.4pt).
! 2405: \def\chapnominalsize{14pt}
! 2406: \setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1}
! 2407: \setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1IT}
! 2408: \setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1}
! 2409: \setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1TT}
! 2410: \setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1TT}
! 2411: \setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1}
! 2412: \let\chapbf\chaprm
! 2413: \setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1}
! 2414: \font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1
! 2415: \font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2
! 2416: \def\chapecsize{1440}
! 2417:
! 2418: % Section fonts (12pt).
! 2419: \def\secnominalsize{12pt}
! 2420: \setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{1000}{OT1}
! 2421: \setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1IT}
! 2422: \setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1}
! 2423: \setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{1000}{OT1TT}
! 2424: \setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT}
! 2425: \setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{1000}{OT1}
! 2426: \let\secbf\secrm
! 2427: \setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1}
! 2428: \font\seci=cmmi12
! 2429: \font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep1
! 2430: \def\sececsize{1200}
! 2431:
! 2432: % Subsection fonts (10pt).
! 2433: \def\ssecnominalsize{10pt}
! 2434: \setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
! 2435: \setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1000}{OT1IT}
! 2436: \setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
! 2437: \setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT}
! 2438: \setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT}
! 2439: \setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
! 2440: \let\ssecbf\ssecrm
! 2441: \setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
! 2442: \font\sseci=cmmi10
! 2443: \font\ssecsy=cmsy10
! 2444: \def\ssececsize{1000}
! 2445:
! 2446: % Reduced fonts for @acronym in text (9pt).
! 2447: \def\reducednominalsize{9pt}
! 2448: \setfont\reducedrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
! 2449: \setfont\reducedtt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT}
! 2450: \setfont\reducedbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1}
! 2451: \setfont\reducedit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT}
! 2452: \setfont\reducedsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
! 2453: \setfont\reducedsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
! 2454: \setfont\reducedsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1}
! 2455: \setfont\reducedttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT}
! 2456: \font\reducedi=cmmi9
! 2457: \font\reducedsy=cmsy9
! 2458: \def\reducedecsize{0900}
! 2459:
! 2460: \divide\parskip by 2 % reduce space between paragraphs
! 2461: \textleading = 12pt % line spacing for 10pt CM
! 2462: \textfonts % reset the current fonts
! 2463: \rm
! 2464: } % end of 10pt text font size definitions, \definetextfontsizex
! 2465:
! 2466: % Fonts for short table of contents.
! 2467: \setfont\shortcontrm\rmshape{12}{1000}{OT1}
! 2468: \setfont\shortcontbf\bfshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1} % no cmb12
! 2469: \setfont\shortcontsl\slshape{12}{1000}{OT1}
! 2470: \setfont\shortconttt\ttshape{12}{1000}{OT1TT}
! 2471:
! 2472:
! 2473: % We provide the user-level command
! 2474: % @fonttextsize 10
! 2475: % (or 11) to redefine the text font size. pt is assumed.
! 2476: %
! 2477: \def\xiword{11}
! 2478: \def\xword{10}
! 2479: \def\xwordpt{10pt}
! 2480: %
! 2481: \parseargdef\fonttextsize{%
! 2482: \def\textsizearg{#1}%
! 2483: %\wlog{doing @fonttextsize \textsizearg}%
! 2484: %
! 2485: % Set \globaldefs so that documents can use this inside @tex, since
! 2486: % makeinfo 4.8 does not support it, but we need it nonetheless.
! 2487: %
! 2488: \begingroup \globaldefs=1
! 2489: \ifx\textsizearg\xword \definetextfontsizex
! 2490: \else \ifx\textsizearg\xiword \definetextfontsizexi
! 2491: \else
! 2492: \errhelp=\EMsimple
! 2493: \errmessage{@fonttextsize only supports `10' or `11', not `\textsizearg'}
! 2494: \fi\fi
! 2495: \endgroup
! 2496: }
! 2497:
! 2498: %
! 2499: % Change the current font style to #1, remembering it in \curfontstyle.
! 2500: % For now, we do not accumulate font styles: @b{@i{foo}} prints foo in
! 2501: % italics, not bold italics.
! 2502: %
! 2503: \def\setfontstyle#1{%
! 2504: \def\curfontstyle{#1}% not as a control sequence, because we are \edef'd.
! 2505: \csname #1font\endcsname % change the current font
! 2506: }
! 2507:
! 2508: \def\rm{\fam=0 \setfontstyle{rm}}
! 2509: \def\it{\fam=\itfam \setfontstyle{it}}
! 2510: \def\sl{\fam=\slfam \setfontstyle{sl}}
! 2511: \def\bf{\fam=\bffam \setfontstyle{bf}}\def\bfstylename{bf}
! 2512: \def\tt{\fam=\ttfam \setfontstyle{tt}}
! 2513:
! 2514: % Texinfo sort of supports the sans serif font style, which plain TeX does not.
! 2515: % So we set up a \sf.
! 2516: \newfam\sffam
! 2517: \def\sf{\fam=\sffam \setfontstyle{sf}}
! 2518:
! 2519: % We don't need math for this font style.
! 2520: \def\ttsl{\setfontstyle{ttsl}}
! 2521:
! 2522:
! 2523: % In order for the font changes to affect most math symbols and letters,
! 2524: % we have to define the \textfont of the standard families.
! 2525: % We don't bother to reset \scriptscriptfont; awaiting user need.
! 2526: %
! 2527: \def\resetmathfonts{%
! 2528: \textfont0=\rmfont \textfont1=\ifont \textfont2=\syfont
! 2529: \textfont\itfam=\itfont \textfont\slfam=\slfont \textfont\bffam=\bffont
! 2530: \textfont\ttfam=\ttfont \textfont\sffam=\sffont
! 2531: %
! 2532: % Fonts for superscript. Note that the 7pt fonts are used regardless
! 2533: % of the current font size.
! 2534: \scriptfont0=\sevenrm \scriptfont1=\seveni \scriptfont2=\sevensy
! 2535: \scriptfont\itfam=\sevenit \scriptfont\slfam=\sevensl
! 2536: \scriptfont\bffam=\sevenbf \scriptfont\ttfam=\seventt
! 2537: \scriptfont\sffam=\sevensf
! 2538: }
! 2539:
! 2540:
! 2541:
! 2542: % \defineassignfonts{SIZE} -
! 2543: % Define sequence \assignfontsSIZE, which switches between font sizes
! 2544: % by redefining the meanings of \STYLEfont. (Just \STYLE additionally sets
! 2545: % the current \fam for math mode.)
! 2546: %
! 2547: \def\defineassignfonts#1{%
! 2548: \expandafter\edef\csname assignfonts#1\endcsname{%
! 2549: \let\noexpand\rmfont\csname #1rm\endcsname
! 2550: \let\noexpand\itfont\csname #1it\endcsname
! 2551: \let\noexpand\slfont\csname #1sl\endcsname
! 2552: \let\noexpand\bffont\csname #1bf\endcsname
! 2553: \let\noexpand\ttfont\csname #1tt\endcsname
! 2554: \let\noexpand\smallcaps\csname #1sc\endcsname
! 2555: \let\noexpand\sffont \csname #1sf\endcsname
! 2556: \let\noexpand\ifont \csname #1i\endcsname
! 2557: \let\noexpand\syfont \csname #1sy\endcsname
! 2558: \let\noexpand\ttslfont\csname #1ttsl\endcsname
! 2559: }
! 2560: }
! 2561:
! 2562: \def\assignfonts#1{%
! 2563: \csname assignfonts#1\endcsname
! 2564: }
! 2565:
! 2566: \newif\ifrmisbold
! 2567:
! 2568: % Select smaller font size with the current style. Used to change font size
! 2569: % in, e.g., the LaTeX logo and acronyms. If we are using bold fonts for
! 2570: % normal roman text, also use bold fonts for roman text in the smaller size.
! 2571: \def\switchtolllsize{%
! 2572: \expandafter\assignfonts\expandafter{\lllsize}%
! 2573: \ifrmisbold
! 2574: \let\rmfont\bffont
! 2575: \fi
! 2576: \csname\curfontstyle\endcsname
! 2577: }%
! 2578:
! 2579: \def\switchtolsize{%
! 2580: \expandafter\assignfonts\expandafter{\lsize}%
! 2581: \ifrmisbold
! 2582: \let\rmfont\bffont
! 2583: \fi
! 2584: \csname\curfontstyle\endcsname
! 2585: }%
! 2586:
! 2587: % Define the font-changing commands (all called \...fonts).
! 2588: % Each font-changing command also sets the names \lsize (one size lower)
! 2589: % and \lllsize (three sizes lower). These relative commands are used
! 2590: % in, e.g., the LaTeX logo and acronyms.
! 2591: %
! 2592: % Note: The fonts used for \ifont are for "math italics" (\itfont is for
! 2593: % italics in regular text). \syfont is also used in math mode only.
! 2594: %
! 2595: \def\definefontsetatsize#1#2#3#4#5{%
! 2596: \defineassignfonts{#1}%
! 2597: \expandafter\def\csname #1fonts\endcsname{%
! 2598: \def\curfontsize{#1}%
! 2599: \def\lsize{#2}\def\lllsize{#3}%
! 2600: \csname rmisbold#5\endcsname
! 2601: \csname assignfonts#1\endcsname
! 2602: \resetmathfonts
! 2603: \setleading{#4}%
! 2604: }}
! 2605:
! 2606: \definefontsetatsize{text} {reduced}{smaller}{\textleading}{false}
! 2607: \definefontsetatsize{title} {chap} {subsec} {27pt} {true}
! 2608: \definefontsetatsize{chap} {sec} {text} {19pt} {true}
! 2609: \definefontsetatsize{sec} {subsec} {reduced}{17pt} {true}
! 2610: \definefontsetatsize{ssec} {text} {small} {15pt} {true}
! 2611: \definefontsetatsize{reduced}{small} {smaller}{10.5pt}{false}
! 2612: \definefontsetatsize{small} {smaller}{smaller}{10.5pt}{false}
! 2613: \definefontsetatsize{smaller}{smaller}{smaller}{9.5pt} {false}
! 2614:
! 2615: \def\titlefont#1{{\titlefonts\rm #1}}
! 2616: \let\subsecfonts = \ssecfonts
! 2617: \let\subsubsecfonts = \ssecfonts
! 2618:
! 2619: % Define these just so they can be easily changed for other fonts.
! 2620: \def\angleleft{$\langle$}
! 2621: \def\angleright{$\rangle$}
! 2622:
! 2623: % Set the fonts to use with the @small... environments.
! 2624: \let\smallexamplefonts = \smallfonts
! 2625:
! 2626: % About \smallexamplefonts. If we use \smallfonts (9pt), @smallexample
! 2627: % can fit this many characters:
! 2628: % 8.5x11=86 smallbook=72 a4=90 a5=69
! 2629: % If we use \scriptfonts (8pt), then we can fit this many characters:
! 2630: % 8.5x11=90+ smallbook=80 a4=90+ a5=77
! 2631: % For me, subjectively, the few extra characters that fit aren't worth
! 2632: % the additional smallness of 8pt. So I'm making the default 9pt.
! 2633: %
! 2634: % By the way, for comparison, here's what fits with @example (10pt):
! 2635: % 8.5x11=71 smallbook=60 a4=75 a5=58
! 2636: % --karl, 24jan03.
! 2637:
! 2638: % Set up the default fonts, so we can use them for creating boxes.
! 2639: %
! 2640: \definetextfontsizexi
! 2641:
! 2642:
! 2643: % Check if we are currently using a typewriter font. Since all the
! 2644: % Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero interword stretch (and
! 2645: % shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all typewriter fonts to have
! 2646: % this property, we can check that font parameter. #1 is what to
! 2647: % print if we are indeed using \tt; #2 is what to print otherwise.
! 2648: \def\ifusingtt#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen3\font=0pt #1\else #2\fi}
! 2649:
! 2650: % Same as above, but check for italic font. Actually this also catches
! 2651: % non-italic slanted fonts since it is impossible to distinguish them from
! 2652: % italic fonts. But since this is only used by $ and it uses \sl anyway
! 2653: % this is not a problem.
! 2654: \def\ifusingit#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen1\font>0pt #1\else #2\fi}
! 2655:
! 2656:
! 2657: % Check if internal flag is clear, i.e. has not been @set.
! 2658: \def\ifflagclear#1#2#3{%
! 2659: \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax
! 2660: #2\else#3\fi
! 2661: }
! 2662:
! 2663: {
! 2664: \catcode`\'=\active
! 2665: \catcode`\`=\active
! 2666:
! 2667: \gdef\setcodequotes{\let`\codequoteleft \let'\codequoteright}
! 2668: \gdef\setregularquotes{\let`\lq \let'\rq}
! 2669: }
! 2670: \setregularquotes
! 2671:
! 2672: % output for ' in @code
! 2673: % in tt font hex 0D (undirected) or 27 (curly right quote)
! 2674: %
! 2675: \def\codequoteright{%
! 2676: \ifusingtt
! 2677: {\ifflagclear{txicodequoteundirected}%
! 2678: {\ifflagclear{codequoteundirected}%
! 2679: {'}%
! 2680: {\char"0D }}%
! 2681: {\char"0D }}%
! 2682: {'}%
! 2683: }
! 2684:
! 2685: % output for ` in @code
! 2686: % in tt font hex 12 (grave accent) or 60 (curly left quote)
! 2687: % \relax disables Spanish ligatures ?` and !` of \tt font.
! 2688: %
! 2689: \def\codequoteleft{%
! 2690: \ifusingtt
! 2691: {\ifflagclear{txicodequotebacktick}%
! 2692: {\ifflagclear{codequotebacktick}%
! 2693: {\relax`}%
! 2694: {\char"12 }}%
! 2695: {\char"12 }}%
! 2696: {\relax`}%
! 2697: }
! 2698:
! 2699: % Commands to set the quote options.
! 2700: %
! 2701: \parseargdef\codequoteundirected{%
! 2702: \def\temp{#1}%
! 2703: \ifx\temp\onword
! 2704: \expandafter\let\csname SETtxicodequoteundirected\endcsname
! 2705: = t%
! 2706: \else\ifx\temp\offword
! 2707: \expandafter\let\csname SETtxicodequoteundirected\endcsname
! 2708: = \relax
! 2709: \else
! 2710: \errhelp = \EMsimple
! 2711: \errmessage{Unknown @codequoteundirected value `\temp', must be on|off}%
! 2712: \fi\fi
! 2713: }
! 2714:
! 2715: \parseargdef\codequotebacktick{%
! 2716: \def\temp{#1}%
! 2717: \ifx\temp\onword
! 2718: \expandafter\let\csname SETtxicodequotebacktick\endcsname
! 2719: = t%
! 2720: \else\ifx\temp\offword
! 2721: \expandafter\let\csname SETtxicodequotebacktick\endcsname
! 2722: = \relax
! 2723: \else
! 2724: \errhelp = \EMsimple
! 2725: \errmessage{Unknown @codequotebacktick value `\temp', must be on|off}%
! 2726: \fi\fi
! 2727: }
! 2728:
! 2729: % Turn them on by default
! 2730: \let\SETtxicodequoteundirected = t
! 2731: \let\SETtxicodequotebacktick = t
! 2732:
! 2733:
! 2734: % [Knuth] pp. 380,381,391, disable Spanish ligatures ?` and !` of \tt font.
! 2735: \def\noligaturesquoteleft{\relax\lq}
! 2736:
! 2737: % Count depth in font-changes, for error checks
! 2738: \newcount\fontdepth \fontdepth=0
! 2739:
! 2740: % Font commands.
! 2741:
! 2742: % #1 is the font command (\sl or \it), #2 is the text to slant.
! 2743: % If we are in a monospaced environment, however, 1) always use \ttsl,
! 2744: % and 2) do not add an italic correction.
! 2745: \def\dosmartslant#1#2{%
! 2746: \ifusingtt
! 2747: {{\ttsl #2}\let\next=\relax}%
! 2748: {\def\next{{#1#2}\smartitaliccorrection}}%
! 2749: \next
! 2750: }
! 2751: \def\smartslanted{\dosmartslant\sl}
! 2752: \def\smartitalic{\dosmartslant\it}
! 2753:
! 2754: % Output an italic correction unless the following character is such as
! 2755: % not to need one.
! 2756: \def\smartitaliccorrection{\futurelet\next\smartitaliccorrectionx}
! 2757: \def\smartitaliccorrectionx{%
! 2758: \ifx\next,%
! 2759: \else\ifx\next-%
! 2760: \else\ifx\next.%
! 2761: \else\ifx\next\.%
! 2762: \else\ifx\next\comma%
! 2763: \else\ptexslash
! 2764: \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
! 2765: \aftersmartic
! 2766: }
! 2767:
! 2768: % @cite unconditionally uses \sl with \smartitaliccorrection.
! 2769: \def\cite#1{{\sl #1}\smartitaliccorrection}
! 2770:
! 2771: % @var unconditionally uses \sl. This gives consistency for
! 2772: % parameter names whether they are in @def, @table @code or a
! 2773: % regular paragraph.
! 2774: % To get ttsl font for @var when used in code context, @set txicodevaristt.
! 2775: % The \null is to reset \spacefactor.
! 2776: \def\aftersmartic{}
! 2777: \def\var#1{%
! 2778: \let\saveaftersmartic = \aftersmartic
! 2779: \def\aftersmartic{\null\let\aftersmartic=\saveaftersmartic}%
! 2780: %
! 2781: \ifflagclear{txicodevaristt}%
! 2782: {\def\varnext{{{\sl #1}}\smartitaliccorrection}}%
! 2783: {\def\varnext{\smartslanted{#1}}}%
! 2784: \varnext
! 2785: }
! 2786:
! 2787: % To be removed after next release
! 2788: \def\SETtxicodevaristt{}% @set txicodevaristt
! 2789:
! 2790: \let\i=\smartitalic
! 2791: \let\slanted=\smartslanted
! 2792: \let\dfn=\smartslanted
! 2793: \let\emph=\smartitalic
! 2794:
! 2795: % @r for roman font, used for code comment
! 2796: \def\r#1{{%
! 2797: \usenormaldash % get --, --- ligatures even if in @code
! 2798: \defcharsdefault % in case on def line
! 2799: \rm #1}}
! 2800: {\catcode`-=\active \gdef\usenormaldash{\let-\normaldash}}
! 2801:
! 2802: % @sc, undocumented @ii.
! 2803: \def\sc#1{{\smallcaps#1}} % smallcaps font
! 2804: \def\ii#1{{\it #1}} % italic font
! 2805:
! 2806: % @b, explicit bold. Also @strong.
! 2807: \def\b#1{{\bf #1}}
! 2808: \let\strong=\b
! 2809:
! 2810: % @sansserif, explicit sans.
! 2811: \def\sansserif#1{{\sf #1}}
! 2812:
! 2813: \newif\iffrenchspacing
! 2814: \frenchspacingfalse
! 2815:
! 2816: % Set sfcode to normal for the chars that usually have another value.
! 2817: % Can't use plain's \frenchspacing because it uses the `\x notation, and
! 2818: % sometimes \x has an active definition that messes things up.
! 2819: %
! 2820: \catcode`@=11
! 2821: \def\plainfrenchspacing{%
! 2822: \iffrenchspacing\else
! 2823: \frenchspacingtrue
! 2824: \sfcode`\.=\@m \sfcode`\?=\@m \sfcode`\!=\@m
! 2825: \sfcode`\:=\@m \sfcode`\;=\@m \sfcode`\,=\@m
! 2826: \def\endofsentencespacefactor{1000}% for @. and friends
! 2827: \fi
! 2828: }
! 2829: \def\plainnonfrenchspacing{%
! 2830: \iffrenchspacing
! 2831: \frenchspacingfalse
! 2832: \sfcode`\.3000\sfcode`\?3000\sfcode`\!3000
! 2833: \sfcode`\:2000\sfcode`\;1500\sfcode`\,1250
! 2834: \def\endofsentencespacefactor{3000}% for @. and friends
! 2835: \fi
! 2836: }
! 2837: \catcode`@=\other
! 2838: \def\endofsentencespacefactor{3000}% default
! 2839:
! 2840: % @frenchspacing on|off says whether to put extra space after punctuation.
! 2841: %
! 2842: \def\onword{on}
! 2843: \def\offword{off}
! 2844: %
! 2845: \let\frenchspacingsetting\plainnonfrenchspacing % used in output routine
! 2846: \parseargdef\frenchspacing{%
! 2847: \def\temp{#1}%
! 2848: \ifx\temp\onword \let\frenchspacingsetting\plainfrenchspacing
! 2849: \else\ifx\temp\offword \let\frenchspacingsetting\plainnonfrenchspacing
! 2850: \else
! 2851: \errhelp = \EMsimple
! 2852: \errmessage{Unknown @frenchspacing option `\temp', must be on|off}%
! 2853: \fi\fi
! 2854: \frenchspacingsetting
! 2855: }
! 2856:
! 2857:
! 2858: % @t, explicit typewriter.
! 2859: \def\t#1{%
! 2860: {\tt \defcharsdefault \plainfrenchspacing #1}%
! 2861: \null
! 2862: }
! 2863:
! 2864: % @samp.
! 2865: \def\samp#1{{\setcodequotes\lq\tclose{#1}\rq\null}}
! 2866:
! 2867: % @indicateurl is \samp, that is, with quotes.
! 2868: \let\indicateurl=\samp
! 2869:
! 2870: % @code (and similar) prints in typewriter, but with spaces the same
! 2871: % size as normal in the surrounding text, without hyphenation, etc.
! 2872: % This is a subroutine for that.
! 2873: \def\tclose#1{%
! 2874: {%
! 2875: % Change normal interword space to be same as for the current font.
! 2876: \spaceskip = \fontdimen2\font
! 2877: %
! 2878: % Switch to typewriter.
! 2879: \tt
! 2880: %
! 2881: % `\ ' produces the large typewriter interword space.
! 2882: \def\ {{\spaceskip = 0pt{} }}%
! 2883: %
! 2884: \plainfrenchspacing
! 2885: #1%
! 2886: }%
! 2887: \null % reset spacefactor to 1000
! 2888: }
! 2889:
! 2890: % This is for LuaTeX: It is not sufficient to disable hyphenation at
! 2891: % explicit dashes by setting `\hyphenchar` to -1.
! 2892: \def\dashnobreak{%
! 2893: \normaldash
! 2894: \penalty 10000 }
! 2895:
! 2896: % We must turn on hyphenation at `-' and `_' in @code.
! 2897: % Otherwise, it is too hard to avoid overfull hboxes
! 2898: % in the Emacs manual, the Library manual, etc.
! 2899: % We explicitly allow hyphenation at these characters
! 2900: % using \discretionary.
! 2901: %
! 2902: % Hyphenation at - and hyphenation within words was turned off
! 2903: % by default for the tt fonts using the \hyphenchar parameter of TeX.
! 2904: {
! 2905: \catcode`\-=\active \catcode`\_=\active
! 2906: \catcode`\'=\active \catcode`\`=\active
! 2907: \global\let'=\rq \global\let`=\lq % default definitions
! 2908: %
! 2909: \global\def\code{\begingroup
! 2910: \setcodequotes
! 2911: \catcode\dashChar=\active \catcode\underChar=\active
! 2912: \ifallowcodebreaks
! 2913: \let-\codedash
! 2914: \let_\codeunder
! 2915: \else
! 2916: \let-\dashnobreak
! 2917: \let_\realunder
! 2918: \fi
! 2919: \codex
! 2920: }
! 2921: %
! 2922: \gdef\codedash{\futurelet\next\codedashfinish}
! 2923: \gdef\codedashfinish{%
! 2924: \normaldash % always output the dash character itself.
! 2925: %
! 2926: % Now, output a discretionary to allow a line break, unless
! 2927: % (a) the next character is a -, or
! 2928: % (b) the preceding character is a -, or
! 2929: % (c) we are at the start of the string.
! 2930: % In both cases (b) and (c), \codedashnobreak should be set to \codedash.
! 2931: %
! 2932: % E.g., given --posix, we do not want to allow a break after either -.
! 2933: % Given --foo-bar, we do want to allow a break between the - and the b.
! 2934: \ifx\next\codedash \else
! 2935: \ifx\codedashnobreak\codedash
! 2936: \else \discretionary{}{}{}\fi
! 2937: \fi
! 2938: % we need the space after the = for the case when \next itself is a
! 2939: % space token; it would get swallowed otherwise. As in @code{- a}.
! 2940: \global\let\codedashnobreak= \next
! 2941: }
! 2942: }
! 2943: \def\normaldash{-}
! 2944: %
! 2945: \def\codex #1{\tclose{%
! 2946: % Given -foo (with a single dash), we do not want to allow a break
! 2947: % after the -. \codedashnobreak is set to the first character in
! 2948: % @code.
! 2949: \futurelet\codedashnobreak\relax
! 2950: #1%
! 2951: }\endgroup}
! 2952:
! 2953: \def\codeunder{%
! 2954: % this is all so @math{@code{var_name}+1} can work. In math mode, _
! 2955: % is "active" (mathcode"8000) and \normalunderscore (or \char95, etc.)
! 2956: % will therefore expand the active definition of _, which is us
! 2957: % (inside @code that is), therefore an endless loop.
! 2958: \ifusingtt{\ifmmode
! 2959: \mathchar"075F % class 0=ordinary, family 7=ttfam, pos 0x5F=_.
! 2960: \else\normalunderscore \fi
! 2961: \discretionary{}{}{}}%
! 2962: {\_}%
! 2963: }
! 2964:
! 2965: % An additional complication: the above will allow breaks after, e.g.,
! 2966: % each of the four underscores in __typeof__. This is bad.
! 2967: % @allowcodebreaks provides a document-level way to turn breaking at -
! 2968: % and _ on and off.
! 2969: %
! 2970: \newif\ifallowcodebreaks \allowcodebreakstrue
! 2971:
! 2972: \def\keywordtrue{true}
! 2973: \def\keywordfalse{false}
! 2974:
! 2975: \parseargdef\allowcodebreaks{%
! 2976: \def\txiarg{#1}%
! 2977: \ifx\txiarg\keywordtrue
! 2978: \allowcodebreakstrue
! 2979: \else\ifx\txiarg\keywordfalse
! 2980: \allowcodebreaksfalse
! 2981: \else
! 2982: \errhelp = \EMsimple
! 2983: \errmessage{Unknown @allowcodebreaks option `\txiarg', must be true|false}%
! 2984: \fi\fi
! 2985: }
! 2986:
! 2987: % For @command, @env, @file, @option quotes seem unnecessary,
! 2988: % so use \code rather than \samp.
! 2989: \let\command=\code
! 2990: \let\env=\code
! 2991: \let\file=\code
! 2992: \let\option=\code
! 2993:
! 2994: % @uref (abbreviation for `urlref') aka @url takes an optional
! 2995: % (comma-separated) second argument specifying the text to display and
! 2996: % an optional third arg as text to display instead of (rather than in
! 2997: % addition to) the url itself. First (mandatory) arg is the url.
! 2998:
! 2999: % TeX-only option to allow changing PDF output to show only the second
! 3000: % arg (if given), and not the url (which is then just the link target).
! 3001: \newif\ifurefurlonlylink
! 3002:
! 3003: % The default \pretolerance setting stops the penalty inserted in
! 3004: % \urefallowbreak being a discouragement to line breaking. Set it to
! 3005: % a negative value for this paragraph only. Hopefully this does not
! 3006: % conflict with redefinitions of \par done elsewhere.
! 3007: \def\nopretolerance{%
! 3008: \pretolerance=-1
! 3009: \def\par{\endgraf\pretolerance=100 \let\par\endgraf}%
! 3010: }
! 3011:
! 3012: % The main macro is \urefbreak, which allows breaking at expected
! 3013: % places within the url.
! 3014: \def\urefbreak{\nopretolerance \begingroup \urefcatcodes \dourefbreak}
! 3015: \let\uref=\urefbreak
! 3016: %
! 3017: \def\dourefbreak#1{\urefbreakfinish #1,,,\finish}
! 3018: \def\urefbreakfinish#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{% doesn't work in @example
! 3019: \unsepspaces
! 3020: \pdfurl{#1}%
! 3021: \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}%
! 3022: \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
! 3023: \unhbox0 % third arg given, show only that
! 3024: \else
! 3025: \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% look for second arg
! 3026: \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
! 3027: \ifpdf
! 3028: % For pdfTeX and LuaTeX
! 3029: \ifurefurlonlylink
! 3030: % PDF plus option to not display url, show just arg
! 3031: \unhbox0
! 3032: \else
! 3033: % PDF, normally display both arg and url for consistency,
! 3034: % visibility, if the pdf is eventually used to print, etc.
! 3035: \unhbox0\ (\urefcode{#1})%
! 3036: \fi
! 3037: \else
! 3038: \ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined
! 3039: \unhbox0\ (\urefcode{#1})% DVI, always show arg and url
! 3040: \else
! 3041: % For XeTeX
! 3042: \ifurefurlonlylink
! 3043: % PDF plus option to not display url, show just arg
! 3044: \unhbox0
! 3045: \else
! 3046: % PDF, normally display both arg and url for consistency,
! 3047: % visibility, if the pdf is eventually used to print, etc.
! 3048: \unhbox0\ (\urefcode{#1})%
! 3049: \fi
! 3050: \fi
! 3051: \fi
! 3052: \else
! 3053: \urefcode{#1}% only url given, so show it
! 3054: \fi
! 3055: \fi
! 3056: \endlink
! 3057: \endgroup}
! 3058:
! 3059: % Allow line breaks around only a few characters (only).
! 3060: \def\urefcatcodes{%
! 3061: \catcode`\&=\active \catcode`\.=\active
! 3062: \catcode`\#=\active \catcode`\?=\active
! 3063: \catcode`\/=\active
! 3064: }
! 3065: {
! 3066: \urefcatcodes
! 3067: %
! 3068: \global\def\urefcode{\begingroup
! 3069: \setcodequotes
! 3070: \urefcatcodes
! 3071: \let&\urefcodeamp
! 3072: \let.\urefcodedot
! 3073: \let#\urefcodehash
! 3074: \let?\urefcodequest
! 3075: \let/\urefcodeslash
! 3076: \codex
! 3077: }
! 3078: %
! 3079: % By default, they are just regular characters.
! 3080: \global\def&{\normalamp}
! 3081: \global\def.{\normaldot}
! 3082: \global\def#{\normalhash}
! 3083: \global\def?{\normalquest}
! 3084: \global\def/{\normalslash}
! 3085: }
! 3086:
! 3087: \def\urefcodeamp{\urefprebreak \&\urefpostbreak}
! 3088: \def\urefcodedot{\urefprebreak .\urefpostbreak}
! 3089: \def\urefcodehash{\urefprebreak \#\urefpostbreak}
! 3090: \def\urefcodequest{\urefprebreak ?\urefpostbreak}
! 3091: \def\urefcodeslash{\futurelet\next\urefcodeslashfinish}
! 3092: {
! 3093: \catcode`\/=\active
! 3094: \global\def\urefcodeslashfinish{%
! 3095: \urefprebreak \slashChar
! 3096: % Allow line break only after the final / in a sequence of
! 3097: % slashes, to avoid line break between the slashes in http://.
! 3098: \ifx\next/\else \urefpostbreak \fi
! 3099: }
! 3100: }
! 3101:
! 3102: % By default we'll break after the special characters, but some people like to
! 3103: % break before the special chars, so allow that. Also allow no breaking at
! 3104: % all, for manual control.
! 3105: %
! 3106: \parseargdef\urefbreakstyle{%
! 3107: \def\txiarg{#1}%
! 3108: \ifx\txiarg\wordnone
! 3109: \def\urefprebreak{\nobreak}\def\urefpostbreak{\nobreak}
! 3110: \else\ifx\txiarg\wordbefore
! 3111: \def\urefprebreak{\urefallowbreak}\def\urefpostbreak{\nobreak}
! 3112: \else\ifx\txiarg\wordafter
! 3113: \def\urefprebreak{\nobreak}\def\urefpostbreak{\urefallowbreak}
! 3114: \else
! 3115: \errhelp = \EMsimple
! 3116: \errmessage{Unknown @urefbreakstyle setting `\txiarg'}%
! 3117: \fi\fi\fi
! 3118: }
! 3119: \def\wordafter{after}
! 3120: \def\wordbefore{before}
! 3121: \def\wordnone{none}
! 3122:
! 3123: % Allow a ragged right output to aid breaking long URL's. There can
! 3124: % be a break at the \allowbreak with no extra glue (if the existing stretch in
! 3125: % the line is sufficient), a break at the \penalty with extra glue added
! 3126: % at the end of the line, or no break at all here.
! 3127: % Changing the value of the penalty and/or the amount of stretch affects how
! 3128: % preferable one choice is over the other.
! 3129: \def\urefallowbreak{%
! 3130: \penalty0\relax
! 3131: \hskip 0pt plus 2 em\relax
! 3132: \penalty1000\relax
! 3133: \hskip 0pt plus -2 em\relax
! 3134: }
! 3135:
! 3136: \urefbreakstyle after
! 3137:
! 3138: % @url synonym for @uref, since that's how everyone uses it.
! 3139: %
! 3140: \let\url=\uref
! 3141:
! 3142: % rms does not like angle brackets --karl, 17may97.
! 3143: % So now @email is just like @uref, unless we are pdf.
! 3144: %
! 3145: %\def\email#1{\angleleft{\tt #1}\angleright}
! 3146: \ifpdforxetex
! 3147: \def\email#1{\doemail#1,,\finish}
! 3148: \def\doemail#1,#2,#3\finish{\begingroup
! 3149: \unsepspaces
! 3150: \pdfurl{mailto:#1}%
! 3151: \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
! 3152: \ifdim\wd0>0pt\unhbox0\else\code{#1}\fi
! 3153: \endlink
! 3154: \endgroup}
! 3155: \else
! 3156: \let\email=\uref
! 3157: \fi
! 3158:
! 3159: % @kbdinputstyle -- arg is `distinct' (@kbd uses slanted tty font always),
! 3160: % `example' (@kbd uses ttsl only inside of @example and friends),
! 3161: % or `code' (@kbd uses normal tty font always).
! 3162: \parseargdef\kbdinputstyle{%
! 3163: \def\txiarg{#1}%
! 3164: \ifx\txiarg\worddistinct
! 3165: \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\ttsl}%
! 3166: \else\ifx\txiarg\wordexample
! 3167: \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}%
! 3168: \else\ifx\txiarg\wordcode
! 3169: \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\tt}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}%
! 3170: \else
! 3171: \errhelp = \EMsimple
! 3172: \errmessage{Unknown @kbdinputstyle setting `\txiarg'}%
! 3173: \fi\fi\fi
! 3174: }
! 3175: \def\worddistinct{distinct}
! 3176: \def\wordexample{example}
! 3177: \def\wordcode{code}
! 3178:
! 3179: % Default is `distinct'.
! 3180: \kbdinputstyle distinct
! 3181:
! 3182: \def\kbd#1{%
! 3183: \tclose{\kbdfont\setcodequotes#1}%
! 3184: }
! 3185:
! 3186: % definition of @key that produces a lozenge. Doesn't adjust to text size.
! 3187: %\setfont\keyrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
! 3188: %\font\keysy=cmsy9
! 3189: %\def\key#1{{\keyrm\textfont2=\keysy \leavevmode\hbox{%
! 3190: % \raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleleft}\kern-.08em\vtop{%
! 3191: % \vbox{\hrule\kern-0.4pt
! 3192: % \hbox{\raise0.4pt\hbox{\vphantom{\angleleft}}#1}}%
! 3193: % \kern-0.4pt\hrule}%
! 3194: % \kern-.06em\raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleright}}}}
! 3195:
! 3196: % definition of @key with no lozenge.
! 3197: %
! 3198: \def\key#1{{\setregularquotes \tt #1}\null}
! 3199:
! 3200: % @clicksequence{File @click{} Open ...}
! 3201: \def\clicksequence#1{\begingroup #1\endgroup}
! 3202:
! 3203: % @clickstyle @arrow (by default)
! 3204: \parseargdef\clickstyle{\def\click{#1}}
! 3205: \def\click{\arrow}
! 3206:
! 3207: % Typeset a dimension, e.g., `in' or `pt'. The only reason for the
! 3208: % argument is to make the input look right: @dmn{pt} instead of @dmn{}pt.
! 3209: %
! 3210: \def\dmn#1{\thinspace #1}
! 3211:
! 3212: % @acronym for "FBI", "NATO", and the like.
! 3213: % We print this one point size smaller, since it's intended for
! 3214: % all-uppercase.
! 3215: %
! 3216: \def\acronym#1{\doacronym #1,,\finish}
! 3217: \def\doacronym#1,#2,#3\finish{%
! 3218: {\switchtolsize #1}%
! 3219: \def\temp{#2}%
! 3220: \ifx\temp\empty \else
! 3221: \space ({\unsepspaces \ignorespaces \temp \unskip})%
! 3222: \fi
! 3223: \null % reset \spacefactor=1000
! 3224: }
! 3225:
! 3226: % @abbr for "Comput. J." and the like.
! 3227: % No font change, but don't do end-of-sentence spacing.
! 3228: %
! 3229: \def\abbr#1{\doabbr #1,,\finish}
! 3230: \def\doabbr#1,#2,#3\finish{%
! 3231: {\plainfrenchspacing #1}%
! 3232: \def\temp{#2}%
! 3233: \ifx\temp\empty \else
! 3234: \space ({\unsepspaces \ignorespaces \temp \unskip})%
! 3235: \fi
! 3236: \null % reset \spacefactor=1000
! 3237: }
! 3238:
! 3239: % @asis just yields its argument. Used with @table, for example.
! 3240: %
! 3241: \def\asis#1{#1}
! 3242:
! 3243: % @math outputs its argument in math mode.
! 3244: %
! 3245: % One complication: _ usually means subscripts, but it could also mean
! 3246: % an actual _ character, as in @math{@var{some_variable} + 1}. So make
! 3247: % _ active, and distinguish by seeing if the current family is \slfam,
! 3248: % which is what @var uses.
! 3249: {
! 3250: \catcode`\_ = \active
! 3251: \gdef\mathunderscore{%
! 3252: \catcode`\_=\active
! 3253: \def_{\ifnum\fam=\slfam \_\else\sb\fi}%
! 3254: }
! 3255: }
! 3256: % Another complication: we want \\ (and @\) to output a math (or tt) \.
! 3257: % FYI, plain.tex uses \\ as a temporary control sequence (for no
! 3258: % particular reason), but this is not advertised and we don't care.
! 3259: %
! 3260: % The \mathchar is class=0=ordinary, family=7=ttfam, position=5C=\.
! 3261: \def\mathbackslash{\ifnum\fam=\ttfam \mathchar"075C \else\backslash \fi}
! 3262: %
! 3263: \def\math{%
! 3264: \ifmmode\else % only go into math if not in math mode already
! 3265: \tex
! 3266: \mathunderscore
! 3267: \let\\ = \mathbackslash
! 3268: \mathactive
! 3269: % make the texinfo accent commands work in math mode
! 3270: \let\"=\ddot
! 3271: \let\'=\acute
! 3272: \let\==\bar
! 3273: \let\^=\hat
! 3274: \let\`=\grave
! 3275: \let\u=\breve
! 3276: \let\v=\check
! 3277: \let\~=\tilde
! 3278: \let\dotaccent=\dot
! 3279: % have to provide another name for sup operator
! 3280: \let\mathopsup=\sup
! 3281: $\expandafter\finishmath\fi
! 3282: }
! 3283: \def\finishmath#1{#1$\endgroup} % Close the group opened by \tex.
! 3284:
! 3285: % Some active characters (such as <) are spaced differently in math.
! 3286: % We have to reset their definitions in case the @math was an argument
! 3287: % to a command which sets the catcodes (such as @item or @section).
! 3288: %
! 3289: {
! 3290: \catcode`^ = \active
! 3291: \catcode`< = \active
! 3292: \catcode`> = \active
! 3293: \catcode`+ = \active
! 3294: \catcode`' = \active
! 3295: \gdef\mathactive{%
! 3296: \let^ = \ptexhat
! 3297: \let< = \ptexless
! 3298: \let> = \ptexgtr
! 3299: \let+ = \ptexplus
! 3300: \let' = \ptexquoteright
! 3301: }
! 3302: }
! 3303:
! 3304: % for @sub and @sup, if in math mode, just do a normal sub/superscript.
! 3305: % If in text, use math to place as sub/superscript, but switch
! 3306: % into text mode, with smaller fonts. This is a different font than the
! 3307: % one used for real math sub/superscripts (8pt vs. 7pt), but let's not
! 3308: % fix it (significant additions to font machinery) until someone notices.
! 3309: %
! 3310: \def\sub{\ifmmode \expandafter\sb \else \expandafter\finishsub\fi}
! 3311: \def\finishsub#1{$\sb{\hbox{\switchtolllsize #1}}$}%
! 3312: %
! 3313: \def\sup{\ifmmode \expandafter\ptexsp \else \expandafter\finishsup\fi}
! 3314: \def\finishsup#1{$\ptexsp{\hbox{\switchtolllsize #1}}$}%
! 3315:
! 3316: % provide this command from LaTeX as it is very common
! 3317: \def\frac#1#2{{{#1}\over{#2}}}
! 3318:
! 3319: % @displaymath.
! 3320: % \globaldefs is needed to recognize the end lines in \tex and
! 3321: % \end tex. Set \thisenv as @end displaymath is seen before @end tex.
! 3322: {\obeylines
! 3323: \globaldefs=1
! 3324: \envdef\displaymath{%
! 3325: \tex%
! 3326: \def\thisenv{\displaymath}%
! 3327: \begingroup\let\end\displaymathend%
! 3328: $$%
! 3329: }
! 3330:
! 3331: \def\displaymathend{$$\endgroup\end}%
! 3332:
! 3333: \def\Edisplaymath{%
! 3334: \def\thisenv{\tex}%
! 3335: \end tex
! 3336: }}
! 3337:
! 3338:
! 3339: % @inlinefmt{FMTNAME,PROCESSED-TEXT} and @inlineraw{FMTNAME,RAW-TEXT}.
! 3340: % Ignore unless FMTNAME == tex; then it is like @iftex and @tex,
! 3341: % except specified as a normal braced arg, so no newlines to worry about.
! 3342: %
! 3343: \def\outfmtnametex{tex}
! 3344: %
! 3345: \long\def\inlinefmt#1{\doinlinefmt #1,\finish}
! 3346: \long\def\doinlinefmt#1,#2,\finish{%
! 3347: \def\inlinefmtname{#1}%
! 3348: \ifx\inlinefmtname\outfmtnametex \ignorespaces #2\fi
! 3349: }
! 3350: %
! 3351: % @inlinefmtifelse{FMTNAME,THEN-TEXT,ELSE-TEXT} expands THEN-TEXT if
! 3352: % FMTNAME is tex, else ELSE-TEXT.
! 3353: \long\def\inlinefmtifelse#1{\doinlinefmtifelse #1,,,\finish}
! 3354: \long\def\doinlinefmtifelse#1,#2,#3,#4,\finish{%
! 3355: \def\inlinefmtname{#1}%
! 3356: \ifx\inlinefmtname\outfmtnametex \ignorespaces #2\else \ignorespaces #3\fi
! 3357: }
! 3358: %
! 3359: % For raw, must switch into @tex before parsing the argument, to avoid
! 3360: % setting catcodes prematurely. Doing it this way means that, for
! 3361: % example, @inlineraw{html, foo{bar} gets a parse error instead of being
! 3362: % ignored. But this isn't important because if people want a literal
! 3363: % *right* brace they would have to use a command anyway, so they may as
! 3364: % well use a command to get a left brace too. We could re-use the
! 3365: % delimiter character idea from \verb, but it seems like overkill.
! 3366: %
! 3367: \long\def\inlineraw{\tex \doinlineraw}
! 3368: \long\def\doinlineraw#1{\doinlinerawtwo #1,\finish}
! 3369: \def\doinlinerawtwo#1,#2,\finish{%
! 3370: \def\inlinerawname{#1}%
! 3371: \ifx\inlinerawname\outfmtnametex \ignorespaces #2\fi
! 3372: \endgroup % close group opened by \tex.
! 3373: }
! 3374:
! 3375: % @inlineifset{VAR, TEXT} expands TEXT if VAR is @set.
! 3376: %
! 3377: \long\def\inlineifset#1{\doinlineifset #1,\finish}
! 3378: \long\def\doinlineifset#1,#2,\finish{%
! 3379: \def\inlinevarname{#1}%
! 3380: \expandafter\ifx\csname SET\inlinevarname\endcsname\relax
! 3381: \else\ignorespaces#2\fi
! 3382: }
! 3383:
! 3384: % @inlineifclear{VAR, TEXT} expands TEXT if VAR is not @set.
! 3385: %
! 3386: \long\def\inlineifclear#1{\doinlineifclear #1,\finish}
! 3387: \long\def\doinlineifclear#1,#2,\finish{%
! 3388: \def\inlinevarname{#1}%
! 3389: \expandafter\ifx\csname SET\inlinevarname\endcsname\relax \ignorespaces#2\fi
! 3390: }
! 3391:
! 3392:
! 3393: \message{glyphs,}
! 3394: % and logos.
! 3395:
! 3396: % @@ prints an @, as does @atchar{}.
! 3397: \def\@{\char64 }
! 3398: \let\atchar=\@
! 3399:
! 3400: % @{ @} @lbracechar{} @rbracechar{} all generate brace characters.
! 3401: \def\lbracechar{{\ifusingtt{\char123}{\ensuremath\lbrace}}}
! 3402: \def\rbracechar{{\ifusingtt{\char125}{\ensuremath\rbrace}}}
! 3403: \let\{=\lbracechar
! 3404: \let\}=\rbracechar
! 3405:
! 3406: % @comma{} to avoid , parsing problems.
! 3407: \let\comma = ,
! 3408:
! 3409: % Accents: @, @dotaccent @ringaccent @ubaraccent @udotaccent
! 3410: % Others are defined by plain TeX: @` @' @" @^ @~ @= @u @v @H.
! 3411: \let\, = \ptexc
! 3412: \let\dotaccent = \ptexdot
! 3413: \def\ringaccent#1{{\accent23 #1}}
! 3414: \let\tieaccent = \ptext
! 3415: \let\ubaraccent = \ptexb
! 3416: \let\udotaccent = \d
! 3417:
! 3418: % Other special characters: @questiondown @exclamdown @ordf @ordm
! 3419: % Plain TeX defines: @AA @AE @O @OE @L (plus lowercase versions) @ss.
! 3420: \def\questiondown{?`}
! 3421: \def\exclamdown{!`}
! 3422: \def\ordf{\leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\switchtolllsize \underbar{a}}}
! 3423: \def\ordm{\leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\switchtolllsize \underbar{o}}}
! 3424:
! 3425: % Dotless i and dotless j, used for accents.
! 3426: \def\imacro{i}
! 3427: \def\jmacro{j}
! 3428: \def\dotless#1{%
! 3429: \def\temp{#1}%
! 3430: \ifx\temp\imacro \ifmmode\imath \else\ptexi \fi
! 3431: \else\ifx\temp\jmacro \ifmmode\jmath \else\j \fi
! 3432: \else \errmessage{@dotless can be used only with i or j}%
! 3433: \fi\fi
! 3434: }
! 3435:
! 3436: % The \TeX{} logo, as in plain, but resetting the spacing so that a
! 3437: % period following counts as ending a sentence. (Idea found in latex.)
! 3438: %
! 3439: \edef\TeX{\TeX \spacefactor=1000 }
! 3440:
! 3441: % @LaTeX{} logo. Not quite the same results as the definition in
! 3442: % latex.ltx, since we use a different font for the raised A; it's most
! 3443: % convenient for us to use an explicitly smaller font, rather than using
! 3444: % the \scriptstyle font (since we don't reset \scriptstyle and
! 3445: % \scriptscriptstyle).
! 3446: %
! 3447: \def\LaTeX{%
! 3448: L\kern-.36em
! 3449: {\setbox0=\hbox{T}%
! 3450: \vbox to \ht0{\hbox{%
! 3451: \ifx\textnominalsize\xwordpt
! 3452: % for 10pt running text, lllsize (8pt) is too small for the A in LaTeX.
! 3453: % Revert to plain's \scriptsize, which is 7pt.
! 3454: \count255=\the\fam $\fam\count255 \scriptstyle A$%
! 3455: \else
! 3456: \ifx\curfontsize\smallword
! 3457: % For footnotes and indices
! 3458: \count255=\the\fam $\fam\count255 \scriptstyle A$%
! 3459: \else
! 3460: % For 11pt, we can use our lllsize.
! 3461: \switchtolllsize A%
! 3462: \fi
! 3463: \fi
! 3464: }%
! 3465: \vss
! 3466: }}%
! 3467: \kern-.15em
! 3468: \TeX
! 3469: }
! 3470: \def\smallword{small}
! 3471:
! 3472: % Some math mode symbols. Define \ensuremath to switch into math mode
! 3473: % unless we are already there. Expansion tricks may not be needed here,
! 3474: % but safer, and can't hurt.
! 3475: \def\ensuremath{\ifmmode \expandafter\asis \else\expandafter\ensuredmath \fi}
! 3476: \def\ensuredmath#1{$\relax#1$}
! 3477: %
! 3478: \def\bullet{\ensuremath\ptexbullet}
! 3479: \def\geq{\ensuremath\ge}
! 3480: \def\leq{\ensuremath\le}
! 3481: \def\minus{\ensuremath-}
! 3482:
! 3483: % @dots{} outputs an ellipsis using the current font.
! 3484: % We do .5em per period so that it has the same spacing in the cm
! 3485: % typewriter fonts as three actual period characters; on the other hand,
! 3486: % in other typewriter fonts three periods are wider than 1.5em. So do
! 3487: % whichever is larger.
! 3488: %
! 3489: \def\dots{%
! 3490: \leavevmode
! 3491: \setbox0=\hbox{...}% get width of three periods
! 3492: \ifdim\wd0 > 1.5em
! 3493: \dimen0 = \wd0
! 3494: \else
! 3495: \dimen0 = 1.5em
! 3496: \fi
! 3497: \hbox to \dimen0{%
! 3498: \hskip 0pt plus.25fil
! 3499: .\hskip 0pt plus1fil
! 3500: .\hskip 0pt plus1fil
! 3501: .\hskip 0pt plus.5fil
! 3502: }%
! 3503: }
! 3504:
! 3505: % @enddots{} is an end-of-sentence ellipsis.
! 3506: %
! 3507: \def\enddots{%
! 3508: \dots
! 3509: \spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor
! 3510: }
! 3511:
! 3512: % @point{}, @result{}, @expansion{}, @print{}, @equiv{}.
! 3513: %
! 3514: % Since these characters are used in examples, they should be an even number of
! 3515: % \tt widths. Each \tt character is 1en, so two makes it 1em.
! 3516: %
! 3517: \def\point{$\star$}
! 3518: \def\arrow{\leavevmode\raise.05ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\rightarrow$\hfil}}
! 3519: \def\result{\leavevmode\raise.05ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\Rightarrow$\hfil}}
! 3520: \def\expansion{\leavevmode\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\mapsto$\hfil}}
! 3521: \def\print{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\dashv$\hfil}}
! 3522: \def\equiv{\leavevmode\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\ptexequiv$\hfil}}
! 3523:
! 3524: % The @error{} command.
! 3525: % Adapted from the TeXbook's \boxit.
! 3526: %
! 3527: \newbox\errorbox
! 3528: %
! 3529: {\ttfont \global\dimen0 = 3em}% Width of the box.
! 3530: \dimen2 = .55pt % Thickness of rules
! 3531: % The text. (`r' is open on the right, `e' somewhat less so on the left.)
! 3532: \setbox0 = \hbox{\kern-.75pt \reducedsf \putworderror\kern-1.5pt}
! 3533: %
! 3534: \setbox\errorbox=\hbox to \dimen0{\hfil
! 3535: \hsize = \dimen0 \advance\hsize by -5.8pt % Space to left+right.
! 3536: \advance\hsize by -2\dimen2 % Rules.
! 3537: \vbox{%
! 3538: \hrule height\dimen2
! 3539: \hbox{\vrule width\dimen2 \kern3pt % Space to left of text.
! 3540: \vtop{\kern2.4pt \box0 \kern2.4pt}% Space above/below.
! 3541: \kern3pt\vrule width\dimen2}% Space to right.
! 3542: \hrule height\dimen2}
! 3543: \hfil}
! 3544: %
! 3545: \def\error{\leavevmode\lower.7ex\copy\errorbox}
! 3546:
! 3547: % @pounds{} is a sterling sign, which Knuth put in the CM italic font.
! 3548: %
! 3549: \def\pounds{{\ifusingtt{\ecfont\char"BF}{\it\$}}}
! 3550:
! 3551: % @euro{} comes from a separate font, depending on the current style.
! 3552: % We use the free feym* fonts from the eurosym package by Henrik
! 3553: % Theiling, which support regular, slanted, bold and bold slanted (and
! 3554: % "outlined" (blackboard board, sort of) versions, which we don't need).
! 3555: % It is available from http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/fonts/eurosym.
! 3556: %
! 3557: % Although only regular is the truly official Euro symbol, we ignore
! 3558: % that. The Euro is designed to be slightly taller than the regular
! 3559: % font height.
! 3560: %
! 3561: % feymr - regular
! 3562: % feymo - slanted
! 3563: % feybr - bold
! 3564: % feybo - bold slanted
! 3565: %
! 3566: % There is no good (free) typewriter version, to my knowledge.
! 3567: % A feymr10 euro is ~7.3pt wide, while a normal cmtt10 char is ~5.25pt wide.
! 3568: % Hmm.
! 3569: %
! 3570: % Also doesn't work in math. Do we need to do math with euro symbols?
! 3571: % Hope not.
! 3572: %
! 3573: %
! 3574: \def\euro{{\eurofont e}}
! 3575: \def\eurofont{%
! 3576: % We set the font at each command, rather than predefining it in
! 3577: % \textfonts and the other font-switching commands, so that
! 3578: % installations which never need the symbol don't have to have the
! 3579: % font installed.
! 3580: %
! 3581: % There is only one designed size (nominal 10pt), so we always scale
! 3582: % that to the current nominal size.
! 3583: %
! 3584: % By the way, simply using "at 1em" works for cmr10 and the like, but
! 3585: % does not work for cmbx10 and other extended/shrunken fonts.
! 3586: %
! 3587: \def\eurosize{\csname\curfontsize nominalsize\endcsname}%
! 3588: %
! 3589: \ifx\curfontstyle\bfstylename
! 3590: % bold:
! 3591: \font\thiseurofont = \ifusingit{feybo10}{feybr10} at \eurosize
! 3592: \else
! 3593: % regular:
! 3594: \font\thiseurofont = \ifusingit{feymo10}{feymr10} at \eurosize
! 3595: \fi
! 3596: \thiseurofont
! 3597: }
! 3598:
! 3599: % Glyphs from the EC fonts. We don't use \let for the aliases, because
! 3600: % sometimes we redefine the original macro, and the alias should reflect
! 3601: % the redefinition.
! 3602: %
! 3603: % Use LaTeX names for the Icelandic letters.
! 3604: \def\DH{{\ecfont \char"D0}} % Eth
! 3605: \def\dh{{\ecfont \char"F0}} % eth
! 3606: \def\TH{{\ecfont \char"DE}} % Thorn
! 3607: \def\th{{\ecfont \char"FE}} % thorn
! 3608: %
! 3609: \def\guillemetleft{{\ecfont \char"13}}
! 3610: \def\guillemotleft{\guillemetleft}
! 3611: \def\guillemetright{{\ecfont \char"14}}
! 3612: \def\guillemotright{\guillemetright}
! 3613: \def\guilsinglleft{{\ecfont \char"0E}}
! 3614: \def\guilsinglright{{\ecfont \char"0F}}
! 3615: \def\quotedblbase{{\ecfont \char"12}}
! 3616: \def\quotesinglbase{{\ecfont \char"0D}}
! 3617: %
! 3618: \def\L{{\ecfont \char"8A}} % L with stroke
! 3619: \def\l{{\ecfont \char"AA}} % l with stroke
! 3620: %
! 3621: % This positioning is not perfect (see the ogonek LaTeX package), but
! 3622: % we have the precomposed glyphs for the most common cases. We put the
! 3623: % tests to use those glyphs in the single \ogonek macro so we have fewer
! 3624: % dummy definitions to worry about for index entries, etc.
! 3625: %
! 3626: % ogonek is also used with other letters in Lithuanian (IOU), but using
! 3627: % the precomposed glyphs for those is not so easy since they aren't in
! 3628: % the same EC font.
! 3629: \def\ogonek#1{{%
! 3630: \def\temp{#1}%
! 3631: \ifx\temp\macrocharA\Aogonek
! 3632: \else\ifx\temp\macrochara\aogonek
! 3633: \else\ifx\temp\macrocharE\Eogonek
! 3634: \else\ifx\temp\macrochare\eogonek
! 3635: \else
! 3636: \ecfont \setbox0=\hbox{#1}%
! 3637: \ifdim\ht0=1ex\accent"0C #1%
! 3638: \else\ooalign{\unhbox0\crcr\hidewidth\char"0C \hidewidth}%
! 3639: \fi
! 3640: \fi\fi\fi\fi
! 3641: }%
! 3642: }
! 3643: \def\Aogonek{{\ecfont \char"81}}\def\macrocharA{A}
! 3644: \def\aogonek{{\ecfont \char"A1}}\def\macrochara{a}
! 3645: \def\Eogonek{{\ecfont \char"86}}\def\macrocharE{E}
! 3646: \def\eogonek{{\ecfont \char"A6}}\def\macrochare{e}
! 3647: %
! 3648: % Use the European Computer Modern fonts (cm-super in outline format)
! 3649: % for non-CM glyphs. That is ec* for regular text and tc* for the text
! 3650: % companion symbols (LaTeX TS1 encoding). Both are part of the ec
! 3651: % package and follow the same conventions.
! 3652: %
! 3653: \def\ecfont{\etcfont{e}}
! 3654: \def\tcfont{\etcfont{t}}
! 3655: %
! 3656: \def\etcfont#1{%
! 3657: % We can't distinguish serif/sans and italic/slanted, but this
! 3658: % is used for crude hacks anyway (like adding French and German
! 3659: % quotes to documents typeset with CM, where we lose kerning), so
! 3660: % hopefully nobody will notice/care.
! 3661: \edef\ecsize{\csname\curfontsize ecsize\endcsname}%
! 3662: \edef\nominalsize{\csname\curfontsize nominalsize\endcsname}%
! 3663: \ifusingtt
! 3664: % typewriter:
! 3665: {\font\thisecfont = #1ctt\ecsize \space at \nominalsize}%
! 3666: % else
! 3667: {\ifx\curfontstyle\bfstylename
! 3668: % bold:
! 3669: \font\thisecfont = #1cb\ifusingit{i}{x}\ecsize \space at \nominalsize
! 3670: \else
! 3671: % regular:
! 3672: \font\thisecfont = #1c\ifusingit{ti}{rm}\ecsize \space at \nominalsize
! 3673: \fi}%
! 3674: \thisecfont
! 3675: }
! 3676:
! 3677: % @registeredsymbol - R in a circle. The font for the R should really
! 3678: % be smaller yet, but lllsize is the best we can do for now.
! 3679: % Adapted from the plain.tex definition of \copyright.
! 3680: %
! 3681: \def\registeredsymbol{%
! 3682: $^{{\ooalign{\hfil\raise.07ex\hbox{\switchtolllsize R}%
! 3683: \hfil\crcr\Orb}}%
! 3684: }$%
! 3685: }
! 3686:
! 3687: % @textdegree - the normal degrees sign.
! 3688: %
! 3689: \def\textdegree{%
! 3690: \ifmmode ^\circ
! 3691: \else {\tcfont \char 176}%
! 3692: \fi}
! 3693:
! 3694: % Laurent Siebenmann reports \Orb undefined with:
! 3695: % Textures 1.7.7 (preloaded format=plain 93.10.14) (68K) 16 APR 2004 02:38
! 3696: % so we'll define it if necessary.
! 3697: %
! 3698: \ifx\Orb\thisisundefined
! 3699: \def\Orb{\mathhexbox20D}
! 3700: \fi
! 3701:
! 3702: % Quotes.
! 3703: \chardef\quoteleft=`\`
! 3704: \chardef\quoteright=`\'
! 3705:
! 3706: % only change font for tt for correct kerning and to avoid using
! 3707: % \ecfont unless necessary.
! 3708: \def\quotedblleft{%
! 3709: \ifusingtt{{\ecfont\char"10}}{{\char"5C}}%
! 3710: }
! 3711:
! 3712: \def\quotedblright{%
! 3713: \ifusingtt{{\ecfont\char"11}}{{\char`\"}}%
! 3714: }
! 3715:
! 3716:
! 3717: \message{page headings,}
! 3718:
! 3719: \newskip\titlepagetopglue \titlepagetopglue = 1.5in
! 3720: \newskip\titlepagebottomglue \titlepagebottomglue = 2pc
! 3721:
! 3722: % First the title page. Must do @settitle before @titlepage.
! 3723: \newif\ifseenauthor
! 3724: \newif\iffinishedtitlepage
! 3725:
! 3726: % @setcontentsaftertitlepage used to do an implicit @contents or
! 3727: % @shortcontents after @end titlepage, but it is now obsolete.
! 3728: \def\setcontentsaftertitlepage{%
! 3729: \errmessage{@setcontentsaftertitlepage has been removed as a Texinfo
! 3730: command; move your @contents command if you want the contents
! 3731: after the title page.}}%
! 3732: \def\setshortcontentsaftertitlepage{%
! 3733: \errmessage{@setshortcontentsaftertitlepage has been removed as a Texinfo
! 3734: command; move your @shortcontents and @contents commands if you
! 3735: want the contents after the title page.}}%
! 3736:
! 3737: \parseargdef\shorttitlepage{%
! 3738: {\headingsoff \begingroup \hbox{}\vskip 1.5in \chaprm \centerline{#1}%
! 3739: \endgroup\page\hbox{}\page}\pageone}
! 3740:
! 3741: \envdef\titlepage{%
! 3742: % Open one extra group, as we want to close it in the middle of \Etitlepage.
! 3743: \begingroup
! 3744: \parindent=0pt \textfonts
! 3745: \headingsoff
! 3746: % Leave some space at the very top of the page.
! 3747: \vglue\titlepagetopglue
! 3748: % No rule at page bottom unless we print one at the top with @title.
! 3749: \finishedtitlepagetrue
! 3750: %
! 3751: % Most title ``pages'' are actually two pages long, with space
! 3752: % at the top of the second. We don't want the ragged left on the second.
! 3753: \let\oldpage = \page
! 3754: \def\page{%
! 3755: \iffinishedtitlepage\else
! 3756: \finishtitlepage
! 3757: \fi
! 3758: \let\page = \oldpage
! 3759: \page
! 3760: \null
! 3761: }%
! 3762: }
! 3763:
! 3764: \def\Etitlepage{%
! 3765: \iffinishedtitlepage\else
! 3766: \finishtitlepage
! 3767: \fi
! 3768: % It is important to do the page break before ending the group,
! 3769: % because the headline and footline are only empty inside the group.
! 3770: % If we use the new definition of \page, we always get a blank page
! 3771: % after the title page, which we certainly don't want.
! 3772: \oldpage
! 3773: \pageone
! 3774: \endgroup
! 3775: %
! 3776: }
! 3777:
! 3778: \def\finishtitlepage{%
! 3779: \vskip4pt \hrule height 2pt width \hsize
! 3780: \vskip\titlepagebottomglue
! 3781: \finishedtitlepagetrue
! 3782: }
! 3783:
! 3784: % Settings used for typesetting titles: no hyphenation, no indentation,
! 3785: % don't worry much about spacing, ragged right. This should be used
! 3786: % inside a \vbox, and fonts need to be set appropriately first. \par should
! 3787: % be specified before the end of the \vbox, since a vbox is a group.
! 3788: %
! 3789: \def\raggedtitlesettings{%
! 3790: \rm
! 3791: \hyphenpenalty=10000
! 3792: \parindent=0pt
! 3793: \tolerance=5000
! 3794: \ptexraggedright
! 3795: }
! 3796:
! 3797: % Macros to be used within @titlepage:
! 3798:
! 3799: \let\subtitlerm=\rmfont
! 3800: \def\subtitlefont{\subtitlerm \normalbaselineskip = 13pt \normalbaselines}
! 3801:
! 3802: \parseargdef\title{%
! 3803: \checkenv\titlepage
! 3804: \vbox{\titlefonts \raggedtitlesettings #1\par}%
! 3805: % print a rule at the page bottom also.
! 3806: \finishedtitlepagefalse
! 3807: \vskip4pt \hrule height 4pt width \hsize \vskip4pt
! 3808: }
! 3809:
! 3810: \parseargdef\subtitle{%
! 3811: \checkenv\titlepage
! 3812: {\subtitlefont \rightline{#1}}%
! 3813: }
! 3814:
! 3815: % @author should come last, but may come many times.
! 3816: % It can also be used inside @quotation.
! 3817: %
! 3818: \parseargdef\author{%
! 3819: \def\temp{\quotation}%
! 3820: \ifx\thisenv\temp
! 3821: \def\quotationauthor{#1}% printed in \Equotation.
! 3822: \else
! 3823: \checkenv\titlepage
! 3824: \ifseenauthor\else \vskip 0pt plus 1filll \seenauthortrue \fi
! 3825: {\secfonts\rm \leftline{#1}}%
! 3826: \fi
! 3827: }
! 3828:
! 3829:
! 3830: % Set up page headings and footings.
! 3831:
! 3832: \let\thispage=\folio
! 3833:
! 3834: \newtoks\evenheadline % headline on even pages
! 3835: \newtoks\oddheadline % headline on odd pages
! 3836: \newtoks\evenchapheadline% headline on even pages with a new chapter
! 3837: \newtoks\oddchapheadline % headline on odd pages with a new chapter
! 3838: \newtoks\evenfootline % footline on even pages
! 3839: \newtoks\oddfootline % footline on odd pages
! 3840:
! 3841: % Now make \makeheadline and \makefootline in Plain TeX use those variables
! 3842: \headline={{\textfonts\rm\frenchspacingsetting
! 3843: \ifchapterpage
! 3844: \ifodd\pageno\the\oddchapheadline\else\the\evenchapheadline\fi
! 3845: \else
! 3846: \ifodd\pageno\the\oddheadline\else\the\evenheadline\fi
! 3847: \fi}}
! 3848:
! 3849: \footline={{\textfonts\rm\frenchspacingsetting
! 3850: \ifodd\pageno \the\oddfootline \else \the\evenfootline \fi}%
! 3851: \HEADINGShook}
! 3852: \let\HEADINGShook=\relax
! 3853:
! 3854: % Commands to set those variables.
! 3855: % For example, this is what @headings on does
! 3856: % @evenheading @thistitle|@thispage|@thischapter
! 3857: % @oddheading @thischapter|@thispage|@thistitle
! 3858: % @evenfooting @thisfile||
! 3859: % @oddfooting ||@thisfile
! 3860:
! 3861:
! 3862: \def\evenheading{\parsearg\evenheadingxxx}
! 3863: \def\evenheadingxxx #1{\evenheadingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish}
! 3864: \def\evenheadingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{%
! 3865: \global\evenheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}
! 3866: \global\evenchapheadline=\evenheadline}
! 3867:
! 3868: \def\oddheading{\parsearg\oddheadingxxx}
! 3869: \def\oddheadingxxx #1{\oddheadingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish}
! 3870: \def\oddheadingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{%
! 3871: \global\oddheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}%
! 3872: \global\oddchapheadline=\oddheadline}
! 3873:
! 3874: \parseargdef\everyheading{\oddheadingxxx{#1}\evenheadingxxx{#1}}%
! 3875:
! 3876: \def\evenfooting{\parsearg\evenfootingxxx}
! 3877: \def\evenfootingxxx #1{\evenfootingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish}
! 3878: \def\evenfootingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{%
! 3879: \global\evenfootline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
! 3880:
! 3881: \def\oddfooting{\parsearg\oddfootingxxx}
! 3882: \def\oddfootingxxx #1{\oddfootingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish}
! 3883: \def\oddfootingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{%
! 3884: \global\oddfootline = {\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}%
! 3885: %
! 3886: % Leave some space for the footline. Hopefully ok to assume
! 3887: % @evenfooting will not be used by itself.
! 3888: \global\advance\txipageheight by -12pt
! 3889: \global\advance\vsize by -12pt
! 3890: }
! 3891:
! 3892: \parseargdef\everyfooting{\oddfootingxxx{#1}\evenfootingxxx{#1}}
! 3893:
! 3894: % @evenheadingmarks top \thischapter <- chapter at the top of a page
! 3895: % @evenheadingmarks bottom \thischapter <- chapter at the bottom of a page
! 3896: %
! 3897: % The same set of arguments for:
! 3898: %
! 3899: % @oddheadingmarks
! 3900: % @evenfootingmarks
! 3901: % @oddfootingmarks
! 3902: % @everyheadingmarks
! 3903: % @everyfootingmarks
! 3904:
! 3905: % These define \getoddheadingmarks, \getevenheadingmarks,
! 3906: % \getoddfootingmarks, and \getevenfootingmarks, each to one of
! 3907: % \gettopheadingmarks, \getbottomheadingmarks.
! 3908: %
! 3909: \def\evenheadingmarks{\headingmarks{even}{heading}}
! 3910: \def\oddheadingmarks{\headingmarks{odd}{heading}}
! 3911: \def\evenfootingmarks{\headingmarks{even}{footing}}
! 3912: \def\oddfootingmarks{\headingmarks{odd}{footing}}
! 3913: \parseargdef\everyheadingmarks{\headingmarks{even}{heading}{#1}
! 3914: \headingmarks{odd}{heading}{#1} }
! 3915: \parseargdef\everyfootingmarks{\headingmarks{even}{footing}{#1}
! 3916: \headingmarks{odd}{footing}{#1} }
! 3917: % #1 = even/odd, #2 = heading/footing, #3 = top/bottom.
! 3918: \def\headingmarks#1#2#3 {%
! 3919: \expandafter\let\expandafter\temp \csname get#3headingmarks\endcsname
! 3920: \global\expandafter\let\csname get#1#2marks\endcsname \temp
! 3921: }
! 3922:
! 3923: \everyheadingmarks bottom
! 3924: \everyfootingmarks bottom
! 3925:
! 3926: % @headings double turns headings on for double-sided printing.
! 3927: % @headings single turns headings on for single-sided printing.
! 3928: % @headings off turns them off.
! 3929: % @headings on same as @headings double, retained for compatibility.
! 3930: % @headings after turns on double-sided headings after this page.
! 3931: % @headings doubleafter turns on double-sided headings after this page.
! 3932: % @headings singleafter turns on single-sided headings after this page.
! 3933: % By default, they are off at the start of a document,
! 3934: % and turned `on' after @end titlepage.
! 3935:
! 3936: \parseargdef\headings{\csname HEADINGS#1\endcsname}
! 3937:
! 3938: \def\headingsoff{% non-global headings elimination
! 3939: \evenheadline={\hfil}\evenfootline={\hfil}\evenchapheadline={\hfil}%
! 3940: \oddheadline={\hfil}\oddfootline={\hfil}\oddchapheadline={\hfil}%
! 3941: }
! 3942:
! 3943: \def\HEADINGSoff{{\globaldefs=1 \headingsoff}} % global setting
! 3944:
! 3945: % Set the page number to 1.
! 3946: \def\pageone{
! 3947: \global\pageno=1
! 3948: \global\arabiccount = \pagecount
! 3949: }
! 3950:
! 3951: \let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
! 3952:
! 3953: % \def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble} % defined by \CHAPPAGon
! 3954:
! 3955: % For double-sided printing, put current file name in lower left corner,
! 3956: % chapter name on inside top of right hand pages, document
! 3957: % title on inside top of left hand pages, and page numbers on outside top
! 3958: % edge of all pages.
! 3959: \def\HEADINGSafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSdouble}
! 3960: \let\HEADINGSdoubleafter=\HEADINGSafter
! 3961: \def\HEADINGSdouble{%
! 3962: \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
! 3963: \global\oddfootline={\hfil}
! 3964: \global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}}
! 3965: \global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
! 3966: \global\evenchapheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}}
! 3967: \global\oddchapheadline={\line{\hfil\folio}}
! 3968: \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
! 3969: }
! 3970:
! 3971: % For single-sided printing, chapter title goes across top left of page,
! 3972: % page number on top right.
! 3973: \def\HEADINGSsingleafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSsingle}
! 3974: \def\HEADINGSsingle{%
! 3975: \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
! 3976: \global\oddfootline={\hfil}
! 3977: \global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
! 3978: \global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
! 3979: \global\evenchapheadline={\line{\hfil\folio}}
! 3980: \global\oddchapheadline={\line{\hfil\folio}}
! 3981: \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
! 3982: }
! 3983:
! 3984: % for @setchapternewpage off
! 3985: \def\HEADINGSsinglechapoff{%
! 3986: \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
! 3987: \global\oddfootline={\hfil}
! 3988: \global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
! 3989: \global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
! 3990: \global\evenchapheadline=\evenheadline
! 3991: \global\oddchapheadline=\oddheadline
! 3992: \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
! 3993: }
! 3994:
! 3995: % Subroutines used in generating headings
! 3996: % This produces Day Month Year style of output.
! 3997: % Only define if not already defined, in case a txi-??.tex file has set
! 3998: % up a different format (e.g., txi-cs.tex does this).
! 3999: \ifx\today\thisisundefined
! 4000: \def\today{%
! 4001: \number\day\space
! 4002: \ifcase\month
! 4003: \or\putwordMJan\or\putwordMFeb\or\putwordMMar\or\putwordMApr
! 4004: \or\putwordMMay\or\putwordMJun\or\putwordMJul\or\putwordMAug
! 4005: \or\putwordMSep\or\putwordMOct\or\putwordMNov\or\putwordMDec
! 4006: \fi
! 4007: \space\number\year}
! 4008: \fi
! 4009:
! 4010: % @settitle line... specifies the title of the document, for headings.
! 4011: % It generates no output of its own.
! 4012: \def\thistitle{\putwordNoTitle}
! 4013: \def\settitle{\parsearg{\gdef\thistitle}}
! 4014:
! 4015:
! 4016: \message{tables,}
! 4017: % Tables -- @table, @ftable, @vtable, @item(x).
! 4018:
! 4019: % default indentation of table text
! 4020: \newdimen\tableindent \tableindent=.8in
! 4021: % default indentation of @itemize and @enumerate text
! 4022: \newdimen\itemindent \itemindent=.3in
! 4023: % margin between end of table item and start of table text.
! 4024: \newdimen\itemmargin \itemmargin=.1in
! 4025:
! 4026: % used internally for \itemindent minus \itemmargin
! 4027: \newdimen\itemmax
! 4028:
! 4029: % Note @table, @ftable, and @vtable define @item, @itemx, etc., with
! 4030: % these defs.
! 4031: % They also define \itemindex
! 4032: % to index the item name in whatever manner is desired (perhaps none).
! 4033:
! 4034: \newif\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip
! 4035:
! 4036: \def\itemxpar{\par\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip\nobreak\vskip-\parskip\nobreak\fi}
! 4037:
! 4038: \def\internalBitem{\smallbreak \parsearg\itemzzz}
! 4039: \def\internalBitemx{\itemxpar \parsearg\itemzzz}
! 4040:
! 4041: \def\itemzzz #1{\begingroup %
! 4042: \advance\hsize by -\rightskip
! 4043: \advance\hsize by -\tableindent
! 4044: \setbox0=\hbox{\itemindicate{#1}}%
! 4045: \itemindex{#1}%
! 4046: \nobreak % This prevents a break before @itemx.
! 4047: %
! 4048: % If the item text does not fit in the space we have, put it on a line
! 4049: % by itself, and do not allow a page break either before or after that
! 4050: % line. We do not start a paragraph here because then if the next
! 4051: % command is, e.g., @kindex, the whatsit would get put into the
! 4052: % horizontal list on a line by itself, resulting in extra blank space.
! 4053: \ifdim \wd0>\itemmax
! 4054: %
! 4055: % Make this a paragraph so we get the \parskip glue and wrapping,
! 4056: % but leave it ragged-right.
! 4057: \begingroup
! 4058: \advance\leftskip by-\tableindent
! 4059: \advance\hsize by\tableindent
! 4060: \advance\rightskip by0pt plus1fil\relax
! 4061: \leavevmode\unhbox0\par
! 4062: \endgroup
! 4063: %
! 4064: % We're going to be starting a paragraph, but we don't want the
! 4065: % \parskip glue -- logically it's part of the @item we just started.
! 4066: \nobreak \vskip-\parskip
! 4067: %
! 4068: % Stop a page break at the \parskip glue coming up. However, if
! 4069: % what follows is an environment such as @example, there will be no
! 4070: % \parskip glue; then the negative vskip we just inserted would
! 4071: % cause the example and the item to crash together. So we use this
! 4072: % bizarre value of 10001 as a signal to \aboveenvbreak to insert
! 4073: % \parskip glue after all. Section titles are handled this way also.
! 4074: %
! 4075: \penalty 10001
! 4076: \endgroup
! 4077: \itemxneedsnegativevskipfalse
! 4078: \else
! 4079: % The item text fits into the space. Start a paragraph, so that the
! 4080: % following text (if any) will end up on the same line.
! 4081: \noindent
! 4082: % Do this with kerns and \unhbox so that if there is a footnote in
! 4083: % the item text, it can migrate to the main vertical list and
! 4084: % eventually be printed.
! 4085: \nobreak\kern-\tableindent
! 4086: \dimen0 = \itemmax \advance\dimen0 by \itemmargin \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0
! 4087: \unhbox0
! 4088: \nobreak\kern\dimen0
! 4089: \endgroup
! 4090: \itemxneedsnegativevskiptrue
! 4091: \fi
! 4092: }
! 4093:
! 4094: \def\item{\errmessage{@item while not in a list environment}}
! 4095: \def\itemx{\errmessage{@itemx while not in a list environment}}
! 4096:
! 4097: % @table, @ftable, @vtable.
! 4098: \envdef\table{%
! 4099: \let\itemindex\gobble
! 4100: \tablecheck{table}%
! 4101: }
! 4102: \envdef\ftable{%
! 4103: \def\itemindex ##1{\doind {fn}{\code{##1}}}%
! 4104: \tablecheck{ftable}%
! 4105: }
! 4106: \envdef\vtable{%
! 4107: \def\itemindex ##1{\doind {vr}{\code{##1}}}%
! 4108: \tablecheck{vtable}%
! 4109: }
! 4110: \def\tablecheck#1{%
! 4111: \ifnum \the\catcode`\^^M=\active
! 4112: \endgroup
! 4113: \errmessage{This command won't work in this context; perhaps the problem is
! 4114: that we are \inenvironment\thisenv}%
! 4115: \def\next{\doignore{#1}}%
! 4116: \else
! 4117: \let\next\tablex
! 4118: \fi
! 4119: \next
! 4120: }
! 4121: \def\tablex#1{%
! 4122: \def\itemindicate{#1}%
! 4123: \parsearg\tabley
! 4124: }
! 4125: \def\tabley#1{%
! 4126: {%
! 4127: \makevalueexpandable
! 4128: \edef\temp{\noexpand\tablez #1\space\space\space}%
! 4129: \expandafter
! 4130: }\temp \endtablez
! 4131: }
! 4132: \def\tablez #1 #2 #3 #4\endtablez{%
! 4133: \aboveenvbreak
! 4134: \ifnum 0#1>0 \advance \leftskip by #1\mil \fi
! 4135: \ifnum 0#2>0 \tableindent=#2\mil \fi
! 4136: \ifnum 0#3>0 \advance \rightskip by #3\mil \fi
! 4137: \itemmax=\tableindent
! 4138: \advance \itemmax by -\itemmargin
! 4139: \advance \leftskip by \tableindent
! 4140: \exdentamount=\tableindent
! 4141: \parindent = 0pt
! 4142: \parskip = \smallskipamount
! 4143: \ifdim \parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi
! 4144: \let\item = \internalBitem
! 4145: \let\itemx = \internalBitemx
! 4146: }
! 4147: \def\Etable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak}
! 4148: \let\Eftable\Etable
! 4149: \let\Evtable\Etable
! 4150: \let\Eitemize\Etable
! 4151: \let\Eenumerate\Etable
! 4152:
! 4153: % This is the counter used by @enumerate, which is really @itemize
! 4154:
! 4155: \newcount \itemno
! 4156:
! 4157: \envdef\itemize{\parsearg\doitemize}
! 4158:
! 4159: \def\doitemize#1{%
! 4160: \aboveenvbreak
! 4161: \itemmax=\itemindent
! 4162: \advance\itemmax by -\itemmargin
! 4163: \advance\leftskip by \itemindent
! 4164: \exdentamount=\itemindent
! 4165: \parindent=0pt
! 4166: \parskip=\smallskipamount
! 4167: \ifdim\parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi
! 4168: %
! 4169: % Try typesetting the item mark so that if the document erroneously says
! 4170: % something like @itemize @samp (intending @table), there's an error
! 4171: % right away at the @itemize. It's not the best error message in the
! 4172: % world, but it's better than leaving it to the @item. This means if
! 4173: % the user wants an empty mark, they have to say @w{} not just @w.
! 4174: \def\itemcontents{#1}%
! 4175: \setbox0 = \hbox{\itemcontents}%
! 4176: %
! 4177: % @itemize with no arg is equivalent to @itemize @bullet.
! 4178: \ifx\itemcontents\empty\def\itemcontents{\bullet}\fi
! 4179: %
! 4180: \let\item=\itemizeitem
! 4181: }
! 4182:
! 4183: % Definition of @item while inside @itemize and @enumerate.
! 4184: %
! 4185: \def\itemizeitem{%
! 4186: \advance\itemno by 1 % for enumerations
! 4187: {\let\par=\endgraf \smallbreak}% reasonable place to break
! 4188: {%
! 4189: % If the document has an @itemize directly after a section title, a
! 4190: % \nobreak will be last on the list, and \sectionheading will have
! 4191: % done a \vskip-\parskip. In that case, we don't want to zero
! 4192: % parskip, or the item text will crash with the heading. On the
! 4193: % other hand, when there is normal text preceding the item (as there
! 4194: % usually is), we do want to zero parskip, or there would be too much
! 4195: % space. In that case, we won't have a \nobreak before. At least
! 4196: % that's the theory.
! 4197: \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 \parskip=0in \fi
! 4198: \noindent
! 4199: \hbox to 0pt{\hss \itemcontents \kern\itemmargin}%
! 4200: %
! 4201: \ifinner\else
! 4202: \vadjust{\penalty 1200}% not good to break after first line of item.
! 4203: \fi
! 4204: % We can be in inner vertical mode in a footnote, although an
! 4205: % @itemize looks awful there.
! 4206: }%
! 4207: \flushcr
! 4208: }
! 4209:
! 4210: % \splitoff TOKENS\endmark defines \first to be the first token in
! 4211: % TOKENS, and \rest to be the remainder.
! 4212: %
! 4213: \def\splitoff#1#2\endmark{\def\first{#1}\def\rest{#2}}%
! 4214:
! 4215: % Allow an optional argument of an uppercase letter, lowercase letter,
! 4216: % or number, to specify the first label in the enumerated list. No
! 4217: % argument is the same as `1'.
! 4218: %
! 4219: \envparseargdef\enumerate{\enumeratey #1 \endenumeratey}
! 4220: \def\enumeratey #1 #2\endenumeratey{%
! 4221: % If we were given no argument, pretend we were given `1'.
! 4222: \def\thearg{#1}%
! 4223: \ifx\thearg\empty \def\thearg{1}\fi
! 4224: %
! 4225: % Detect if the argument is a single token. If so, it might be a
! 4226: % letter. Otherwise, the only valid thing it can be is a number.
! 4227: % (We will always have one token, because of the test we just made.
! 4228: % This is a good thing, since \splitoff doesn't work given nothing at
! 4229: % all -- the first parameter is undelimited.)
! 4230: \expandafter\splitoff\thearg\endmark
! 4231: \ifx\rest\empty
! 4232: % Only one token in the argument. It could still be anything.
! 4233: % A ``lowercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is nonzero.
! 4234: % An ``uppercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is both nonzero, and
! 4235: % not equal to itself.
! 4236: % Otherwise, we assume it's a number.
! 4237: %
! 4238: % We need the \relax at the end of the \ifnum lines to stop TeX from
! 4239: % continuing to look for a <number>.
! 4240: %
! 4241: \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=0\relax
! 4242: \numericenumerate % a number (we hope)
! 4243: \else
! 4244: % It's a letter.
! 4245: \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=\expandafter`\thearg\relax
! 4246: \lowercaseenumerate % lowercase letter
! 4247: \else
! 4248: \uppercaseenumerate % uppercase letter
! 4249: \fi
! 4250: \fi
! 4251: \else
! 4252: % Multiple tokens in the argument. We hope it's a number.
! 4253: \numericenumerate
! 4254: \fi
! 4255: }
! 4256:
! 4257: % An @enumerate whose labels are integers. The starting integer is
! 4258: % given in \thearg.
! 4259: %
! 4260: \def\numericenumerate{%
! 4261: \itemno = \thearg
! 4262: \startenumeration{\the\itemno}%
! 4263: }
! 4264:
! 4265: % The starting (lowercase) letter is in \thearg.
! 4266: \def\lowercaseenumerate{%
! 4267: \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg
! 4268: \startenumeration{%
! 4269: % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet.
! 4270: \ifnum\itemno=0
! 4271: \errmessage{No more lowercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger
! 4272: alphabet}%
! 4273: \fi
! 4274: \char\lccode\itemno
! 4275: }%
! 4276: }
! 4277:
! 4278: % The starting (uppercase) letter is in \thearg.
! 4279: \def\uppercaseenumerate{%
! 4280: \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg
! 4281: \startenumeration{%
! 4282: % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet.
! 4283: \ifnum\itemno=0
! 4284: \errmessage{No more uppercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger
! 4285: alphabet}
! 4286: \fi
! 4287: \char\uccode\itemno
! 4288: }%
! 4289: }
! 4290:
! 4291: % Call \doitemize, adding a period to the first argument and supplying the
! 4292: % common last two arguments. Also subtract one from the initial value in
! 4293: % \itemno, since @item increments \itemno.
! 4294: %
! 4295: \def\startenumeration#1{%
! 4296: \advance\itemno by -1
! 4297: \doitemize{#1.}\flushcr
! 4298: }
! 4299:
! 4300:
! 4301: % @multitable macros
! 4302:
! 4303: % Macros used to set up halign preamble:
! 4304: %
! 4305: \let\endsetuptable\relax
! 4306: \def\xendsetuptable{\endsetuptable}
! 4307: \let\columnfractions\relax
! 4308: \def\xcolumnfractions{\columnfractions}
! 4309: \newif\ifsetpercent
! 4310:
! 4311: % #1 is the @columnfraction, usually a decimal number like .5, but might
! 4312: % be just 1. We just use it, whatever it is.
! 4313: %
! 4314: \def\pickupwholefraction#1 {%
! 4315: \global\advance\colcount by 1
! 4316: \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{#1\hsize}%
! 4317: \setuptable
! 4318: }
! 4319:
! 4320: \newcount\colcount
! 4321: \def\setuptable#1{%
! 4322: \def\firstarg{#1}%
! 4323: \ifx\firstarg\xendsetuptable
! 4324: \let\go = \relax
! 4325: \else
! 4326: \ifx\firstarg\xcolumnfractions
! 4327: \global\setpercenttrue
! 4328: \else
! 4329: \ifsetpercent
! 4330: \let\go\pickupwholefraction
! 4331: \else
! 4332: \global\advance\colcount by 1
! 4333: \setbox0=\hbox{#1\unskip\space}% Add a normal word space as a
! 4334: % separator; typically that is always in the input, anyway.
! 4335: \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{\the\wd0}%
! 4336: \fi
! 4337: \fi
! 4338: \ifx\go\pickupwholefraction
! 4339: % Put the argument back for the \pickupwholefraction call, so
! 4340: % we'll always have a period there to be parsed.
! 4341: \def\go{\pickupwholefraction#1}%
! 4342: \else
! 4343: \let\go = \setuptable
! 4344: \fi%
! 4345: \fi
! 4346: \go
! 4347: }
! 4348:
! 4349: % @headitem starts a heading row, which we typeset in bold. Assignments
! 4350: % have to be global since we are inside the implicit group of an
! 4351: % alignment entry. \everycr below resets \everytab so we don't have to
! 4352: % undo it ourselves.
! 4353: \def\headitemfont{\b}% for people to use in the template row; not changeable
! 4354: \def\headitem{%
! 4355: \crcr % must appear first
! 4356: \gdef\headitemcrhook{\nobreak}% attempt to avoid page break after headings
! 4357: \global\everytab={\bf}% can't use \headitemfont since the parsing differs
! 4358: \the\everytab % for the first item
! 4359: }%
! 4360: %
! 4361: % default for tables with no headings.
! 4362: \let\headitemcrhook=\relax
! 4363: %
! 4364: \def\tab{\checkenv\multitable &\the\everytab}%
! 4365:
! 4366: \newtoks\everytab % insert after every tab.
! 4367: %
! 4368: \envdef\multitable{%
! 4369: \vskip\parskip
! 4370: \startsavinginserts
! 4371: %
! 4372: % @item within a multitable starts a normal row.
! 4373: % We use \def instead of \let so that if one of the multitable entries
! 4374: % contains an @itemize, we don't choke on the \item (seen as \crcr aka
! 4375: % \endtemplate) expanding \doitemize.
! 4376: \def\item{\crcr}%
! 4377: %
! 4378: \tolerance=9500
! 4379: \hbadness=9500
! 4380: \parskip=0pt
! 4381: \parindent=6pt
! 4382: \overfullrule=0pt
! 4383: \global\colcount=0
! 4384: %
! 4385: \everycr = {%
! 4386: \noalign{%
! 4387: \global\everytab={}% Reset from possible headitem.
! 4388: \global\colcount=0 % Reset the column counter.
! 4389: %
! 4390: % Check for saved footnotes, etc.:
! 4391: \checkinserts
! 4392: %
! 4393: % Perhaps a \nobreak, then reset:
! 4394: \headitemcrhook
! 4395: \global\let\headitemcrhook=\relax
! 4396: }%
! 4397: }%
! 4398: %
! 4399: \parsearg\domultitable
! 4400: }
! 4401: \def\domultitable#1{%
! 4402: % To parse everything between @multitable and @item:
! 4403: \setuptable#1 \endsetuptable
! 4404: %
! 4405: % This preamble sets up a generic column definition, which will
! 4406: % be used as many times as user calls for columns.
! 4407: % \vtop will set a single line and will also let text wrap and
! 4408: % continue for many paragraphs if desired.
! 4409: \halign\bgroup &%
! 4410: \global\advance\colcount by 1
! 4411: \strut
! 4412: \vtop{%
! 4413: \advance\hsize by -1\leftskip
! 4414: % Find the correct column width
! 4415: \hsize=\expandafter\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname
! 4416: %
! 4417: \advance\rightskip by -1\rightskip % Zero leaving only any stretch
! 4418: \ifnum\colcount=1
! 4419: \advance\hsize by\leftskip % Add indent of surrounding text
! 4420: \else
! 4421: % In order to keep entries from bumping into each other.
! 4422: \leftskip=12pt
! 4423: \ifsetpercent \else
! 4424: % If a template has been used
! 4425: \advance\hsize by \leftskip
! 4426: \fi
! 4427: \fi
! 4428: \noindent\ignorespaces##\unskip\strut
! 4429: }\cr
! 4430: }
! 4431: \def\Emultitable{%
! 4432: \crcr
! 4433: \egroup % end the \halign
! 4434: \global\setpercentfalse
! 4435: }
! 4436:
! 4437:
! 4438: \message{conditionals,}
! 4439:
! 4440: % @iftex, @ifnotdocbook, @ifnothtml, @ifnotinfo, @ifnotlatex, @ifnotplaintext,
! 4441: % @ifnotxml always succeed. They currently do nothing; we don't
! 4442: % attempt to check whether the conditionals are properly nested. But we
! 4443: % have to remember that they are conditionals, so that @end doesn't
! 4444: % attempt to close an environment group.
! 4445: %
! 4446: \def\makecond#1{%
! 4447: \expandafter\let\csname #1\endcsname = \relax
! 4448: \expandafter\let\csname iscond.#1\endcsname = 1
! 4449: }
! 4450: \makecond{iftex}
! 4451: \makecond{ifnotdocbook}
! 4452: \makecond{ifnothtml}
! 4453: \makecond{ifnotinfo}
! 4454: \makecond{ifnotlatex}
! 4455: \makecond{ifnotplaintext}
! 4456: \makecond{ifnotxml}
! 4457:
! 4458: % Ignore @ignore, @ifhtml, @ifinfo, and the like.
! 4459: %
! 4460: \def\direntry{\doignore{direntry}}
! 4461: \def\documentdescription{\doignore{documentdescription}}
! 4462: \def\docbook{\doignore{docbook}}
! 4463: \def\html{\doignore{html}}
! 4464: \def\ifdocbook{\doignore{ifdocbook}}
! 4465: \def\ifhtml{\doignore{ifhtml}}
! 4466: \def\ifinfo{\doignore{ifinfo}}
! 4467: \def\iflatex{\doignore{iflatex}}
! 4468: \def\ifnottex{\doignore{ifnottex}}
! 4469: \def\ifplaintext{\doignore{ifplaintext}}
! 4470: \def\ifxml{\doignore{ifxml}}
! 4471: \def\ignore{\doignore{ignore}}
! 4472: \def\latex{\doignore{latex}}
! 4473: \def\menu{\doignore{menu}}
! 4474: \def\xml{\doignore{xml}}
! 4475:
! 4476: % Ignore text until a line `@end #1', keeping track of nested conditionals.
! 4477: %
! 4478: % A count to remember the depth of nesting.
! 4479: \newcount\doignorecount
! 4480:
! 4481: \def\doignore#1{\begingroup
! 4482: % Scan in ``verbatim'' mode:
! 4483: \obeylines
! 4484: \catcode`\@ = \other
! 4485: \catcode`\{ = \other
! 4486: \catcode`\} = \other
! 4487: %
! 4488: % Make sure that spaces turn into tokens that match what \doignoretext wants.
! 4489: \spaceisspace
! 4490: %
! 4491: % Count number of #1's that we've seen.
! 4492: \doignorecount = 0
! 4493: %
! 4494: % Swallow text until we reach the matching `@end #1'.
! 4495: \dodoignore{#1}%
! 4496: }
! 4497:
! 4498: { \catcode`_=11 % We want to use \_STOP_ which cannot appear in texinfo source.
! 4499: \obeylines %
! 4500: %
! 4501: \gdef\dodoignore#1{%
! 4502: % #1 contains the command name as a string, e.g., `ifinfo'.
! 4503: %
! 4504: % Define a command to find the next `@end #1'.
! 4505: \long\def\doignoretext##1^^M@end #1{%
! 4506: \doignoretextyyy##1^^M@#1\_STOP_}%
! 4507: %
! 4508: % And this command to find another #1 command, at the beginning of a
! 4509: % line. (Otherwise, we would consider a line `@c @ifset', for
! 4510: % example, to count as an @ifset for nesting.)
! 4511: \long\def\doignoretextyyy##1^^M@#1##2\_STOP_{\doignoreyyy{##2}\_STOP_}%
! 4512: %
! 4513: % And now expand that command.
! 4514: \doignoretext ^^M%
! 4515: }%
! 4516: }
! 4517:
! 4518: \def\doignoreyyy#1{%
! 4519: \def\temp{#1}%
! 4520: \ifx\temp\empty % Nothing found.
! 4521: \let\next\doignoretextzzz
! 4522: \else % Found a nested condition, ...
! 4523: \advance\doignorecount by 1
! 4524: \let\next\doignoretextyyy % ..., look for another.
! 4525: % If we're here, #1 ends with ^^M\ifinfo (for example).
! 4526: \fi
! 4527: \next #1% the token \_STOP_ is present just after this macro.
! 4528: }
! 4529:
! 4530: % We have to swallow the remaining "\_STOP_".
! 4531: %
! 4532: \def\doignoretextzzz#1{%
! 4533: \ifnum\doignorecount = 0 % We have just found the outermost @end.
! 4534: \let\next\enddoignore
! 4535: \else % Still inside a nested condition.
! 4536: \advance\doignorecount by -1
! 4537: \let\next\doignoretext % Look for the next @end.
! 4538: \fi
! 4539: \next
! 4540: }
! 4541:
! 4542: % Finish off ignored text.
! 4543: { \obeylines%
! 4544: % Ignore anything after the last `@end #1'; this matters in verbatim
! 4545: % environments, where otherwise the newline after an ignored conditional
! 4546: % would result in a blank line in the output.
! 4547: \gdef\enddoignore#1^^M{\endgroup\ignorespaces}%
! 4548: }
! 4549:
! 4550:
! 4551: % @set VAR sets the variable VAR to an empty value.
! 4552: % @set VAR REST-OF-LINE sets VAR to the value REST-OF-LINE.
! 4553: %
! 4554: % Since we want to separate VAR from REST-OF-LINE (which might be
! 4555: % empty), we can't just use \parsearg; we have to insert a space of our
! 4556: % own to delimit the rest of the line, and then take it out again if we
! 4557: % didn't need it.
! 4558: % We rely on the fact that \parsearg sets \catcode`\ =10.
! 4559: %
! 4560: \parseargdef\set{\setyyy#1 \endsetyyy}
! 4561: \def\setyyy#1 #2\endsetyyy{%
! 4562: {%
! 4563: \makevalueexpandable
! 4564: \def\temp{#2}%
! 4565: \edef\next{\gdef\makecsname{SET#1}}%
! 4566: \ifx\temp\empty
! 4567: \next{}%
! 4568: \else
! 4569: \setzzz#2\endsetzzz
! 4570: \fi
! 4571: }%
! 4572: }
! 4573: % Remove the trailing space \setxxx inserted.
! 4574: \def\setzzz#1 \endsetzzz{\next{#1}}
! 4575:
! 4576: % @clear VAR clears (i.e., unsets) the variable VAR.
! 4577: %
! 4578: \parseargdef\clear{%
! 4579: {%
! 4580: \makevalueexpandable
! 4581: \global\expandafter\let\csname SET#1\endcsname=\relax
! 4582: }%
! 4583: }
! 4584:
! 4585: % @value{foo} gets the text saved in variable foo.
! 4586: \def\value{\begingroup\makevalueexpandable\valuexxx}
! 4587: \def\valuexxx#1{\expandablevalue{#1}\endgroup}
! 4588: {
! 4589: \catcode`\-=\active \catcode`\_=\active
! 4590: %
! 4591: \gdef\makevalueexpandable{%
! 4592: \let\value = \expandablevalue
! 4593: % We don't want these characters active, ...
! 4594: \catcode`\-=\other \catcode`\_=\other
! 4595: % ..., but we might end up with active ones in the argument if
! 4596: % we're called from @code, as @code{@value{foo-bar_}}, though.
! 4597: % So \let them to their normal equivalents.
! 4598: \let-\normaldash \let_\normalunderscore
! 4599: }
! 4600: }
! 4601:
! 4602: \def\expandablevalue#1{%
! 4603: \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax
! 4604: {[No value for ``#1'']}%
! 4605: \message{Variable `#1', used in @value, is not set.}%
! 4606: \else
! 4607: \csname SET#1\endcsname
! 4608: \fi
! 4609: }
! 4610:
! 4611: % Like \expandablevalue, but completely expandable (the \message in the
! 4612: % definition above operates at the execution level of TeX). Used when
! 4613: % writing to auxiliary files, due to the expansion that \write does.
! 4614: % If flag is undefined, pass through an unexpanded @value command: maybe it
! 4615: % will be set by the time it is read back in.
! 4616: %
! 4617: % NB flag names containing - or _ may not work here.
! 4618: \def\dummyvalue#1{%
! 4619: \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax
! 4620: \string\value{#1}%
! 4621: \else
! 4622: \csname SET#1\endcsname
! 4623: \fi
! 4624: }
! 4625:
! 4626: % Used for @value's in index entries to form the sort key: expand the @value
! 4627: % if possible, otherwise sort late.
! 4628: \def\indexnofontsvalue#1{%
! 4629: \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax
! 4630: ZZZZZZZ%
! 4631: \else
! 4632: \csname SET#1\endcsname
! 4633: \fi
! 4634: }
! 4635:
! 4636: % @ifset VAR ... @end ifset reads the `...' iff VAR has been defined
! 4637: % with @set.
! 4638: %
! 4639: % To get the special treatment we need for `@end ifset,' we call
! 4640: % \makecond and then redefine.
! 4641: %
! 4642: \makecond{ifset}
! 4643: \def\ifset{\parsearg{\doifset{\let\next=\ifsetfail}}}
! 4644: \def\doifset#1#2{%
! 4645: {%
! 4646: \makevalueexpandable
! 4647: \let\next=\empty
! 4648: \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#2\endcsname\relax
! 4649: #1% If not set, redefine \next.
! 4650: \fi
! 4651: \expandafter
! 4652: }\next
! 4653: }
! 4654: \def\ifsetfail{\doignore{ifset}}
! 4655:
! 4656: % @ifclear VAR ... @end executes the `...' iff VAR has never been
! 4657: % defined with @set, or has been undefined with @clear.
! 4658: %
! 4659: % The `\else' inside the `\doifset' parameter is a trick to reuse the
! 4660: % above code: if the variable is not set, do nothing, if it is set,
! 4661: % then redefine \next to \ifclearfail.
! 4662: %
! 4663: \makecond{ifclear}
! 4664: \def\ifclear{\parsearg{\doifset{\else \let\next=\ifclearfail}}}
! 4665: \def\ifclearfail{\doignore{ifclear}}
! 4666:
! 4667: % @ifcommandisdefined CMD ... @end executes the `...' if CMD (written
! 4668: % without the @) is in fact defined. We can only feasibly check at the
! 4669: % TeX level, so something like `mathcode' is going to considered
! 4670: % defined even though it is not a Texinfo command.
! 4671: %
! 4672: \makecond{ifcommanddefined}
! 4673: \def\ifcommanddefined{\parsearg{\doifcmddefined{\let\next=\ifcmddefinedfail}}}
! 4674: %
! 4675: \def\doifcmddefined#1#2{{%
! 4676: \makevalueexpandable
! 4677: \let\next=\empty
! 4678: \expandafter\ifx\csname #2\endcsname\relax
! 4679: #1% If not defined, \let\next as above.
! 4680: \fi
! 4681: \expandafter
! 4682: }\next
! 4683: }
! 4684: \def\ifcmddefinedfail{\doignore{ifcommanddefined}}
! 4685:
! 4686: % @ifcommandnotdefined CMD ... handled similar to @ifclear above.
! 4687: \makecond{ifcommandnotdefined}
! 4688: \def\ifcommandnotdefined{%
! 4689: \parsearg{\doifcmddefined{\else \let\next=\ifcmdnotdefinedfail}}}
! 4690: \def\ifcmdnotdefinedfail{\doignore{ifcommandnotdefined}}
! 4691:
! 4692: % Set the `txicommandconditionals' variable, so documents have a way to
! 4693: % test if the @ifcommand...defined conditionals are available.
! 4694: \set txicommandconditionals
! 4695:
! 4696: % @dircategory CATEGORY -- specify a category of the dir file
! 4697: % which this file should belong to. Ignore this in TeX.
! 4698: \let\dircategory=\comment
! 4699:
! 4700: % @defininfoenclose.
! 4701: \let\definfoenclose=\comment
! 4702:
! 4703:
! 4704: \message{indexing,}
! 4705: % Index generation facilities
! 4706:
! 4707: % Define \newwrite to be identical to plain tex's \newwrite
! 4708: % except not \outer, so it can be used within macros and \if's.
! 4709: \edef\newwrite{\makecsname{ptexnewwrite}}
! 4710:
! 4711: % \newindex {IX} defines an index named IX.
! 4712: % It automatically defines \IXindex such that
! 4713: % \IXindex ...rest of line... puts an entry in the index IX.
! 4714: % It also defines \IXindfile to be the number of the output channel for
! 4715: % the file that accumulates this index. The file's extension is IX.
! 4716: %
! 4717: \def\newindex#1{%
! 4718: \expandafter\chardef\csname#1indfile\endcsname=0
! 4719: \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% % Define @#1index
! 4720: \noexpand\doindex{#1}}
! 4721: }
! 4722:
! 4723: % @defindex foo == \newindex{foo}
! 4724: %
! 4725: \def\defindex{\parsearg\newindex}
! 4726:
! 4727: % Define @defcodeindex, like @defindex except put all entries in @code.
! 4728: %
! 4729: \def\defcodeindex{\parsearg\newcodeindex}
! 4730: %
! 4731: \def\newcodeindex#1{%
! 4732: \expandafter\chardef\csname#1indfile\endcsname=0
! 4733: \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{%
! 4734: \noexpand\docodeindex{#1}}%
! 4735: }
! 4736:
! 4737: % The default indices:
! 4738: \newindex{cp}% concepts,
! 4739: \newcodeindex{fn}% functions,
! 4740: \newcodeindex{vr}% variables,
! 4741: \newcodeindex{tp}% types,
! 4742: \newcodeindex{ky}% keys
! 4743: \newcodeindex{pg}% and programs.
! 4744:
! 4745:
! 4746: % @synindex foo bar makes index foo feed into index bar.
! 4747: % Do this instead of @defindex foo if you don't want it as a separate index.
! 4748: %
! 4749: % @syncodeindex foo bar similar, but put all entries made for index foo
! 4750: % inside @code.
! 4751: %
! 4752: \def\synindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\doindex{#1}{#2}}
! 4753: \def\syncodeindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\docodeindex{#1}{#2}}
! 4754:
! 4755: % #1 is \doindex or \docodeindex, #2 the index getting redefined (foo),
! 4756: % #3 the target index (bar).
! 4757: \def\dosynindex#1#2#3{%
! 4758: \requireopenindexfile{#3}%
! 4759: % redefine \fooindfile:
! 4760: \expandafter\let\expandafter\temp\expandafter=\csname#3indfile\endcsname
! 4761: \expandafter\let\csname#2indfile\endcsname=\temp
! 4762: % redefine \fooindex:
! 4763: \expandafter\xdef\csname#2index\endcsname{\noexpand#1{#3}}%
! 4764: }
! 4765:
! 4766: % Define \doindex, the driver for all index macros.
! 4767: % Argument #1 is generated by the calling \fooindex macro,
! 4768: % and it is the two-letter name of the index.
! 4769:
! 4770: \def\doindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\doindexxxx}
! 4771: \def\doindexxxx #1{\doind{\indexname}{#1}}
! 4772:
! 4773: % like the previous two, but they put @code around the argument.
! 4774: \def\docodeindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\docodeindexxxx}
! 4775: \def\docodeindexxxx #1{\docind{\indexname}{#1}}
! 4776:
! 4777:
! 4778: % \definedummyword defines \#1 as \string\#1\space, thus effectively
! 4779: % preventing its expansion. This is used only for control words,
! 4780: % not control letters, because the \space would be incorrect for
! 4781: % control characters, but is needed to separate the control word
! 4782: % from whatever follows.
! 4783: %
! 4784: % These can be used both for control words that take an argument and
! 4785: % those that do not. If it is followed by {arg} in the input, then
! 4786: % that will dutifully get written to the index (or wherever).
! 4787: %
! 4788: % For control letters, we have \definedummyletter, which omits the
! 4789: % space.
! 4790: %
! 4791: \def\definedummyword #1{\def#1{\string#1\space}}%
! 4792: \def\definedummyletter#1{\def#1{\string#1}}%
! 4793:
! 4794: % Used for the aux, toc and index files to prevent expansion of Texinfo
! 4795: % commands. Most of the commands are controlled through the
! 4796: % \ifdummies conditional.
! 4797: %
! 4798: \def\atdummies{%
! 4799: \dummiestrue
! 4800: %
! 4801: \definedummyletter\@%
! 4802: \definedummyletter\ %
! 4803: \definedummyletter\{%
! 4804: \definedummyletter\}%
! 4805: \definedummyletter\&%
! 4806: %
! 4807: \definedummyletter\_%
! 4808: \definedummyletter\-%
! 4809: %
! 4810: \definedummyword\subentry
! 4811: %
! 4812: % We want to disable all macros so that they are not expanded by \write.
! 4813: \let\commondummyword\definedummyword
! 4814: \macrolist
! 4815: \let\value\dummyvalue
! 4816: %
! 4817: \turnoffactive
! 4818: }
! 4819:
! 4820: \newif\ifdummies
! 4821: \newif\ifindexnofonts
! 4822:
! 4823: \def\commondummyletter#1{%
! 4824: \expandafter\let\csname\string#1:impl\endcsname#1%
! 4825: \edef#1{%
! 4826: \noexpand\ifindexnofonts
! 4827: % empty expansion
! 4828: \noexpand\else
! 4829: \noexpand\ifdummies\string#1%
! 4830: \noexpand\else
! 4831: \noexpand\jumptwofi % dispose of the \fi
! 4832: \expandafter\noexpand\csname\string#1:impl\endcsname
! 4833: \noexpand\fi
! 4834: \noexpand\fi}%
! 4835: }
! 4836:
! 4837: \def\commondummyaccent#1{%
! 4838: \expandafter\let\csname\string#1:impl\endcsname#1%
! 4839: \edef#1{%
! 4840: \noexpand\ifindexnofonts
! 4841: \noexpand\expandafter % dispose of \else ... \fi
! 4842: \noexpand\asis
! 4843: \noexpand\else
! 4844: \noexpand\ifdummies\string#1%
! 4845: \noexpand\else
! 4846: \noexpand\jumptwofi % dispose of the \fi
! 4847: \expandafter\noexpand\csname\string#1:impl\endcsname
! 4848: \noexpand\fi
! 4849: \noexpand\fi}%
! 4850: }
! 4851:
! 4852: % Like \commondummyaccent but add a \space at the end of the dummy expansion
! 4853: % #2 is the expansion used for \indexnofonts. #2 is always followed by
! 4854: % \asis to remove a pair of following braces.
! 4855: \def\commondummyword#1#2{%
! 4856: \expandafter\let\csname\string#1:impl\endcsname#1%
! 4857: \expandafter\def\csname\string#1:ixnf\endcsname{#2\asis}%
! 4858: \edef#1{%
! 4859: \noexpand\ifindexnofonts
! 4860: \noexpand\expandafter % dispose of \else ... \fi
! 4861: \expandafter\noexpand\csname\string#1:ixnf\endcsname
! 4862: \noexpand\else
! 4863: \noexpand\ifdummies\string#1\space
! 4864: \noexpand\else
! 4865: \noexpand\jumptwofi % dispose of the \fi \fi
! 4866: \expandafter\noexpand\csname\string#1:impl\endcsname
! 4867: \noexpand\fi
! 4868: \noexpand\fi}%
! 4869: }
! 4870: \def\jumptwofi#1\fi\fi{\fi\fi#1}
! 4871:
! 4872: % For \atdummies and \indexnofonts. \atdummies sets
! 4873: % \dummiestrue and \indexnofonts sets \indexnofontstrue.
! 4874: \def\definedummies{
! 4875: % @-sign is always an escape character when reading auxiliary files
! 4876: \escapechar = `\@
! 4877: %
! 4878: \commondummyletter\!%
! 4879: \commondummyaccent\"%
! 4880: \commondummyaccent\'%
! 4881: \commondummyletter\*%
! 4882: \commondummyaccent\,%
! 4883: \commondummyletter\.%
! 4884: \commondummyletter\/%
! 4885: \commondummyletter\:%
! 4886: \commondummyaccent\=%
! 4887: \commondummyletter\?%
! 4888: \commondummyaccent\^%
! 4889: \commondummyaccent\`%
! 4890: \commondummyaccent\~%
! 4891: %
! 4892: % Control letters and accents.
! 4893: \commondummyword\u {}%
! 4894: \commondummyword\v {}%
! 4895: \commondummyword\H {}%
! 4896: \commondummyword\dotaccent {}%
! 4897: \commondummyword\ogonek {}%
! 4898: \commondummyword\ringaccent {}%
! 4899: \commondummyword\tieaccent {}%
! 4900: \commondummyword\ubaraccent {}%
! 4901: \commondummyword\udotaccent {}%
! 4902: \commondummyword\dotless {}%
! 4903: %
! 4904: % Texinfo font commands.
! 4905: \commondummyword\b {}%
! 4906: \commondummyword\i {}%
! 4907: \commondummyword\r {}%
! 4908: \commondummyword\sansserif {}%
! 4909: \commondummyword\sc {}%
! 4910: \commondummyword\slanted {}%
! 4911: \commondummyword\t {}%
! 4912: %
! 4913: % Commands that take arguments.
! 4914: \commondummyword\abbr {}%
! 4915: \commondummyword\acronym {}%
! 4916: \commondummyword\anchor {}%
! 4917: \commondummyword\cite {}%
! 4918: \commondummyword\code {}%
! 4919: \commondummyword\command {}%
! 4920: \commondummyword\dfn {}%
! 4921: \commondummyword\dmn {}%
! 4922: \commondummyword\email {}%
! 4923: \commondummyword\emph {}%
! 4924: \commondummyword\env {}%
! 4925: \commondummyword\file {}%
! 4926: \commondummyword\image {}%
! 4927: \commondummyword\indicateurl{}%
! 4928: \commondummyword\inforef {}%
! 4929: \commondummyword\kbd {}%
! 4930: \commondummyword\key {}%
! 4931: \commondummyword\link {}%
! 4932: \commondummyword\math {}%
! 4933: \commondummyword\option {}%
! 4934: \commondummyword\pxref {}%
! 4935: \commondummyword\ref {}%
! 4936: \commondummyword\samp {}%
! 4937: \commondummyword\strong {}%
! 4938: \commondummyword\tie {}%
! 4939: \commondummyword\U {}%
! 4940: \commondummyword\uref {}%
! 4941: \commondummyword\url {}%
! 4942: \commondummyword\var {}%
! 4943: \commondummyword\verb {}%
! 4944: \commondummyword\w {}%
! 4945: \commondummyword\xref {}%
! 4946: %
! 4947: \commondummyword\AA {AA}%
! 4948: \commondummyword\AE {AE}%
! 4949: \commondummyword\DH {DZZ}%
! 4950: \commondummyword\L {L}%
! 4951: \commondummyword\O {O}%
! 4952: \commondummyword\OE {OE}%
! 4953: \commondummyword\TH {TH}%
! 4954: \commondummyword\aa {aa}%
! 4955: \commondummyword\ae {ae}%
! 4956: \commondummyword\dh {dzz}%
! 4957: \commondummyword\exclamdown {!}%
! 4958: \commondummyword\l {l}%
! 4959: \commondummyword\o {o}%
! 4960: \commondummyword\oe {oe}%
! 4961: \commondummyword\ordf {a}%
! 4962: \commondummyword\ordm {o}%
! 4963: \commondummyword\questiondown {?}%
! 4964: \commondummyword\ss {ss}%
! 4965: \commondummyword\th {th}%
! 4966: %
! 4967: \commondummyword\LaTeX {LaTeX}%
! 4968: \commondummyword\TeX {TeX}%
! 4969: %
! 4970: % Assorted special characters.
! 4971: \commondummyword\ampchar {\normalamp}%
! 4972: \commondummyword\atchar {\@}%
! 4973: \commondummyword\arrow {->}%
! 4974: \commondummyword\backslashchar {\realbackslash}%
! 4975: \commondummyword\bullet {bullet}%
! 4976: \commondummyword\comma {,}%
! 4977: \commondummyword\copyright {copyright}%
! 4978: \commondummyword\dots {...}%
! 4979: \commondummyword\enddots {...}%
! 4980: \commondummyword\entrybreak {}%
! 4981: \commondummyword\equiv {===}%
! 4982: \commondummyword\error {error}%
! 4983: \commondummyword\euro {euro}%
! 4984: \commondummyword\expansion {==>}%
! 4985: \commondummyword\geq {>=}%
! 4986: \commondummyword\guillemetleft {<<}%
! 4987: \commondummyword\guillemetright {>>}%
! 4988: \commondummyword\guilsinglleft {<}%
! 4989: \commondummyword\guilsinglright {>}%
! 4990: \commondummyword\lbracechar {\{}%
! 4991: \commondummyword\leq {<=}%
! 4992: \commondummyword\mathopsup {sup}%
! 4993: \commondummyword\minus {-}%
! 4994: \commondummyword\pounds {pounds}%
! 4995: \commondummyword\point {.}%
! 4996: \commondummyword\print {-|}%
! 4997: \commondummyword\quotedblbase {"}%
! 4998: \commondummyword\quotedblleft {"}%
! 4999: \commondummyword\quotedblright {"}%
! 5000: \commondummyword\quoteleft {`}%
! 5001: \commondummyword\quoteright {'}%
! 5002: \commondummyword\quotesinglbase {,}%
! 5003: \commondummyword\rbracechar {\}}%
! 5004: \commondummyword\registeredsymbol {R}%
! 5005: \commondummyword\result {=>}%
! 5006: \commondummyword\sub {}%
! 5007: \commondummyword\sup {}%
! 5008: \commondummyword\textdegree {o}%
! 5009: }
! 5010:
! 5011: \let\indexlbrace\relax
! 5012: \let\indexrbrace\relax
! 5013: \let\indexatchar\relax
! 5014: \let\indexbackslash\relax
! 5015:
! 5016: {\catcode`\@=0
! 5017: \catcode`\\=13
! 5018: @gdef@backslashdisappear{@def\{}}
! 5019: }
! 5020:
! 5021: {
! 5022: \catcode`\<=13
! 5023: \catcode`\-=13
! 5024: \catcode`\`=13
! 5025: \gdef\indexnonalnumdisappear{%
! 5026: \ifflagclear{txiindexlquoteignore}{}{%
! 5027: % @set txiindexlquoteignore makes us ignore left quotes in the sort term.
! 5028: % (Introduced for FSFS 2nd ed.)
! 5029: \let`=\empty
! 5030: }%
! 5031: %
! 5032: \ifflagclear{txiindexbackslashignore}{}{%
! 5033: \backslashdisappear
! 5034: }%
! 5035: \ifflagclear{txiindexhyphenignore}{}{%
! 5036: \def-{}%
! 5037: }%
! 5038: \ifflagclear{txiindexlessthanignore}{}{%
! 5039: \def<{}%
! 5040: }%
! 5041: \ifflagclear{txiindexatsignignore}{}{%
! 5042: \def\@{}%
! 5043: }%
! 5044: }
! 5045:
! 5046: \gdef\indexnonalnumreappear{%
! 5047: \let-\normaldash
! 5048: \let<\normalless
! 5049: }
! 5050: }
! 5051:
! 5052:
! 5053: % \indexnofonts is used when outputting the strings to sort the index
! 5054: % by, and when constructing control sequence names. It eliminates all
! 5055: % control sequences and just writes whatever the best ASCII sort string
! 5056: % would be for a given command (usually its argument).
! 5057: %
! 5058: \def\indexnofonts{%
! 5059: \indexnofontstrue
! 5060: %
! 5061: \def\ { }%
! 5062: \def\@{@}%
! 5063: \def\_{\normalunderscore}%
! 5064: \def\-{}% @- shouldn't affect sorting
! 5065: %
! 5066: \uccode`\1=`\{ \uppercase{\def\{{1}}%
! 5067: \uccode`\1=`\} \uppercase{\def\}{1}}%
! 5068: \let\lbracechar\{%
! 5069: \let\rbracechar\}%
! 5070: %
! 5071: %
! 5072: % We need to get rid of all macros, leaving only the arguments (if present).
! 5073: % Of course this is not nearly correct, but it is the best we can do for now.
! 5074: %
! 5075: % Since macro invocations are followed by braces, we can just redefine them
! 5076: % to take a single TeX argument. The case of a macro invocation that
! 5077: % goes to end-of-line is not handled.
! 5078: %
! 5079: \def\commondummyword##1{\let##1\asis}%
! 5080: \macrolist
! 5081: \let\value\indexnofontsvalue
! 5082: }
! 5083:
! 5084:
! 5085:
! 5086:
! 5087: % #1 is the index name, #2 is the entry text.
! 5088: \def\doind#1#2{%
! 5089: \iflinks
! 5090: {%
! 5091: %
! 5092: \requireopenindexfile{#1}%
! 5093: \edef\writeto{\csname#1indfile\endcsname}%
! 5094: %
! 5095: \def\indextext{#2}%
! 5096: \safewhatsit\doindwrite
! 5097: }%
! 5098: \fi
! 5099: }
! 5100:
! 5101: % Same as \doind, but for code indices
! 5102: \def\docind#1#2{%
! 5103: \iflinks
! 5104: {%
! 5105: %
! 5106: \requireopenindexfile{#1}%
! 5107: \edef\writeto{\csname#1indfile\endcsname}%
! 5108: %
! 5109: \def\indextext{#2}%
! 5110: \safewhatsit\docindwrite
! 5111: }%
! 5112: \fi
! 5113: }
! 5114:
! 5115: % Check if an index file has been opened, and if not, open it.
! 5116: \def\requireopenindexfile#1{%
! 5117: \ifnum\csname #1indfile\endcsname=0
! 5118: \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname
! 5119: \edef\suffix{#1}%
! 5120: % A .fls suffix would conflict with the file extension for the output
! 5121: % of -recorder, so use .f1s instead.
! 5122: \ifx\suffix\indexisfl\def\suffix{f1}\fi
! 5123: % Open the file
! 5124: \immediate\openout\csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.\suffix
! 5125: % Using \immediate above here prevents an object entering into the current
! 5126: % box, which could confound checks such as those in \safewhatsit for
! 5127: % preceding skips.
! 5128: \typeout{Writing index file \jobname.\suffix}%
! 5129: \fi}
! 5130: \def\indexisfl{fl}
! 5131:
! 5132: % Definition for writing index entry sort key.
! 5133: {
! 5134: \catcode`\-=13
! 5135: \gdef\indexwritesortas{%
! 5136: \begingroup
! 5137: \indexnonalnumreappear
! 5138: \indexwritesortasxxx}
! 5139: \gdef\indexwritesortasxxx#1{%
! 5140: \xdef\indexsortkey{#1}\endgroup}
! 5141: }
! 5142:
! 5143: \def\indexwriteseealso#1{
! 5144: \gdef\pagenumbertext{\string\seealso{#1}}%
! 5145: }
! 5146: \def\indexwriteseeentry#1{
! 5147: \gdef\pagenumbertext{\string\seeentry{#1}}%
! 5148: }
! 5149:
! 5150: % The default definitions
! 5151: \def\sortas#1{}%
! 5152: \def\seealso#1{\i{\putwordSeeAlso}\ #1}% for sorted index file only
! 5153: \def\putwordSeeAlso{See also}
! 5154: \def\seeentry#1{\i{\putwordSee}\ #1}% for sorted index file only
! 5155:
! 5156:
! 5157: % Given index entry text like "aaa @subentry bbb @sortas{ZZZ}":
! 5158: % * Set \bracedtext to "{aaa}{bbb}"
! 5159: % * Set \fullindexsortkey to "aaa @subentry ZZZ"
! 5160: % * If @seealso occurs, set \pagenumbertext
! 5161: %
! 5162: \def\splitindexentry#1{%
! 5163: \gdef\fullindexsortkey{}%
! 5164: \xdef\bracedtext{}%
! 5165: \def\sep{}%
! 5166: \def\seealso##1{}%
! 5167: \def\seeentry##1{}%
! 5168: \expandafter\doindexsegment#1\subentry\finish\subentry
! 5169: }
! 5170:
! 5171: % append the results from the next segment
! 5172: \def\doindexsegment#1\subentry{%
! 5173: \def\segment{#1}%
! 5174: \ifx\segment\isfinish
! 5175: \else
! 5176: %
! 5177: % Fully expand the segment, throwing away any @sortas directives, and
! 5178: % trim spaces.
! 5179: \edef\trimmed{\segment}%
! 5180: \edef\trimmed{\expandafter\eatspaces\expandafter{\trimmed}}%
! 5181: \ifincodeindex
! 5182: \edef\trimmed{\noexpand\code{\trimmed}}%
! 5183: \fi
! 5184: %
! 5185: \xdef\bracedtext{\bracedtext{\trimmed}}%
! 5186: %
! 5187: % Get the string to sort by. Process the segment with all
! 5188: % font commands turned off.
! 5189: \bgroup
! 5190: \let\sortas\indexwritesortas
! 5191: \let\seealso\indexwriteseealso
! 5192: \let\seeentry\indexwriteseeentry
! 5193: \indexnofonts
! 5194: % The braces around the commands are recognized by texindex.
! 5195: \def\lbracechar{{\string\indexlbrace}}%
! 5196: \def\rbracechar{{\string\indexrbrace}}%
! 5197: \let\{=\lbracechar
! 5198: \let\}=\rbracechar
! 5199: \def\@{{\string\indexatchar}}%
! 5200: \def\atchar##1{\@}%
! 5201: \def\backslashchar{{\string\indexbackslash}}%
! 5202: \uccode`\~=`\\ \uppercase{\let~\backslashchar}%
! 5203: %
! 5204: \let\indexsortkey\empty
! 5205: \global\let\pagenumbertext\empty
! 5206: % Execute the segment and throw away the typeset output. This executes
! 5207: % any @sortas or @seealso commands in this segment.
! 5208: \setbox\dummybox = \hbox{\segment}%
! 5209: \ifx\indexsortkey\empty{%
! 5210: \indexnonalnumdisappear
! 5211: \xdef\trimmed{\segment}%
! 5212: \xdef\trimmed{\expandafter\eatspaces\expandafter{\trimmed}}%
! 5213: \xdef\indexsortkey{\trimmed}%
! 5214: \ifx\indexsortkey\empty
! 5215: \message{Empty index sort key near line \the\inputlineno}%
! 5216: \xdef\indexsortkey{ }%
! 5217: \fi
! 5218: }\fi
! 5219: %
! 5220: % Append to \fullindexsortkey.
! 5221: \edef\tmp{\gdef\noexpand\fullindexsortkey{%
! 5222: \fullindexsortkey\sep\indexsortkey}}%
! 5223: \tmp
! 5224: \egroup
! 5225: \def\sep{\subentry}%
! 5226: %
! 5227: \expandafter\doindexsegment
! 5228: \fi
! 5229: }
! 5230: \def\isfinish{\finish}%
! 5231: \newbox\dummybox % used above
! 5232:
! 5233: \let\subentry\relax
! 5234:
! 5235: % Use \ instead of @ in index files. To support old texi2dvi and texindex.
! 5236: % This works without changing the escape character used in the toc or aux
! 5237: % files because the index entries are fully expanded here, and \string uses
! 5238: % the current value of \escapechar.
! 5239: \def\escapeisbackslash{\escapechar=`\\}
! 5240:
! 5241: % Uncomment to use \ in index files by default. Old texi2dvi (before 2019)
! 5242: % didn't support @ as the escape character (as it checked for "\entry" in
! 5243: % the files, and not "@entry").
! 5244: % In the future we can remove this flag and simplify the code for
! 5245: % index files and backslashes, once the support is no longer likely to be
! 5246: % useful.
! 5247: %
! 5248: % \set txiindexescapeisbackslash
! 5249:
! 5250: % Write the entry in \indextext to the index file.
! 5251: %
! 5252:
! 5253: \newif\ifincodeindex
! 5254: \def\doindwrite{\incodeindexfalse\doindwritex}
! 5255: \def\docindwrite{\incodeindextrue\doindwritex}
! 5256:
! 5257: \def\doindwritex{%
! 5258: \maybemarginindex
! 5259: %
! 5260: \atdummies
! 5261: %
! 5262: \ifflagclear{txiindexescapeisbackslash}{}{\escapeisbackslash}%
! 5263: %
! 5264: % For texindex which always views { and } as separators.
! 5265: \def\{{\lbracechar{}}%
! 5266: \def\}{\rbracechar{}}%
! 5267: \uccode`\~=`\\ \uppercase{\def~{\backslashchar{}}}%
! 5268: %
! 5269: % Split the entry into primary entry and any subentries, and get the index
! 5270: % sort key.
! 5271: \splitindexentry\indextext
! 5272: %
! 5273: % Set up the complete index entry, with both the sort key and
! 5274: % the original text, including any font commands. We write
! 5275: % three arguments to \entry to the .?? file (four in the
! 5276: % subentry case), texindex reduces to two when writing the .??s
! 5277: % sorted result.
! 5278: %
! 5279: \edef\temp{%
! 5280: \write\writeto{%
! 5281: \string\entry{\fullindexsortkey}%
! 5282: {\ifx\pagenumbertext\empty\noexpand\folio\else\pagenumbertext\fi}%
! 5283: \bracedtext}%
! 5284: }%
! 5285: \temp
! 5286: }
! 5287:
! 5288: % Put the index entry in the margin if desired (undocumented).
! 5289: \def\maybemarginindex{%
! 5290: \ifx\SETmarginindex\relax\else
! 5291: \insert\margin{\hbox{\vrule height8pt depth3pt width0pt \relax\indextext}}%
! 5292: \fi
! 5293: }
! 5294: \let\SETmarginindex=\relax
! 5295:
! 5296:
! 5297: % Take care of unwanted page breaks/skips around a whatsit:
! 5298: %
! 5299: % If a skip is the last thing on the list now, preserve it
! 5300: % by backing up by \lastskip, doing the \write, then inserting
! 5301: % the skip again. Otherwise, the whatsit generated by the
! 5302: % \write or \pdfdest will make \lastskip zero. The result is that
! 5303: % sequences like this:
! 5304: % @end defun
! 5305: % @tindex whatever
! 5306: % @defun ...
! 5307: % will have extra space inserted, because the \medbreak in the
! 5308: % start of the @defun won't see the skip inserted by the @end of
! 5309: % the previous defun.
! 5310: %
! 5311: % But don't do any of this if we're not in vertical mode. We
! 5312: % don't want to do a \vskip and prematurely end a paragraph.
! 5313: %
! 5314: % Avoid page breaks due to these extra skips, too.
! 5315: %
! 5316: % But wait, there is a catch there:
! 5317: % We'll have to check whether \lastskip is zero skip. \ifdim is not
! 5318: % sufficient for this purpose, as it ignores stretch and shrink parts
! 5319: % of the skip. The only way seems to be to check the textual
! 5320: % representation of the skip.
! 5321: %
! 5322: % The following is almost like \def\zeroskipmacro{0.0pt} except that
! 5323: % the ``p'' and ``t'' characters have catcode \other, not 11 (letter).
! 5324: %
! 5325: \edef\zeroskipmacro{\expandafter\the\csname z@skip\endcsname}
! 5326: %
! 5327: \newskip\whatsitskip
! 5328: \newcount\whatsitpenalty
! 5329: %
! 5330: % ..., ready, GO:
! 5331: %
! 5332: \def\safewhatsit#1{\ifhmode
! 5333: #1%
! 5334: \else
! 5335: % \lastskip and \lastpenalty cannot both be nonzero simultaneously.
! 5336: \whatsitskip = \lastskip
! 5337: \edef\lastskipmacro{\the\lastskip}%
! 5338: \whatsitpenalty = \lastpenalty
! 5339: %
! 5340: % If \lastskip is nonzero, that means the last item was a
! 5341: % skip. And since a skip is discardable, that means this
! 5342: % -\whatsitskip glue we're inserting is preceded by a
! 5343: % non-discardable item, therefore it is not a potential
! 5344: % breakpoint, therefore no \nobreak needed.
! 5345: \ifx\lastskipmacro\zeroskipmacro
! 5346: \else
! 5347: \vskip-\whatsitskip
! 5348: \fi
! 5349: %
! 5350: #1%
! 5351: %
! 5352: \ifx\lastskipmacro\zeroskipmacro
! 5353: % If \lastskip was zero, perhaps the last item was a penalty, and
! 5354: % perhaps it was >=10000, e.g., a \nobreak. In that case, we want
! 5355: % to re-insert the same penalty (values >10000 are used for various
! 5356: % signals); since we just inserted a non-discardable item, any
! 5357: % following glue (such as a \parskip) would be a breakpoint. For example:
! 5358: % @deffn deffn-whatever
! 5359: % @vindex index-whatever
! 5360: % Description.
! 5361: % would allow a break between the index-whatever whatsit
! 5362: % and the "Description." paragraph.
! 5363: \ifnum\whatsitpenalty>9999 \penalty\whatsitpenalty \fi
! 5364: \else
! 5365: % On the other hand, if we had a nonzero \lastskip,
! 5366: % this make-up glue would be preceded by a non-discardable item
! 5367: % (the whatsit from the \write), so we must insert a \nobreak.
! 5368: \nobreak\vskip\whatsitskip
! 5369: \fi
! 5370: \fi}
! 5371:
! 5372: % The index entry written in the file actually looks like
! 5373: % \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}
! 5374: % or
! 5375: % \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}{subtopic}
! 5376: % The texindex program reads in these files and writes files
! 5377: % containing these kinds of lines:
! 5378: % \initial {c}
! 5379: % before the first topic whose initial is c
! 5380: % \entry {topic}{pagelist}
! 5381: % for a topic that is used without subtopics
! 5382: % \primary {topic}
! 5383: % \entry {topic}{}
! 5384: % for the beginning of a topic that is used with subtopics
! 5385: % \secondary {subtopic}{pagelist}
! 5386: % for each subtopic.
! 5387: % \secondary {subtopic}{}
! 5388: % for a subtopic with sub-subtopics
! 5389: % \tertiary {subtopic}{subsubtopic}{pagelist}
! 5390: % for each sub-subtopic.
! 5391:
! 5392: % Define the user-accessible indexing commands
! 5393: % @findex, @vindex, @kindex, @cindex.
! 5394:
! 5395: \def\findex {\fnindex}
! 5396: \def\kindex {\kyindex}
! 5397: \def\cindex {\cpindex}
! 5398: \def\vindex {\vrindex}
! 5399: \def\tindex {\tpindex}
! 5400: \def\pindex {\pgindex}
! 5401:
! 5402: % Define the macros used in formatting output of the sorted index material.
! 5403:
! 5404: % @printindex causes a particular index (the ??s file) to get printed.
! 5405: % It does not print any chapter heading (usually an @unnumbered).
! 5406: %
! 5407: \parseargdef\printindex{\begingroup
! 5408: \dobreak \chapheadingskip{10000}%
! 5409: %
! 5410: \smallfonts \rm
! 5411: \tolerance = 9500
! 5412: \plainfrenchspacing
! 5413: \everypar = {}% don't want the \kern\-parindent from indentation suppression.
! 5414: %
! 5415: % See comment in \requireopenindexfile.
! 5416: \def\indexname{#1}\ifx\indexname\indexisfl\def\indexname{f1}\fi
! 5417: %
! 5418: % See if the index file exists and is nonempty.
! 5419: \openin 1 \jobname.\indexname s
! 5420: \ifeof 1
! 5421: % \enddoublecolumns gets confused if there is no text in the index,
! 5422: % and it loses the chapter title and the aux file entries for the
! 5423: % index. The easiest way to prevent this problem is to make sure
! 5424: % there is some text.
! 5425: \putwordIndexNonexistent
! 5426: \typeout{No file \jobname.\indexname s.}%
! 5427: \else
! 5428: % If the index file exists but is empty, then \openin leaves \ifeof
! 5429: % false. We have to make TeX try to read something from the file, so
! 5430: % it can discover if there is anything in it.
! 5431: \read 1 to \thisline
! 5432: \ifeof 1
! 5433: \putwordIndexIsEmpty
! 5434: \else
! 5435: \expandafter\printindexzz\thisline\relax\relax\finish%
! 5436: \fi
! 5437: \fi
! 5438: \closein 1
! 5439: \endgroup}
! 5440:
! 5441: % If the index file starts with a backslash, forgo reading the index
! 5442: % file altogether. If somebody upgrades texinfo.tex they may still have
! 5443: % old index files using \ as the escape character. Reading this would
! 5444: % at best lead to typesetting garbage, at worst a TeX syntax error.
! 5445: \def\printindexzz#1#2\finish{%
! 5446: \ifflagclear{txiindexescapeisbackslash}{%
! 5447: \uccode`\~=`\\ \uppercase{\if\noexpand~}\noexpand#1
! 5448: \ifflagclear{txiskipindexfileswithbackslash}{%
! 5449: \errmessage{%
! 5450: ERROR: A sorted index file in an obsolete format was skipped.
! 5451: To fix this problem, please upgrade your version of 'texi2dvi'
! 5452: or 'texi2pdf' to that at <https://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/texinfo>.
! 5453: If you are using an old version of 'texindex' (part of the Texinfo
! 5454: distribution), you may also need to upgrade to a newer version (at least 6.0).
! 5455: You may be able to typeset the index if you run
! 5456: 'texindex \jobname.\indexname' yourself.
! 5457: You could also try setting the 'txiindexescapeisbackslash' flag by
! 5458: running a command like
! 5459: 'texi2dvi -t "@set txiindexescapeisbackslash" \jobname.texi'. If you do
! 5460: this, Texinfo will try to use index files in the old format.
! 5461: If you continue to have problems, deleting the index files and starting again
! 5462: might help (with 'rm \jobname.?? \jobname.??s')%
! 5463: }%
! 5464: }{%
! 5465: (Skipped sorted index file in obsolete format)
! 5466: }%
! 5467: \else
! 5468: \begindoublecolumns
! 5469: \input \jobname.\indexname s
! 5470: \enddoublecolumns
! 5471: \fi
! 5472: }{%
! 5473: \begindoublecolumns
! 5474: \catcode`\\=0\relax
! 5475: %
! 5476: % Make @ an escape character to give macros a chance to work. This
! 5477: % should work because we (hopefully) don't otherwise use @ in index files.
! 5478: %\catcode`\@=12\relax
! 5479: \catcode`\@=0\relax
! 5480: \input \jobname.\indexname s
! 5481: \enddoublecolumns
! 5482: }%
! 5483: }
! 5484:
! 5485: % These macros are used by the sorted index file itself.
! 5486: % Change them to control the appearance of the index.
! 5487:
! 5488: {\catcode`\/=13 \catcode`\-=13 \catcode`\^=13 \catcode`\~=13 \catcode`\_=13
! 5489: \catcode`\|=13 \catcode`\<=13 \catcode`\>=13 \catcode`\+=13 \catcode`\"=13
! 5490: \catcode`\$=3
! 5491: \gdef\initialglyphs{%
! 5492: % special control sequences used in the index sort key
! 5493: \let\indexlbrace\{%
! 5494: \let\indexrbrace\}%
! 5495: \let\indexatchar\@%
! 5496: \def\indexbackslash{\math{\backslash}}%
! 5497: %
! 5498: % Some changes for non-alphabetic characters. Using the glyphs from the
! 5499: % math fonts looks more consistent than the typewriter font used elsewhere
! 5500: % for these characters.
! 5501: \uccode`\~=`\\ \uppercase{\def~{\math{\backslash}}}
! 5502: %
! 5503: % In case @\ is used for backslash
! 5504: \uppercase{\let\\=~}
! 5505: % Can't get bold backslash so don't use bold forward slash
! 5506: \catcode`\/=13
! 5507: \def/{{\secrmnotbold \normalslash}}%
! 5508: \def-{{\normaldash\normaldash}}% en dash `--'
! 5509: \def^{{\chapbf \normalcaret}}%
! 5510: \def~{{\chapbf \normaltilde}}%
! 5511: \def\_{%
! 5512: \leavevmode \kern.07em \vbox{\hrule width.3em height.1ex}\kern .07em }%
! 5513: \def|{$\vert$}%
! 5514: \def<{$\less$}%
! 5515: \def>{$\gtr$}%
! 5516: \def+{$\normalplus$}%
! 5517: }}
! 5518:
! 5519: \def\initial{%
! 5520: \bgroup
! 5521: \initialglyphs
! 5522: \initialx
! 5523: }
! 5524:
! 5525: \def\initialx#1{%
! 5526: % Remove any glue we may have, we'll be inserting our own.
! 5527: \removelastskip
! 5528: %
! 5529: % We like breaks before the index initials, so insert a bonus.
! 5530: % The glue before the bonus allows a little bit of space at the
! 5531: % bottom of a column to reduce an increase in inter-line spacing.
! 5532: \nobreak
! 5533: \vskip 0pt plus 5\baselineskip
! 5534: \penalty -300
! 5535: \vskip 0pt plus -5\baselineskip
! 5536: %
! 5537: % Typeset the initial. Making this add up to a whole number of
! 5538: % baselineskips increases the chance of the dots lining up from column
! 5539: % to column. It still won't often be perfect, because of the stretch
! 5540: % we need before each entry, but it's better.
! 5541: %
! 5542: % No shrink because it confuses \balancecolumns.
! 5543: \vskip 1.67\baselineskip plus 1\baselineskip
! 5544: \leftline{\secfonts \kern-0.05em \secbf #1}%
! 5545: % \secfonts is inside the argument of \leftline so that the change of
! 5546: % \baselineskip will not affect any glue inserted before the vbox that
! 5547: % \leftline creates.
! 5548: % Do our best not to break after the initial.
! 5549: \nobreak
! 5550: \vskip .33\baselineskip plus .1\baselineskip
! 5551: \egroup % \initialglyphs
! 5552: }
! 5553:
! 5554: \newdimen\entryrightmargin
! 5555: \entryrightmargin=0pt
! 5556:
! 5557: % amount to indent subsequent lines in an entry when it spans more than
! 5558: % one line.
! 5559: \newdimen\entrycontskip
! 5560: \entrycontskip=1em
! 5561:
! 5562: % for PDF output, whether to make the text of the entry a link to the page
! 5563: % number. set for @contents and @shortcontents where there is only one
! 5564: % page number.
! 5565: \newif\iflinkentrytext
! 5566:
! 5567: % \entry typesets a paragraph consisting of the text (#1), dot leaders, and
! 5568: % then page number (#2) flushed to the right margin. It is used for index
! 5569: % and table of contents entries. The paragraph is indented by \leftskip.
! 5570: %
! 5571: \def\entry{%
! 5572: \begingroup
! 5573: %
! 5574: % Start a new paragraph if necessary, so our assignments below can't
! 5575: % affect previous text.
! 5576: \par
! 5577: %
! 5578: % No extra space above this paragraph.
! 5579: \parskip = 0in
! 5580: %
! 5581: % When reading the text of entry, convert explicit line breaks
! 5582: % from @* into spaces. The user might give these in long section
! 5583: % titles, for instance.
! 5584: \def\*{\unskip\space\ignorespaces}%
! 5585: \def\entrybreak{\hfil\break}% An undocumented command
! 5586: %
! 5587: % Swallow the left brace of the text (first parameter):
! 5588: \afterassignment\doentry
! 5589: \let\temp =
! 5590: }
! 5591: \def\entrybreak{\unskip\space\ignorespaces}%
! 5592: \def\doentry{%
! 5593: % Save the text of the entry in \boxA
! 5594: \global\setbox\boxA=\hbox\bgroup
! 5595: \bgroup % Instead of the swallowed brace.
! 5596: \noindent
! 5597: \aftergroup\finishentry
! 5598: % And now comes the text of the entry.
! 5599: % Not absorbing as a macro argument reduces the chance of problems
! 5600: % with catcodes occurring.
! 5601: }
! 5602: {\catcode`\@=11
! 5603: % #1 is the page number
! 5604: \gdef\finishentry#1{%
! 5605: \egroup % end \boxA
! 5606: \dimen@ = \wd\boxA % Length of text of entry
! 5607: % add any leaders and page number to \boxA.
! 5608: \global\setbox\boxA=\hbox\bgroup
! 5609: \ifpdforxetex
! 5610: \iflinkentrytext
! 5611: \pdflinkpage{#1}{\unhbox\boxA}%
! 5612: \else
! 5613: \unhbox\boxA
! 5614: \fi
! 5615: \else
! 5616: \unhbox\boxA
! 5617: \fi
! 5618: %
! 5619: % Get the width of the page numbers, and only use
! 5620: % leaders if they are present.
! 5621: \global\setbox\boxB = \hbox{#1}%
! 5622: \ifdim\wd\boxB = 0pt
! 5623: \null\nobreak\hfill\ %
! 5624: \else
! 5625: %
! 5626: \null\nobreak\indexdotfill % Have leaders before the page number.
! 5627: %
! 5628: \ifpdforxetex
! 5629: \pdfgettoks#1.%
! 5630: \hskip\skip\thinshrinkable\the\toksA
! 5631: \else
! 5632: \hskip\skip\thinshrinkable #1%
! 5633: \fi
! 5634: \fi
! 5635: \egroup % end \boxA
! 5636: %
! 5637: % now output
! 5638: \ifdim\wd\boxB = 0pt
! 5639: \noindent\unhbox\boxA\par
! 5640: \nobreak
! 5641: \else\bgroup
! 5642: % We want the text of the entries to be aligned to the left, and the
! 5643: % page numbers to be aligned to the right.
! 5644: %
! 5645: \parindent = 0pt
! 5646: \advance\leftskip by 0pt plus 1fil
! 5647: \advance\leftskip by 0pt plus -1fill
! 5648: \rightskip = 0pt plus -1fil
! 5649: \advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fill
! 5650: % Cause last line, which could consist of page numbers on their own
! 5651: % if the list of page numbers is long, to be aligned to the right.
! 5652: \parfillskip=0pt plus -1fill
! 5653: %
! 5654: \advance\rightskip by \entryrightmargin
! 5655: %
! 5656: \dimen@ii = \hsize
! 5657: \advance\dimen@ii by -1\leftskip
! 5658: \advance\dimen@ii by -1\entryrightmargin
! 5659: \ifdim\wd\boxA > \dimen@ii % If the entry doesn't fit in one line
! 5660: \ifdim\dimen@ > 0.8\dimen@ii % due to long index text
! 5661: \advance\leftskip by 0pt plus 1fill % ragged right
! 5662: %
! 5663: % Indent all lines but the first one.
! 5664: \advance\leftskip by \entrycontskip
! 5665: \advance\parindent by -\entrycontskip
! 5666: \fi\fi
! 5667: \indent % start paragraph
! 5668: \unhbox\boxA
! 5669: %
! 5670: % Do not prefer a separate line ending with a hyphen to fewer lines.
! 5671: \finalhyphendemerits = 0
! 5672: %
! 5673: % Word spacing - no stretch
! 5674: \spaceskip=\fontdimen2\font minus \fontdimen4\font
! 5675: %
! 5676: \linepenalty=1000 % Discourage line breaks.
! 5677: \hyphenpenalty=5000 % Discourage hyphenation.
! 5678: %
! 5679: \par % format the paragraph
! 5680: \egroup % The \vbox
! 5681: \fi
! 5682: \endgroup
! 5683: }}
! 5684:
! 5685: \newskip\thinshrinkable
! 5686: \skip\thinshrinkable=.15em minus .15em
! 5687:
! 5688: % Like plain.tex's \dotfill, except uses up at least 0.5 em.
! 5689: % The filll stretch here overpowers both the fil and fill stretch to push
! 5690: % the page number to the right.
! 5691: \def\indexdotfill{\cleaders
! 5692: \hbox{$\mathsurround=0pt \mkern1.5mu.\mkern1.5mu$}\hskip 0.5em plus 1filll}
! 5693:
! 5694: \def\primary #1{\line{#1\hfil}}
! 5695:
! 5696: \def\secondary{\indententry{0.5cm}}
! 5697: \def\tertiary{\indententry{1cm}}
! 5698:
! 5699: \def\indententry#1#2#3{%
! 5700: \bgroup
! 5701: \leftskip=#1
! 5702: \entry{#2}{#3}%
! 5703: \egroup
! 5704: }
! 5705:
! 5706: % Define two-column mode, which we use to typeset indexes.
! 5707: % Adapted from the TeXbook, page 416, which is to say,
! 5708: % the manmac.tex format used to print the TeXbook itself.
! 5709: \catcode`\@=11 % private names
! 5710:
! 5711: \newbox\partialpage
! 5712: \newdimen\doublecolumnhsize
! 5713:
! 5714: \def\begindoublecolumns{\begingroup % ended by \enddoublecolumns
! 5715: % If not much space left on page, start a new page.
! 5716: \ifdim\pagetotal>0.8\vsize\vfill\eject\fi
! 5717: %
! 5718: % Grab any single-column material above us.
! 5719: \output = {%
! 5720: \savetopmark
! 5721: %
! 5722: \global\setbox\partialpage = \vbox{%
! 5723: % Unvbox the main output page.
! 5724: \unvbox\PAGE
! 5725: \kern-\topskip \kern\baselineskip
! 5726: }%
! 5727: }%
! 5728: \eject % run that output routine to set \partialpage
! 5729: %
! 5730: % Use the double-column output routine for subsequent pages.
! 5731: \output = {\doublecolumnout}%
! 5732: %
! 5733: % Change the page size parameters. We could do this once outside this
! 5734: % routine, in each of @smallbook, @afourpaper, and the default 8.5x11
! 5735: % format, but then we repeat the same computation. Repeating a couple
! 5736: % of assignments once per index is clearly meaningless for the
! 5737: % execution time, so we may as well do it in one place.
! 5738: %
! 5739: % First we halve the line length, less a little for the gutter between
! 5740: % the columns. We compute the gutter based on the line length, so it
! 5741: % changes automatically with the paper format. The magic constant
! 5742: % below is chosen so that the gutter has the same value (well, +-<1pt)
! 5743: % as it did when we hard-coded it.
! 5744: %
! 5745: % We put the result in a separate register, \doublecolumnhsize, so we
! 5746: % can restore it in \pagesofar, after \hsize itself has (potentially)
! 5747: % been clobbered.
! 5748: %
! 5749: \doublecolumnhsize = \hsize
! 5750: \advance\doublecolumnhsize by -.04154\hsize
! 5751: \divide\doublecolumnhsize by 2
! 5752: \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize
! 5753: %
! 5754: % Get the available space for the double columns -- the normal
! 5755: % (undoubled) page height minus any material left over from the
! 5756: % previous page.
! 5757: \advance\vsize by -\ht\partialpage
! 5758: \vsize = 2\vsize
! 5759: %
! 5760: % For the benefit of balancing columns
! 5761: \advance\baselineskip by 0pt plus 0.5pt
! 5762: }
! 5763:
! 5764: % The double-column output routine for all double-column pages except
! 5765: % the last, which is done by \balancecolumns.
! 5766: %
! 5767: \def\doublecolumnout{%
! 5768: %
! 5769: \savetopmark
! 5770: \splittopskip=\topskip \splitmaxdepth=\maxdepth
! 5771: \dimen@ = \vsize
! 5772: \divide\dimen@ by 2
! 5773: %
! 5774: % box0 will be the left-hand column, box2 the right.
! 5775: \setbox0=\vsplit\PAGE to\dimen@ \setbox2=\vsplit\PAGE to\dimen@
! 5776: \global\advance\vsize by 2\ht\partialpage
! 5777: \onepageout\pagesofar % empty except for the first time we are called
! 5778: \unvbox\PAGE
! 5779: \penalty\outputpenalty
! 5780: }
! 5781: %
! 5782: % Re-output the contents of the output page -- any previous material,
! 5783: % followed by the two boxes we just split, in box0 and box2.
! 5784: \def\pagesofar{%
! 5785: \unvbox\partialpage
! 5786: %
! 5787: \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize
! 5788: \wd0=\hsize \wd2=\hsize
! 5789: \hbox to\txipagewidth{\box0\hfil\box2}%
! 5790: }
! 5791:
! 5792:
! 5793: % Finished with double columns.
! 5794: \def\enddoublecolumns{%
! 5795: % The following penalty ensures that the page builder is exercised
! 5796: % _before_ we change the output routine. This is necessary in the
! 5797: % following situation:
! 5798: %
! 5799: % The last section of the index consists only of a single entry.
! 5800: % Before this section, \pagetotal is less than \pagegoal, so no
! 5801: % break occurs before the last section starts. However, the last
! 5802: % section, consisting of \initial and the single \entry, does not
! 5803: % fit on the page and has to be broken off. Without the following
! 5804: % penalty the page builder will not be exercised until \eject
! 5805: % below, and by that time we'll already have changed the output
! 5806: % routine to the \balancecolumns version, so the next-to-last
! 5807: % double-column page will be processed with \balancecolumns, which
! 5808: % is wrong: The two columns will go to the main vertical list, with
! 5809: % the broken-off section in the recent contributions. As soon as
! 5810: % the output routine finishes, TeX starts reconsidering the page
! 5811: % break. The two columns and the broken-off section both fit on the
! 5812: % page, because the two columns now take up only half of the page
! 5813: % goal. When TeX sees \eject from below which follows the final
! 5814: % section, it invokes the new output routine that we've set after
! 5815: % \balancecolumns below; \onepageout will try to fit the two columns
! 5816: % and the final section into the vbox of \txipageheight (see
! 5817: % \pagebody), causing an overfull box.
! 5818: %
! 5819: % Note that glue won't work here, because glue does not exercise the
! 5820: % page builder, unlike penalties (see The TeXbook, pp. 280-281).
! 5821: \penalty0
! 5822: %
! 5823: \output = {%
! 5824: % Split the last of the double-column material.
! 5825: \savetopmark
! 5826: \balancecolumns
! 5827: }%
! 5828: \eject % call the \output just set
! 5829: \ifdim\pagetotal=0pt
! 5830: % Having called \balancecolumns once, we do not
! 5831: % want to call it again. Therefore, reset \output to its normal
! 5832: % definition right away.
! 5833: \global\output=\expandafter{\the\defaultoutput}
! 5834: %
! 5835: \endgroup % started in \begindoublecolumns
! 5836: % Leave the double-column material on the current page, no automatic
! 5837: % page break.
! 5838: \box\balancedcolumns
! 5839: %
! 5840: % \pagegoal was set to the doubled \vsize above, since we restarted
! 5841: % the current page. We're now back to normal single-column
! 5842: % typesetting, so reset \pagegoal to the normal \vsize.
! 5843: \global\vsize = \txipageheight %
! 5844: \pagegoal = \txipageheight %
! 5845: \else
! 5846: % We had some left-over material. This might happen when \doublecolumnout
! 5847: % is called in \balancecolumns. Try again.
! 5848: \expandafter\enddoublecolumns
! 5849: \fi
! 5850: }
! 5851: \newbox\balancedcolumns
! 5852: \setbox\balancedcolumns=\vbox{shouldnt see this}%
! 5853: %
! 5854: % Only called for the last of the double column material. \doublecolumnout
! 5855: % does the others.
! 5856: \def\balancecolumns{%
! 5857: \setbox0 = \vbox{\unvbox\PAGE}% like \box255 but more efficient, see p.120.
! 5858: \dimen@ = \ht0
! 5859: \ifdim\dimen@<7\baselineskip
! 5860: % Don't split a short final column in two.
! 5861: \setbox2=\vbox{}%
! 5862: \global\setbox\balancedcolumns=\vbox{\pagesofar}%
! 5863: \else
! 5864: % double the leading vertical space
! 5865: \advance\dimen@ by \topskip
! 5866: \advance\dimen@ by-\baselineskip
! 5867: \divide\dimen@ by 2 % target to split to
! 5868: \dimen@ii = \dimen@
! 5869: \splittopskip = \topskip
! 5870: % Loop until left column is at least as high as the right column.
! 5871: {%
! 5872: \vbadness = 10000
! 5873: \loop
! 5874: \global\setbox3 = \copy0
! 5875: \global\setbox1 = \vsplit3 to \dimen@
! 5876: \ifdim\ht1<\ht3
! 5877: \global\advance\dimen@ by 1pt
! 5878: \repeat
! 5879: }%
! 5880: % Now the left column is in box 1, and the right column in box 3.
! 5881: %
! 5882: % Check whether the left column has come out higher than the page itself.
! 5883: % (Note that we have doubled \vsize for the double columns, so
! 5884: % the actual height of the page is 0.5\vsize).
! 5885: \ifdim2\ht1>\vsize
! 5886: % It appears that we have been called upon to balance too much material.
! 5887: % Output some of it with \doublecolumnout, leaving the rest on the page.
! 5888: \setbox\PAGE=\box0
! 5889: \doublecolumnout
! 5890: \else
! 5891: % Compare the heights of the two columns.
! 5892: \ifdim4\ht1>5\ht3
! 5893: % Column heights are too different, so don't make their bottoms
! 5894: % flush with each other.
! 5895: \setbox2=\vbox to \ht1 {\unvbox3\vfill}%
! 5896: \setbox0=\vbox to \ht1 {\unvbox1\vfill}%
! 5897: \else
! 5898: % Make column bottoms flush with each other.
! 5899: \setbox2=\vbox to\ht1{\unvbox3\unskip}%
! 5900: \setbox0=\vbox to\ht1{\unvbox1\unskip}%
! 5901: \fi
! 5902: \global\setbox\balancedcolumns=\vbox{\pagesofar}%
! 5903: \fi
! 5904: \fi
! 5905: %
! 5906: }
! 5907: \catcode`\@ = \other
! 5908:
! 5909:
! 5910: \message{sectioning,}
! 5911: % Chapters, sections, etc.
! 5912:
! 5913: % Let's start with @part.
! 5914: \parseargdef\part{\partzzz{#1}}
! 5915: \def\partzzz#1{%
! 5916: \chapoddpage
! 5917: \null
! 5918: \vskip.3\vsize % move it down on the page a bit
! 5919: \begingroup
! 5920: \noindent \titlefonts\rm #1\par % the text
! 5921: \let\lastnode=\empty % no node to associate with
! 5922: \writetocentry{part}{#1}{}% but put it in the toc
! 5923: \headingsoff % no headline or footline on the part page
! 5924: % This outputs a mark at the end of the page that clears \thischapter
! 5925: % and \thissection, as is done in \startcontents.
! 5926: \let\pchapsepmacro\relax
! 5927: \chapmacro{}{Yomitfromtoc}{}%
! 5928: \chapoddpage
! 5929: \endgroup
! 5930: }
! 5931:
! 5932: % \unnumberedno is an oxymoron. But we count the unnumbered
! 5933: % sections so that we can refer to them unambiguously in the pdf
! 5934: % outlines by their "section number". We avoid collisions with chapter
! 5935: % numbers by starting them at 10000. (If a document ever has 10000
! 5936: % chapters, we're in trouble anyway, I'm sure.)
! 5937: \newcount\unnumberedno \unnumberedno = 10000
! 5938: \newcount\chapno
! 5939: \newcount\secno \secno=0
! 5940: \newcount\subsecno \subsecno=0
! 5941: \newcount\subsubsecno \subsubsecno=0
! 5942:
! 5943: % This counter is funny since it counts through charcodes of letters A, B, ...
! 5944: \newcount\appendixno \appendixno = `\@
! 5945: %
! 5946: % \def\appendixletter{\char\the\appendixno}
! 5947: % We do the following ugly conditional instead of the above simple
! 5948: % construct for the sake of pdftex, which needs the actual
! 5949: % letter in the expansion, not just typeset.
! 5950: %
! 5951: \def\appendixletter{%
! 5952: \ifnum\appendixno=`A A%
! 5953: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`B B%
! 5954: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`C C%
! 5955: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`D D%
! 5956: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`E E%
! 5957: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`F F%
! 5958: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`G G%
! 5959: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`H H%
! 5960: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`I I%
! 5961: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`J J%
! 5962: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`K K%
! 5963: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`L L%
! 5964: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`M M%
! 5965: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`N N%
! 5966: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`O O%
! 5967: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`P P%
! 5968: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Q Q%
! 5969: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`R R%
! 5970: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`S S%
! 5971: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`T T%
! 5972: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`U U%
! 5973: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`V V%
! 5974: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`W W%
! 5975: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`X X%
! 5976: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Y Y%
! 5977: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Z Z%
! 5978: % The \the is necessary, despite appearances, because \appendixletter is
! 5979: % expanded while writing the .toc file. \char\appendixno is not
! 5980: % expandable, thus it is written literally, thus all appendixes come out
! 5981: % with the same letter (or @) in the toc without it.
! 5982: \else\char\the\appendixno
! 5983: \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
! 5984: \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi}
! 5985:
! 5986: % Each @chapter defines these (using marks) as the number+name, number
! 5987: % and name of the chapter. Page headings and footings can use
! 5988: % these. @section does likewise.
! 5989: \def\thischapter{}
! 5990: \def\thischapternum{}
! 5991: \def\thischaptername{}
! 5992: \def\thissection{}
! 5993: \def\thissectionnum{}
! 5994: \def\thissectionname{}
! 5995:
! 5996: \newcount\absseclevel % used to calculate proper heading level
! 5997: \newcount\secbase\secbase=0 % @raisesections/@lowersections modify this count
! 5998:
! 5999: % @raisesections: treat @section as chapter, @subsection as section, etc.
! 6000: \def\raisesections{\global\advance\secbase by -1}
! 6001:
! 6002: % @lowersections: treat @chapter as section, @section as subsection, etc.
! 6003: \def\lowersections{\global\advance\secbase by 1}
! 6004:
! 6005: % we only have subsub.
! 6006: \chardef\maxseclevel = 3
! 6007: %
! 6008: % A numbered section within an unnumbered changes to unnumbered too.
! 6009: % To achieve this, remember the "biggest" unnum. sec. we are currently in:
! 6010: \chardef\unnlevel = \maxseclevel
! 6011: %
! 6012: % Trace whether the current chapter is an appendix or not:
! 6013: % \chapheadtype is "N" or "A", unnumbered chapters are ignored.
! 6014: \def\chapheadtype{N}
! 6015:
! 6016: % Choose a heading macro
! 6017: % #1 is heading type
! 6018: % #2 is heading level
! 6019: % #3 is text for heading
! 6020: \def\genhead#1#2#3{%
! 6021: % Compute the abs. sec. level:
! 6022: \absseclevel=#2
! 6023: \advance\absseclevel by \secbase
! 6024: % Make sure \absseclevel doesn't fall outside the range:
! 6025: \ifnum \absseclevel < 0
! 6026: \absseclevel = 0
! 6027: \else
! 6028: \ifnum \absseclevel > 3
! 6029: \absseclevel = 3
! 6030: \fi
! 6031: \fi
! 6032: % The heading type:
! 6033: \def\headtype{#1}%
! 6034: \if \headtype U%
! 6035: \ifnum \absseclevel < \unnlevel
! 6036: \chardef\unnlevel = \absseclevel
! 6037: \fi
! 6038: \else
! 6039: % Check for appendix sections:
! 6040: \ifnum \absseclevel = 0
! 6041: \edef\chapheadtype{\headtype}%
! 6042: \else
! 6043: \if \headtype A\if \chapheadtype N%
! 6044: \errmessage{@appendix... within a non-appendix chapter}%
! 6045: \fi\fi
! 6046: \fi
! 6047: % Check for numbered within unnumbered:
! 6048: \ifnum \absseclevel > \unnlevel
! 6049: \def\headtype{U}%
! 6050: \else
! 6051: \chardef\unnlevel = 3
! 6052: \fi
! 6053: \fi
! 6054: % Now print the heading:
! 6055: \if \headtype U%
! 6056: \ifcase\absseclevel
! 6057: \unnumberedzzz{#3}%
! 6058: \or \unnumberedseczzz{#3}%
! 6059: \or \unnumberedsubseczzz{#3}%
! 6060: \or \unnumberedsubsubseczzz{#3}%
! 6061: \fi
! 6062: \else
! 6063: \if \headtype A%
! 6064: \ifcase\absseclevel
! 6065: \appendixzzz{#3}%
! 6066: \or \appendixsectionzzz{#3}%
! 6067: \or \appendixsubseczzz{#3}%
! 6068: \or \appendixsubsubseczzz{#3}%
! 6069: \fi
! 6070: \else
! 6071: \ifcase\absseclevel
! 6072: \chapterzzz{#3}%
! 6073: \or \seczzz{#3}%
! 6074: \or \numberedsubseczzz{#3}%
! 6075: \or \numberedsubsubseczzz{#3}%
! 6076: \fi
! 6077: \fi
! 6078: \fi
! 6079: \suppressfirstparagraphindent
! 6080: }
! 6081:
! 6082: % an interface:
! 6083: \def\numhead{\genhead N}
! 6084: \def\apphead{\genhead A}
! 6085: \def\unnmhead{\genhead U}
! 6086:
! 6087: % @chapter, @appendix, @unnumbered. Increment top-level counter, reset
! 6088: % all lower-level sectioning counters to zero.
! 6089: %
! 6090: % Also set \chaplevelprefix, which we prepend to @float sequence numbers
! 6091: % (e.g., figures), q.v. By default (before any chapter), that is empty.
! 6092: \let\chaplevelprefix = \empty
! 6093: %
! 6094: \outer\parseargdef\chapter{\numhead0{#1}} % normally numhead0 calls chapterzzz
! 6095: \def\chapterzzz#1{%
! 6096: % section resetting is \global in case the chapter is in a group, such
! 6097: % as an @include file.
! 6098: \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0
! 6099: \global\advance\chapno by 1
! 6100: %
! 6101: % Used for \float.
! 6102: \gdef\chaplevelprefix{\the\chapno.}%
! 6103: \resetallfloatnos
! 6104: %
! 6105: % \putwordChapter can contain complex things in translations.
! 6106: \toks0=\expandafter{\putwordChapter}%
! 6107: \message{\the\toks0 \space \the\chapno}%
! 6108: %
! 6109: % Write the actual heading.
! 6110: \chapmacro{#1}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno}%
! 6111: %
! 6112: % So @section and the like are numbered underneath this chapter.
! 6113: \global\let\section = \numberedsec
! 6114: \global\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec
! 6115: \global\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec
! 6116: }
! 6117:
! 6118: \outer\parseargdef\appendix{\apphead0{#1}} % normally calls appendixzzz
! 6119: %
! 6120: \def\appendixzzz#1{%
! 6121: \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0
! 6122: \global\advance\appendixno by 1
! 6123: \gdef\chaplevelprefix{\appendixletter.}%
! 6124: \resetallfloatnos
! 6125: %
! 6126: % \putwordAppendix can contain complex things in translations.
! 6127: \toks0=\expandafter{\putwordAppendix}%
! 6128: \message{\the\toks0 \space \appendixletter}%
! 6129: %
! 6130: \chapmacro{#1}{Yappendix}{\appendixletter}%
! 6131: %
! 6132: \global\let\section = \appendixsec
! 6133: \global\let\subsection = \appendixsubsec
! 6134: \global\let\subsubsection = \appendixsubsubsec
! 6135: }
! 6136:
! 6137: % normally unnmhead0 calls unnumberedzzz:
! 6138: \outer\parseargdef\unnumbered{\unnmhead0{#1}}
! 6139: \def\unnumberedzzz#1{%
! 6140: \global\advance\unnumberedno by 1
! 6141: %
! 6142: % Since an unnumbered has no number, no prefix for figures.
! 6143: \global\let\chaplevelprefix = \empty
! 6144: \resetallfloatnos
! 6145: %
! 6146: % This used to be simply \message{#1}, but TeX fully expands the
! 6147: % argument to \message. Therefore, if #1 contained @-commands, TeX
! 6148: % expanded them. For example, in `@unnumbered The @cite{Book}', TeX
! 6149: % expanded @cite (which turns out to cause errors because \cite is meant
! 6150: % to be executed, not expanded).
! 6151: %
! 6152: % Anyway, we don't want the fully-expanded definition of @cite to appear
! 6153: % as a result of the \message, we just want `@cite' itself. We use
! 6154: % \the<toks register> to achieve this: TeX expands \the<toks> only once,
! 6155: % simply yielding the contents of <toks register>. (We also do this for
! 6156: % the toc entries.)
! 6157: \toks0 = {#1}%
! 6158: \message{(\the\toks0)}%
! 6159: %
! 6160: \chapmacro{#1}{Ynothing}{\the\unnumberedno}%
! 6161: %
! 6162: \global\let\section = \unnumberedsec
! 6163: \global\let\subsection = \unnumberedsubsec
! 6164: \global\let\subsubsection = \unnumberedsubsubsec
! 6165: }
! 6166:
! 6167: % @centerchap is like @unnumbered, but the heading is centered.
! 6168: \outer\parseargdef\centerchap{%
! 6169: \let\centerparametersmaybe = \centerparameters
! 6170: \unnmhead0{#1}%
! 6171: \let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax
! 6172: }
! 6173:
! 6174: % @top is like @unnumbered.
! 6175: \let\top\unnumbered
! 6176:
! 6177: % Sections.
! 6178: %
! 6179: \outer\parseargdef\numberedsec{\numhead1{#1}} % normally calls seczzz
! 6180: \def\seczzz#1{%
! 6181: \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1
! 6182: \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno.\the\secno}%
! 6183: }
! 6184:
! 6185: % normally calls appendixsectionzzz:
! 6186: \outer\parseargdef\appendixsection{\apphead1{#1}}
! 6187: \def\appendixsectionzzz#1{%
! 6188: \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1
! 6189: \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Yappendix}{\appendixletter.\the\secno}%
! 6190: }
! 6191: \let\appendixsec\appendixsection
! 6192:
! 6193: % normally calls unnumberedseczzz:
! 6194: \outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsec{\unnmhead1{#1}}
! 6195: \def\unnumberedseczzz#1{%
! 6196: \global\advance\unnumberedno by 1
! 6197: \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Ynothing}{\the\unnumberedno}%
! 6198: }
! 6199:
! 6200: % Subsections.
! 6201: %
! 6202: % normally calls numberedsubseczzz:
! 6203: \outer\parseargdef\numberedsubsec{\numhead2{#1}}
! 6204: \def\numberedsubseczzz#1{%
! 6205: \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1
! 6206: \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}%
! 6207: }
! 6208:
! 6209: % normally calls appendixsubseczzz:
! 6210: \outer\parseargdef\appendixsubsec{\apphead2{#1}}
! 6211: \def\appendixsubseczzz#1{%
! 6212: \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1
! 6213: \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Yappendix}%
! 6214: {\appendixletter.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}%
! 6215: }
! 6216:
! 6217: % normally calls unnumberedsubseczzz:
! 6218: \outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsubsec{\unnmhead2{#1}}
! 6219: \def\unnumberedsubseczzz#1{%
! 6220: \global\advance\unnumberedno by 1
! 6221: \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Ynothing}{\the\unnumberedno}%
! 6222: }
! 6223:
! 6224: % Subsubsections.
! 6225: %
! 6226: % normally numberedsubsubseczzz:
! 6227: \outer\parseargdef\numberedsubsubsec{\numhead3{#1}}
! 6228: \def\numberedsubsubseczzz#1{%
! 6229: \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1
! 6230: \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Ynumbered}%
! 6231: {\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}%
! 6232: }
! 6233:
! 6234: % normally appendixsubsubseczzz:
! 6235: \outer\parseargdef\appendixsubsubsec{\apphead3{#1}}
! 6236: \def\appendixsubsubseczzz#1{%
! 6237: \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1
! 6238: \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Yappendix}%
! 6239: {\appendixletter.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}%
! 6240: }
! 6241:
! 6242: % normally unnumberedsubsubseczzz:
! 6243: \outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsubsubsec{\unnmhead3{#1}}
! 6244: \def\unnumberedsubsubseczzz#1{%
! 6245: \global\advance\unnumberedno by 1
! 6246: \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Ynothing}{\the\unnumberedno}%
! 6247: }
! 6248:
! 6249: % These macros control what the section commands do, according
! 6250: % to what kind of chapter we are in (ordinary, appendix, or unnumbered).
! 6251: % Define them by default for a numbered chapter.
! 6252: \let\section = \numberedsec
! 6253: \let\subsection = \numberedsubsec
! 6254: \let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec
! 6255:
! 6256: % Define @majorheading, @heading and @subheading
! 6257:
! 6258: \def\majorheading{%
! 6259: {\advance\chapheadingskip by 10pt \chapbreak }%
! 6260: \parsearg\chapheadingzzz
! 6261: }
! 6262:
! 6263: \def\chapheading{\chapbreak \parsearg\chapheadingzzz}
! 6264: \def\chapheadingzzz#1{%
! 6265: \vbox{\chapfonts \raggedtitlesettings #1\par}%
! 6266: \nobreak\bigskip \nobreak
! 6267: \suppressfirstparagraphindent
! 6268: }
! 6269:
! 6270: % @heading, @subheading, @subsubheading.
! 6271: \parseargdef\heading{\sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Yomitfromtoc}{}
! 6272: \suppressfirstparagraphindent}
! 6273: \parseargdef\subheading{\sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Yomitfromtoc}{}
! 6274: \suppressfirstparagraphindent}
! 6275: \parseargdef\subsubheading{\sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Yomitfromtoc}{}
! 6276: \suppressfirstparagraphindent}
! 6277:
! 6278: % These macros generate a chapter, section, etc. heading only
! 6279: % (including whitespace, linebreaking, etc. around it),
! 6280: % given all the information in convenient, parsed form.
! 6281:
! 6282: % Args are the skip and penalty (usually negative)
! 6283: \def\dobreak#1#2{\par\ifdim\lastskip<#1\removelastskip\penalty#2\vskip#1\fi}
! 6284:
! 6285: % Parameter controlling skip before chapter headings (if needed)
! 6286: \newskip\chapheadingskip
! 6287:
! 6288: % Define plain chapter starts, and page on/off switching for it.
! 6289: \def\chapbreak{\dobreak \chapheadingskip {-4000}}
! 6290:
! 6291: % Start a new page
! 6292: \def\chappager{\par\vfill\supereject}
! 6293:
! 6294: % \chapoddpage - start on an odd page for a new chapter
! 6295: % Because \domark is called before \chapoddpage, the filler page will
! 6296: % get the headings for the next chapter, which is wrong. But we don't
! 6297: % care -- we just disable all headings on the filler page.
! 6298: \def\chapoddpage{%
! 6299: \chappager
! 6300: \ifodd\pageno \else
! 6301: \begingroup
! 6302: \headingsoff
! 6303: \null
! 6304: \chappager
! 6305: \endgroup
! 6306: \fi
! 6307: }
! 6308:
! 6309: \parseargdef\setchapternewpage{\csname CHAPPAG#1\endcsname\HEADINGSon}
! 6310:
! 6311: \def\CHAPPAGoff{%
! 6312: \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
! 6313: \global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapbreak
! 6314: \global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSsinglechapoff}}
! 6315:
! 6316: \def\CHAPPAGon{%
! 6317: \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
! 6318: \global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chappager
! 6319: \global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSsingle}}
! 6320:
! 6321: \def\CHAPPAGodd{%
! 6322: \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
! 6323: \global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapoddpage
! 6324: \global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble}}
! 6325:
! 6326: \setchapternewpage on
! 6327:
! 6328: % \chapmacro - Chapter opening.
! 6329: %
! 6330: % #1 is the text, #2 is the section type (Ynumbered, Ynothing,
! 6331: % Yappendix, Yomitfromtoc), #3 the chapter number.
! 6332: % Not used for @heading series.
! 6333: %
! 6334: % To test against our argument.
! 6335: \def\Ynothingkeyword{Ynothing}
! 6336: \def\Yappendixkeyword{Yappendix}
! 6337: \def\Yomitfromtockeyword{Yomitfromtoc}
! 6338: %
! 6339: %
! 6340: % Definitions for @thischapter. These can be overridden in translation
! 6341: % files.
! 6342: \def\thischapterAppendix{%
! 6343: \putwordAppendix{} \thischapternum: \thischaptername}
! 6344:
! 6345: \def\thischapterChapter{%
! 6346: \putwordChapter{} \thischapternum: \thischaptername}
! 6347: %
! 6348: %
! 6349: \def\chapmacro#1#2#3{%
! 6350: \expandafter\ifx\thisenv\titlepage\else
! 6351: \checkenv{}% chapters, etc., should not start inside an environment.
! 6352: \fi
! 6353: % Insert the first mark before the heading break (see notes for \domark).
! 6354: \let\prevchapterdefs=\currentchapterdefs
! 6355: \let\prevsectiondefs=\currentsectiondefs
! 6356: \gdef\currentsectiondefs{\gdef\thissectionname{}\gdef\thissectionnum{}%
! 6357: \gdef\thissection{}}%
! 6358: %
! 6359: \def\temptype{#2}%
! 6360: \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword
! 6361: \gdef\currentchapterdefs{\gdef\thischaptername{#1}\gdef\thischapternum{}%
! 6362: \gdef\thischapter{\thischaptername}}%
! 6363: \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword
! 6364: \gdef\currentchapterdefs{\gdef\thischaptername{#1}\gdef\thischapternum{}%
! 6365: \gdef\thischapter{}}%
! 6366: \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword
! 6367: \toks0={#1}%
! 6368: \xdef\currentchapterdefs{%
! 6369: \gdef\noexpand\thischaptername{\the\toks0}%
! 6370: \gdef\noexpand\thischapternum{\appendixletter}%
! 6371: \let\noexpand\thischapter\noexpand\thischapterAppendix
! 6372: }%
! 6373: \else
! 6374: \toks0={#1}%
! 6375: \xdef\currentchapterdefs{%
! 6376: \gdef\noexpand\thischaptername{\the\toks0}%
! 6377: \gdef\noexpand\thischapternum{\the\chapno}%
! 6378: \let\noexpand\thischapter\noexpand\thischapterChapter
! 6379: }%
! 6380: \fi\fi\fi
! 6381: %
! 6382: % Output the mark. Pass it through \safewhatsit, to take care of
! 6383: % the preceding space.
! 6384: \safewhatsit\domark
! 6385: %
! 6386: % Insert the chapter heading break.
! 6387: \pchapsepmacro
! 6388: %
! 6389: % Now the second mark, after the heading break. No break points
! 6390: % between here and the heading.
! 6391: \let\prevchapterdefs=\currentchapterdefs
! 6392: \let\prevsectiondefs=\currentsectiondefs
! 6393: \domark
! 6394: %
! 6395: {%
! 6396: \chapfonts \rm
! 6397: \let\footnote=\errfootnoteheading % give better error message
! 6398: %
! 6399: % Have to define \currentsection before calling \donoderef, because the
! 6400: % xref code eventually uses it. On the other hand, it has to be called
! 6401: % after \pchapsepmacro, or the headline will change too soon.
! 6402: \gdef\currentsection{#1}%
! 6403: %
! 6404: % Only insert the separating space if we have a chapter/appendix
! 6405: % number, and don't print the unnumbered ``number''.
! 6406: \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword
! 6407: \setbox0 = \hbox{}%
! 6408: \def\toctype{unnchap}%
! 6409: \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword
! 6410: \setbox0 = \hbox{}% contents like unnumbered, but no toc entry
! 6411: \def\toctype{omit}%
! 6412: \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword
! 6413: \setbox0 = \hbox{\putwordAppendix{} #3\enspace}%
! 6414: \def\toctype{app}%
! 6415: \else
! 6416: \setbox0 = \hbox{#3\enspace}%
! 6417: \def\toctype{numchap}%
! 6418: \fi\fi\fi
! 6419: %
! 6420: % Write the toc entry for this chapter. Must come before the
! 6421: % \donoderef, because we include the current node name in the toc
! 6422: % entry, and \donoderef resets it to empty.
! 6423: \writetocentry{\toctype}{#1}{#3}%
! 6424: %
! 6425: % For pdftex, we have to write out the node definition (aka, make
! 6426: % the pdfdest) after any page break, but before the actual text has
! 6427: % been typeset. If the destination for the pdf outline is after the
! 6428: % text, then jumping from the outline may wind up with the text not
! 6429: % being visible, for instance under high magnification.
! 6430: \donoderef{#2}%
! 6431: %
! 6432: % Typeset the actual heading.
! 6433: \nobreak % Avoid page breaks at the interline glue.
! 6434: \vbox{\raggedtitlesettings \hangindent=\wd0 \centerparametersmaybe
! 6435: \unhbox0 #1\par}%
! 6436: }%
! 6437: \nobreak\bigskip % no page break after a chapter title
! 6438: \nobreak
! 6439: }
! 6440:
! 6441: % @centerchap -- centered and unnumbered.
! 6442: \let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax
! 6443: \def\centerparameters{%
! 6444: \advance\rightskip by 3\rightskip
! 6445: \leftskip = \rightskip
! 6446: \parfillskip = 0pt
! 6447: }
! 6448:
! 6449:
! 6450: % Section titles. These macros combine the section number parts and
! 6451: % call the generic \sectionheading to do the printing.
! 6452: %
! 6453: \newskip\secheadingskip
! 6454: \def\secheadingbreak{\dobreak \secheadingskip{-1000}}
! 6455:
! 6456: % Subsection titles.
! 6457: \newskip\subsecheadingskip
! 6458: \def\subsecheadingbreak{\dobreak \subsecheadingskip{-500}}
! 6459:
! 6460: % Subsubsection titles.
! 6461: \def\subsubsecheadingskip{\subsecheadingskip}
! 6462: \def\subsubsecheadingbreak{\subsecheadingbreak}
! 6463:
! 6464: % Definition for @thissection. This can be overridden in translation
! 6465: % files.
! 6466: \def\thissectionDef{%
! 6467: \putwordSection{} \thissectionnum: \thissectionname}
! 6468: %
! 6469:
! 6470:
! 6471: % Print any size, any type, section title.
! 6472: %
! 6473: % #1 is the text of the title,
! 6474: % #2 is the section level (sec/subsec/subsubsec),
! 6475: % #3 is the section type (Ynumbered, Ynothing, Yappendix, Yomitfromtoc),
! 6476: % #4 is the section number.
! 6477: %
! 6478: \def\seckeyword{sec}
! 6479: %
! 6480: \def\sectionheading#1#2#3#4{%
! 6481: {%
! 6482: \def\sectionlevel{#2}%
! 6483: \def\temptype{#3}%
! 6484: %
! 6485: % It is ok for the @heading series commands to appear inside an
! 6486: % environment (it's been historically allowed, though the logic is
! 6487: % dubious), but not the others.
! 6488: \ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword\else
! 6489: \checkenv{}% non-@*heading should not be in an environment.
! 6490: \fi
! 6491: \let\footnote=\errfootnoteheading
! 6492: %
! 6493: % Switch to the right set of fonts.
! 6494: \csname #2fonts\endcsname \rm
! 6495: %
! 6496: % Insert first mark before the heading break (see notes for \domark).
! 6497: \let\prevsectiondefs=\currentsectiondefs
! 6498: \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword
! 6499: \ifx\sectionlevel\seckeyword
! 6500: \gdef\currentsectiondefs{\gdef\thissectionname{#1}\gdef\thissectionnum{}%
! 6501: \gdef\thissection{\thissectionname}}%
! 6502: \fi
! 6503: \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword
! 6504: % Don't redefine \thissection.
! 6505: \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword
! 6506: \ifx\sectionlevel\seckeyword
! 6507: \toks0={#1}%
! 6508: \xdef\currentsectiondefs{%
! 6509: \gdef\noexpand\thissectionname{\the\toks0}%
! 6510: \gdef\noexpand\thissectionnum{#4}%
! 6511: \let\noexpand\thissection\noexpand\thissectionDef
! 6512: }%
! 6513: \fi
! 6514: \else
! 6515: \ifx\sectionlevel\seckeyword
! 6516: \toks0={#1}%
! 6517: \xdef\currentsectiondefs{%
! 6518: \gdef\noexpand\thissectionname{\the\toks0}%
! 6519: \gdef\noexpand\thissectionnum{#4}%
! 6520: \let\noexpand\thissection\noexpand\thissectionDef
! 6521: }%
! 6522: \fi
! 6523: \fi\fi\fi
! 6524: %
! 6525: % Go into vertical mode. Usually we'll already be there, but we
! 6526: % don't want the following whatsit to end up in a preceding paragraph
! 6527: % if the document didn't happen to have a blank line.
! 6528: \par
! 6529: %
! 6530: % Output the mark. Pass it through \safewhatsit, to take care of
! 6531: % the preceding space.
! 6532: \safewhatsit\domark
! 6533: %
! 6534: % Insert space above the heading.
! 6535: \csname #2headingbreak\endcsname
! 6536: %
! 6537: % Now the second mark, after the heading break. No break points
! 6538: % between here and the heading.
! 6539: \global\let\prevsectiondefs=\currentsectiondefs
! 6540: \domark
! 6541: %
! 6542: % Only insert the space after the number if we have a section number.
! 6543: \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword
! 6544: \setbox0 = \hbox{}%
! 6545: \def\toctype{unn}%
! 6546: \gdef\currentsection{#1}%
! 6547: \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword
! 6548: % for @headings -- no section number, don't include in toc,
! 6549: % and don't redefine \currentsection.
! 6550: \setbox0 = \hbox{}%
! 6551: \def\toctype{omit}%
! 6552: \let\sectionlevel=\empty
! 6553: \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword
! 6554: \setbox0 = \hbox{#4\enspace}%
! 6555: \def\toctype{app}%
! 6556: \gdef\currentsection{#1}%
! 6557: \else
! 6558: \setbox0 = \hbox{#4\enspace}%
! 6559: \def\toctype{num}%
! 6560: \gdef\currentsection{#1}%
! 6561: \fi\fi\fi
! 6562: %
! 6563: % Write the toc entry (before \donoderef). See comments in \chapmacro.
! 6564: \writetocentry{\toctype\sectionlevel}{#1}{#4}%
! 6565: %
! 6566: % Write the node reference (= pdf destination for pdftex).
! 6567: % Again, see comments in \chapmacro.
! 6568: \donoderef{#3}%
! 6569: %
! 6570: % Interline glue will be inserted when the vbox is completed.
! 6571: % That glue will be a valid breakpoint for the page, since it'll be
! 6572: % preceded by a whatsit (usually from the \donoderef, or from the
! 6573: % \writetocentry if there was no node). We don't want to allow that
! 6574: % break, since then the whatsits could end up on page n while the
! 6575: % section is on page n+1, thus toc/etc. are wrong. Debian bug 276000.
! 6576: \nobreak
! 6577: %
! 6578: % Output the actual section heading.
! 6579: \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \ptexraggedright
! 6580: \hangindent=\wd0 % zero if no section number
! 6581: \unhbox0 #1}%
! 6582: }%
! 6583: % Add extra space after the heading -- half of whatever came above it.
! 6584: % Don't allow stretch, though.
! 6585: \kern .5 \csname #2headingskip\endcsname
! 6586: %
! 6587: % Do not let the kern be a potential breakpoint, as it would be if it
! 6588: % was followed by glue.
! 6589: \nobreak
! 6590: %
! 6591: % We'll almost certainly start a paragraph next, so don't let that
! 6592: % glue accumulate. (Not a breakpoint because it's preceded by a
! 6593: % discardable item.) However, when a paragraph is not started next
! 6594: % (\startdefun, \cartouche, \center, etc.), this needs to be wiped out
! 6595: % or the negative glue will cause weirdly wrong output, typically
! 6596: % obscuring the section heading with something else.
! 6597: \vskip-\parskip
! 6598: %
! 6599: % This is so the last item on the main vertical list is a known
! 6600: % \penalty > 10000, so \startdefun, etc., can recognize the situation
! 6601: % and do the needful.
! 6602: \penalty 10001
! 6603: }
! 6604:
! 6605:
! 6606: \message{toc,}
! 6607: % Table of contents.
! 6608: \newwrite\tocfile
! 6609:
! 6610: % Write an entry to the toc file, opening it if necessary.
! 6611: % Called from @chapter, etc.
! 6612: %
! 6613: % Example usage: \writetocentry{sec}{Section Name}{\the\chapno.\the\secno}
! 6614: % We append the current node name (if any) and page number as additional
! 6615: % arguments for the \{chap,sec,...}entry macros which will eventually
! 6616: % read this. The node name is used in the pdf outlines as the
! 6617: % destination to jump to.
! 6618: %
! 6619: % We open the .toc file for writing here instead of at @setfilename (or
! 6620: % any other fixed time) so that @contents can be anywhere in the document.
! 6621: % But if #1 is `omit', then we don't do anything. This is used for the
! 6622: % table of contents chapter openings themselves.
! 6623: %
! 6624: \newif\iftocfileopened
! 6625: \def\omitkeyword{omit}%
! 6626: %
! 6627: \def\writetocentry#1#2#3{%
! 6628: \edef\writetoctype{#1}%
! 6629: \ifx\writetoctype\omitkeyword \else
! 6630: \iftocfileopened\else
! 6631: \immediate\openout\tocfile = \jobname.toc
! 6632: \global\tocfileopenedtrue
! 6633: \fi
! 6634: %
! 6635: \iflinks
! 6636: {\atdummies
! 6637: \edef\temp{%
! 6638: \write\tocfile{@#1entry{#2}{#3}{\lastnode}{\noexpand\folio}}}%
! 6639: \temp
! 6640: }%
! 6641: \fi
! 6642: \fi
! 6643: %
! 6644: % Tell \shipout to create a pdf destination on each page, if we're
! 6645: % writing pdf. These are used in the table of contents. We can't
! 6646: % just write one on every page because the title pages are numbered
! 6647: % 1 and 2 (the page numbers aren't printed), and so are the first
! 6648: % two pages of the document. Thus, we'd have two destinations named
! 6649: % `1', and two named `2'.
! 6650: \ifpdforxetex
! 6651: \global\pdfmakepagedesttrue
! 6652: \fi
! 6653: }
! 6654:
! 6655:
! 6656: % These characters do not print properly in the Computer Modern roman
! 6657: % fonts, so we must take special care. This is more or less redundant
! 6658: % with the Texinfo input format setup at the end of this file.
! 6659: %
! 6660: \def\activecatcodes{%
! 6661: \catcode`\"=\active
! 6662: \catcode`\$=\active
! 6663: \catcode`\<=\active
! 6664: \catcode`\>=\active
! 6665: \catcode`\\=\active
! 6666: \catcode`\^=\active
! 6667: \catcode`\_=\active
! 6668: \catcode`\|=\active
! 6669: \catcode`\~=\active
! 6670: }
! 6671:
! 6672:
! 6673: % Read the toc file, which is essentially Texinfo input.
! 6674: \def\readtocfile{%
! 6675: \setupdatafile
! 6676: \activecatcodes
! 6677: \input \tocreadfilename
! 6678: }
! 6679:
! 6680: % process toc file to find the maximum width of the section numbers for
! 6681: % each chapter
! 6682: \def\findsecnowidths{%
! 6683: \begingroup
! 6684: \setupdatafile
! 6685: \activecatcodes
! 6686: \secentryfonts
! 6687: % Redefinitions
! 6688: \def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{%
! 6689: \def\curchapname{secnowidth-##2}%
! 6690: \curchapmax=0pt
! 6691: }%
! 6692: \let\appentry\numchapentry
! 6693: %
! 6694: \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
! 6695: \def\cursecname{secnowidth-##2}%
! 6696: \cursecmax=0pt
! 6697: %
! 6698: \setbox0=\hbox{##2}%
! 6699: \ifdim\wd0>\curchapmax
! 6700: \curchapmax=\wd0
! 6701: \expandafter\xdef\csname\curchapname\endcsname{\the\wd0}%
! 6702: \fi
! 6703: }%
! 6704: \let\appsecentry\numsecentry
! 6705: %
! 6706: \def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
! 6707: \def\curssecname{secnowidth-##2}%
! 6708: \curssecmax=0pt
! 6709: %
! 6710: \setbox0=\hbox{##2}%
! 6711: \ifdim\wd0>\cursecmax
! 6712: \cursecmax=\wd0
! 6713: \expandafter\xdef\csname\cursecname\endcsname{\the\wd0}%
! 6714: \fi
! 6715: }%
! 6716: \let\appsubsecentry\numsubsecentry
! 6717: %
! 6718: \def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
! 6719: \setbox0=\hbox{##2}%
! 6720: \ifdim\wd0>\curssecmax
! 6721: \curssecmax=\wd0
! 6722: \expandafter\xdef\csname\curssecname\endcsname{\the\wd0}%
! 6723: \fi
! 6724: }%
! 6725: \let\appsubsubsecentry\numsubsubsecentry
! 6726: %
! 6727: % Discard any output by outputting to dummy vbox, in case the toc file
! 6728: % contains macros that we have not redefined above.
! 6729: \setbox\dummybox\vbox\bgroup
! 6730: \input \tocreadfilename\relax
! 6731: \egroup
! 6732: \endgroup
! 6733: }
! 6734: \newdimen\curchapmax
! 6735: \newdimen\cursecmax
! 6736: \newdimen\curssecmax
! 6737:
! 6738:
! 6739: % set #1 to the maximum section width for #2
! 6740: \def\retrievesecnowidth#1#2{%
! 6741: \expandafter\let\expandafter\savedsecnowidth \csname secnowidth-#2\endcsname
! 6742: \ifx\savedsecnowidth\relax
! 6743: #1=0pt
! 6744: \else
! 6745: #1=\savedsecnowidth
! 6746: \fi
! 6747: }
! 6748: \newdimen\secnowidthchap
! 6749: \secnowidthchap=0pt
! 6750: \newdimen\secnowidthsec
! 6751: \secnowidthsec=0pt
! 6752: \newdimen\secnowidthssec
! 6753: \secnowidthssec=0pt
! 6754:
! 6755:
! 6756: \newskip\contentsrightmargin \contentsrightmargin=1in
! 6757: \newcount\savepageno
! 6758: \newcount\lastnegativepageno \lastnegativepageno = -1
! 6759:
! 6760: % Prepare to read what we've written to \tocfile.
! 6761: %
! 6762: \def\startcontents#1{%
! 6763: % If @setchapternewpage on, and @headings double, the contents should
! 6764: % start on an odd page, unlike chapters.
! 6765: \contentsalignmacro
! 6766: \immediate\closeout\tocfile
! 6767: %
! 6768: % Don't need to put `Contents' or `Short Contents' in the headline.
! 6769: % It is abundantly clear what they are.
! 6770: \chapmacro{#1}{Yomitfromtoc}{}%
! 6771: %
! 6772: \savepageno = \pageno
! 6773: \begingroup % Set up to handle contents files properly.
! 6774: \raggedbottom % Worry more about breakpoints than the bottom.
! 6775: \entryrightmargin=\contentsrightmargin % Don't use the full line length.
! 6776: %
! 6777: % Roman numerals for page numbers.
! 6778: \ifnum \pageno>0 \global\pageno = \lastnegativepageno \fi
! 6779: \def\thistitle{}% no title in double-sided headings
! 6780: % Record where the Roman numerals started.
! 6781: \ifnum\romancount=0 \global\romancount=\pagecount \fi
! 6782: \linkentrytexttrue
! 6783: }
! 6784:
! 6785: % \raggedbottom in plain.tex hardcodes \topskip so override it
! 6786: \catcode`\@=11
! 6787: \def\raggedbottom{\advance\topskip by 0pt plus60pt \r@ggedbottomtrue}
! 6788: \catcode`\@=\other
! 6789:
! 6790: % redefined for the two-volume lispref. We always output on
! 6791: % \jobname.toc even if this is redefined.
! 6792: %
! 6793: \def\tocreadfilename{\jobname.toc}
! 6794:
! 6795: % Normal (long) toc.
! 6796: %
! 6797: \def\contents{%
! 6798: \startcontents{\putwordTOC}%
! 6799: \openin 1 \tocreadfilename\space
! 6800: \ifeof 1 \else
! 6801: \findsecnowidths
! 6802: \readtocfile
! 6803: \fi
! 6804: \vfill \eject
! 6805: \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect
! 6806: \ifeof 1 \else
! 6807: \pdfmakeoutlines
! 6808: \fi
! 6809: \closein 1
! 6810: \endgroup
! 6811: \contentsendroman
! 6812: }
! 6813:
! 6814: % And just the chapters.
! 6815: \def\summarycontents{%
! 6816: \startcontents{\putwordShortTOC}%
! 6817: %
! 6818: \let\partentry = \shortpartentry
! 6819: \let\numchapentry = \shortchapentry
! 6820: \let\appentry = \shortchapentry
! 6821: \let\unnchapentry = \shortunnchapentry
! 6822: % We want a true roman here for the page numbers.
! 6823: \secfonts
! 6824: \let\rm=\shortcontrm \let\bf=\shortcontbf
! 6825: \let\sl=\shortcontsl \let\tt=\shortconttt
! 6826: \rm
! 6827: \hyphenpenalty = 10000
! 6828: \advance\baselineskip by 1pt % Open it up a little.
! 6829: \extrasecnoskip=0.4pt
! 6830: \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{}
! 6831: \let\appsecentry = \numsecentry
! 6832: \let\unnsecentry = \numsecentry
! 6833: \let\numsubsecentry = \numsecentry
! 6834: \let\appsubsecentry = \numsecentry
! 6835: \let\unnsubsecentry = \numsecentry
! 6836: \let\numsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry
! 6837: \let\appsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry
! 6838: \let\unnsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry
! 6839: \openin 1 \tocreadfilename\space
! 6840: \ifeof 1 \else
! 6841: \readtocfile
! 6842: \fi
! 6843: \closein 1
! 6844: \vfill \eject
! 6845: \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect
! 6846: \endgroup
! 6847: \contentsendroman
! 6848: }
! 6849: \let\shortcontents = \summarycontents
! 6850:
! 6851: % Get ready to use Arabic numerals again
! 6852: \def\contentsendroman{%
! 6853: \lastnegativepageno = \pageno
! 6854: \global\pageno=1
! 6855: \contentsendcount = \pagecount
! 6856: }
! 6857:
! 6858: % Typeset the label for a chapter or appendix for the short contents.
! 6859: % The arg is, e.g., `A' for an appendix, or `3' for a chapter.
! 6860: %
! 6861: \def\shortchaplabel#1{%
! 6862: % This space should be enough, since a single number is .5em, and the
! 6863: % widest letter (M) is 1em, at least in the Computer Modern fonts.
! 6864: % But use \hss just in case.
! 6865: %
! 6866: % We'd like to right-justify chapter numbers, but that looks strange
! 6867: % with appendix letters. And right-justifying numbers and
! 6868: % left-justifying letters looks strange when there is less than 10
! 6869: % chapters. Have to read the whole toc once to know how many chapters
! 6870: % there are before deciding ...
! 6871: \hbox to 1em{#1\hss}%
! 6872: }
! 6873:
! 6874: % These macros generate individual entries in the table of contents,
! 6875: % and are read in from the *.toc file.
! 6876: %
! 6877: % The arguments are like:
! 6878: % \def\numchapentry#1#2#3#4
! 6879: % #1 - the chapter or section name.
! 6880: % #2 - section number
! 6881: % #3 - level of section (e.g "chap", "sec")
! 6882: % #4 - page number
! 6883:
! 6884: % Parts, in the main contents. Replace the part number, which doesn't
! 6885: % exist, with an empty box. Let's hope all the numbers have the same width.
! 6886: % Also ignore the page number, which is conventionally not printed.
! 6887: \def\numeralbox{\setbox0=\hbox{8}\hbox to \wd0{\hfil}}
! 6888: \def\partentry#1#2#3#4{%
! 6889: % Add stretch and a bonus for breaking the page before the part heading.
! 6890: % This reduces the chance of the page being broken immediately after the
! 6891: % part heading, before a following chapter heading.
! 6892: \vskip 0pt plus 5\baselineskip
! 6893: \penalty-300
! 6894: \vskip 0pt plus -5\baselineskip
! 6895: \dochapentry{#1}{\numeralbox}{}%
! 6896: }
! 6897: %
! 6898: % Parts, in the short toc.
! 6899: \def\shortpartentry#1#2#3#4{%
! 6900: \penalty-300
! 6901: \vskip.5\baselineskip plus.15\baselineskip minus.1\baselineskip
! 6902: \shortchapentry{{\bf #1}}{\numeralbox}{}{}%
! 6903: }
! 6904:
! 6905: % Chapters, in the main contents.
! 6906: \def\numchapentry#1#2#3#4{%
! 6907: \retrievesecnowidth\secnowidthchap{#2}%
! 6908: \dochapentry{#1}{#2}{#4}%
! 6909: }
! 6910:
! 6911: % Chapters, in the short toc.
! 6912: \def\shortchapentry#1#2#3#4{%
! 6913: \tocentry{#1}{\shortchaplabel{#2}}{#4}%
! 6914: }
! 6915:
! 6916: % Appendices, in the main contents.
! 6917: % Need the word Appendix, and a fixed-size box.
! 6918: %
! 6919: \def\appendixbox#1{%
! 6920: % We use M since it's probably the widest letter.
! 6921: \setbox0 = \hbox{\putwordAppendix{} M}%
! 6922: \hbox to \wd0{\putwordAppendix{} #1\hss}}
! 6923: %
! 6924: \def\appentry#1#2#3#4{%
! 6925: \retrievesecnowidth\secnowidthchap{#2}%
! 6926: \dochapentry{\appendixbox{#2}\hskip.7em#1}{}{#4}%
! 6927: }
! 6928:
! 6929: % Unnumbered chapters.
! 6930: \def\unnchapentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{#1}{}{#4}}
! 6931: \def\shortunnchapentry#1#2#3#4{\tocentry{#1}{}{#4}}
! 6932:
! 6933: % Sections.
! 6934: \def\numsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#1}{#2}{#4}}
! 6935:
! 6936: \def\numsecentry#1#2#3#4{%
! 6937: \retrievesecnowidth\secnowidthsec{#2}%
! 6938: \dosecentry{#1}{#2}{#4}%
! 6939: }
! 6940: \let\appsecentry=\numsecentry
! 6941: \def\unnsecentry#1#2#3#4{%
! 6942: \retrievesecnowidth\secnowidthsec{#2}%
! 6943: \dosecentry{#1}{}{#4}%
! 6944: }
! 6945:
! 6946: % Subsections.
! 6947: \def\numsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{%
! 6948: \retrievesecnowidth\secnowidthssec{#2}%
! 6949: \dosubsecentry{#1}{#2}{#4}%
! 6950: }
! 6951: \let\appsubsecentry=\numsubsecentry
! 6952: \def\unnsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{%
! 6953: \retrievesecnowidth\secnowidthssec{#2}%
! 6954: \dosubsecentry{#1}{}{#4}%
! 6955: }
! 6956:
! 6957: % And subsubsections.
! 6958: \def\numsubsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsubsecentry{#1}{#2}{#4}}
! 6959: \let\appsubsubsecentry=\numsubsubsecentry
! 6960: \def\unnsubsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsubsecentry{#1}{}{#4}}
! 6961:
! 6962: % This parameter controls the indentation of the various levels.
! 6963: % Same as \defaultparindent.
! 6964: \newdimen\tocindent \tocindent = 15pt
! 6965:
! 6966: % Now for the actual typesetting. In all these, #1 is the text, #2 is
! 6967: % a section number if present, and #3 is the page number.
! 6968: %
! 6969: % If the toc has to be broken over pages, we want it to be at chapters
! 6970: % if at all possible; hence the \penalty.
! 6971: \def\dochapentry#1#2#3{%
! 6972: \penalty-300 \vskip1\baselineskip plus.33\baselineskip minus.25\baselineskip
! 6973: \begingroup
! 6974: % Move the page numbers slightly to the right
! 6975: \advance\entryrightmargin by -0.05em
! 6976: \chapentryfonts
! 6977: \extrasecnoskip=0.4em % separate chapter number more
! 6978: \tocentry{#1}{#2}{#3}%
! 6979: \endgroup
! 6980: \nobreak\vskip .25\baselineskip plus.1\baselineskip
! 6981: }
! 6982:
! 6983: \def\dosecentry#1#2#3{\begingroup
! 6984: \secnowidth=\secnowidthchap
! 6985: \secentryfonts \leftskip=\tocindent
! 6986: \tocentry{#1}{#2}{#3}%
! 6987: \endgroup}
! 6988:
! 6989: \def\dosubsecentry#1#2#3{\begingroup
! 6990: \secnowidth=\secnowidthsec
! 6991: \subsecentryfonts \leftskip=2\tocindent
! 6992: \tocentry{#1}{#2}{#3}%
! 6993: \endgroup}
! 6994:
! 6995: \def\dosubsubsecentry#1#2#3{\begingroup
! 6996: \secnowidth=\secnowidthssec
! 6997: \subsubsecentryfonts \leftskip=3\tocindent
! 6998: \tocentry{#1}{#2}{#3}%
! 6999: \endgroup}
! 7000:
! 7001: % Used for the maximum width of a section number so we can align
! 7002: % section titles.
! 7003: \newdimen\secnowidth
! 7004: \secnowidth=0pt
! 7005: \newdimen\extrasecnoskip
! 7006: \extrasecnoskip=0pt
! 7007:
! 7008: % \tocentry{TITLE}{SEC NO}{PAGE}
! 7009: %
! 7010: \def\tocentry#1#2#3{%
! 7011: \def\secno{#2}%
! 7012: \ifx\empty\secno
! 7013: \entry{#1}{#3}%
! 7014: \else
! 7015: \ifdim 0pt=\secnowidth
! 7016: \setbox0=\hbox{#2\hskip\labelspace\hskip\extrasecnoskip}%
! 7017: \else
! 7018: \advance\secnowidth by \labelspace
! 7019: \advance\secnowidth by \extrasecnoskip
! 7020: \setbox0=\hbox to \secnowidth{%
! 7021: #2\hskip\labelspace\hskip\extrasecnoskip\hfill}%
! 7022: \fi
! 7023: \entrycontskip=\wd0
! 7024: \entry{\box0 #1}{#3}%
! 7025: \fi
! 7026: }
! 7027: \newdimen\labelspace
! 7028: \labelspace=0.6em
! 7029:
! 7030: \def\chapentryfonts{\secfonts \rm}
! 7031: \def\secentryfonts{\textfonts}
! 7032: \def\subsecentryfonts{\textfonts}
! 7033: \def\subsubsecentryfonts{\textfonts}
! 7034:
! 7035:
! 7036: \message{environments,}
! 7037: % @foo ... @end foo.
! 7038:
! 7039: % @tex ... @end tex escapes into raw TeX temporarily.
! 7040: % One exception: @ is still an escape character, so that @end tex works.
! 7041: % But \@ or @@ will get a plain @ character.
! 7042:
! 7043: \envdef\tex{%
! 7044: \setregularquotes
! 7045: \catcode `\\=0 \catcode `\{=1 \catcode `\}=2
! 7046: \catcode `\$=3 \catcode `\&=4 \catcode `\#=6
! 7047: \catcode `\^=7 \catcode `\_=8 \catcode `\~=\active \let~=\tie
! 7048: \catcode `\%=14
! 7049: \catcode `\+=\other
! 7050: \catcode `\"=\other
! 7051: \catcode `\|=\other
! 7052: \catcode `\<=\other
! 7053: \catcode `\>=\other
! 7054: \catcode `\`=\other
! 7055: \catcode `\'=\other
! 7056: %
! 7057: % ' is active in math mode (mathcode"8000). So reset it, and all our
! 7058: % other math active characters (just in case), to plain's definitions.
! 7059: \mathactive
! 7060: %
! 7061: % Inverse of the list at the beginning of the file.
! 7062: \let\b=\ptexb
! 7063: \let\bullet=\ptexbullet
! 7064: \let\c=\ptexc
! 7065: \let\,=\ptexcomma
! 7066: \let\.=\ptexdot
! 7067: \let\dots=\ptexdots
! 7068: \let\equiv=\ptexequiv
! 7069: \let\!=\ptexexclam
! 7070: \let\i=\ptexi
! 7071: \let\indent=\ptexindent
! 7072: \let\noindent=\ptexnoindent
! 7073: \let\{=\ptexlbrace
! 7074: \let\+=\tabalign
! 7075: \let\}=\ptexrbrace
! 7076: \let\/=\ptexslash
! 7077: \let\sp=\ptexsp
! 7078: \let\*=\ptexstar
! 7079: %\let\sup=\ptexsup % do not redefine, we want @sup to work in math mode
! 7080: \let\t=\ptext
! 7081: \expandafter \let\csname top\endcsname=\ptextop % we've made it outer
! 7082: \let\frenchspacing=\plainfrenchspacing
! 7083: %
! 7084: \def\endldots{\mathinner{\ldots\ldots\ldots\ldots}}%
! 7085: \def\enddots{\relax\ifmmode\endldots\else$\mathsurround=0pt \endldots\,$\fi}%
! 7086: \def\@{@}%
! 7087: }
! 7088: % There is no need to define \Etex.
! 7089:
! 7090: % Define @lisp ... @end lisp.
! 7091: % @lisp environment forms a group so it can rebind things,
! 7092: % including the definition of @end lisp (which normally is erroneous).
! 7093:
! 7094: % Amount to narrow the margins by for @lisp.
! 7095: \newskip\lispnarrowing \lispnarrowing=0.4in
! 7096:
! 7097: % This is the definition that ^^M gets inside @lisp, @example, and other
! 7098: % such environments. \null is better than a space, since it doesn't
! 7099: % have any width.
! 7100: \def\lisppar{\null\endgraf}
! 7101:
! 7102: % This space is always present above and below environments.
! 7103: \newskip\envskipamount \envskipamount = 0pt
! 7104:
! 7105: % Make spacing and below environment symmetrical. We use \parskip here
! 7106: % to help in doing that, since in @example-like environments \parskip
! 7107: % is reset to zero; thus the \afterenvbreak inserts no space -- but the
! 7108: % start of the next paragraph will insert \parskip.
! 7109: %
! 7110: \def\aboveenvbreak{{%
! 7111: % =10000 instead of <10000 because of a special case in \itemzzz and
! 7112: % \sectionheading, q.v.
! 7113: \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else
! 7114: \advance\envskipamount by \parskip
! 7115: \endgraf
! 7116: \ifdim\lastskip<\envskipamount
! 7117: \removelastskip
! 7118: \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000
! 7119: % Penalize breaking before the environment, because preceding text
! 7120: % often leads into it.
! 7121: \penalty100
! 7122: \fi
! 7123: \vskip\envskipamount
! 7124: \fi
! 7125: \fi
! 7126: }}
! 7127:
! 7128: \def\afterenvbreak{{%
! 7129: % =10000 instead of <10000 because of a special case in \itemzzz and
! 7130: % \sectionheading, q.v.
! 7131: \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else
! 7132: \advance\envskipamount by \parskip
! 7133: \endgraf
! 7134: \ifdim\lastskip<\envskipamount
! 7135: \removelastskip
! 7136: % it's not a good place to break if the last penalty was \nobreak
! 7137: % or better ...
! 7138: \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 \penalty-50 \fi
! 7139: \vskip\envskipamount
! 7140: \fi
! 7141: \fi
! 7142: }}
! 7143:
! 7144: % \nonarrowing is a flag. If "set", @lisp etc don't narrow margins; it will
! 7145: % also clear it, so that its embedded environments do the narrowing again.
! 7146: \let\nonarrowing=\relax
! 7147:
! 7148: % @cartouche ... @end cartouche: draw rectangle w/rounded corners around
! 7149: % environment contents.
! 7150:
! 7151: %
! 7152: \def\ctl{{\circle\char'013\hskip -6pt}}% 6pt from pl file: 1/2charwidth
! 7153: \def\ctr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'010}}
! 7154: \def\cbl{{\circle\char'012\hskip -6pt}}
! 7155: \def\cbr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'011}}
! 7156: \def\carttop{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip
! 7157: \ctl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\ctr
! 7158: \hskip\rskip}}
! 7159: \def\cartbot{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip
! 7160: \cbl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\cbr
! 7161: \hskip\rskip}}
! 7162: %
! 7163: \newskip\lskip\newskip\rskip
! 7164:
! 7165: % only require the font if @cartouche is actually used
! 7166: \def\cartouchefontdefs{%
! 7167: \font\circle=lcircle10\relax
! 7168: \circthick=\fontdimen8\circle
! 7169: }
! 7170: \newdimen\circthick
! 7171: \newdimen\cartouter\newdimen\cartinner
! 7172: \newskip\normbskip\newskip\normpskip\newskip\normlskip
! 7173:
! 7174: \envparseargdef\cartouche{%
! 7175: \cartouchefontdefs
! 7176: \ifhmode\par\fi % can't be in the midst of a paragraph.
! 7177: \startsavinginserts
! 7178: \lskip=\leftskip \rskip=\rightskip
! 7179: \leftskip=0pt\rightskip=0pt % we want these *outside*.
! 7180: %
! 7181: % Set paragraph width for text inside cartouche. There are
! 7182: % left and right margins of 3pt each plus two vrules 0.4pt each.
! 7183: \cartinner=\hsize \advance\cartinner by-\lskip
! 7184: \advance\cartinner by-\rskip
! 7185: \advance\cartinner by -6.8pt
! 7186: %
! 7187: % For drawing top and bottom of cartouche. Each corner char
! 7188: % adds 6pt and we take off the width of a rule to line up with the
! 7189: % right boundary perfectly.
! 7190: \cartouter=\hsize
! 7191: \advance\cartouter by 11.6pt
! 7192: %
! 7193: \normbskip=\baselineskip \normpskip=\parskip \normlskip=\lineskip
! 7194: %
! 7195: % If this cartouche directly follows a sectioning command, we need the
! 7196: % \parskip glue (backspaced over by default) or the cartouche can
! 7197: % collide with the section heading.
! 7198: \ifnum\lastpenalty>10000 \vskip\parskip \penalty\lastpenalty \fi
! 7199: %
! 7200: \setbox\groupbox=\vtop\bgroup
! 7201: \baselineskip=0pt\parskip=0pt\lineskip=0pt
! 7202: \carttop
! 7203: \hbox\bgroup
! 7204: \hskip\lskip
! 7205: \vrule\kern3pt
! 7206: \vbox\bgroup
! 7207: \hsize=\cartinner
! 7208: \baselineskip=\normbskip
! 7209: \lineskip=\normlskip
! 7210: \parskip=\normpskip
! 7211: \def\arg{#1}%
! 7212: \ifx\arg\empty\else
! 7213: \centerV{\hfil \bf #1 \hfil}%
! 7214: \fi
! 7215: \kern3pt
! 7216: \vskip -\parskip
! 7217: }
! 7218: \def\Ecartouche{%
! 7219: \ifhmode\par\fi
! 7220: \kern3pt
! 7221: \egroup
! 7222: \kern3pt\vrule
! 7223: \hskip\rskip
! 7224: \egroup
! 7225: \cartbot
! 7226: \egroup
! 7227: \addgroupbox
! 7228: \checkinserts
! 7229: }
! 7230:
! 7231:
! 7232: % This macro is called at the beginning of all the @example variants,
! 7233: % inside a group.
! 7234: \newdimen\nonfillparindent
! 7235: \def\nonfillstart{%
! 7236: \aboveenvbreak
! 7237: \ifdim\hfuzz < 12pt \hfuzz = 12pt \fi % Don't be fussy
! 7238: \sepspaces % Make spaces be word-separators rather than space tokens.
! 7239: \let\par = \lisppar % don't ignore blank lines
! 7240: \obeylines % each line of input is a line of output
! 7241: \parskip = 0pt
! 7242: % Turn off paragraph indentation but redefine \indent to emulate
! 7243: % the normal \indent.
! 7244: \nonfillparindent=\parindent
! 7245: \parindent = 0pt
! 7246: \let\indent\nonfillindent
! 7247: %
! 7248: \emergencystretch = 0pt % don't try to avoid overfull boxes
! 7249: \ifx\nonarrowing\relax
! 7250: \advance \leftskip by \lispnarrowing
! 7251: \exdentamount=\lispnarrowing
! 7252: \else
! 7253: \let\nonarrowing = \relax
! 7254: \fi
! 7255: \let\exdent=\nofillexdent
! 7256: }
! 7257:
! 7258: \begingroup
! 7259: \obeyspaces
! 7260: % We want to swallow spaces (but not other tokens) after the fake
! 7261: % @indent in our nonfill-environments, where spaces are normally
! 7262: % active and set to @tie, resulting in them not being ignored after
! 7263: % @indent.
! 7264: \gdef\nonfillindent{\futurelet\temp\nonfillindentcheck}%
! 7265: \gdef\nonfillindentcheck{%
! 7266: \ifx\temp %
! 7267: \expandafter\nonfillindentgobble%
! 7268: \else%
! 7269: \leavevmode\nonfillindentbox%
! 7270: \fi%
! 7271: }%
! 7272: \endgroup
! 7273: \def\nonfillindentgobble#1{\nonfillindent}
! 7274: \def\nonfillindentbox{\hbox to \nonfillparindent{\hss}}
! 7275:
! 7276: % If you want all examples etc. small: @set dispenvsize small.
! 7277: % If you want even small examples the full size: @set dispenvsize nosmall.
! 7278: % This affects the following displayed environments:
! 7279: % @example, @display, @format, @lisp, @verbatim
! 7280: %
! 7281: \def\smallword{small}
! 7282: \def\nosmallword{nosmall}
! 7283: \let\SETdispenvsize\relax
! 7284: \def\setnormaldispenv{%
! 7285: \ifx\SETdispenvsize\smallword
! 7286: % end paragraph for sake of leading, in case document has no blank
! 7287: % line. This is redundant with what happens in \aboveenvbreak, but
! 7288: % we need to do it before changing the fonts, and it's inconvenient
! 7289: % to change the fonts afterward.
! 7290: \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else \endgraf \fi
! 7291: \smallexamplefonts \rm
! 7292: \fi
! 7293: }
! 7294: \def\setsmalldispenv{%
! 7295: \ifx\SETdispenvsize\nosmallword
! 7296: \else
! 7297: \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else \endgraf \fi
! 7298: \smallexamplefonts \rm
! 7299: \fi
! 7300: }
! 7301:
! 7302: % We often define two environments, @foo and @smallfoo.
! 7303: % Let's do it in one command. #1 is the env name, #2 the definition.
! 7304: \def\makedispenvdef#1#2{%
! 7305: \expandafter\envdef\csname#1\endcsname {\setnormaldispenv #2}%
! 7306: \expandafter\envdef\csname small#1\endcsname {\setsmalldispenv #2}%
! 7307: \expandafter\let\csname E#1\endcsname \afterenvbreak
! 7308: \expandafter\let\csname Esmall#1\endcsname \afterenvbreak
! 7309: }
! 7310:
! 7311: % Define two environment synonyms (#1 and #2) for an environment.
! 7312: \def\maketwodispenvdef#1#2#3{%
! 7313: \makedispenvdef{#1}{#3}%
! 7314: \makedispenvdef{#2}{#3}%
! 7315: }
! 7316: %
! 7317: % @lisp: indented, narrowed, typewriter font;
! 7318: % @example: same as @lisp.
! 7319: %
! 7320: % @smallexample and @smalllisp: use smaller fonts.
! 7321: % Originally contributed by Pavel@xerox.
! 7322: %
! 7323: \maketwodispenvdef{lisp}{example}{%
! 7324: \nonfillstart
! 7325: \tt\setcodequotes
! 7326: \let\kbdfont = \kbdexamplefont % Allow @kbd to do something special.
! 7327: \parsearg\gobble
! 7328: }
! 7329: % @display/@smalldisplay: same as @lisp except keep current font.
! 7330: %
! 7331: \makedispenvdef{display}{%
! 7332: \nonfillstart
! 7333: \gobble
! 7334: }
! 7335:
! 7336: % @format/@smallformat: same as @display except don't narrow margins.
! 7337: %
! 7338: \makedispenvdef{format}{%
! 7339: \let\nonarrowing = t%
! 7340: \nonfillstart
! 7341: \gobble
! 7342: }
! 7343:
! 7344: % @flushleft: same as @format, but doesn't obey \SETdispenvsize.
! 7345: \envdef\flushleft{%
! 7346: \let\nonarrowing = t%
! 7347: \nonfillstart
! 7348: \gobble
! 7349: }
! 7350: \let\Eflushleft = \afterenvbreak
! 7351:
! 7352: % @flushright.
! 7353: %
! 7354: \envdef\flushright{%
! 7355: \let\nonarrowing = t%
! 7356: \nonfillstart
! 7357: \advance\leftskip by 0pt plus 1fill\relax
! 7358: \gobble
! 7359: }
! 7360: \let\Eflushright = \afterenvbreak
! 7361:
! 7362:
! 7363: % @raggedright does more-or-less normal line breaking but no right
! 7364: % justification. From plain.tex.
! 7365: \envdef\raggedright{%
! 7366: \rightskip0pt plus2.4em \spaceskip.3333em \xspaceskip.5em\relax
! 7367: }
! 7368: \let\Eraggedright\par
! 7369:
! 7370:
! 7371: % @quotation does normal linebreaking (hence we can't use \nonfillstart)
! 7372: % and narrows the margins. We keep \parskip nonzero in general, since
! 7373: % we're doing normal filling. So, when using \aboveenvbreak and
! 7374: % \afterenvbreak, temporarily make \parskip 0.
! 7375: %
! 7376: \makedispenvdef{quotation}{\quotationstart}
! 7377: %
! 7378: \def\quotationstart{%
! 7379: \indentedblockstart % same as \indentedblock, but increase right margin too.
! 7380: \ifx\nonarrowing\relax
! 7381: \advance\rightskip by \lispnarrowing
! 7382: \fi
! 7383: \parsearg\quotationlabel
! 7384: }
! 7385:
! 7386: % We have retained a nonzero parskip for the environment, since we're
! 7387: % doing normal filling.
! 7388: %
! 7389: \def\Equotation{%
! 7390: \par
! 7391: \ifx\quotationauthor\thisisundefined\else
! 7392: % indent a bit.
! 7393: \leftline{\kern 2\leftskip \sl ---\quotationauthor}%
! 7394: \fi
! 7395: {\parskip=0pt \afterenvbreak}%
! 7396: }
! 7397: \def\Esmallquotation{\Equotation}
! 7398:
! 7399: % If we're given an argument, typeset it in bold with a colon after.
! 7400: \def\quotationlabel#1{%
! 7401: \def\temp{#1}%
! 7402: \ifx\temp\empty \else
! 7403: {\bf #1: }%
! 7404: \fi
! 7405: }
! 7406:
! 7407: % @indentedblock is like @quotation, but indents only on the left and
! 7408: % has no optional argument.
! 7409: %
! 7410: \makedispenvdef{indentedblock}{\indentedblockstart}
! 7411: %
! 7412: \def\indentedblockstart{%
! 7413: {\parskip=0pt \aboveenvbreak}% because \aboveenvbreak inserts \parskip
! 7414: \parindent=0pt
! 7415: %
! 7416: % @cartouche defines \nonarrowing to inhibit narrowing at next level down.
! 7417: \ifx\nonarrowing\relax
! 7418: \advance\leftskip by \lispnarrowing
! 7419: \exdentamount = \lispnarrowing
! 7420: \else
! 7421: \let\nonarrowing = \relax
! 7422: \fi
! 7423: }
! 7424:
! 7425: % Keep a nonzero parskip for the environment, since we're doing normal filling.
! 7426: %
! 7427: \def\Eindentedblock{%
! 7428: \par
! 7429: {\parskip=0pt \afterenvbreak}%
! 7430: }
! 7431: \def\Esmallindentedblock{\Eindentedblock}
! 7432:
! 7433:
! 7434: % LaTeX-like @verbatim...@end verbatim and @verb{<char>...<char>}
! 7435: % If we want to allow any <char> as delimiter,
! 7436: % we need the curly braces so that makeinfo sees the @verb command, eg:
! 7437: % `@verbx...x' would look like the '@verbx' command. --janneke@gnu.org
! 7438: %
! 7439: % [Knuth]: Donald Ervin Knuth, 1996. The TeXbook.
! 7440: %
! 7441: % [Knuth] p.344; only we need to do the other characters Texinfo sets
! 7442: % active too. Otherwise, they get lost as the first character on a
! 7443: % verbatim line.
! 7444: \def\dospecials{%
! 7445: \do\ \do\\\do\{\do\}\do\$\do\&%
! 7446: \do\#\do\^\do\^^K\do\_\do\^^A\do\%\do\~%
! 7447: \do\<\do\>\do\|\do\@\do+\do\"%
! 7448: % Don't do the quotes -- if we do, @set txicodequoteundirected and
! 7449: % @set txicodequotebacktick will not have effect on @verb and
! 7450: % @verbatim, and ?` and !` ligatures won't get disabled.
! 7451: %\do\`\do\'%
! 7452: }
! 7453: %
! 7454: % [Knuth] p. 380
! 7455: \def\uncatcodespecials{%
! 7456: \def\do##1{\catcode`##1=\other}\dospecials}
! 7457: %
! 7458: % Setup for the @verb command.
! 7459: %
! 7460: % Eight spaces for a tab
! 7461: \begingroup
! 7462: \catcode`\^^I=\active
! 7463: \gdef\tabeightspaces{\catcode`\^^I=\active\def^^I{\ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ }}
! 7464: \endgroup
! 7465: %
! 7466: \def\setupverb{%
! 7467: \tt
! 7468: \def\par{\leavevmode\endgraf}%
! 7469: \parindent = 0pt
! 7470: \setcodequotes
! 7471: \tabeightspaces
! 7472: % Respect line breaks,
! 7473: % print special symbols as themselves, and
! 7474: % make each space count
! 7475: % must do in this order:
! 7476: \obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces
! 7477: }
! 7478:
! 7479: % Setup for the @verbatim environment
! 7480: %
! 7481: % Real tab expansion.
! 7482: \newdimen\tabw \setbox0=\hbox{\tt\space} \tabw=8\wd0 % tab amount
! 7483: %
! 7484: % We typeset each line of the verbatim in an \hbox, so we can handle
! 7485: % tabs.
! 7486: \newbox\verbbox
! 7487: \def\starttabbox{\setbox\verbbox=\hbox\bgroup}
! 7488: %
! 7489: \begingroup
! 7490: \catcode`\^^I=\active
! 7491: \gdef\tabexpand{%
! 7492: \catcode`\^^I=\active
! 7493: \def^^I{\leavevmode\egroup
! 7494: \dimen\verbbox=\wd\verbbox % the width so far, or since the previous tab
! 7495: \divide\dimen\verbbox by\tabw
! 7496: \multiply\dimen\verbbox by\tabw % compute previous multiple of \tabw
! 7497: \advance\dimen\verbbox by\tabw % advance to next multiple of \tabw
! 7498: \wd\verbbox=\dimen\verbbox
! 7499: \leavevmode\box\verbbox \starttabbox
! 7500: }%
! 7501: }
! 7502: \endgroup
! 7503:
! 7504: % start the verbatim environment.
! 7505: \def\setupverbatim{%
! 7506: \let\nonarrowing = t%
! 7507: \nonfillstart
! 7508: \tt % easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim
! 7509: \def\par{\egroup\leavevmode\box\verbbox\endgraf\starttabbox}%
! 7510: \tabexpand
! 7511: \setcodequotes
! 7512: % Respect line breaks,
! 7513: % print special symbols as themselves, and
! 7514: % make each space count.
! 7515: % Must do in this order:
! 7516: \obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces
! 7517: }
! 7518:
! 7519: % Do the @verb magic: verbatim text is quoted by unique
! 7520: % delimiter characters. Before first delimiter expect a
! 7521: % right brace, after last delimiter expect closing brace:
! 7522: %
! 7523: % \def\doverb'{'<char>#1<char>'}'{#1}
! 7524: %
! 7525: % [Knuth] p. 382; only eat outer {}
! 7526: \begingroup
! 7527: \catcode`[=1\catcode`]=2\catcode`\{=\other\catcode`\}=\other
! 7528: \gdef\doverb{#1[\def\next##1#1}[##1\endgroup]\next]
! 7529: \endgroup
! 7530: %
! 7531: \def\verb{\begingroup\setupverb\doverb}
! 7532: %
! 7533: %
! 7534: % Do the @verbatim magic: define the macro \doverbatim so that
! 7535: % the (first) argument ends when '@end verbatim' is reached, ie:
! 7536: %
! 7537: % \def\doverbatim#1@end verbatim{#1}
! 7538: %
! 7539: % For Texinfo it's a lot easier than for LaTeX,
! 7540: % because texinfo's \verbatim doesn't stop at '\end{verbatim}':
! 7541: % we need not redefine '\', '{' and '}'.
! 7542: %
! 7543: % Inspired by LaTeX's verbatim command set [latex.ltx]
! 7544: %
! 7545: \begingroup
! 7546: \catcode`\ =\active
! 7547: \obeylines %
! 7548: % ignore everything up to the first ^^M, that's the newline at the end
! 7549: % of the @verbatim input line itself. Otherwise we get an extra blank
! 7550: % line in the output.
! 7551: \xdef\doverbatim#1^^M#2@end verbatim{%
! 7552: \starttabbox#2\egroup\noexpand\end\gobble verbatim}%
! 7553: % We really want {...\end verbatim} in the body of the macro, but
! 7554: % without the active space; thus we have to use \xdef and \gobble.
! 7555: % The \egroup ends the \verbbox started at the end of the last line in
! 7556: % the block.
! 7557: \endgroup
! 7558: %
! 7559: \envdef\verbatim{%
! 7560: \setnormaldispenv\setupverbatim\doverbatim
! 7561: }
! 7562: \let\Everbatim = \afterenvbreak
! 7563:
! 7564:
! 7565: % @verbatiminclude FILE - insert text of file in verbatim environment.
! 7566: %
! 7567: \def\verbatiminclude{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\doverbatiminclude}
! 7568: %
! 7569: \def\doverbatiminclude#1{%
! 7570: {%
! 7571: \makevalueexpandable
! 7572: \setupverbatim
! 7573: {%
! 7574: \indexnofonts % Allow `@@' and other weird things in file names.
! 7575: \wlog{texinfo.tex: doing @verbatiminclude of #1^^J}%
! 7576: \edef\tmp{\noexpand\input #1 }
! 7577: \expandafter
! 7578: }\expandafter\starttabbox\tmp\egroup
! 7579: \afterenvbreak
! 7580: }%
! 7581: }
! 7582:
! 7583: % @copying ... @end copying.
! 7584: % Save the text away for @insertcopying later.
! 7585: %
! 7586: % We save the uninterpreted tokens, rather than creating a box.
! 7587: % Saving the text in a box would be much easier, but then all the
! 7588: % typesetting commands (@smallbook, font changes, etc.) have to be done
! 7589: % beforehand -- and a) we want @copying to be done first in the source
! 7590: % file; b) letting users define the frontmatter in as flexible order as
! 7591: % possible is desirable.
! 7592: %
! 7593: \def\copying{\checkenv{}\begingroup\macrobodyctxt\docopying}
! 7594: {\catcode`\ =\other
! 7595: \gdef\docopying#1@end copying{\endgroup\def\copyingtext{#1}}
! 7596: }
! 7597:
! 7598: \def\insertcopying{%
! 7599: \begingroup
! 7600: \parindent = 0pt % paragraph indentation looks wrong on title page
! 7601: \scanexp\copyingtext
! 7602: \endgroup
! 7603: }
! 7604:
! 7605:
! 7606: \message{defuns,}
! 7607: % @defun etc.
! 7608:
! 7609: \newskip\defbodyindent \defbodyindent=.4in
! 7610: \newskip\defargsindent \defargsindent=50pt
! 7611: \newskip\deflastargmargin \deflastargmargin=18pt
! 7612: \newcount\defunpenalty
! 7613:
! 7614: % Start the processing of @deffn:
! 7615: \def\startdefun{%
! 7616: \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000
! 7617: \medbreak
! 7618: \defunpenalty=10003 % Will keep this @deffn together with the
! 7619: % following @def command, see below.
! 7620: \else
! 7621: % If there are two @def commands in a row, we'll have a \nobreak,
! 7622: % which is there to keep the function description together with its
! 7623: % header. But if there's nothing but headers, we need to allow a
! 7624: % break somewhere. Check specifically for penalty 10002, inserted
! 7625: % by \printdefunline, instead of 10000, since the sectioning
! 7626: % commands also insert a nobreak penalty, and we don't want to allow
! 7627: % a break between a section heading and a defun.
! 7628: %
! 7629: % As a further refinement, we avoid "club" headers by signalling
! 7630: % with penalty of 10003 after the very first @deffn in the
! 7631: % sequence (see above), and penalty of 10002 after any following
! 7632: % @def command.
! 7633: \ifnum\lastpenalty=10002 \penalty2000 \else \defunpenalty=10002 \fi
! 7634: %
! 7635: % Similarly, after a section heading, do not allow a break.
! 7636: % But do insert the glue.
! 7637: \medskip % preceded by discardable penalty, so not a breakpoint
! 7638: \fi
! 7639: %
! 7640: \parindent=0in
! 7641: \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
! 7642: \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
! 7643: }
! 7644:
! 7645: % Called as \printdefunline \deffooheader{text}
! 7646: %
! 7647: \def\printdefunline#1#2{%
! 7648: \begingroup
! 7649: \plainfrenchspacing
! 7650: % call \deffooheader:
! 7651: #1#2 \endheader
! 7652: % common ending:
! 7653: \interlinepenalty = 10000
! 7654: \advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fil\relax
! 7655: \endgraf
! 7656: \nobreak\vskip -\parskip
! 7657: \penalty\defunpenalty % signal to \startdefun and \deffoox
! 7658: % Some of the @defun-type tags do not enable magic parentheses,
! 7659: % rendering the following check redundant. But we don't optimize.
! 7660: \checkparencounts
! 7661: \endgroup
! 7662: }
! 7663:
! 7664: \def\Edefun{\endgraf\medbreak}
! 7665:
! 7666: % @defblock, @defline do not automatically create index entries
! 7667: \envdef\defblock{%
! 7668: \startdefun
! 7669: }
! 7670: \let\Edefblock\Edefun
! 7671:
! 7672: \def\defline{%
! 7673: \doingtypefnfalse
! 7674: \parseargusing\activeparens{\printdefunline\deflineheader}%
! 7675: }
! 7676: \def\deflineheader#1 #2 #3\endheader{%
! 7677: \printdefname{#1}{}{#2}\magicamp\defunargs{#3\unskip}%
! 7678: }
! 7679:
! 7680: \def\deftypeline{%
! 7681: \doingtypefntrue
! 7682: \parseargusing\activeparens{\printdefunline\deftypelineheader}%
! 7683: }
! 7684: \def\deftypelineheader#1 #2 #3 #4\endheader{%
! 7685: \printdefname{#1}{#2}{#3}\magicamp\defunargs{#4\unskip}%
! 7686: }
! 7687:
! 7688: % \makedefun{deffoo} (\deffooheader parameters) { (\deffooheader expansion) }
! 7689: %
! 7690: % Define \deffoo, \deffoox \Edeffoo and \deffooheader.
! 7691: \def\makedefun#1{%
! 7692: \expandafter\let\csname E#1\endcsname = \Edefun
! 7693: \edef\temp{\noexpand\domakedefun
! 7694: \makecsname{#1}\makecsname{#1x}\makecsname{#1header}}%
! 7695: \temp
! 7696: }
! 7697: \def\domakedefun#1#2#3{%
! 7698: \envdef#1{%
! 7699: \startdefun
! 7700: \doingtypefnfalse % distinguish typed functions from all else
! 7701: \parseargusing\activeparens{\printdefunline#3}%
! 7702: }%
! 7703: \def#2{%
! 7704: % First, check whether we are in the right environment:
! 7705: \checkenv#1%
! 7706: %
! 7707: % As in \startdefun, allow line break if we have multiple x headers
! 7708: % in a row. It's not a great place, though.
! 7709: \ifnum\lastpenalty=10002 \penalty3000 \else \defunpenalty=10002 \fi
! 7710: %
! 7711: \doingtypefnfalse % distinguish typed functions from all else
! 7712: \parseargusing\activeparens{\printdefunline#3}%
! 7713: }%
! 7714: \def#3% definition of \deffooheader follows
! 7715: }
! 7716:
! 7717: \newif\ifdoingtypefn % doing typed function?
! 7718: \newif\ifrettypeownline % typeset return type on its own line?
! 7719:
! 7720: % @deftypefnnewline on|off says whether the return type of typed functions
! 7721: % are printed on their own line. This affects @deftypefn, @deftypefun,
! 7722: % @deftypeop, and @deftypemethod.
! 7723: %
! 7724: \parseargdef\deftypefnnewline{%
! 7725: \def\temp{#1}%
! 7726: \ifx\temp\onword
! 7727: \expandafter\let\csname SETtxideftypefnnl\endcsname
! 7728: = \empty
! 7729: \else\ifx\temp\offword
! 7730: \expandafter\let\csname SETtxideftypefnnl\endcsname
! 7731: = \relax
! 7732: \else
! 7733: \errhelp = \EMsimple
! 7734: \errmessage{Unknown @txideftypefnnl value `\temp',
! 7735: must be on|off}%
! 7736: \fi\fi
! 7737: }
! 7738:
! 7739: % Untyped functions:
! 7740:
! 7741: % @deffn category name args
! 7742: \makedefun{deffn}#1 #2 #3\endheader{%
! 7743: \doind{fn}{\code{#2}}%
! 7744: \printdefname{#1}{}{#2}\magicamp\defunargs{#3\unskip}%
! 7745: }
! 7746:
! 7747: % @defop category class name args
! 7748: \makedefun{defop}#1 {\defopheaderx{#1\ \putwordon}}
! 7749: \def\defopheaderx#1#2 #3 #4\endheader{%
! 7750: \doind{fn}{\code{#3}\space\putwordon\ \code{#2}}%
! 7751: \printdefname{#1\ \code{#2}}{}{#3}\magicamp\defunargs{#4\unskip}%
! 7752: }
! 7753:
! 7754: % Typed functions:
! 7755:
! 7756: % @deftypefn category type name args
! 7757: \makedefun{deftypefn}#1 #2 #3 #4\endheader{%
! 7758: \doind{fn}{\code{#3}}%
! 7759: \doingtypefntrue
! 7760: \printdefname{#1}{#2}{#3}\defunargs{#4\unskip}%
! 7761: }
! 7762:
! 7763: % @deftypeop category class type name args
! 7764: \makedefun{deftypeop}#1 {\deftypeopheaderx{#1\ \putwordon}}
! 7765: \def\deftypeopheaderx#1#2 #3 #4 #5\endheader{%
! 7766: \doind{fn}{\code{#4}\space\putwordon\ \code{#1\ \code{#2}}}%
! 7767: \doingtypefntrue
! 7768: \printdefname{#1\ \code{#2}}{#3}{#4}\defunargs{#5\unskip}%
! 7769: }
! 7770:
! 7771: % Typed variables:
! 7772:
! 7773: % @deftypevr category type var args
! 7774: \makedefun{deftypevr}#1 #2 #3 #4\endheader{%
! 7775: \doind{vr}{\code{#3}}%
! 7776: \printdefname{#1}{#2}{#3}\defunargs{#4\unskip}%
! 7777: }
! 7778:
! 7779: % @deftypecv category class type var args
! 7780: \makedefun{deftypecv}#1 {\deftypecvheaderx{#1\ \putwordof}}
! 7781: \def\deftypecvheaderx#1#2 #3 #4 #5\endheader{%
! 7782: \doind{vr}{\code{#4}\space\putwordof\ \code{#2}}%
! 7783: \printdefname{#1\ \code{#2}}{#3}{#4}\defunargs{#5\unskip}%
! 7784: }
! 7785:
! 7786: % Untyped variables:
! 7787:
! 7788: % @defvr category var args
! 7789: \makedefun{defvr}#1 {\deftypevrheader{#1} {} }
! 7790:
! 7791: % @defcv category class var args
! 7792: \makedefun{defcv}#1 {\defcvheaderx{#1\ \putwordof}}
! 7793: \def\defcvheaderx#1#2 {\deftypecvheaderx{#1}#2 {} }
! 7794:
! 7795: % Types:
! 7796:
! 7797: % @deftp category name args
! 7798: \makedefun{deftp}#1 #2 #3\endheader{%
! 7799: \doind{tp}{\code{#2}}%
! 7800: \printdefname{#1}{}{#2}\defunargs{#3\unskip}%
! 7801: }
! 7802:
! 7803: % Remaining @defun-like shortcuts:
! 7804: \makedefun{defun}{\deffnheader{\putwordDeffunc} }
! 7805: \makedefun{defmac}{\deffnheader{\putwordDefmac} }
! 7806: \makedefun{defspec}{\deffnheader{\putwordDefspec} }
! 7807: \makedefun{deftypefun}{\deftypefnheader{\putwordDeffunc} }
! 7808: \makedefun{defvar}{\defvrheader{\putwordDefvar} }
! 7809: \makedefun{defopt}{\defvrheader{\putwordDefopt} }
! 7810: \makedefun{deftypevar}{\deftypevrheader{\putwordDefvar} }
! 7811: \makedefun{defmethod}{\defopheaderx\putwordMethodon}
! 7812: \makedefun{deftypemethod}{\deftypeopheaderx\putwordMethodon}
! 7813: \makedefun{defivar}{\defcvheaderx\putwordInstanceVariableof}
! 7814: \makedefun{deftypeivar}{\deftypecvheaderx\putwordInstanceVariableof}
! 7815:
! 7816: % \printdefname, which formats the name of the @def (not the args).
! 7817: % #1 is the category, such as "Function".
! 7818: % #2 is the return type, if any.
! 7819: % #3 is the function name.
! 7820: %
! 7821: % We are followed by (but not passed) the arguments, if any.
! 7822: %
! 7823: \def\printdefname#1#2#3{%
! 7824: \par
! 7825: % Get the values of \leftskip and \rightskip as they were outside the @def...
! 7826: \advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent
! 7827: %
! 7828: % Determine if we are typesetting the return type of a typed function
! 7829: % on a line by itself.
! 7830: \rettypeownlinefalse
! 7831: \ifdoingtypefn % doing a typed function specifically?
! 7832: % then check user option for putting return type on its own line:
! 7833: \ifflagclear{txideftypefnnl}{}{\rettypeownlinetrue}%
! 7834: \fi
! 7835: %
! 7836: % How we'll format the category name. Putting it in brackets helps
! 7837: % distinguish it from the body text that may end up on the next line
! 7838: % just below it.
! 7839: \def\temp{#1}%
! 7840: \setbox0=\hbox{\kern\deflastargmargin \ifx\temp\empty\else [\rm\temp]\fi}
! 7841: %
! 7842: % Figure out line sizes for the paragraph shape. We'll always have at
! 7843: % least two.
! 7844: \tempnum = 2
! 7845: %
! 7846: % The first line needs space for \box0; but if \rightskip is nonzero,
! 7847: % we need only space for the part of \box0 which exceeds it:
! 7848: \dimen0=\hsize \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0 \advance\dimen0 by \rightskip
! 7849: %
! 7850: % If doing a return type on its own line, we'll have another line.
! 7851: \ifrettypeownline
! 7852: \advance\tempnum by 1
! 7853: \def\maybeshapeline{0in \hsize}%
! 7854: \else
! 7855: \def\maybeshapeline{}%
! 7856: \fi
! 7857: %
! 7858: % The continuations:
! 7859: \dimen2=\hsize \advance\dimen2 by -\defargsindent
! 7860: %
! 7861: % The final paragraph shape:
! 7862: \parshape \tempnum 0in \dimen0 \maybeshapeline \defargsindent \dimen2
! 7863: %
! 7864: % Put the category name at the right margin.
! 7865: \noindent
! 7866: \hbox to 0pt{%
! 7867: \hfil\box0 \kern-\hsize
! 7868: % \hsize has to be shortened this way:
! 7869: \kern\leftskip
! 7870: % Intentionally do not respect \rightskip, since we need the space.
! 7871: }%
! 7872: %
! 7873: % Allow all lines to be underfull without complaint:
! 7874: \tolerance=10000 \hbadness=10000
! 7875: \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
! 7876: {%
! 7877: \def\^^M{}% for line continuation
! 7878: %
! 7879: % defun fonts. We use typewriter by default (used to be bold) because:
! 7880: % . we're printing identifiers, they should be in tt in principle.
! 7881: % . in languages with many accents, such as Czech or French, it's
! 7882: % common to leave accents off identifiers. The result looks ok in
! 7883: % tt, but exceedingly strange in rm.
! 7884: % . we don't want -- and --- to be treated as ligatures.
! 7885: % . this still does not fix the ?` and !` ligatures, but so far no
! 7886: % one has made identifiers using them :).
! 7887: \df \tt
! 7888: \def\temp{#2}% text of the return type
! 7889: \ifx\temp\empty\else
! 7890: \tclose{\temp}% typeset the return type
! 7891: \ifrettypeownline
! 7892: % put return type on its own line; prohibit line break following:
! 7893: \hfil\vadjust{\nobreak}\break
! 7894: \else
! 7895: \space % type on same line, so just followed by a space
! 7896: \fi
! 7897: \fi % no return type
! 7898: #3% output function name
! 7899: }%
! 7900: \ifflagclear{txidefnamenospace}{%
! 7901: {\rm\enskip}% hskip 0.5 em of \rmfont
! 7902: }{}%
! 7903: %
! 7904: \boldbrax
! 7905: % arguments will be output next, if any.
! 7906: }
! 7907:
! 7908: % Print arguments. Use slanted for @def*, typewriter for @deftype*.
! 7909: \def\defunargs#1{%
! 7910: \bgroup
! 7911: \def\^^M{}% for line continuation
! 7912: \df \ifdoingtypefn \tt \else \sl \fi
! 7913: \ifflagclear{txicodevaristt}{}%
! 7914: {\def\var##1{{\setregularquotes \ttsl ##1}}}%
! 7915: #1%
! 7916: \egroup
! 7917: }
! 7918:
! 7919: % We want ()&[] to print specially on the defun line.
! 7920: %
! 7921: \def\activeparens{%
! 7922: \catcode`\(=\active \catcode`\)=\active
! 7923: \catcode`\[=\active \catcode`\]=\active
! 7924: \catcode`\&=\active
! 7925: }
! 7926:
! 7927: % Make control sequences which act like normal parenthesis chars.
! 7928: \let\lparen = ( \let\rparen = )
! 7929:
! 7930: % Be sure that we always have a definition for `(', etc. For example,
! 7931: % if the fn name has parens in it, \boldbrax will not be in effect yet,
! 7932: % so TeX would otherwise complain about undefined control sequence.
! 7933: {
! 7934: \activeparens
! 7935: \gdef\defcharsdefault{%
! 7936: \let(=\lparen \let)=\rparen
! 7937: \let[=\lbrack \let]=\rbrack
! 7938: \let& = \&%
! 7939: }
! 7940: \globaldefs=1 \defcharsdefault
! 7941:
! 7942: \gdef\boldbrax{\let(=\opnr\let)=\clnr\let[=\lbrb\let]=\rbrb}
! 7943: \gdef\magicamp{\let&=\amprm}
! 7944: }
! 7945: \let\ampchar\&
! 7946:
! 7947: \newcount\parencount
! 7948:
! 7949: % If we encounter &foo, then turn on ()-hacking afterwards
! 7950: \newif\ifampseen
! 7951: \def\amprm#1 {\ampseentrue{\rm\ }}
! 7952:
! 7953: \def\parenfont{%
! 7954: \ifampseen
! 7955: % At the first level, print parens in roman,
! 7956: % otherwise use the default font.
! 7957: \ifnum \parencount=1 \rm \fi
! 7958: \else
! 7959: % The \sf parens (in \boldbrax) actually are a little bolder than
! 7960: % the contained text. This is especially needed for [ and ] .
! 7961: \sf
! 7962: \fi
! 7963: }
! 7964: \def\infirstlevel#1{%
! 7965: \ifampseen
! 7966: \ifnum\parencount=1
! 7967: #1%
! 7968: \fi
! 7969: \fi
! 7970: }
! 7971: \def\bfafterword#1 {#1 \bf}
! 7972:
! 7973: \def\opnr{%
! 7974: \global\advance\parencount by 1
! 7975: {\parenfont(}%
! 7976: \infirstlevel \bfafterword
! 7977: }
! 7978: \def\clnr{%
! 7979: {\parenfont)}%
! 7980: \infirstlevel \sl
! 7981: \global\advance\parencount by -1
! 7982: }
! 7983:
! 7984: \newcount\brackcount
! 7985: \def\lbrb{%
! 7986: \global\advance\brackcount by 1
! 7987: {\bf[}%
! 7988: }
! 7989: \def\rbrb{%
! 7990: {\bf]}%
! 7991: \global\advance\brackcount by -1
! 7992: }
! 7993:
! 7994: \def\checkparencounts{%
! 7995: \ifnum\parencount=0 \else \badparencount \fi
! 7996: \ifnum\brackcount=0 \else \badbrackcount \fi
! 7997: }
! 7998: % these should not use \errmessage; the glibc manual, at least, actually
! 7999: % has such constructs (when documenting function pointers).
! 8000: \def\badparencount{%
! 8001: \message{Warning: unbalanced parentheses in @def...}%
! 8002: \global\parencount=0
! 8003: }
! 8004: \def\badbrackcount{%
! 8005: \message{Warning: unbalanced square brackets in @def...}%
! 8006: \global\brackcount=0
! 8007: }
! 8008:
! 8009:
! 8010: \message{macros,}
! 8011: % @macro.
! 8012:
! 8013: % To do this right we need a feature of e-TeX, \scantokens,
! 8014: % which we arrange to emulate with a temporary file in ordinary TeX.
! 8015: \ifx\eTeXversion\thisisundefined
! 8016: \newwrite\macscribble
! 8017: \def\scantokens#1{%
! 8018: \toks0={#1}%
! 8019: \immediate\openout\macscribble=\jobname.tmp
! 8020: \immediate\write\macscribble{\the\toks0}%
! 8021: \immediate\closeout\macscribble
! 8022: \input \jobname.tmp
! 8023: }
! 8024: \fi
! 8025:
! 8026: \let\E=\expandafter
! 8027:
! 8028: % Used at the time of macro expansion.
! 8029: % Argument is macro body with arguments substituted
! 8030: \def\scanmacro#1{%
! 8031: \newlinechar`\^^M
! 8032: % expand the expansion of \eatleadingcr twice to maybe remove a leading
! 8033: % newline (and \else and \fi tokens), then call \eatspaces on the result.
! 8034: \def\xeatspaces##1{%
! 8035: \E\E\E\E\E\E\E\eatspaces\E\E\E\E\E\E\E{\eatleadingcr##1%
! 8036: }}%
! 8037: \def\xempty##1{}%
! 8038: %
! 8039: % Process the macro body under the current catcode regime.
! 8040: \scantokens{#1@comment}%
! 8041: %
! 8042: % The \comment is to remove the \newlinechar added by \scantokens, and
! 8043: % can be noticed by \parsearg. Note \c isn't used because this means cedilla
! 8044: % in math mode.
! 8045: }
! 8046:
! 8047: % Used for copying and captions
! 8048: \def\scanexp#1{%
! 8049: \expandafter\scanmacro\expandafter{#1}%
! 8050: }
! 8051:
! 8052: \newcount\paramno % Count of parameters
! 8053: \newtoks\macname % Macro name
! 8054: \newif\ifrecursive % Is it recursive?
! 8055:
! 8056: % List of all defined macros in the form
! 8057: % \commondummyword\macro1\commondummyword\macro2...
! 8058: % Currently is also contains all @aliases; the list can be split
! 8059: % if there is a need.
! 8060: \def\macrolist{}
! 8061:
! 8062: % Add the macro to \macrolist
! 8063: \def\addtomacrolist#1{\expandafter \addtomacrolistxxx \csname#1\endcsname}
! 8064: \def\addtomacrolistxxx#1{%
! 8065: \toks0 = \expandafter{\macrolist\commondummyword#1}%
! 8066: \xdef\macrolist{\the\toks0}%
! 8067: }
! 8068:
! 8069: % Utility routines.
! 8070: % This does \let #1 = #2, with \csnames; that is,
! 8071: % \let \csname#1\endcsname = \csname#2\endcsname
! 8072: % (except of course we have to play expansion games).
! 8073: %
! 8074: \def\cslet#1#2{%
! 8075: \expandafter\let
! 8076: \csname#1\expandafter\endcsname
! 8077: \csname#2\endcsname
! 8078: }
! 8079:
! 8080: % Trim leading and trailing spaces off a string.
! 8081: % Concepts from aro-bend problem 15 (see CTAN).
! 8082: {\catcode`\@=11
! 8083: \gdef\eatspaces #1{\expandafter\trim@\expandafter{#1 }}
! 8084: \gdef\trim@ #1{\trim@@ @#1 @ #1 @ @@}
! 8085: \gdef\trim@@ #1@ #2@ #3@@{\trim@@@\empty #2 @}
! 8086: \def\unbrace#1{#1}
! 8087: \unbrace{\gdef\trim@@@ #1 } #2@{#1}
! 8088: }
! 8089:
! 8090: {\catcode`\^^M=\other%
! 8091: \gdef\eatleadingcr#1{\if\noexpand#1\noexpand^^M\else\E#1\fi}}%
! 8092: % Warning: this won't work for a delimited argument
! 8093: % or for an empty argument
! 8094:
! 8095: % Trim a single trailing ^^M off a string.
! 8096: {\catcode`\^^M=\other \catcode`\Q=3%
! 8097: \gdef\eatcr #1{\eatcra #1Q^^MQ}%
! 8098: \gdef\eatcra#1^^MQ{\eatcrb#1Q}%
! 8099: \gdef\eatcrb#1Q#2Q{#1}%
! 8100: }
! 8101:
! 8102: % Macro bodies are absorbed as an argument in a context where
! 8103: % all characters are catcode 10, 11 or 12, except \ which is active
! 8104: % (as in normal texinfo). It is necessary to change the definition of \
! 8105: % to recognize macro arguments; this is the job of \mbodybackslash.
! 8106: %
! 8107: % Non-ASCII encodings make 8-bit characters active, so un-activate
! 8108: % them to avoid their expansion. Must do this non-globally, to
! 8109: % confine the change to the current group.
! 8110: %
! 8111: % It's necessary to have hard CRs when the macro is executed. This is
! 8112: % done by making ^^M (\endlinechar) catcode 12 when reading the macro
! 8113: % body, and then making it the \newlinechar in \scanmacro.
! 8114: %
! 8115: \def\scanctxt{% used as subroutine
! 8116: \catcode`\"=\other
! 8117: \catcode`\+=\other
! 8118: \catcode`\<=\other
! 8119: \catcode`\>=\other
! 8120: \catcode`\^=\other
! 8121: \catcode`\_=\other
! 8122: \catcode`\|=\other
! 8123: \catcode`\~=\other
! 8124: \catcode`\@=\other
! 8125: \catcode`\^^M=\other
! 8126: \catcode`\\=\active
! 8127: \passthroughcharstrue
! 8128: }
! 8129:
! 8130: \def\macrobodyctxt{% used for @macro definitions and @copying
! 8131: \scanctxt
! 8132: \catcode`\ =\other
! 8133: \catcode`\{=\other
! 8134: \catcode`\}=\other
! 8135: }
! 8136:
! 8137: % Used when scanning braced macro arguments. Note, however, that catcode
! 8138: % changes here are ineffectual if the macro invocation was nested inside
! 8139: % an argument to another Texinfo command.
! 8140: \def\macroargctxt{%
! 8141: \scanctxt
! 8142: \catcode`\ =\active
! 8143: }
! 8144:
! 8145: \def\macrolineargctxt{% used for whole-line arguments without braces
! 8146: \scanctxt
! 8147: \catcode`\{=\other
! 8148: \catcode`\}=\other
! 8149: }
! 8150:
! 8151: % \mbodybackslash is the definition of \ in @macro bodies.
! 8152: % It maps \foo\ => \csname macarg.foo\endcsname => #N
! 8153: % where N is the macro parameter number.
! 8154: % We define \csname macarg.\endcsname to be \realbackslash, so
! 8155: % \\ in macro replacement text gets you a backslash.
! 8156: %
! 8157: {\catcode`@=0 @catcode`@\=@active
! 8158: @gdef@usembodybackslash{@let\=@mbodybackslash}
! 8159: @gdef@mbodybackslash#1\{@csname macarg.#1@endcsname}
! 8160: }
! 8161: \expandafter\def\csname macarg.\endcsname{\realbackslash}
! 8162:
! 8163: \def\margbackslash#1{\char`\#1 }
! 8164:
! 8165: \def\macro{\recursivefalse\parsearg\macroxxx}
! 8166: \def\rmacro{\recursivetrue\parsearg\macroxxx}
! 8167:
! 8168: \def\macroxxx#1{%
! 8169: \getargs{#1}% now \macname is the macname and \argl the arglist
! 8170: \ifx\argl\empty % no arguments
! 8171: \paramno=0\relax
! 8172: \else
! 8173: \expandafter\parsemargdef \argl;%
! 8174: \if\paramno>256\relax
! 8175: \ifx\eTeXversion\thisisundefined
! 8176: \errhelp = \EMsimple
! 8177: \errmessage{You need eTeX to compile a file with macros with more than 256 arguments}
! 8178: \fi
! 8179: \fi
! 8180: \fi
! 8181: \if1\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname
! 8182: \message{Warning: redefining \the\macname}%
! 8183: \else
! 8184: \expandafter\ifx\csname \the\macname\endcsname \relax
! 8185: \else \errmessage{Macro name \the\macname\space already defined}\fi
! 8186: \global\cslet{macsave.\the\macname}{\the\macname}%
! 8187: \global\expandafter\let\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname=1%
! 8188: \addtomacrolist{\the\macname}%
! 8189: \fi
! 8190: \begingroup \macrobodyctxt \usembodybackslash
! 8191: \ifrecursive \expandafter\parsermacbody
! 8192: \else \expandafter\parsemacbody
! 8193: \fi}
! 8194:
! 8195: \parseargdef\unmacro{%
! 8196: \if1\csname ismacro.#1\endcsname
! 8197: \global\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}%
! 8198: \global\expandafter\let \csname ismacro.#1\endcsname=0%
! 8199: % Remove the macro name from \macrolist:
! 8200: \begingroup
! 8201: \expandafter\let\csname#1\endcsname \relax
! 8202: \let\commondummyword\unmacrodo
! 8203: \xdef\macrolist{\macrolist}%
! 8204: \endgroup
! 8205: \fi
! 8206: }
! 8207:
! 8208: % Called by \do from \dounmacro on each macro. The idea is to omit any
! 8209: % macro definitions that have been changed to \relax.
! 8210: %
! 8211: \def\unmacrodo#1{%
! 8212: \ifx #1\relax
! 8213: % remove this
! 8214: \else
! 8215: \noexpand\commondummyword \noexpand#1%
! 8216: \fi
! 8217: }
! 8218:
! 8219: % \getargs -- Parse the arguments to a @macro line. Set \macname to
! 8220: % the name of the macro, and \argl to the braced argument list.
! 8221: \def\getargs#1{\getargsxxx#1{}}
! 8222: \def\getargsxxx#1#{\getmacname #1 \relax\getmacargs}
! 8223: \def\getmacname#1 #2\relax{\macname={#1}}
! 8224: \def\getmacargs#1{\def\argl{#1}}
! 8225: % This made use of the feature that if the last token of a
! 8226: % <parameter list> is #, then the preceding argument is delimited by
! 8227: % an opening brace, and that opening brace is not consumed.
! 8228:
! 8229: % Parse the optional {params} list to @macro or @rmacro.
! 8230: % Set \paramno to the number of arguments,
! 8231: % and \paramlist to a parameter text for the macro (e.g. #1,#2,#3 for a
! 8232: % three-param macro.) Define \macarg.BLAH for each BLAH in the params
! 8233: % list to some hook where the argument is to be expanded. If there are
! 8234: % less than 10 arguments that hook is to be replaced by ##N where N
! 8235: % is the position in that list, that is to say the macro arguments are to be
! 8236: % defined `a la TeX in the macro body.
! 8237: %
! 8238: % That gets used by \mbodybackslash (above).
! 8239: %
! 8240: % If there are 10 or more arguments, a different technique is used: see
! 8241: % \parsemmanyargdef.
! 8242: %
! 8243: \def\parsemargdef#1;{%
! 8244: \paramno=0\def\paramlist{}%
! 8245: \let\hash\relax
! 8246: % \hash is redefined to `#' later to get it into definitions
! 8247: \let\xeatspaces\relax
! 8248: \let\xempty\relax
! 8249: \parsemargdefxxx#1,;,%
! 8250: \ifnum\paramno<10\relax\else
! 8251: \paramno0\relax
! 8252: \parsemmanyargdef@@#1,;,% 10 or more arguments
! 8253: \fi
! 8254: }
! 8255: \def\parsemargdefxxx#1,{%
! 8256: \if#1;\let\next=\relax
! 8257: \else \let\next=\parsemargdefxxx
! 8258: \advance\paramno by 1
! 8259: \expandafter\edef\csname macarg.\eatspaces{#1}\endcsname
! 8260: {\xeatspaces{\hash\the\paramno\noexpand\xempty{}}}%
! 8261: \edef\paramlist{\paramlist\hash\the\paramno,}%
! 8262: \fi\next}
! 8263: % the \xempty{} is to give \eatleadingcr an argument in the case of an
! 8264: % empty macro argument.
! 8265:
! 8266: % \parsemacbody, \parsermacbody
! 8267: %
! 8268: % Read recursive and nonrecursive macro bodies. (They're different since
! 8269: % rec and nonrec macros end differently.)
! 8270: %
! 8271: % We are in \macrobodyctxt, and the \xdef causes backslashes in the macro
! 8272: % body to be transformed.
! 8273: % Set \macrobody to the body of the macro, and call \macrodef.
! 8274: %
! 8275: {\catcode`\ =\other\long\gdef\parsemacbody#1@end macro{%
! 8276: \xdef\macrobody{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\macrodef}}%
! 8277: {\catcode`\ =\other\long\gdef\parsermacbody#1@end rmacro{%
! 8278: \xdef\macrobody{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\macrodef}}%
! 8279:
! 8280: % Make @ a letter, so that we can make private-to-Texinfo macro names.
! 8281: \edef\texiatcatcode{\the\catcode`\@}
! 8282: \catcode `@=11\relax
! 8283:
! 8284: %%%%%%%%%%%%%% Code for > 10 arguments only %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
! 8285:
! 8286: % If there are 10 or more arguments, a different technique is used, where the
! 8287: % hook remains in the body, and when macro is to be expanded the body is
! 8288: % processed again to replace the arguments.
! 8289: %
! 8290: % In that case, the hook is \the\toks N-1, and we simply set \toks N-1 to the
! 8291: % argument N value and then \edef the body (nothing else will expand because of
! 8292: % the catcode regime under which the body was input).
! 8293: %
! 8294: % If you compile with TeX (not eTeX), and you have macros with 10 or more
! 8295: % arguments, no macro can have more than 256 arguments (else error).
! 8296: %
! 8297: % In case that there are 10 or more arguments we parse again the arguments
! 8298: % list to set new definitions for the \macarg.BLAH macros corresponding to
! 8299: % each BLAH argument. It was anyhow needed to parse already once this list
! 8300: % in order to count the arguments, and as macros with at most 9 arguments
! 8301: % are by far more frequent than macro with 10 or more arguments, defining
! 8302: % twice the \macarg.BLAH macros does not cost too much processing power.
! 8303: \def\parsemmanyargdef@@#1,{%
! 8304: \if#1;\let\next=\relax
! 8305: \else
! 8306: \let\next=\parsemmanyargdef@@
! 8307: \edef\tempb{\eatspaces{#1}}%
! 8308: \expandafter\def\expandafter\tempa
! 8309: \expandafter{\csname macarg.\tempb\endcsname}%
! 8310: % Note that we need some extra \noexpand\noexpand, this is because we
! 8311: % don't want \the to be expanded in the \parsermacbody as it uses an
! 8312: % \xdef .
! 8313: \expandafter\edef\tempa
! 8314: {\noexpand\noexpand\noexpand\the\toks\the\paramno}%
! 8315: \advance\paramno by 1\relax
! 8316: \fi\next}
! 8317:
! 8318:
! 8319: \let\endargs@\relax
! 8320: \let\nil@\relax
! 8321: \def\nilm@{\nil@}%
! 8322: \long\def\nillm@{\nil@}%
! 8323:
! 8324: % This macro is expanded during the Texinfo macro expansion, not during its
! 8325: % definition. It gets all the arguments' values and assigns them to macros
! 8326: % macarg.ARGNAME
! 8327: %
! 8328: % #1 is the macro name
! 8329: % #2 is the list of argument names
! 8330: % #3 is the list of argument values
! 8331: \def\getargvals@#1#2#3{%
! 8332: \def\macargdeflist@{}%
! 8333: \def\saveparamlist@{#2}% Need to keep a copy for parameter expansion.
! 8334: \def\paramlist{#2,\nil@}%
! 8335: \def\macroname{#1}%
! 8336: \begingroup
! 8337: \macroargctxt
! 8338: \def\argvaluelist{#3,\nil@}%
! 8339: \def\@tempa{#3}%
! 8340: \ifx\@tempa\empty
! 8341: \setemptyargvalues@
! 8342: \else
! 8343: \getargvals@@
! 8344: \fi
! 8345: }
! 8346: \def\getargvals@@{%
! 8347: \ifx\paramlist\nilm@
! 8348: % Some sanity check needed here that \argvaluelist is also empty.
! 8349: \ifx\argvaluelist\nillm@
! 8350: \else
! 8351: \errhelp = \EMsimple
! 8352: \errmessage{Too many arguments in macro `\macroname'!}%
! 8353: \fi
! 8354: \let\next\macargexpandinbody@
! 8355: \else
! 8356: \ifx\argvaluelist\nillm@
! 8357: % No more arguments values passed to macro. Set remaining named-arg
! 8358: % macros to empty.
! 8359: \let\next\setemptyargvalues@
! 8360: \else
! 8361: % pop current arg name into \@tempb
! 8362: \def\@tempa##1{\pop@{\@tempb}{\paramlist}##1\endargs@}%
! 8363: \expandafter\@tempa\expandafter{\paramlist}%
! 8364: % pop current argument value into \@tempc
! 8365: \def\@tempa##1{\longpop@{\@tempc}{\argvaluelist}##1\endargs@}%
! 8366: \expandafter\@tempa\expandafter{\argvaluelist}%
! 8367: % Here \@tempb is the current arg name and \@tempc is the current arg value.
! 8368: % First place the new argument macro definition into \@tempd
! 8369: \expandafter\macname\expandafter{\@tempc}%
! 8370: \expandafter\let\csname macarg.\@tempb\endcsname\relax
! 8371: \expandafter\def\expandafter\@tempe\expandafter{%
! 8372: \csname macarg.\@tempb\endcsname}%
! 8373: \edef\@tempd{\long\def\@tempe{\the\macname}}%
! 8374: \push@\@tempd\macargdeflist@
! 8375: \let\next\getargvals@@
! 8376: \fi
! 8377: \fi
! 8378: \next
! 8379: }
! 8380:
! 8381: \def\push@#1#2{%
! 8382: \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\def
! 8383: \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter#2%
! 8384: \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter{%
! 8385: \expandafter#1#2}%
! 8386: }
! 8387:
! 8388: % Replace arguments by their values in the macro body, and place the result
! 8389: % in macro \@tempa.
! 8390: %
! 8391: \def\macvalstoargs@{%
! 8392: % To do this we use the property that token registers that are \the'ed
! 8393: % within an \edef expand only once. So we are going to place all argument
! 8394: % values into respective token registers.
! 8395: %
! 8396: % First we save the token context, and initialize argument numbering.
! 8397: \begingroup
! 8398: \paramno0\relax
! 8399: % Then, for each argument number #N, we place the corresponding argument
! 8400: % value into a new token list register \toks#N
! 8401: \expandafter\putargsintokens@\saveparamlist@,;,%
! 8402: % Then, we expand the body so that argument are replaced by their
! 8403: % values. The trick for values not to be expanded themselves is that they
! 8404: % are within tokens and that tokens expand only once in an \edef .
! 8405: \edef\@tempc{\csname mac.\macroname .body\endcsname}%
! 8406: % Now we restore the token stack pointer to free the token list registers
! 8407: % which we have used, but we make sure that expanded body is saved after
! 8408: % group.
! 8409: \expandafter
! 8410: \endgroup
! 8411: \expandafter\def\expandafter\@tempa\expandafter{\@tempc}%
! 8412: }
! 8413:
! 8414: % Define the named-macro outside of this group and then close this group.
! 8415: %
! 8416: \def\macargexpandinbody@{%
! 8417: \expandafter
! 8418: \endgroup
! 8419: \macargdeflist@
! 8420: % First the replace in body the macro arguments by their values, the result
! 8421: % is in \@tempa .
! 8422: \macvalstoargs@
! 8423: % Then we point at the \norecurse or \gobble (for recursive) macro value
! 8424: % with \@tempb .
! 8425: \expandafter\let\expandafter\@tempb\csname mac.\macroname .recurse\endcsname
! 8426: % Depending on whether it is recursive or not, we need some tailing
! 8427: % \egroup .
! 8428: \ifx\@tempb\gobble
! 8429: \let\@tempc\relax
! 8430: \else
! 8431: \let\@tempc\egroup
! 8432: \fi
! 8433: % And now we do the real job:
! 8434: \edef\@tempd{\noexpand\@tempb{\macroname}\noexpand\scanmacro{\@tempa}\@tempc}%
! 8435: \@tempd
! 8436: }
! 8437:
! 8438: \def\putargsintokens@#1,{%
! 8439: \if#1;\let\next\relax
! 8440: \else
! 8441: \let\next\putargsintokens@
! 8442: % First we allocate the new token list register, and give it a temporary
! 8443: % alias \@tempb .
! 8444: \toksdef\@tempb\the\paramno
! 8445: % Then we place the argument value into that token list register.
! 8446: \expandafter\let\expandafter\@tempa\csname macarg.#1\endcsname
! 8447: \expandafter\@tempb\expandafter{\@tempa}%
! 8448: \advance\paramno by 1\relax
! 8449: \fi
! 8450: \next
! 8451: }
! 8452:
! 8453: % Trailing missing arguments are set to empty.
! 8454: %
! 8455: \def\setemptyargvalues@{%
! 8456: \ifx\paramlist\nilm@
! 8457: \let\next\macargexpandinbody@
! 8458: \else
! 8459: \expandafter\setemptyargvaluesparser@\paramlist\endargs@
! 8460: \let\next\setemptyargvalues@
! 8461: \fi
! 8462: \next
! 8463: }
! 8464:
! 8465: \def\setemptyargvaluesparser@#1,#2\endargs@{%
! 8466: \expandafter\def\expandafter\@tempa\expandafter{%
! 8467: \expandafter\def\csname macarg.#1\endcsname{}}%
! 8468: \push@\@tempa\macargdeflist@
! 8469: \def\paramlist{#2}%
! 8470: }
! 8471:
! 8472: % #1 is the element target macro
! 8473: % #2 is the list macro
! 8474: % #3,#4\endargs@ is the list value
! 8475: \def\pop@#1#2#3,#4\endargs@{%
! 8476: \def#1{#3}%
! 8477: \def#2{#4}%
! 8478: }
! 8479: \long\def\longpop@#1#2#3,#4\endargs@{%
! 8480: \long\def#1{#3}%
! 8481: \long\def#2{#4}%
! 8482: }
! 8483:
! 8484:
! 8485: %%%%%%%%%%%%%% End of code for > 10 arguments %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
! 8486:
! 8487:
! 8488: % This defines a Texinfo @macro or @rmacro, called by \parsemacbody.
! 8489: % \macrobody has the body of the macro in it, with placeholders for
! 8490: % its parameters, looking like "\xeatspaces{\hash 1}".
! 8491: % \paramno is the number of parameters
! 8492: % \paramlist is a TeX parameter text, e.g. "#1,#2,#3,"
! 8493: % There are four cases: macros of zero, one, up to nine, and many arguments.
! 8494: % \xdef is used so that macro definitions will survive the file
! 8495: % they're defined in: @include reads the file inside a group.
! 8496: %
! 8497: \def\macrodef{%
! 8498: \let\hash=##% convert placeholders to macro parameter chars
! 8499: \ifnum\paramno=1
! 8500: \long\def\xeatspaces##1{##1}%
! 8501: % We don't use \xeatspaces for single-argument macros, because we
! 8502: % want to keep ends of lines. This definition removes \xeatspaces
! 8503: % when \macrobody is expanded below.
! 8504: \else
! 8505: \def\xeatspaces{\string\xeatspaces}%
! 8506: % This expands \xeatspaces as a sequence of character tokens, which
! 8507: % stops \scantokens inserting an extra space after the control sequence.
! 8508: \fi
! 8509: \ifcase\paramno
! 8510: % 0
! 8511: \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
! 8512: \begingroup
! 8513: \noexpand\spaceisspace
! 8514: \noexpand\endlineisspace
! 8515: \noexpand\expandafter % skip any whitespace after the macro name.
! 8516: \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname @@@\endcsname}%
! 8517: \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname @@@\endcsname{%
! 8518: \endgroup
! 8519: \noexpand\scanmacro{\macrobody}}%
! 8520: \or % 1
! 8521: \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
! 8522: \begingroup
! 8523: \noexpand\braceorline
! 8524: \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname @@@\endcsname}%
! 8525: \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname @@@\endcsname##1{%
! 8526: \endgroup
! 8527: \noexpand\scanmacro{\macrobody}%
! 8528: }%
! 8529: \else % at most 9
! 8530: \ifnum\paramno<10\relax
! 8531: % @MACNAME sets the context for reading the macro argument
! 8532: % @MACNAME@@ gets the argument, processes backslashes and appends a
! 8533: % comma.
! 8534: % @MACNAME@@@ removes braces surrounding the argument list.
! 8535: % @MACNAME@@@@ scans the macro body with arguments substituted.
! 8536: \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
! 8537: \begingroup
! 8538: \noexpand\expandafter % This \expandafter skip any spaces after the
! 8539: \noexpand\macroargctxt % macro before we change the catcode of space.
! 8540: \noexpand\expandafter
! 8541: \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname @@\endcsname}%
! 8542: \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname @@\endcsname##1{%
! 8543: \noexpand\passargtomacro
! 8544: \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname @@@\endcsname{##1,}}%
! 8545: \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname @@@\endcsname##1{%
! 8546: \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname @@@@\endcsname ##1}%
! 8547: \expandafter\expandafter
! 8548: \expandafter\xdef
! 8549: \expandafter\expandafter
! 8550: \csname\the\macname @@@@\endcsname\paramlist{%
! 8551: \endgroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\macrobody}}%
! 8552: \else % 10 or more:
! 8553: \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
! 8554: \noexpand\getargvals@{\the\macname}{\argl}%
! 8555: }%
! 8556: \global\expandafter\let\csname mac.\the\macname .body\endcsname\macrobody
! 8557: \global\expandafter\let\csname mac.\the\macname .recurse\endcsname\gobble
! 8558: \fi
! 8559: \fi}
! 8560:
! 8561: \catcode `\@\texiatcatcode\relax % end private-to-Texinfo catcodes
! 8562:
! 8563: \def\norecurse#1{\bgroup\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}}
! 8564:
! 8565:
! 8566: %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
! 8567: %
! 8568: {\catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=13 % We need to manipulate \ so use @ as escape
! 8569: @catcode`@_=11 % private names
! 8570: @catcode`@!=11 % used as argument separator
! 8571:
! 8572: % \passargtomacro#1#2 -
! 8573: % Call #1 with a list of tokens #2, with any doubled backslashes in #2
! 8574: % compressed to one.
! 8575: %
! 8576: % This implementation works by expansion, and not execution (so we cannot use
! 8577: % \def or similar). This reduces the risk of this failing in contexts where
! 8578: % complete expansion is done with no execution (for example, in writing out to
! 8579: % an auxiliary file for an index entry).
! 8580: %
! 8581: % State is kept in the input stream: the argument passed to
! 8582: % @look_ahead, @gobble_and_check_finish and @add_segment is
! 8583: %
! 8584: % THE_MACRO ARG_RESULT ! {PENDING_BS} NEXT_TOKEN (... rest of input)
! 8585: %
! 8586: % where:
! 8587: % THE_MACRO - name of the macro we want to call
! 8588: % ARG_RESULT - argument list we build to pass to that macro
! 8589: % PENDING_BS - either a backslash or nothing
! 8590: % NEXT_TOKEN - used to look ahead in the input stream to see what's coming next
! 8591:
! 8592: @gdef@passargtomacro#1#2{%
! 8593: @add_segment #1!{}@relax#2\@_finish\%
! 8594: }
! 8595: @gdef@_finish{@_finishx} @global@let@_finishx@relax
! 8596:
! 8597: % #1 - THE_MACRO ARG_RESULT
! 8598: % #2 - PENDING_BS
! 8599: % #3 - NEXT_TOKEN
! 8600: % #4 used to look ahead
! 8601: %
! 8602: % If the next token is not a backslash, process the rest of the argument;
! 8603: % otherwise, remove the next token.
! 8604: @gdef@look_ahead#1!#2#3#4{%
! 8605: @ifx#4\%
! 8606: @expandafter@gobble_and_check_finish
! 8607: @else
! 8608: @expandafter@add_segment
! 8609: @fi#1!{#2}#4#4%
! 8610: }
! 8611:
! 8612: % #1 - THE_MACRO ARG_RESULT
! 8613: % #2 - PENDING_BS
! 8614: % #3 - NEXT_TOKEN
! 8615: % #4 should be a backslash, which is gobbled.
! 8616: % #5 looks ahead
! 8617: %
! 8618: % Double backslash found. Add a single backslash, and look ahead.
! 8619: @gdef@gobble_and_check_finish#1!#2#3#4#5{%
! 8620: @add_segment#1\!{}#5#5%
! 8621: }
! 8622:
! 8623: @gdef@is_fi{@fi}
! 8624:
! 8625: % #1 - THE_MACRO ARG_RESULT
! 8626: % #2 - PENDING_BS
! 8627: % #3 - NEXT_TOKEN
! 8628: % #4 is input stream until next backslash
! 8629: %
! 8630: % Input stream is either at the start of the argument, or just after a
! 8631: % backslash sequence, either a lone backslash, or a doubled backslash.
! 8632: % NEXT_TOKEN contains the first token in the input stream: if it is \finish,
! 8633: % finish; otherwise, append to ARG_RESULT the segment of the argument up until
! 8634: % the next backslash. PENDING_BACKSLASH contains a backslash to represent
! 8635: % a backslash just before the start of the input stream that has not been
! 8636: % added to ARG_RESULT.
! 8637: @gdef@add_segment#1!#2#3#4\{%
! 8638: @ifx#3@_finish
! 8639: @call_the_macro#1!%
! 8640: @else
! 8641: % append the pending backslash to the result, followed by the next segment
! 8642: @expandafter@is_fi@look_ahead#1#2#4!{\}@fi
! 8643: % this @fi is discarded by @look_ahead.
! 8644: % we can't get rid of it with \expandafter because we don't know how
! 8645: % long #4 is.
! 8646: }
! 8647:
! 8648: % #1 - THE_MACRO
! 8649: % #2 - ARG_RESULT
! 8650: % #3 discards the res of the conditional in @add_segment, and @is_fi ends the
! 8651: % conditional.
! 8652: @gdef@call_the_macro#1#2!#3@fi{@is_fi #1{#2}}
! 8653:
! 8654: }
! 8655: %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
! 8656:
! 8657: % \braceorline MAC is used for a one-argument macro MAC. It checks
! 8658: % whether the next non-whitespace character is a {. It sets the context
! 8659: % for reading the argument (slightly different in the two cases). Then,
! 8660: % to read the argument, in the whole-line case, it then calls the regular
! 8661: % \parsearg MAC; in the lbrace case, it calls \passargtomacro MAC.
! 8662: %
! 8663: \def\braceorline#1{\let\macnamexxx=#1\futurelet\nchar\braceorlinexxx}
! 8664: \def\braceorlinexxx{%
! 8665: \ifx\nchar\bgroup
! 8666: \macroargctxt
! 8667: \expandafter\passargtomacro
! 8668: \else
! 8669: \macrolineargctxt\expandafter\parsearg
! 8670: \fi \macnamexxx}
! 8671:
! 8672:
! 8673: % @linemacro
! 8674:
! 8675: \parseargdef\linemacro{%
! 8676: \getargs{#1}% now \macname is the macname and \argl the arglist
! 8677: \ifx\argl\empty
! 8678: \paramno=0
! 8679: \let\hash\relax
! 8680: \def\paramlist{\hash 1\endlinemacro}%
! 8681: \else
! 8682: \expandafter\linegetparamlist\argl;%
! 8683: \fi
! 8684: \begingroup \macrobodyctxt \usembodybackslash
! 8685: \parselinemacrobody
! 8686: }
! 8687:
! 8688: % Build up \paramlist which will be used as the parameter text for the macro.
! 8689: % At the end it will be like "#1 #2 #3\endlinemacro".
! 8690: \def\linegetparamlist#1;{%
! 8691: \paramno=0\def\paramlist{}%
! 8692: \let\hash\relax
! 8693: \linegetparamlistxxx#1,;,%
! 8694: }
! 8695: \def\linegetparamlistxxx#1,{%
! 8696: \if#1;\let\next=\linegetparamlistxxxx
! 8697: \else \let\next=\linegetparamlistxxx
! 8698: \advance\paramno by 1
! 8699: \expandafter\edef\csname macarg.\eatspaces{#1}\endcsname
! 8700: {\hash\the\paramno}%
! 8701: \edef\paramlist{\paramlist\hash\the\paramno\space}%
! 8702: \fi\next}
! 8703: \def\linegetparamlistxxxx{%
! 8704: \expandafter\fixparamlist\paramlist\fixparamlist
! 8705: }
! 8706: % Replace final space token
! 8707: \def\fixparamlist#1 \fixparamlist{%
! 8708: \def\paramlist{#1\endlinemacro}%
! 8709: }
! 8710:
! 8711: % Read the body of the macro, replacing backslash-surrounded variables
! 8712: %
! 8713: {\catcode`\ =\other\long\gdef\parselinemacrobody#1@end linemacro{%
! 8714: \xdef\macrobody{#1}%
! 8715: \endgroup
! 8716: \linemacrodef
! 8717: }}
! 8718:
! 8719: % Make the definition
! 8720: \def\linemacrodef{%
! 8721: \let\hash=##%
! 8722: \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
! 8723: \bgroup
! 8724: \noexpand\parsearg
! 8725: \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname @@\endcsname
! 8726: }
! 8727: \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname @@\endcsname##1{%
! 8728: \egroup
! 8729: \expandafter\noexpand
! 8730: \csname\the\macname @@@\endcsname##1\noexpand\endlinemacro
! 8731: }
! 8732: \expandafter\expandafter
! 8733: \expandafter\xdef
! 8734: \expandafter\expandafter\csname\the\macname @@@\endcsname\paramlist{%
! 8735: \newlinechar=13 % split \macrobody into lines
! 8736: \noexpand\scantokens{\macrobody}%
! 8737: }
! 8738: }
! 8739:
! 8740:
! 8741:
! 8742: % @alias.
! 8743: % We need some trickery to remove the optional spaces around the equal
! 8744: % sign. Make them active and then expand them all to nothing.
! 8745: %
! 8746: \def\alias{\parseargusing\obeyspaces\aliasxxx}
! 8747: \def\aliasxxx #1{\aliasyyy#1\relax}
! 8748: \def\aliasyyy #1=#2\relax{%
! 8749: {%
! 8750: \expandafter\let\obeyedspace=\empty
! 8751: \addtomacrolist{#1}%
! 8752: \xdef\next{\global\let\makecsname{#1}=\makecsname{#2}}%
! 8753: }%
! 8754: \next
! 8755: }
! 8756:
! 8757:
! 8758: \message{cross references,}
! 8759:
! 8760: \newwrite\auxfile
! 8761: \newif\ifhavexrefs % True if xref values are known.
! 8762: \newif\ifwarnedxrefs % True if we warned once that they aren't known.
! 8763:
! 8764: % @inforef is relatively simple.
! 8765: \def\inforef #1{\inforefzzz #1,,,,**}
! 8766: \def\inforefzzz #1,#2,#3,#4**{%
! 8767: \putwordSee{} \putwordInfo{} \putwordfile{} \file{\ignorespaces #3{}},
! 8768: node \samp{\ignorespaces#1{}}}
! 8769:
! 8770: % @node's only job in TeX is to define \lastnode, which is used in
! 8771: % cross-references. The @node line might or might not have commas, and
! 8772: % might or might not have spaces before the first comma, like:
! 8773: % @node foo , bar , ...
! 8774: % We don't want such trailing spaces in the node name.
! 8775: %
! 8776: \parseargdef\node{\checkenv{}\donode #1 ,\finishnodeparse}
! 8777: %
! 8778: % also remove a trailing comma, in case of something like this:
! 8779: % @node Help-Cross, , , Cross-refs
! 8780: \def\donode#1 ,#2\finishnodeparse{\dodonode #1,\finishnodeparse}
! 8781: \def\dodonode#1,#2\finishnodeparse{\gdef\lastnode{#1}\omittopnode}
! 8782:
! 8783: % Used so that the @top node doesn't have to be wrapped in an @ifnottex
! 8784: % conditional.
! 8785: % \doignore goes to more effort to skip nested conditionals but we don't need
! 8786: % that here.
! 8787: \def\omittopnode{%
! 8788: \ifx\lastnode\wordTop
! 8789: \expandafter\ignorenode\fi
! 8790: }
! 8791: \def\wordTop{Top}
! 8792:
! 8793: % Until the next @node, @part or @bye command, divert output to a box that
! 8794: % is not output.
! 8795: \def\ignorenode{\setbox\dummybox\vbox\bgroup
! 8796: \def\part{\egroup\part}%
! 8797: \def\node{\egroup\node}%
! 8798: \ignorenodebye
! 8799: }
! 8800:
! 8801: {\let\bye\relax
! 8802: \gdef\ignorenodebye{\let\bye\ignorenodebyedef}
! 8803: \gdef\ignorenodebyedef{\egroup(`Top' node ignored)\bye}}
! 8804: % The redefinition of \bye here is because it is declared \outer
! 8805:
! 8806: \let\lastnode=\empty
! 8807:
! 8808: % Write a cross-reference definition for the current node. #1 is the
! 8809: % type (Ynumbered, Yappendix, Ynothing).
! 8810: %
! 8811: \def\donoderef#1{%
! 8812: \ifx\lastnode\empty\else
! 8813: \setref{\lastnode}{#1}%
! 8814: \global\let\lastnode=\empty
! 8815: \fi
! 8816: }
! 8817:
! 8818: % @nodedescription, @nodedescriptionblock - do nothing for TeX
! 8819: \parseargdef\nodedescription{}
! 8820: \def\nodedescriptionblock{\doignore{nodedescriptionblock}}
! 8821:
! 8822:
! 8823: % @anchor{NAME} -- define xref target at arbitrary point.
! 8824: %
! 8825: \newcount\savesfregister
! 8826: %
! 8827: \def\savesf{\relax \ifhmode \savesfregister=\spacefactor \fi}
! 8828: \def\restoresf{\relax \ifhmode \spacefactor=\savesfregister \fi}
! 8829: \def\anchor#1{\savesf \setref{#1}{Ynothing}\restoresf \ignorespaces}
! 8830:
! 8831: % \setref{NAME}{SNT} defines a cross-reference point NAME (a node or an
! 8832: % anchor), which consists of three parts:
! 8833: % 1) NAME-title - the current sectioning name taken from \currentsection,
! 8834: % or the anchor name.
! 8835: % 2) NAME-snt - section number and type, passed as the SNT arg, or
! 8836: % empty for anchors.
! 8837: % 3) NAME-pg - the page number.
! 8838: %
! 8839: % This is called from \donoderef, \anchor, and \dofloat. In the case of
! 8840: % floats, there is an additional part, which is not written here:
! 8841: % 4) NAME-lof - the text as it should appear in a @listoffloats.
! 8842: %
! 8843: \def\setref#1#2{%
! 8844: \pdfmkdest{#1}%
! 8845: \iflinks
! 8846: {%
! 8847: \requireauxfile
! 8848: \atdummies % preserve commands, but don't expand them
! 8849: % match definition in \xrdef, \refx, \xrefX.
! 8850: \def\value##1{##1}%
! 8851: \edef\writexrdef##1##2{%
! 8852: \write\auxfile{@xrdef{#1-% #1 of \setref, expanded by the \edef
! 8853: ##1}{##2}}% these are parameters of \writexrdef
! 8854: }%
! 8855: \toks0 = \expandafter{\currentsection}%
! 8856: \immediate \writexrdef{title}{\the\toks0 }%
! 8857: \immediate \writexrdef{snt}{\csname #2\endcsname}% \Ynumbered etc.
! 8858: \safewhatsit{\writexrdef{pg}{\folio}}% will be written later, at \shipout
! 8859: }%
! 8860: \fi
! 8861: }
! 8862:
! 8863: % @xrefautosectiontitle on|off says whether @section(ing) names are used
! 8864: % automatically in xrefs, if the third arg is not explicitly specified.
! 8865: % This was provided as a "secret" @set xref-automatic-section-title
! 8866: % variable, now it's official.
! 8867: %
! 8868: \parseargdef\xrefautomaticsectiontitle{%
! 8869: \def\temp{#1}%
! 8870: \ifx\temp\onword
! 8871: \expandafter\let\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname
! 8872: = \empty
! 8873: \else\ifx\temp\offword
! 8874: \expandafter\let\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname
! 8875: = \relax
! 8876: \else
! 8877: \errhelp = \EMsimple
! 8878: \errmessage{Unknown @xrefautomaticsectiontitle value `\temp',
! 8879: must be on|off}%
! 8880: \fi\fi
! 8881: }
! 8882:
! 8883: %
! 8884: % @xref, @pxref, and @ref generate cross-references. For \xrefX, #1 is
! 8885: % the node name, #2 the name of the Info cross-reference, #3 the printed
! 8886: % node name, #4 the name of the Info file, #5 the name of the printed
! 8887: % manual. All but the node name can be omitted.
! 8888: %
! 8889: \def\pxref{\putwordsee{} \xrefXX}
! 8890: \def\xref{\putwordSee{} \xrefXX}
! 8891: \def\ref{\xrefXX}
! 8892:
! 8893: \def\xrefXX#1{\def\xrefXXarg{#1}\futurelet\tokenafterxref\xrefXXX}
! 8894: \def\xrefXXX{\expandafter\xrefX\expandafter[\xrefXXarg,,,,,,,]}
! 8895: %
! 8896: \newbox\toprefbox
! 8897: \newbox\printedrefnamebox
! 8898: \newbox\infofilenamebox
! 8899: \newbox\printedmanualbox
! 8900: %
! 8901: \def\xrefX[#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6]{\begingroup
! 8902: \unsepspaces
! 8903: %
! 8904: \getprintedrefname{#1}{#3}{#5}%
! 8905: \def\infofilename{\ignorespaces #4}%
! 8906: \setbox\infofilenamebox = \hbox{\infofilename\unskip}%
! 8907: %
! 8908: \startxreflink{#1}{#4}%
! 8909: {%
! 8910: % Have to otherify everything special to allow the \csname to
! 8911: % include an _ in the xref name, etc.
! 8912: \indexnofonts
! 8913: \turnoffactive
! 8914: \def\value##1{##1}%
! 8915: \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\Xthisreftitle
! 8916: \csname XR#1-title\endcsname
! 8917: }%
! 8918: %
! 8919: % Float references are printed completely differently: "Figure 1.2"
! 8920: % instead of "[somenode], p.3". \iffloat distinguishes them by
! 8921: % \Xthisreftitle being set to a magic string.
! 8922: \iffloat\Xthisreftitle
! 8923: % If the user specified the print name (third arg) to the ref,
! 8924: % print it instead of our usual "Figure 1.2".
! 8925: \ifdim\wd\printedrefnamebox = 0pt
! 8926: \refx{#1-snt}%
! 8927: \else
! 8928: \printedrefname
! 8929: \fi
! 8930: %
! 8931: % If the user also gave the printed manual name (fifth arg), append
! 8932: % "in MANUALNAME".
! 8933: \ifdim \wd\printedmanualbox > 0pt
! 8934: \space \putwordin{} \cite{\printedmanual}%
! 8935: \fi
! 8936: \else
! 8937: % node/anchor (non-float) references.
! 8938: %
! 8939: % If we use \unhbox to print the node names, TeX does not insert
! 8940: % empty discretionaries after hyphens, which means that it will not
! 8941: % find a line break at a hyphen in a node names. Since some manuals
! 8942: % are best written with fairly long node names, containing hyphens,
! 8943: % this is a loss. Therefore, we give the text of the node name
! 8944: % again, so it is as if TeX is seeing it for the first time.
! 8945: %
! 8946: \ifdim \wd\printedmanualbox > 0pt
! 8947: % Cross-manual reference with a printed manual name.
! 8948: %
! 8949: \crossmanualxref{\cite{\printedmanual\unskip}}%
! 8950: %
! 8951: \else\ifdim \wd\infofilenamebox > 0pt
! 8952: % Cross-manual reference with only an info filename (arg 4), no
! 8953: % printed manual name (arg 5). This is essentially the same as
! 8954: % the case above; we output the filename, since we have nothing else.
! 8955: %
! 8956: \crossmanualxref{\code{\infofilename\unskip}}%
! 8957: %
! 8958: \else
! 8959: % Reference within this manual.
! 8960: %
! 8961: % Only output a following space if the -snt ref is nonempty, as the ref
! 8962: % will be empty for @unnumbered and @anchor.
! 8963: \setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces \refx{#1-snt}}%
! 8964: \ifdim \wd2 > 0pt \refx{#1-snt}\space\fi
! 8965: %
! 8966: % output the `[mynode]' via the macro below so it can be overridden.
! 8967: \xrefprintnodename\printedrefname
! 8968: %
! 8969: \ifflagclear{txiomitxrefpg}{%
! 8970: % We always want a comma
! 8971: ,%
! 8972: % output the `page 3'.
! 8973: \turnoffactive \putpageref{#1}%
! 8974: % Add a , if xref followed by a space
! 8975: \if\space\noexpand\tokenafterxref ,%
! 8976: \else\ifx\ \tokenafterxref ,% @TAB
! 8977: \else\ifx\*\tokenafterxref ,% @*
! 8978: \else\ifx\ \tokenafterxref ,% @SPACE
! 8979: \else\ifx\
! 8980: \tokenafterxref ,% @NL
! 8981: \else\ifx\tie\tokenafterxref ,% @tie
! 8982: \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
! 8983: }{}%
! 8984: \fi\fi
! 8985: \fi
! 8986: \endlink
! 8987: \endgroup}
! 8988:
! 8989: % \getprintedrefname{NODE}{LABEL}{MANUAL}
! 8990: % - set \printedrefname and \printedmanual
! 8991: %
! 8992: \def\getprintedrefname#1#2#3{%
! 8993: % Get args without leading/trailing spaces.
! 8994: \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #2}%
! 8995: \setbox\printedrefnamebox = \hbox{\printedrefname\unskip}%
! 8996: %
! 8997: \def\printedmanual{\ignorespaces #3}%
! 8998: \setbox\printedmanualbox = \hbox{\printedmanual\unskip}%
! 8999: %
! 9000: % If the printed reference name (arg #2) was not explicitly given in
! 9001: % the @xref, figure out what we want to use.
! 9002: \ifdim \wd\printedrefnamebox = 0pt
! 9003: % No printed node name was explicitly given.
! 9004: \expandafter\ifx\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname \relax
! 9005: % Not auto section-title: use node name inside the square brackets.
! 9006: \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}%
! 9007: \else
! 9008: % Auto section-title: use chapter/section title inside
! 9009: % the square brackets if we have it.
! 9010: \ifdim \wd\printedmanualbox > 0pt
! 9011: % It is in another manual, so we don't have it; use node name.
! 9012: \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}%
! 9013: \else
! 9014: \ifhavexrefs
! 9015: % We (should) know the real title if we have the xref values.
! 9016: \def\printedrefname{\refx{#1-title}}%
! 9017: \else
! 9018: % Otherwise just copy the Info node name.
! 9019: \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}%
! 9020: \fi%
! 9021: \fi
! 9022: \fi
! 9023: \fi
! 9024: }
! 9025:
! 9026: % \startxreflink{NODE}{FILE} - start link in pdf output.
! 9027: \def\startxreflink#1#2{%
! 9028: \ifpdforxetex
! 9029: % For pdfTeX and LuaTeX
! 9030: {\indexnofonts
! 9031: \makevalueexpandable
! 9032: \turnoffactive
! 9033: % This expands tokens, so do it after making catcode changes, so _
! 9034: % etc. don't get their TeX definitions. This ignores all spaces in
! 9035: % #2, including (wrongly) those in the middle of the filename.
! 9036: \getfilename{#2}%
! 9037: %
! 9038: % This (wrongly) does not take account of leading or trailing
! 9039: % spaces in #1, which should be ignored.
! 9040: \setpdfdestname{#1}%
! 9041: %
! 9042: \ifx\pdfdestname\empty
! 9043: \def\pdfdestname{Top}% no empty targets
! 9044: \fi
! 9045: %
! 9046: \leavevmode
! 9047: \ifpdf
! 9048: \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}%
! 9049: \ifnum\filenamelength>0
! 9050: goto file{\the\filename.pdf} name{\pdfdestname}%
! 9051: \else
! 9052: goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\pdfdestname}}%
! 9053: \fi
! 9054: \else % XeTeX
! 9055: \ifnum\filenamelength>0
! 9056: % With default settings,
! 9057: % XeTeX (xdvipdfmx) replaces link destination names with integers.
! 9058: % In this case, the replaced destination names of
! 9059: % remote PDFs are no longer known. In order to avoid a replacement,
! 9060: % you can use xdvipdfmx's command line option `-C 0x0010'.
! 9061: % If you use XeTeX 0.99996+ (TeX Live 2016+),
! 9062: % this command line option is no longer necessary
! 9063: % because we can use the `dvipdfmx:config' special.
! 9064: \special{pdf:bann << /Border [0 0 0] /Type /Annot /Subtype /Link /A
! 9065: << /S /GoToR /F (\the\filename.pdf) /D (\pdfdestname) >> >>}%
! 9066: \else
! 9067: \special{pdf:bann << /Border [0 0 0] /Type /Annot /Subtype /Link /A
! 9068: << /S /GoTo /D (\pdfdestname) >> >>}%
! 9069: \fi
! 9070: \fi
! 9071: }%
! 9072: \setcolor{\linkcolor}%
! 9073: \fi
! 9074: }
! 9075:
! 9076: % can be overridden in translation files
! 9077: \def\putpageref#1{%
! 9078: \space\putwordpage\tie\refx{#1-pg}}
! 9079:
! 9080: % Output a cross-manual xref to #1. Used just above (twice).
! 9081: %
! 9082: % Only include the text "Section ``foo'' in" if the foo is neither
! 9083: % missing or Top. Thus, @xref{,,,foo,The Foo Manual} outputs simply
! 9084: % "see The Foo Manual", the idea being to refer to the whole manual.
! 9085: %
! 9086: % But, this being TeX, we can't easily compare our node name against the
! 9087: % string "Top" while ignoring the possible spaces before and after in
! 9088: % the input. By adding the arbitrary 7sp below, we make it much less
! 9089: % likely that a real node name would have the same width as "Top" (e.g.,
! 9090: % in a monospaced font). Hopefully it will never happen in practice.
! 9091: %
! 9092: % For the same basic reason, we retypeset the "Top" at every
! 9093: % reference, since the current font is indeterminate.
! 9094: %
! 9095: \def\crossmanualxref#1{%
! 9096: \setbox\toprefbox = \hbox{Top\kern7sp}%
! 9097: \setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces \printedrefname \unskip \kern7sp}%
! 9098: \ifdim \wd2 > 7sp % nonempty?
! 9099: \ifdim \wd2 = \wd\toprefbox \else % same as Top?
! 9100: \putwordSection{} ``\printedrefname'' \putwordin{}\space
! 9101: \fi
! 9102: \fi
! 9103: #1%
! 9104: }
! 9105:
! 9106: % This macro is called from \xrefX for the `[nodename]' part of xref
! 9107: % output. It's a separate macro only so it can be changed more easily,
! 9108: % since square brackets don't work well in some documents. Particularly
! 9109: % one that Bob is working on :).
! 9110: %
! 9111: \def\xrefprintnodename#1{[#1]}
! 9112:
! 9113: % @link{NODENAME, LABEL, MANUAL} - create a "plain" link, with no
! 9114: % page number. Not useful if printed on paper.
! 9115: %
! 9116: \def\link#1{\linkX[#1,,,]}
! 9117: \def\linkX[#1,#2,#3,#4]{%
! 9118: \begingroup
! 9119: \unsepspaces
! 9120: \getprintedrefname{#1}{#2}{#3}%
! 9121: \startxreflink{#1}{#3}%
! 9122: \printedrefname
! 9123: \endlink
! 9124: \endgroup
! 9125: }
! 9126:
! 9127:
! 9128: % Things referred to by \setref.
! 9129: %
! 9130: \def\Ynothing{}
! 9131: \def\Yomitfromtoc{}
! 9132: \def\Ynumbered{%
! 9133: \ifnum\secno=0
! 9134: \putwordChapter@tie \the\chapno
! 9135: \else \ifnum\subsecno=0
! 9136: \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno
! 9137: \else \ifnum\subsubsecno=0
! 9138: \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno
! 9139: \else
! 9140: \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno
! 9141: \fi\fi\fi
! 9142: }
! 9143: \def\Yappendix{%
! 9144: \ifnum\secno=0
! 9145: \putwordAppendix@tie @char\the\appendixno{}%
! 9146: \else \ifnum\subsecno=0
! 9147: \putwordSection@tie @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno
! 9148: \else \ifnum\subsubsecno=0
! 9149: \putwordSection@tie @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno
! 9150: \else
! 9151: \putwordSection@tie
! 9152: @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno
! 9153: \fi\fi\fi
! 9154: }
! 9155:
! 9156: % \refx{NAME} - reference a cross-reference string named NAME.
! 9157: \def\refx#1{%
! 9158: \requireauxfile
! 9159: {%
! 9160: \indexnofonts
! 9161: \turnoffactive
! 9162: \def\value##1{##1}%
! 9163: \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\thisrefX
! 9164: \csname XR#1\endcsname
! 9165: }%
! 9166: \ifx\thisrefX\relax
! 9167: % If not defined, say something at least.
! 9168: \angleleft un\-de\-fined\angleright
! 9169: \iflinks
! 9170: \ifhavexrefs
! 9171: {\toks0 = {#1}% avoid expansion of possibly-complex value
! 9172: \message{\linenumber Undefined cross reference `\the\toks0'.}}%
! 9173: \else
! 9174: \ifwarnedxrefs\else
! 9175: \global\warnedxrefstrue
! 9176: \message{Cross reference values unknown; you must run TeX again.}%
! 9177: \fi
! 9178: \fi
! 9179: \fi
! 9180: \else
! 9181: % It's defined, so just use it.
! 9182: \thisrefX
! 9183: \fi
! 9184: }
! 9185:
! 9186: % This is the macro invoked by entries in the aux file. Define a control
! 9187: % sequence for a cross-reference target (we prepend XR to the control sequence
! 9188: % name to avoid collisions). The value is the page number. If this is a float
! 9189: % type, we have more work to do.
! 9190: %
! 9191: \def\xrdef#1#2{%
! 9192: {% Expand the node or anchor name to remove control sequences.
! 9193: % \turnoffactive stops 8-bit characters being changed to commands
! 9194: % like @'e. \refx does the same to retrieve the value in the definition.
! 9195: \indexnofonts
! 9196: \turnoffactive
! 9197: \def\value##1{##1}%
! 9198: \xdef\safexrefname{#1}%
! 9199: }%
! 9200: %
! 9201: \bgroup
! 9202: \expandafter\gdef\csname XR\safexrefname\endcsname{#2}%
! 9203: \egroup
! 9204: % We put the \gdef inside a group to avoid the definitions building up on
! 9205: % TeX's save stack, which can cause it to run out of space for aux files with
! 9206: % thousands of lines. \gdef doesn't use the save stack, but \csname does
! 9207: % when it defines an unknown control sequence as \relax.
! 9208: %
! 9209: % Was that xref control sequence that we just defined for a float?
! 9210: \expandafter\iffloat\csname XR\safexrefname\endcsname
! 9211: % it was a float, and we have the (safe) float type in \iffloattype.
! 9212: \expandafter\let\expandafter\floatlist
! 9213: \csname floatlist\iffloattype\endcsname
! 9214: %
! 9215: % Is this the first time we've seen this float type?
! 9216: \expandafter\ifx\floatlist\relax
! 9217: \toks0 = {\do}% yes, so just \do
! 9218: \else
! 9219: % had it before, so preserve previous elements in list.
! 9220: \toks0 = \expandafter{\floatlist\do}%
! 9221: \fi
! 9222: %
! 9223: % Remember this xref in the control sequence \floatlistFLOATTYPE,
! 9224: % for later use in \listoffloats.
! 9225: \expandafter\xdef\csname floatlist\iffloattype\endcsname{\the\toks0
! 9226: {\safexrefname}}%
! 9227: \fi
! 9228: }
! 9229:
! 9230: % If working on a large document in chapters, it is convenient to
! 9231: % be able to disable indexing, cross-referencing, and contents, for test runs.
! 9232: % This is done with @novalidate at the beginning of the file.
! 9233: %
! 9234: \newif\iflinks \linkstrue % by default we want the aux files.
! 9235: \let\novalidate = \linksfalse
! 9236:
! 9237: % Used when writing to the aux file, or when using data from it.
! 9238: \def\requireauxfile{%
! 9239: \iflinks
! 9240: \tryauxfile
! 9241: % Open the new aux file. TeX will close it automatically at exit.
! 9242: \immediate\openout\auxfile=\jobname.aux
! 9243: \fi
! 9244: \global\let\requireauxfile=\relax % Only do this once.
! 9245: }
! 9246:
! 9247: % Read the last existing aux file, if any. No error if none exists.
! 9248: %
! 9249: \def\tryauxfile{%
! 9250: \openin 1 \jobname.aux
! 9251: \ifeof 1 \else
! 9252: \readdatafile{aux}%
! 9253: \global\havexrefstrue
! 9254: \fi
! 9255: \closein 1
! 9256: }
! 9257:
! 9258: \def\setupdatafile{%
! 9259: \catcode`\^^@=\other
! 9260: \catcode`\^^A=\other
! 9261: \catcode`\^^B=\other
! 9262: \catcode`\^^C=\other
! 9263: \catcode`\^^D=\other
! 9264: \catcode`\^^E=\other
! 9265: \catcode`\^^F=\other
! 9266: \catcode`\^^G=\other
! 9267: \catcode`\^^H=\other
! 9268: \catcode`\^^K=\other
! 9269: \catcode`\^^L=\other
! 9270: \catcode`\^^N=\other
! 9271: \catcode`\^^P=\other
! 9272: \catcode`\^^Q=\other
! 9273: \catcode`\^^R=\other
! 9274: \catcode`\^^S=\other
! 9275: \catcode`\^^T=\other
! 9276: \catcode`\^^U=\other
! 9277: \catcode`\^^V=\other
! 9278: \catcode`\^^W=\other
! 9279: \catcode`\^^X=\other
! 9280: \catcode`\^^Z=\other
! 9281: \catcode`\^^[=\other
! 9282: \catcode`\^^\=\other
! 9283: \catcode`\^^]=\other
! 9284: \catcode`\^^^=\other
! 9285: \catcode`\^^_=\other
! 9286: \catcode`\^=\other
! 9287: %
! 9288: % Special characters. Should be turned off anyway, but...
! 9289: \catcode`\~=\other
! 9290: \catcode`\[=\other
! 9291: \catcode`\]=\other
! 9292: \catcode`\"=\other
! 9293: \catcode`\_=\active
! 9294: \catcode`\|=\active
! 9295: \catcode`\<=\active
! 9296: \catcode`\>=\active
! 9297: \catcode`\$=\other
! 9298: \catcode`\#=\other
! 9299: \catcode`\&=\other
! 9300: \catcode`\%=\other
! 9301: \catcode`+=\other % avoid \+ for paranoia even though we've turned it off
! 9302: %
! 9303: \catcode`\\=\active
! 9304: %
! 9305: % @ is our escape character in .aux files, and we need braces.
! 9306: \catcode`\{=1
! 9307: \catcode`\}=2
! 9308: \catcode`\@=0
! 9309: }
! 9310:
! 9311: \def\readdatafile#1{%
! 9312: \begingroup
! 9313: \setupdatafile
! 9314: \input\jobname.#1
! 9315: \endgroup}
! 9316:
! 9317:
! 9318: \message{insertions,}
! 9319: % including footnotes.
! 9320:
! 9321: \newcount \footnoteno
! 9322:
! 9323: % The trailing space in the following definition for supereject is
! 9324: % vital for proper filling; pages come out unaligned when you do a
! 9325: % pagealignmacro call if that space before the closing brace is
! 9326: % removed. (Generally, numeric constants should always be followed by a
! 9327: % space to prevent strange expansion errors.)
! 9328: \def\supereject{\par\penalty -20000\footnoteno =0 }
! 9329:
! 9330: % @footnotestyle is meaningful for Info output only.
! 9331: \let\footnotestyle=\comment
! 9332:
! 9333: {\catcode `\@=11
! 9334: %
! 9335: % Auto-number footnotes. Otherwise like plain.
! 9336: \gdef\footnote{%
! 9337: \global\advance\footnoteno by \@ne
! 9338: \edef\thisfootno{$^{\the\footnoteno}$}%
! 9339: %
! 9340: % In case the footnote comes at the end of a sentence, preserve the
! 9341: % extra spacing after we do the footnote number.
! 9342: \let\@sf\empty
! 9343: \ifhmode\edef\@sf{\spacefactor\the\spacefactor}\ptexslash\fi
! 9344: %
! 9345: % Remove inadvertent blank space before typesetting the footnote number.
! 9346: \unskip
! 9347: \thisfootno\@sf
! 9348: \dofootnote
! 9349: }%
! 9350:
! 9351: % Don't bother with the trickery in plain.tex to not require the
! 9352: % footnote text as a parameter. Our footnotes don't need to be so general.
! 9353: %
! 9354: % Oh yes, they do; otherwise, @ifset (and anything else that uses
! 9355: % \parseargline) fails inside footnotes because the tokens are fixed when
! 9356: % the footnote is read. --karl, 16nov96.
! 9357: %
! 9358: \gdef\dofootnote{%
! 9359: \insert\footins\bgroup
! 9360: %
! 9361: % Nested footnotes are not supported in TeX, that would take a lot
! 9362: % more work. (\startsavinginserts does not suffice.)
! 9363: \let\footnote=\errfootnotenest
! 9364: %
! 9365: % We want to typeset this text as a normal paragraph, even if the
! 9366: % footnote reference occurs in (for example) a display environment.
! 9367: % So reset some parameters.
! 9368: \hsize=\txipagewidth
! 9369: \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty
! 9370: \splittopskip\ht\strutbox % top baseline for broken footnotes
! 9371: \splitmaxdepth\dp\strutbox
! 9372: \floatingpenalty\@MM
! 9373: \leftskip\z@skip
! 9374: \rightskip\z@skip
! 9375: \spaceskip\z@skip
! 9376: \xspaceskip\z@skip
! 9377: \parindent\defaultparindent
! 9378: %
! 9379: \smallfonts \rm
! 9380: %
! 9381: % Because we use hanging indentation in footnotes, a @noindent appears
! 9382: % to exdent this text, so make it be a no-op. makeinfo does not use
! 9383: % hanging indentation so @noindent can still be needed within footnote
! 9384: % text after an @example or the like (not that this is good style).
! 9385: \let\noindent = \relax
! 9386: %
! 9387: % Hang the footnote text off the number. Use \everypar in case the
! 9388: % footnote extends for more than one paragraph.
! 9389: \everypar = {\hang}%
! 9390: \textindent{\thisfootno}%
! 9391: %
! 9392: % Don't crash into the line above the footnote text. Since this
! 9393: % expands into a box, it must come within the paragraph, lest it
! 9394: % provide a place where TeX can split the footnote.
! 9395: \footstrut
! 9396: %
! 9397: % Invoke rest of plain TeX footnote routine.
! 9398: \futurelet\next\fo@t
! 9399: }
! 9400: }%end \catcode `\@=11
! 9401:
! 9402: \def\errfootnotenest{%
! 9403: \errhelp=\EMsimple
! 9404: \errmessage{Nested footnotes not supported in texinfo.tex,
! 9405: even though they work in makeinfo; sorry}
! 9406: }
! 9407:
! 9408: \def\errfootnoteheading{%
! 9409: \errhelp=\EMsimple
! 9410: \errmessage{Footnotes in chapters, sections, etc., are not supported}
! 9411: }
! 9412:
! 9413: % In case a @footnote appears in a vbox, save the footnote text and create
! 9414: % the real \insert just after the vbox finished. Otherwise, the insertion
! 9415: % would be lost.
! 9416: % Similarly, if a @footnote appears inside an alignment, save the footnote
! 9417: % text to a box and make the \insert when a row of the table is finished.
! 9418: % And the same can be done for other insert classes. --kasal, 16nov03.
! 9419: %
! 9420: % Replace the \insert primitive by a cheating macro.
! 9421: % Deeper inside, just make sure that the saved insertions are not spilled
! 9422: % out prematurely.
! 9423: %
! 9424: \def\startsavinginserts{%
! 9425: \ifx \insert\ptexinsert
! 9426: \let\insert\saveinsert
! 9427: \else
! 9428: \let\checkinserts\relax
! 9429: \fi
! 9430: }
! 9431:
! 9432: % This \insert replacement works for both \insert\footins{foo} and
! 9433: % \insert\footins\bgroup foo\egroup, but it doesn't work for \insert27{foo}.
! 9434: %
! 9435: \def\saveinsert#1{%
! 9436: \edef\next{\noexpand\savetobox \makeSAVEname#1}%
! 9437: \afterassignment\next
! 9438: % swallow the left brace
! 9439: \let\temp =
! 9440: }
! 9441: \def\makeSAVEname#1{\makecsname{SAVE\expandafter\gobble\string#1}}
! 9442: \def\savetobox#1{\global\setbox#1 = \vbox\bgroup \unvbox#1}
! 9443:
! 9444: \def\checksaveins#1{\ifvoid#1\else \placesaveins#1\fi}
! 9445:
! 9446: \def\placesaveins#1{%
! 9447: \ptexinsert \csname\expandafter\gobblesave\string#1\endcsname
! 9448: {\box#1}%
! 9449: }
! 9450:
! 9451: % eat @SAVE -- beware, all of them have catcode \other:
! 9452: {
! 9453: \def\dospecials{\do S\do A\do V\do E} \uncatcodespecials % ;-)
! 9454: \gdef\gobblesave @SAVE{}
! 9455: }
! 9456:
! 9457: % initialization:
! 9458: \def\newsaveins #1{%
! 9459: \edef\next{\noexpand\newsaveinsX \makeSAVEname#1}%
! 9460: \next
! 9461: }
! 9462: \def\newsaveinsX #1{%
! 9463: \csname newbox\endcsname #1%
! 9464: \expandafter\def\expandafter\checkinserts\expandafter{\checkinserts
! 9465: \checksaveins #1}%
! 9466: }
! 9467:
! 9468: % initialize:
! 9469: \let\checkinserts\empty
! 9470: \newsaveins\footins
! 9471: \newsaveins\margin
! 9472:
! 9473:
! 9474: % @image. We use the macros from epsf.tex to support this.
! 9475: % If epsf.tex is not installed and @image is used, we complain.
! 9476: %
! 9477: % Check for and read epsf.tex up front. If we read it only at @image
! 9478: % time, we might be inside a group, and then its definitions would get
! 9479: % undone and the next image would fail.
! 9480: \openin 1 = epsf.tex
! 9481: \ifeof 1 \else
! 9482: % Do not bother showing banner with epsf.tex v2.7k (available in
! 9483: % doc/epsf.tex and on ctan).
! 9484: \def\epsfannounce{\toks0 = }%
! 9485: \input epsf.tex
! 9486: \fi
! 9487: \closein 1
! 9488: %
! 9489: % We will only complain once about lack of epsf.tex.
! 9490: \newif\ifwarnednoepsf
! 9491: \newhelp\noepsfhelp{epsf.tex must be installed for images to
! 9492: work. It is also included in the Texinfo distribution, or you can get
! 9493: it from https://ctan.org/texarchive/macros/texinfo/texinfo/doc/epsf.tex.}
! 9494: %
! 9495: \def\image#1{%
! 9496: \ifx\epsfbox\thisisundefined
! 9497: \ifwarnednoepsf \else
! 9498: \errhelp = \noepsfhelp
! 9499: \errmessage{epsf.tex not found, images will be ignored}%
! 9500: \global\warnednoepsftrue
! 9501: \fi
! 9502: \else
! 9503: \imagexxx #1,,,,,\finish
! 9504: \fi
! 9505: }
! 9506:
! 9507: % Approximate height of a line in the standard text font.
! 9508: \newdimen\capheight
! 9509: \setbox0=\vbox{\tenrm H}
! 9510: \capheight=\ht0
! 9511:
! 9512: %
! 9513: % Arguments to @image:
! 9514: % #1 is (mandatory) image filename; we tack on .eps extension.
! 9515: % #2 is (optional) width, #3 is (optional) height.
! 9516: % #4 is (ignored optional) html alt text.
! 9517: % #5 is (ignored optional) extension.
! 9518: % #6 is just the usual extra ignored arg for parsing stuff.
! 9519: \newif\ifimagevmode
! 9520: \def\imagexxx#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6\finish{\begingroup
! 9521: \catcode`\^^M = 5 % in case we're inside an example
! 9522: \normalturnoffactive % allow _ et al. in names
! 9523: \makevalueexpandable
! 9524: \ifvmode
! 9525: \imagevmodetrue
! 9526: \medskip
! 9527: % Usually we'll have text after the image which will insert
! 9528: % \parskip glue, so insert it here too to equalize the space
! 9529: % above and below.
! 9530: \vskip\parskip
! 9531: %
! 9532: % Place image in a \vtop for a top page margin that is (close to) correct,
! 9533: % as \topskip glue is relative to the first baseline.
! 9534: \vtop\bgroup \kern -\capheight \vskip-\parskip
! 9535: \fi
! 9536: %
! 9537: \ifx\centersub\centerV
! 9538: % For @center @image, enter vertical mode and add vertical space
! 9539: % Enter an extra \parskip because @center doesn't add space itself.
! 9540: \vbox\bgroup\vskip\parskip\medskip\vskip\parskip
! 9541: \else
! 9542: % Enter horizontal mode so that indentation from an enclosing
! 9543: % environment such as @quotation is respected.
! 9544: % However, if we're at the top level, we don't want the
! 9545: % normal paragraph indentation.
! 9546: \imageindent
! 9547: \fi
! 9548: %
! 9549: % Output the image.
! 9550: \ifpdf
! 9551: % For pdfTeX and LuaTeX <= 0.80
! 9552: \dopdfimage{#1}{#2}{#3}%
! 9553: \else
! 9554: \ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined
! 9555: % For epsf.tex
! 9556: % \epsfbox itself resets \epsf?size at each figure.
! 9557: \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
! 9558: \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfxsize=#2\relax \fi
! 9559: \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}%
! 9560: \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfysize=#3\relax \fi
! 9561: \epsfbox{#1.eps}%
! 9562: \else
! 9563: % For XeTeX
! 9564: \doxeteximage{#1}{#2}{#3}%
! 9565: \fi
! 9566: \fi
! 9567: %
! 9568: \ifimagevmode
! 9569: \egroup
! 9570: \medskip % space after a standalone image
! 9571: \fi
! 9572: \ifx\centersub\centerV % @center @image
! 9573: \medskip
! 9574: \egroup % close \vbox
! 9575: \fi
! 9576: \endgroup}
! 9577:
! 9578:
! 9579: % @float FLOATTYPE,LABEL,LOC ... @end float for displayed figures, tables,
! 9580: % etc. We don't actually implement floating yet, we always include the
! 9581: % float "here". But it seemed the best name for the future.
! 9582: %
! 9583: \envparseargdef\float{\eatcommaspace\eatcommaspace\dofloat#1, , ,\finish}
! 9584:
! 9585: % There may be a space before second and/or third parameter; delete it.
! 9586: \def\eatcommaspace#1, {#1,}
! 9587:
! 9588: % #1 is the optional FLOATTYPE, the text label for this float, typically
! 9589: % "Figure", "Table", "Example", etc. Can't contain commas. If omitted,
! 9590: % this float will not be numbered and cannot be referred to.
! 9591: %
! 9592: % #2 is the optional xref label. Also must be present for the float to
! 9593: % be referable.
! 9594: %
! 9595: % #3 is the optional positioning argument; for now, it is ignored. It
! 9596: % will somehow specify the positions allowed to float to (here, top, bottom).
! 9597: %
! 9598: % We keep a separate counter for each FLOATTYPE, which we reset at each
! 9599: % chapter-level command.
! 9600: \let\resetallfloatnos=\empty
! 9601: %
! 9602: \def\dofloat#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{%
! 9603: \let\thiscaption=\empty
! 9604: \let\thisshortcaption=\empty
! 9605: %
! 9606: % don't lose footnotes inside @float.
! 9607: %
! 9608: % BEWARE: when the floats start float, we have to issue warning whenever an
! 9609: % insert appears inside a float which could possibly float. --kasal, 26may04
! 9610: %
! 9611: \startsavinginserts
! 9612: %
! 9613: % We can't be used inside a paragraph.
! 9614: \par
! 9615: %
! 9616: \vtop\bgroup
! 9617: \def\floattype{#1}%
! 9618: \def\floatlabel{#2}%
! 9619: \def\floatloc{#3}% we do nothing with this yet.
! 9620: %
! 9621: \ifx\floattype\empty
! 9622: \let\safefloattype=\empty
! 9623: \else
! 9624: {%
! 9625: % the floattype might have accents or other special characters,
! 9626: % but we need to use it in a control sequence name.
! 9627: \indexnofonts
! 9628: \turnoffactive
! 9629: \xdef\safefloattype{\floattype}%
! 9630: }%
! 9631: \fi
! 9632: %
! 9633: % If label is given but no type, we handle that as the empty type.
! 9634: \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else
! 9635: % We want each FLOATTYPE to be numbered separately (Figure 1,
! 9636: % Table 1, Figure 2, ...). (And if no label, no number.)
! 9637: %
! 9638: \expandafter\getfloatno\csname\safefloattype floatno\endcsname
! 9639: \global\advance\floatno by 1
! 9640: %
! 9641: {%
! 9642: % This magic value for \currentsection is output by \setref as the
! 9643: % XREFLABEL-title value. \xrefX uses it to distinguish float
! 9644: % labels (which have a completely different output format) from
! 9645: % node and anchor labels. And \xrdef uses it to construct the
! 9646: % lists of floats.
! 9647: %
! 9648: \edef\currentsection{\floatmagic=\safefloattype}%
! 9649: \setref{\floatlabel}{Yfloat}%
! 9650: }%
! 9651: \fi
! 9652: %
! 9653: % start with \parskip glue, I guess.
! 9654: \vskip\parskip
! 9655: %
! 9656: % Don't suppress indentation if a float happens to start a section.
! 9657: \restorefirstparagraphindent
! 9658: }
! 9659:
! 9660: % we have these possibilities:
! 9661: % @float Foo,lbl & @caption{Cap}: Foo 1.1: Cap
! 9662: % @float Foo,lbl & no caption: Foo 1.1
! 9663: % @float Foo & @caption{Cap}: Foo: Cap
! 9664: % @float Foo & no caption: Foo
! 9665: % @float ,lbl & Caption{Cap}: 1.1: Cap
! 9666: % @float ,lbl & no caption: 1.1
! 9667: % @float & @caption{Cap}: Cap
! 9668: % @float & no caption:
! 9669: %
! 9670: \def\Efloat{%
! 9671: \let\floatident = \empty
! 9672: %
! 9673: % In all cases, if we have a float type, it comes first.
! 9674: \ifx\floattype\empty \else \def\floatident{\floattype}\fi
! 9675: %
! 9676: % If we have an xref label, the number comes next.
! 9677: \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else
! 9678: \ifx\floattype\empty \else % if also had float type, need tie first.
! 9679: \appendtomacro\floatident{\tie}%
! 9680: \fi
! 9681: % the number.
! 9682: \appendtomacro\floatident{\chaplevelprefix\the\floatno}%
! 9683: \fi
! 9684: %
! 9685: % Start the printed caption with what we've constructed in
! 9686: % \floatident, but keep it separate; we need \floatident again.
! 9687: \let\captionline = \floatident
! 9688: %
! 9689: \ifx\thiscaption\empty \else
! 9690: \ifx\floatident\empty \else
! 9691: \appendtomacro\captionline{: }% had ident, so need a colon between
! 9692: \fi
! 9693: %
! 9694: % caption text.
! 9695: \appendtomacro\captionline{\scanexp\thiscaption}%
! 9696: \fi
! 9697: %
! 9698: % If we have anything to print, print it, with space before.
! 9699: % Eventually this needs to become an \insert.
! 9700: \ifx\captionline\empty \else
! 9701: \vskip.5\parskip
! 9702: \captionline
! 9703: %
! 9704: % Space below caption.
! 9705: \vskip\parskip
! 9706: \fi
! 9707: %
! 9708: % If have an xref label, write the list of floats info. Do this
! 9709: % after the caption, to avoid chance of it being a breakpoint.
! 9710: \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else
! 9711: % Write the text that goes in the lof to the aux file as
! 9712: % \floatlabel-lof. Besides \floatident, we include the short
! 9713: % caption if specified, else the full caption if specified, else nothing.
! 9714: {%
! 9715: \requireauxfile
! 9716: \atdummies
! 9717: %
! 9718: \ifx\thisshortcaption\empty
! 9719: \def\gtemp{\thiscaption}%
! 9720: \else
! 9721: \def\gtemp{\thisshortcaption}%
! 9722: \fi
! 9723: \immediate\write\auxfile{@xrdef{\floatlabel-lof}{\floatident
! 9724: \ifx\gtemp\empty \else : \gtemp \fi}}%
! 9725: }%
! 9726: \fi
! 9727: \egroup % end of \vtop
! 9728: %
! 9729: \checkinserts
! 9730: }
! 9731:
! 9732: % Append the tokens #2 to the definition of macro #1, not expanding either.
! 9733: %
! 9734: \def\appendtomacro#1#2{%
! 9735: \expandafter\def\expandafter#1\expandafter{#1#2}%
! 9736: }
! 9737:
! 9738: % @caption, @shortcaption
! 9739: %
! 9740: \def\caption{\docaption\thiscaption}
! 9741: \def\shortcaption{\docaption\thisshortcaption}
! 9742: \def\docaption{\checkenv\float \bgroup\scanctxt\docaptionz}
! 9743: \def\docaptionz#1#2{\egroup \def#1{#2}}
! 9744:
! 9745: % The parameter is the control sequence identifying the counter we are
! 9746: % going to use. Create it if it doesn't exist and assign it to \floatno.
! 9747: \def\getfloatno#1{%
! 9748: \ifx#1\relax
! 9749: % Haven't seen this figure type before.
! 9750: \csname newcount\endcsname #1%
! 9751: %
! 9752: % Remember to reset this floatno at the next chap.
! 9753: \expandafter\gdef\expandafter\resetallfloatnos
! 9754: \expandafter{\resetallfloatnos #1=0 }%
! 9755: \fi
! 9756: \let\floatno#1%
! 9757: }
! 9758:
! 9759: % \setref calls this to get the XREFLABEL-snt value. We want an @xref
! 9760: % to the FLOATLABEL to expand to "Figure 3.1". We call \setref when we
! 9761: % first read the @float command.
! 9762: %
! 9763: \def\Yfloat{\floattype@tie \chaplevelprefix\the\floatno}%
! 9764:
! 9765: % Magic string used for the XREFLABEL-title value, so \xrefX can
! 9766: % distinguish floats from other xref types.
! 9767: \def\floatmagic{!!float!!}
! 9768:
! 9769: % #1 is the control sequence we are passed; we expand into a conditional
! 9770: % which is true if #1 represents a float ref. That is, the magic
! 9771: % \currentsection value which we \setref above.
! 9772: %
! 9773: \def\iffloat#1{\expandafter\doiffloat#1==\finish}
! 9774: %
! 9775: % #1 is (maybe) the \floatmagic string. If so, #2 will be the
! 9776: % (safe) float type for this float. We set \iffloattype to #2.
! 9777: %
! 9778: \def\doiffloat#1=#2=#3\finish{%
! 9779: \def\temp{#1}%
! 9780: \def\iffloattype{#2}%
! 9781: \ifx\temp\floatmagic
! 9782: }
! 9783:
! 9784: % @listoffloats FLOATTYPE - print a list of floats like a table of contents.
! 9785: %
! 9786: \parseargdef\listoffloats{%
! 9787: \def\floattype{#1}% floattype
! 9788: {%
! 9789: % the floattype might have accents or other special characters,
! 9790: % but we need to use it in a control sequence name.
! 9791: \indexnofonts
! 9792: \turnoffactive
! 9793: \xdef\safefloattype{\floattype}%
! 9794: }%
! 9795: %
! 9796: % \xrdef saves the floats as a \do-list in \floatlistSAFEFLOATTYPE.
! 9797: \expandafter\ifx\csname floatlist\safefloattype\endcsname \relax
! 9798: \ifhavexrefs
! 9799: % if the user said @listoffloats foo but never @float foo.
! 9800: \message{\linenumber No `\safefloattype' floats to list.}%
! 9801: \fi
! 9802: \else
! 9803: \begingroup
! 9804: \leftskip=\tocindent % indent these entries like a toc
! 9805: \let\do=\listoffloatsdo
! 9806: \csname floatlist\safefloattype\endcsname
! 9807: \endgroup
! 9808: \fi
! 9809: }
! 9810:
! 9811: % This is called on each entry in a list of floats. We're passed the
! 9812: % xref label, in the form LABEL-title, which is how we save it in the
! 9813: % aux file. We strip off the -title and look up \XRLABEL-lof, which
! 9814: % has the text we're supposed to typeset here.
! 9815: %
! 9816: % Figures without xref labels will not be included in the list (since
! 9817: % they won't appear in the aux file).
! 9818: %
! 9819: \def\listoffloatsdo#1{\listoffloatsdoentry#1\finish}
! 9820: \def\listoffloatsdoentry#1-title\finish{{%
! 9821: % Can't fully expand XR#1-lof because it can contain anything. Just
! 9822: % pass the control sequence. On the other hand, XR#1-pg is just the
! 9823: % page number, and we want to fully expand that so we can get a link
! 9824: % in pdf output.
! 9825: \toksA = \expandafter{\csname XR#1-lof\endcsname}%
! 9826: %
! 9827: % use the same \entry macro we use to generate the TOC and index.
! 9828: \edef\writeentry{\noexpand\entry{\the\toksA}{\csname XR#1-pg\endcsname}}%
! 9829: \writeentry
! 9830: }}
! 9831:
! 9832:
! 9833: \message{localization,}
! 9834:
! 9835: % For single-language documents, @documentlanguage is usually given very
! 9836: % early, just after @documentencoding. Single argument is the language
! 9837: % (de) or locale (de_DE) abbreviation.
! 9838: %
! 9839: {
! 9840: \catcode`\_ = \active
! 9841: \globaldefs=1
! 9842: \parseargdef\documentlanguage{%
! 9843: \tex % read txi-??.tex file in plain TeX.
! 9844: % Read the file by the name they passed if it exists.
! 9845: \let_ = \normalunderscore % normal _ character for filename test
! 9846: \openin 1 txi-#1.tex
! 9847: \ifeof 1
! 9848: \documentlanguagetrywithoutunderscore #1_\finish
! 9849: \else
! 9850: \globaldefs = 1 % everything in the txi-LL files needs to persist
! 9851: \input txi-#1.tex
! 9852: \fi
! 9853: \closein 1
! 9854: \endgroup % end raw TeX
! 9855: }
! 9856: %
! 9857: % If they passed de_DE, and txi-de_DE.tex doesn't exist,
! 9858: % try txi-de.tex.
! 9859: %
! 9860: \gdef\documentlanguagetrywithoutunderscore#1_#2\finish{%
! 9861: \openin 1 txi-#1.tex
! 9862: \ifeof 1
! 9863: \errhelp = \nolanghelp
! 9864: \errmessage{Cannot read language file txi-#1.tex}%
! 9865: \else
! 9866: \globaldefs = 1 % everything in the txi-LL files needs to persist
! 9867: \input txi-#1.tex
! 9868: \fi
! 9869: \closein 1
! 9870: }
! 9871: }% end of special _ catcode
! 9872: %
! 9873: \newhelp\nolanghelp{The given language definition file cannot be found or
! 9874: is empty. Maybe you need to install it? Putting it in the current
! 9875: directory should work if nowhere else does.}
! 9876:
! 9877: % This macro is called from txi-??.tex files; the first argument is the
! 9878: % \language name to set (without the "\lang@" prefix), the second and
! 9879: % third args are \{left,right}hyphenmin.
! 9880: %
! 9881: % The language names to pass are determined when the format is built.
! 9882: % See the etex.log file created at that time, e.g.,
! 9883: % /usr/local/texlive/2008/texmf-var/web2c/pdftex/etex.log.
! 9884: %
! 9885: % With TeX Live 2008, etex now includes hyphenation patterns for all
! 9886: % available languages. This means we can support hyphenation in
! 9887: % Texinfo, at least to some extent. (This still doesn't solve the
! 9888: % accented characters problem.)
! 9889: %
! 9890: \catcode`@=11
! 9891: \def\txisetlanguage#1#2#3{%
! 9892: % do not set the language if the name is undefined in the current TeX.
! 9893: \expandafter\ifx\csname lang@#1\endcsname \relax
! 9894: \message{no patterns for #1}%
! 9895: \else
! 9896: \global\language = \csname lang@#1\endcsname
! 9897: \fi
! 9898: % but there is no harm in adjusting the hyphenmin values regardless.
! 9899: \global\lefthyphenmin = #2\relax
! 9900: \global\righthyphenmin = #3\relax
! 9901: }
! 9902:
! 9903: % XeTeX and LuaTeX can handle Unicode natively.
! 9904: % Their default I/O uses UTF-8 sequences instead of a byte-wise operation.
! 9905: % Other TeX engines' I/O (pdfTeX, etc.) is byte-wise.
! 9906: %
! 9907: \newif\iftxinativeunicodecapable
! 9908: \newif\iftxiusebytewiseio
! 9909:
! 9910: \ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined
! 9911: \ifx\luatexversion\thisisundefined
! 9912: \txinativeunicodecapablefalse
! 9913: \txiusebytewiseiotrue
! 9914: \else
! 9915: \txinativeunicodecapabletrue
! 9916: \txiusebytewiseiofalse
! 9917: \fi
! 9918: \else
! 9919: \txinativeunicodecapabletrue
! 9920: \txiusebytewiseiofalse
! 9921: \fi
! 9922:
! 9923: % Set I/O by bytes instead of UTF-8 sequence for XeTeX and LuaTex
! 9924: % for non-UTF-8 (byte-wise) encodings.
! 9925: %
! 9926: \def\setbytewiseio{%
! 9927: \ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined
! 9928: \else
! 9929: \XeTeXdefaultencoding "bytes" % For subsequent files to be read
! 9930: \XeTeXinputencoding "bytes" % For document root file
! 9931: % Unfortunately, there seems to be no corresponding XeTeX command for
! 9932: % output encoding. This is a problem for auxiliary index and TOC files.
! 9933: % The only solution would be perhaps to write out @U{...} sequences in
! 9934: % place of non-ASCII characters.
! 9935: \fi
! 9936:
! 9937: \ifx\luatexversion\thisisundefined
! 9938: \else
! 9939: \directlua{
! 9940: local utf8_char, byte, gsub = unicode.utf8.char, string.byte, string.gsub
! 9941: local function convert_char (char)
! 9942: return utf8_char(byte(char))
! 9943: end
! 9944:
! 9945: local function convert_line (line)
! 9946: return gsub(line, ".", convert_char)
! 9947: end
! 9948:
! 9949: callback.register("process_input_buffer", convert_line)
! 9950:
! 9951: local function convert_line_out (line)
! 9952: local line_out = ""
! 9953: for c in string.utfvalues(line) do
! 9954: line_out = line_out .. string.char(c)
! 9955: end
! 9956: return line_out
! 9957: end
! 9958:
! 9959: callback.register("process_output_buffer", convert_line_out)
! 9960: }
! 9961: \fi
! 9962:
! 9963: \txiusebytewiseiotrue
! 9964: }
! 9965:
! 9966:
! 9967: % Helpers for encodings.
! 9968: % Set the catcode of characters 128 through 255 to the specified number.
! 9969: %
! 9970: \def\setnonasciicharscatcode#1{%
! 9971: \count255=128
! 9972: \loop\ifnum\count255<256
! 9973: \global\catcode\count255=#1\relax
! 9974: \advance\count255 by 1
! 9975: \repeat
! 9976: }
! 9977:
! 9978: \def\setnonasciicharscatcodenonglobal#1{%
! 9979: \count255=128
! 9980: \loop\ifnum\count255<256
! 9981: \catcode\count255=#1\relax
! 9982: \advance\count255 by 1
! 9983: \repeat
! 9984: }
! 9985:
! 9986: % @documentencoding sets the definition of non-ASCII characters
! 9987: % according to the specified encoding.
! 9988: %
! 9989: \def\documentencoding{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\documentencodingzzz}
! 9990: \def\documentencodingzzz#1{%
! 9991: %
! 9992: % Encoding being declared for the document.
! 9993: \def\declaredencoding{\csname #1.enc\endcsname}%
! 9994: %
! 9995: % Supported encodings: names converted to tokens in order to be able
! 9996: % to compare them with \ifx.
! 9997: \def\ascii{\csname US-ASCII.enc\endcsname}%
! 9998: \def\latnine{\csname ISO-8859-15.enc\endcsname}%
! 9999: \def\latone{\csname ISO-8859-1.enc\endcsname}%
! 10000: \def\lattwo{\csname ISO-8859-2.enc\endcsname}%
! 10001: \def\utfeight{\csname UTF-8.enc\endcsname}%
! 10002: %
! 10003: \ifx \declaredencoding \ascii
! 10004: \asciichardefs
! 10005: %
! 10006: \else \ifx \declaredencoding \lattwo
! 10007: \iftxinativeunicodecapable
! 10008: \setbytewiseio
! 10009: \fi
! 10010: \setnonasciicharscatcode\active
! 10011: \lattwochardefs
! 10012: %
! 10013: \else \ifx \declaredencoding \latone
! 10014: \iftxinativeunicodecapable
! 10015: \setbytewiseio
! 10016: \fi
! 10017: \setnonasciicharscatcode\active
! 10018: \latonechardefs
! 10019: %
! 10020: \else \ifx \declaredencoding \latnine
! 10021: \iftxinativeunicodecapable
! 10022: \setbytewiseio
! 10023: \fi
! 10024: \setnonasciicharscatcode\active
! 10025: \latninechardefs
! 10026: %
! 10027: \else \ifx \declaredencoding \utfeight
! 10028: \iftxinativeunicodecapable
! 10029: % For native Unicode handling (XeTeX and LuaTeX)
! 10030: \nativeunicodechardefs
! 10031: \else
! 10032: % For treating UTF-8 as byte sequences (TeX, eTeX and pdfTeX).
! 10033: % Since we already invoke \utfeightchardefs at the top level,
! 10034: % making non-ascii chars active is sufficient.
! 10035: \setnonasciicharscatcode\active
! 10036: \fi
! 10037: %
! 10038: \else
! 10039: \message{Ignoring unknown document encoding: #1.}%
! 10040: %
! 10041: \fi % utfeight
! 10042: \fi % latnine
! 10043: \fi % latone
! 10044: \fi % lattwo
! 10045: \fi % ascii
! 10046: %
! 10047: \ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined
! 10048: \else
! 10049: \ifx \declaredencoding \utfeight
! 10050: \else
! 10051: \ifx \declaredencoding \ascii
! 10052: \else
! 10053: \message{Warning: XeTeX with non-UTF-8 encodings cannot handle %
! 10054: non-ASCII characters in auxiliary files.}%
! 10055: \fi
! 10056: \fi
! 10057: \fi
! 10058: }
! 10059:
! 10060: % A message to be logged when using a character that isn't available
! 10061: % the default font encoding (OT1).
! 10062: %
! 10063: \def\missingcharmsg#1{\message{Character missing, sorry: #1.}}
! 10064:
! 10065: % Take account of \c (plain) vs. \, (Texinfo) difference.
! 10066: \def\cedilla#1{\ifx\c\ptexc\c{#1}\else\,{#1}\fi}
! 10067:
! 10068: \def\gdefchar#1#2{%
! 10069: \gdef#1{%
! 10070: \ifpassthroughchars
! 10071: \string#1%
! 10072: \else
! 10073: #2%
! 10074: \fi
! 10075: }}
! 10076:
! 10077: \begingroup
! 10078:
! 10079: % Make non-ASCII characters active for defining the character definition
! 10080: % macros.
! 10081: \setnonasciicharscatcode\active
! 10082:
! 10083: % Latin1 (ISO-8859-1) character definitions.
! 10084: \gdef\latonechardefs{%
! 10085: \gdefchar^^a0{\tie}
! 10086: \gdefchar^^a1{\exclamdown}
! 10087: \gdefchar^^a2{{\tcfont \char162}} % cent
! 10088: \gdefchar^^a3{\pounds{}}
! 10089: \gdefchar^^a4{{\tcfont \char164}} % currency
! 10090: \gdefchar^^a5{{\tcfont \char165}} % yen
! 10091: \gdefchar^^a6{{\tcfont \char166}} % broken bar
! 10092: \gdefchar^^a7{\S}
! 10093: \gdefchar^^a8{\"{}}
! 10094: \gdefchar^^a9{\copyright{}}
! 10095: \gdefchar^^aa{\ordf}
! 10096: \gdefchar^^ab{\guillemetleft{}}
! 10097: \gdefchar^^ac{\ensuremath\lnot}
! 10098: \gdefchar^^ad{\-}
! 10099: \gdefchar^^ae{\registeredsymbol{}}
! 10100: \gdefchar^^af{\={}}
! 10101: %
! 10102: \gdefchar^^b0{\textdegree}
! 10103: \gdefchar^^b1{$\pm$}
! 10104: \gdefchar^^b2{$^2$}
! 10105: \gdefchar^^b3{$^3$}
! 10106: \gdefchar^^b4{\'{}}
! 10107: \gdefchar^^b5{$\mu$}
! 10108: \gdefchar^^b6{\P}
! 10109: \gdefchar^^b7{\ensuremath\cdot}
! 10110: \gdefchar^^b8{\cedilla\ }
! 10111: \gdefchar^^b9{$^1$}
! 10112: \gdefchar^^ba{\ordm}
! 10113: \gdefchar^^bb{\guillemetright{}}
! 10114: \gdefchar^^bc{$1\over4$}
! 10115: \gdefchar^^bd{$1\over2$}
! 10116: \gdefchar^^be{$3\over4$}
! 10117: \gdefchar^^bf{\questiondown}
! 10118: %
! 10119: \gdefchar^^c0{\`A}
! 10120: \gdefchar^^c1{\'A}
! 10121: \gdefchar^^c2{\^A}
! 10122: \gdefchar^^c3{\~A}
! 10123: \gdefchar^^c4{\"A}
! 10124: \gdefchar^^c5{\ringaccent A}
! 10125: \gdefchar^^c6{\AE}
! 10126: \gdefchar^^c7{\cedilla C}
! 10127: \gdefchar^^c8{\`E}
! 10128: \gdefchar^^c9{\'E}
! 10129: \gdefchar^^ca{\^E}
! 10130: \gdefchar^^cb{\"E}
! 10131: \gdefchar^^cc{\`I}
! 10132: \gdefchar^^cd{\'I}
! 10133: \gdefchar^^ce{\^I}
! 10134: \gdefchar^^cf{\"I}
! 10135: %
! 10136: \gdefchar^^d0{\DH}
! 10137: \gdefchar^^d1{\~N}
! 10138: \gdefchar^^d2{\`O}
! 10139: \gdefchar^^d3{\'O}
! 10140: \gdefchar^^d4{\^O}
! 10141: \gdefchar^^d5{\~O}
! 10142: \gdefchar^^d6{\"O}
! 10143: \gdefchar^^d7{$\times$}
! 10144: \gdefchar^^d8{\O}
! 10145: \gdefchar^^d9{\`U}
! 10146: \gdefchar^^da{\'U}
! 10147: \gdefchar^^db{\^U}
! 10148: \gdefchar^^dc{\"U}
! 10149: \gdefchar^^dd{\'Y}
! 10150: \gdefchar^^de{\TH}
! 10151: \gdefchar^^df{\ss}
! 10152: %
! 10153: \gdefchar^^e0{\`a}
! 10154: \gdefchar^^e1{\'a}
! 10155: \gdefchar^^e2{\^a}
! 10156: \gdefchar^^e3{\~a}
! 10157: \gdefchar^^e4{\"a}
! 10158: \gdefchar^^e5{\ringaccent a}
! 10159: \gdefchar^^e6{\ae}
! 10160: \gdefchar^^e7{\cedilla c}
! 10161: \gdefchar^^e8{\`e}
! 10162: \gdefchar^^e9{\'e}
! 10163: \gdefchar^^ea{\^e}
! 10164: \gdefchar^^eb{\"e}
! 10165: \gdefchar^^ec{\`{\dotless i}}
! 10166: \gdefchar^^ed{\'{\dotless i}}
! 10167: \gdefchar^^ee{\^{\dotless i}}
! 10168: \gdefchar^^ef{\"{\dotless i}}
! 10169: %
! 10170: \gdefchar^^f0{\dh}
! 10171: \gdefchar^^f1{\~n}
! 10172: \gdefchar^^f2{\`o}
! 10173: \gdefchar^^f3{\'o}
! 10174: \gdefchar^^f4{\^o}
! 10175: \gdefchar^^f5{\~o}
! 10176: \gdefchar^^f6{\"o}
! 10177: \gdefchar^^f7{$\div$}
! 10178: \gdefchar^^f8{\o}
! 10179: \gdefchar^^f9{\`u}
! 10180: \gdefchar^^fa{\'u}
! 10181: \gdefchar^^fb{\^u}
! 10182: \gdefchar^^fc{\"u}
! 10183: \gdefchar^^fd{\'y}
! 10184: \gdefchar^^fe{\th}
! 10185: \gdefchar^^ff{\"y}
! 10186: }
! 10187:
! 10188: % Latin9 (ISO-8859-15) encoding character definitions.
! 10189: \gdef\latninechardefs{%
! 10190: % Encoding is almost identical to Latin1.
! 10191: \latonechardefs
! 10192: %
! 10193: \gdefchar^^a4{\euro{}}
! 10194: \gdefchar^^a6{\v S}
! 10195: \gdefchar^^a8{\v s}
! 10196: \gdefchar^^b4{\v Z}
! 10197: \gdefchar^^b8{\v z}
! 10198: \gdefchar^^bc{\OE}
! 10199: \gdefchar^^bd{\oe}
! 10200: \gdefchar^^be{\"Y}
! 10201: }
! 10202:
! 10203: % Latin2 (ISO-8859-2) character definitions.
! 10204: \gdef\lattwochardefs{%
! 10205: \gdefchar^^a0{\tie}
! 10206: \gdefchar^^a1{\ogonek{A}}
! 10207: \gdefchar^^a2{\u{}}
! 10208: \gdefchar^^a3{\L}
! 10209: \gdefchar^^a4{\missingcharmsg{CURRENCY SIGN}}
! 10210: \gdefchar^^a5{\v L}
! 10211: \gdefchar^^a6{\'S}
! 10212: \gdefchar^^a7{\S}
! 10213: \gdefchar^^a8{\"{}}
! 10214: \gdefchar^^a9{\v S}
! 10215: \gdefchar^^aa{\cedilla S}
! 10216: \gdefchar^^ab{\v T}
! 10217: \gdefchar^^ac{\'Z}
! 10218: \gdefchar^^ad{\-}
! 10219: \gdefchar^^ae{\v Z}
! 10220: \gdefchar^^af{\dotaccent Z}
! 10221: %
! 10222: \gdefchar^^b0{\textdegree}
! 10223: \gdefchar^^b1{\ogonek{a}}
! 10224: \gdefchar^^b2{\ogonek{ }}
! 10225: \gdefchar^^b3{\l}
! 10226: \gdefchar^^b4{\'{}}
! 10227: \gdefchar^^b5{\v l}
! 10228: \gdefchar^^b6{\'s}
! 10229: \gdefchar^^b7{\v{}}
! 10230: \gdefchar^^b8{\cedilla\ }
! 10231: \gdefchar^^b9{\v s}
! 10232: \gdefchar^^ba{\cedilla s}
! 10233: \gdefchar^^bb{\v t}
! 10234: \gdefchar^^bc{\'z}
! 10235: \gdefchar^^bd{\H{}}
! 10236: \gdefchar^^be{\v z}
! 10237: \gdefchar^^bf{\dotaccent z}
! 10238: %
! 10239: \gdefchar^^c0{\'R}
! 10240: \gdefchar^^c1{\'A}
! 10241: \gdefchar^^c2{\^A}
! 10242: \gdefchar^^c3{\u A}
! 10243: \gdefchar^^c4{\"A}
! 10244: \gdefchar^^c5{\'L}
! 10245: \gdefchar^^c6{\'C}
! 10246: \gdefchar^^c7{\cedilla C}
! 10247: \gdefchar^^c8{\v C}
! 10248: \gdefchar^^c9{\'E}
! 10249: \gdefchar^^ca{\ogonek{E}}
! 10250: \gdefchar^^cb{\"E}
! 10251: \gdefchar^^cc{\v E}
! 10252: \gdefchar^^cd{\'I}
! 10253: \gdefchar^^ce{\^I}
! 10254: \gdefchar^^cf{\v D}
! 10255: %
! 10256: \gdefchar^^d0{\DH}
! 10257: \gdefchar^^d1{\'N}
! 10258: \gdefchar^^d2{\v N}
! 10259: \gdefchar^^d3{\'O}
! 10260: \gdefchar^^d4{\^O}
! 10261: \gdefchar^^d5{\H O}
! 10262: \gdefchar^^d6{\"O}
! 10263: \gdefchar^^d7{$\times$}
! 10264: \gdefchar^^d8{\v R}
! 10265: \gdefchar^^d9{\ringaccent U}
! 10266: \gdefchar^^da{\'U}
! 10267: \gdefchar^^db{\H U}
! 10268: \gdefchar^^dc{\"U}
! 10269: \gdefchar^^dd{\'Y}
! 10270: \gdefchar^^de{\cedilla T}
! 10271: \gdefchar^^df{\ss}
! 10272: %
! 10273: \gdefchar^^e0{\'r}
! 10274: \gdefchar^^e1{\'a}
! 10275: \gdefchar^^e2{\^a}
! 10276: \gdefchar^^e3{\u a}
! 10277: \gdefchar^^e4{\"a}
! 10278: \gdefchar^^e5{\'l}
! 10279: \gdefchar^^e6{\'c}
! 10280: \gdefchar^^e7{\cedilla c}
! 10281: \gdefchar^^e8{\v c}
! 10282: \gdefchar^^e9{\'e}
! 10283: \gdefchar^^ea{\ogonek{e}}
! 10284: \gdefchar^^eb{\"e}
! 10285: \gdefchar^^ec{\v e}
! 10286: \gdefchar^^ed{\'{\dotless{i}}}
! 10287: \gdefchar^^ee{\^{\dotless{i}}}
! 10288: \gdefchar^^ef{\v d}
! 10289: %
! 10290: \gdefchar^^f0{\dh}
! 10291: \gdefchar^^f1{\'n}
! 10292: \gdefchar^^f2{\v n}
! 10293: \gdefchar^^f3{\'o}
! 10294: \gdefchar^^f4{\^o}
! 10295: \gdefchar^^f5{\H o}
! 10296: \gdefchar^^f6{\"o}
! 10297: \gdefchar^^f7{$\div$}
! 10298: \gdefchar^^f8{\v r}
! 10299: \gdefchar^^f9{\ringaccent u}
! 10300: \gdefchar^^fa{\'u}
! 10301: \gdefchar^^fb{\H u}
! 10302: \gdefchar^^fc{\"u}
! 10303: \gdefchar^^fd{\'y}
! 10304: \gdefchar^^fe{\cedilla t}
! 10305: \gdefchar^^ff{\dotaccent{}}
! 10306: }
! 10307:
! 10308: \endgroup % active chars
! 10309:
! 10310: % UTF-8 character definitions.
! 10311: %
! 10312: % This code to support UTF-8 is based on LaTeX's utf8.def, with some
! 10313: % changes for Texinfo conventions. It is included here under the GPL by
! 10314: % permission from Frank Mittelbach and the LaTeX team.
! 10315: %
! 10316: \newcount\countUTFx
! 10317: \newcount\countUTFy
! 10318: \newcount\countUTFz
! 10319:
! 10320: \gdef\UTFviiiTwoOctets#1#2{\expandafter
! 10321: \UTFviiiDefined\csname u8:#1\string #2\endcsname}
! 10322: %
! 10323: \gdef\UTFviiiThreeOctets#1#2#3{\expandafter
! 10324: \UTFviiiDefined\csname u8:#1\string #2\string #3\endcsname}
! 10325: %
! 10326: \gdef\UTFviiiFourOctets#1#2#3#4{\expandafter
! 10327: \UTFviiiDefined\csname u8:#1\string #2\string #3\string #4\endcsname}
! 10328:
! 10329: \gdef\UTFviiiDefined#1{%
! 10330: \ifx #1\relax
! 10331: \message{\linenumber Unicode char \string #1 not defined for Texinfo}%
! 10332: \else
! 10333: \expandafter #1%
! 10334: \fi
! 10335: }
! 10336:
! 10337: % Give non-ASCII bytes the active definitions for processing UTF-8 sequences
! 10338: \begingroup
! 10339: \catcode`\~13
! 10340: \catcode`\$12
! 10341: \catcode`\"12
! 10342:
! 10343: % Loop from \countUTFx to \countUTFy, performing \UTFviiiTmp
! 10344: % substituting ~ and $ with a character token of that value.
! 10345: \def\UTFviiiLoop{%
! 10346: \global\catcode\countUTFx\active
! 10347: \uccode`\~\countUTFx
! 10348: \uccode`\$\countUTFx
! 10349: \uppercase\expandafter{\UTFviiiTmp}%
! 10350: \advance\countUTFx by 1
! 10351: \ifnum\countUTFx < \countUTFy
! 10352: \expandafter\UTFviiiLoop
! 10353: \fi}
! 10354:
! 10355: % For bytes other than the first in a UTF-8 sequence. Not expected to
! 10356: % be expanded except when writing to auxiliary files.
! 10357: \countUTFx = "80
! 10358: \countUTFy = "C2
! 10359: \def\UTFviiiTmp{%
! 10360: \gdef~{%
! 10361: \ifpassthroughchars $\fi}}%
! 10362: \UTFviiiLoop
! 10363:
! 10364: \countUTFx = "C2
! 10365: \countUTFy = "E0
! 10366: \def\UTFviiiTmp{%
! 10367: \gdef~{%
! 10368: \ifpassthroughchars $%
! 10369: \else\expandafter\UTFviiiTwoOctets\expandafter$\fi}}%
! 10370: \UTFviiiLoop
! 10371:
! 10372: \countUTFx = "E0
! 10373: \countUTFy = "F0
! 10374: \def\UTFviiiTmp{%
! 10375: \gdef~{%
! 10376: \ifpassthroughchars $%
! 10377: \else\expandafter\UTFviiiThreeOctets\expandafter$\fi}}%
! 10378: \UTFviiiLoop
! 10379:
! 10380: \countUTFx = "F0
! 10381: \countUTFy = "F4
! 10382: \def\UTFviiiTmp{%
! 10383: \gdef~{%
! 10384: \ifpassthroughchars $%
! 10385: \else\expandafter\UTFviiiFourOctets\expandafter$\fi
! 10386: }}%
! 10387: \UTFviiiLoop
! 10388: \endgroup
! 10389:
! 10390: \def\globallet{\global\let} % save some \expandafter's below
! 10391:
! 10392: % @U{xxxx} to produce U+xxxx, if we support it.
! 10393: \def\U#1{%
! 10394: \expandafter\ifx\csname uni:#1\endcsname \relax
! 10395: \iftxinativeunicodecapable
! 10396: % All Unicode characters can be used if native Unicode handling is
! 10397: % active. However, if the font does not have the glyph,
! 10398: % letters are missing.
! 10399: \begingroup
! 10400: \uccode`\.="#1\relax
! 10401: \uppercase{.}
! 10402: \endgroup
! 10403: \else
! 10404: \errhelp = \EMsimple
! 10405: \errmessage{Unicode character U+#1 not supported, sorry}%
! 10406: \fi
! 10407: \else
! 10408: \csname uni:#1\endcsname
! 10409: \fi
! 10410: }
! 10411:
! 10412: % These macros are used here to construct the name of a control
! 10413: % sequence to be defined.
! 10414: \def\UTFviiiTwoOctetsName#1#2{%
! 10415: \csname u8:#1\string #2\endcsname}%
! 10416: \def\UTFviiiThreeOctetsName#1#2#3{%
! 10417: \csname u8:#1\string #2\string #3\endcsname}%
! 10418: \def\UTFviiiFourOctetsName#1#2#3#4{%
! 10419: \csname u8:#1\string #2\string #3\string #4\endcsname}%
! 10420:
! 10421: % For UTF-8 byte sequences (TeX, e-TeX and pdfTeX),
! 10422: % provide a definition macro to replace a Unicode character;
! 10423: % this gets used by the @U command
! 10424: %
! 10425: \begingroup
! 10426: \catcode`\"=12
! 10427: \catcode`\<=12
! 10428: \catcode`\.=12
! 10429: \catcode`\,=12
! 10430: \catcode`\;=12
! 10431: \catcode`\!=12
! 10432: \catcode`\~=13
! 10433: \gdef\DeclareUnicodeCharacterUTFviii#1#2{%
! 10434: \countUTFz = "#1\relax
! 10435: \begingroup
! 10436: \parseXMLCharref
! 10437:
! 10438: % Give \u8:... its definition. The sequence of seven \expandafter's
! 10439: % expands after the \gdef three times, e.g.
! 10440: %
! 10441: % 1. \UTFviiTwoOctetsName B1 B2
! 10442: % 2. \csname u8:B1 \string B2 \endcsname
! 10443: % 3. \u8: B1 B2 (a single control sequence token)
! 10444: %
! 10445: \expandafter\expandafter
! 10446: \expandafter\expandafter
! 10447: \expandafter\expandafter
! 10448: \expandafter\gdef \UTFviiiTmp{#2}%
! 10449: %
! 10450: \expandafter\ifx\csname uni:#1\endcsname \relax \else
! 10451: \message{Internal error, already defined: #1}%
! 10452: \fi
! 10453: %
! 10454: % define an additional control sequence for this code point.
! 10455: \expandafter\globallet\csname uni:#1\endcsname \UTFviiiTmp
! 10456: \endgroup}
! 10457: %
! 10458: % Given the value in \countUTFz as a Unicode code point, set \UTFviiiTmp
! 10459: % to the corresponding UTF-8 sequence.
! 10460: \gdef\parseXMLCharref{%
! 10461: \ifnum\countUTFz < "20\relax
! 10462: \errhelp = \EMsimple
! 10463: \errmessage{Cannot define Unicode char value < 0020}%
! 10464: \else\ifnum\countUTFz < "800\relax
! 10465: \parseUTFviiiA,%
! 10466: \parseUTFviiiB C\UTFviiiTwoOctetsName.,%
! 10467: \else\ifnum\countUTFz < "10000\relax
! 10468: \parseUTFviiiA;%
! 10469: \parseUTFviiiA,%
! 10470: \parseUTFviiiB E\UTFviiiThreeOctetsName.{,;}%
! 10471: \else
! 10472: \parseUTFviiiA;%
! 10473: \parseUTFviiiA,%
! 10474: \parseUTFviiiA!%
! 10475: \parseUTFviiiB F\UTFviiiFourOctetsName.{!,;}%
! 10476: \fi\fi\fi
! 10477: }
! 10478:
! 10479: % Extract a byte from the end of the UTF-8 representation of \countUTFx.
! 10480: % It must be a non-initial byte in the sequence.
! 10481: % Change \uccode of #1 for it to be used in \parseUTFviiiB as one
! 10482: % of the bytes.
! 10483: \gdef\parseUTFviiiA#1{%
! 10484: \countUTFx = \countUTFz
! 10485: \divide\countUTFz by 64
! 10486: \countUTFy = \countUTFz % Save to be the future value of \countUTFz.
! 10487: \multiply\countUTFz by 64
! 10488:
! 10489: % \countUTFz is now \countUTFx with the last 5 bits cleared. Subtract
! 10490: % in order to get the last five bits.
! 10491: \advance\countUTFx by -\countUTFz
! 10492:
! 10493: % Convert this to the byte in the UTF-8 sequence.
! 10494: \advance\countUTFx by 128
! 10495: \uccode `#1\countUTFx
! 10496: \countUTFz = \countUTFy}
! 10497:
! 10498: % Used to put a UTF-8 byte sequence into \UTFviiiTmp
! 10499: % #1 is the increment for \countUTFz to yield a the first byte of the UTF-8
! 10500: % sequence.
! 10501: % #2 is one of the \UTFviii*OctetsName macros.
! 10502: % #3 is always a full stop (.)
! 10503: % #4 is a template for the other bytes in the sequence. The values for these
! 10504: % bytes is substituted in here with \uppercase using the \uccode's.
! 10505: \gdef\parseUTFviiiB#1#2#3#4{%
! 10506: \advance\countUTFz by "#10\relax
! 10507: \uccode `#3\countUTFz
! 10508: \uppercase{\gdef\UTFviiiTmp{#2#3#4}}}
! 10509: \endgroup
! 10510:
! 10511: % For native Unicode handling (XeTeX and LuaTeX),
! 10512: % provide a definition macro that sets a catcode to `other' non-globally
! 10513: %
! 10514: \def\DeclareUnicodeCharacterNativeOther#1#2{%
! 10515: \catcode"#1=\other
! 10516: }
! 10517:
! 10518: % https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Plane_(Unicode)#Basic_M
! 10519: % U+0000..U+007F = https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Basic_Latin_(Unicode_block)
! 10520: % U+0080..U+00FF = https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Latin-1_Supplement_(Unicode_block)
! 10521: % U+0100..U+017F = https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Latin_Extended-A
! 10522: % U+0180..U+024F = https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Latin_Extended-B
! 10523: %
! 10524: % Many of our renditions are less than wonderful, and all the missing
! 10525: % characters are available somewhere. Loading the necessary fonts
! 10526: % awaits user request. We can't truly support Unicode without
! 10527: % reimplementing everything that's been done in LaTeX for many years,
! 10528: % plus probably using luatex or xetex, and who knows what else.
! 10529: % We won't be doing that here in this simple file. But we can try to at
! 10530: % least make most of the characters not bomb out.
! 10531: %
! 10532: \def\unicodechardefs{%
! 10533: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0020}{ } % space
! 10534: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0021}{\char"21 }% % space to terminate number
! 10535: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0022}{\char"22 }%
! 10536: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0023}{\char"23 }%
! 10537: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0024}{\char"24 }%
! 10538: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0025}{\char"25 }%
! 10539: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0026}{\char"26 }%
! 10540: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0027}{\char"27 }%
! 10541: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0028}{\char"28 }%
! 10542: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0029}{\char"29 }%
! 10543: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{002A}{\char"2A }%
! 10544: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{002B}{\char"2B }%
! 10545: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{002C}{\char"2C }%
! 10546: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{002D}{\char"2D }%
! 10547: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{002E}{\char"2E }%
! 10548: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{002F}{\char"2F }%
! 10549: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0030}{0}%
! 10550: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0031}{1}%
! 10551: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0032}{2}%
! 10552: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0033}{3}%
! 10553: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0034}{4}%
! 10554: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0035}{5}%
! 10555: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0036}{6}%
! 10556: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0037}{7}%
! 10557: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0038}{8}%
! 10558: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0039}{9}%
! 10559: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{003A}{\char"3A }%
! 10560: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{003B}{\char"3B }%
! 10561: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{003C}{\char"3C }%
! 10562: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{003D}{\char"3D }%
! 10563: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{003E}{\char"3E }%
! 10564: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{003F}{\char"3F }%
! 10565: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0040}{\char"40 }%
! 10566: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0041}{A}%
! 10567: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0042}{B}%
! 10568: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0043}{C}%
! 10569: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0044}{D}%
! 10570: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0045}{E}%
! 10571: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0046}{F}%
! 10572: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0047}{G}%
! 10573: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0048}{H}%
! 10574: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0049}{I}%
! 10575: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{004A}{J}%
! 10576: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{004B}{K}%
! 10577: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{004C}{L}%
! 10578: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{004D}{M}%
! 10579: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{004E}{N}%
! 10580: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{004F}{O}%
! 10581: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0050}{P}%
! 10582: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0051}{Q}%
! 10583: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0052}{R}%
! 10584: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0053}{S}%
! 10585: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0054}{T}%
! 10586: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0055}{U}%
! 10587: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0056}{V}%
! 10588: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0057}{W}%
! 10589: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0058}{X}%
! 10590: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0059}{Y}%
! 10591: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{005A}{Z}%
! 10592: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{005B}{\char"5B }%
! 10593: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{005C}{\char"5C }%
! 10594: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{005D}{\char"5D }%
! 10595: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{005E}{\char"5E }%
! 10596: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{005F}{\char"5F }%
! 10597: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0060}{\char"60 }%
! 10598: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0061}{a}%
! 10599: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0062}{b}%
! 10600: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0063}{c}%
! 10601: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0064}{d}%
! 10602: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0065}{e}%
! 10603: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0066}{f}%
! 10604: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0067}{g}%
! 10605: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0068}{h}%
! 10606: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0069}{i}%
! 10607: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{006A}{j}%
! 10608: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{006B}{k}%
! 10609: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{006C}{l}%
! 10610: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{006D}{m}%
! 10611: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{006E}{n}%
! 10612: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{006F}{o}%
! 10613: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0070}{p}%
! 10614: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0071}{q}%
! 10615: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0072}{r}%
! 10616: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0073}{s}%
! 10617: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0074}{t}%
! 10618: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0075}{u}%
! 10619: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0076}{v}%
! 10620: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0077}{w}%
! 10621: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0078}{x}%
! 10622: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0079}{y}%
! 10623: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{007A}{z}%
! 10624: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{007B}{\char"7B }%
! 10625: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{007C}{\char"7C }%
! 10626: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{007D}{\char"7D }%
! 10627: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{007E}{\char"7E }%
! 10628: % \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{007F}{} % DEL
! 10629: %
! 10630: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A0}{\tie}%
! 10631: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A1}{\exclamdown}%
! 10632: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A2}{{\tcfont \char162}}% 0242=cent
! 10633: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A3}{\pounds{}}%
! 10634: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A4}{{\tcfont \char164}}% 0244=currency
! 10635: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A5}{{\tcfont \char165}}% 0245=yen
! 10636: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A6}{{\tcfont \char166}}% 0246=brokenbar
! 10637: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A7}{\S}%
! 10638: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A8}{\"{ }}%
! 10639: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A9}{\copyright{}}%
! 10640: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AA}{\ordf}%
! 10641: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AB}{\guillemetleft{}}%
! 10642: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AC}{\ensuremath\lnot}%
! 10643: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AD}{\-}%
! 10644: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AE}{\registeredsymbol{}}%
! 10645: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AF}{\={ }}%
! 10646: %
! 10647: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B0}{\textdegree}%
! 10648: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B1}{\ensuremath\pm}%
! 10649: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B2}{$^2$}%
! 10650: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B3}{$^3$}%
! 10651: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B4}{\'{ }}%
! 10652: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B5}{$\mu$}%
! 10653: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B6}{\P}%
! 10654: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B7}{\ensuremath\cdot}%
! 10655: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B8}{\cedilla{ }}%
! 10656: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B9}{$^1$}%
! 10657: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BA}{\ordm}%
! 10658: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BB}{\guillemetright{}}%
! 10659: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BC}{$1\over4$}%
! 10660: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BD}{$1\over2$}%
! 10661: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BE}{$3\over4$}%
! 10662: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BF}{\questiondown}%
! 10663: %
! 10664: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C0}{\`A}%
! 10665: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C1}{\'A}%
! 10666: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C2}{\^A}%
! 10667: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C3}{\~A}%
! 10668: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C4}{\"A}%
! 10669: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C5}{\AA}%
! 10670: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C6}{\AE}%
! 10671: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C7}{\cedilla{C}}%
! 10672: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C8}{\`E}%
! 10673: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C9}{\'E}%
! 10674: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CA}{\^E}%
! 10675: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CB}{\"E}%
! 10676: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CC}{\`I}%
! 10677: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CD}{\'I}%
! 10678: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CE}{\^I}%
! 10679: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CF}{\"I}%
! 10680: %
! 10681: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D0}{\DH}%
! 10682: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D1}{\~N}%
! 10683: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D2}{\`O}%
! 10684: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D3}{\'O}%
! 10685: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D4}{\^O}%
! 10686: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D5}{\~O}%
! 10687: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D6}{\"O}%
! 10688: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D7}{\ensuremath\times}%
! 10689: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D8}{\O}%
! 10690: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D9}{\`U}%
! 10691: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DA}{\'U}%
! 10692: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DB}{\^U}%
! 10693: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DC}{\"U}%
! 10694: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DD}{\'Y}%
! 10695: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DE}{\TH}%
! 10696: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DF}{\ss}%
! 10697: %
! 10698: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E0}{\`a}%
! 10699: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E1}{\'a}%
! 10700: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E2}{\^a}%
! 10701: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E3}{\~a}%
! 10702: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E4}{\"a}%
! 10703: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E5}{\aa}%
! 10704: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E6}{\ae}%
! 10705: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E7}{\cedilla{c}}%
! 10706: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E8}{\`e}%
! 10707: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E9}{\'e}%
! 10708: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EA}{\^e}%
! 10709: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EB}{\"e}%
! 10710: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EC}{\`{\dotless{i}}}%
! 10711: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00ED}{\'{\dotless{i}}}%
! 10712: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EE}{\^{\dotless{i}}}%
! 10713: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EF}{\"{\dotless{i}}}%
! 10714: %
! 10715: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F0}{\dh}%
! 10716: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F1}{\~n}%
! 10717: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F2}{\`o}%
! 10718: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F3}{\'o}%
! 10719: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F4}{\^o}%
! 10720: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F5}{\~o}%
! 10721: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F6}{\"o}%
! 10722: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F7}{\ensuremath\div}%
! 10723: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F8}{\o}%
! 10724: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F9}{\`u}%
! 10725: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FA}{\'u}%
! 10726: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FB}{\^u}%
! 10727: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FC}{\"u}%
! 10728: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FD}{\'y}%
! 10729: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FE}{\th}%
! 10730: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FF}{\"y}%
! 10731: %
! 10732: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0100}{\=A}%
! 10733: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0101}{\=a}%
! 10734: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0102}{\u{A}}%
! 10735: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0103}{\u{a}}%
! 10736: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0104}{\ogonek{A}}%
! 10737: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0105}{\ogonek{a}}%
! 10738: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0106}{\'C}%
! 10739: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0107}{\'c}%
! 10740: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0108}{\^C}%
! 10741: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0109}{\^c}%
! 10742: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010A}{\dotaccent{C}}%
! 10743: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010B}{\dotaccent{c}}%
! 10744: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010C}{\v{C}}%
! 10745: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010D}{\v{c}}%
! 10746: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010E}{\v{D}}%
! 10747: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010F}{d'}%
! 10748: %
! 10749: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0110}{\DH}%
! 10750: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0111}{\dh}%
! 10751: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0112}{\=E}%
! 10752: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0113}{\=e}%
! 10753: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0114}{\u{E}}%
! 10754: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0115}{\u{e}}%
! 10755: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0116}{\dotaccent{E}}%
! 10756: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0117}{\dotaccent{e}}%
! 10757: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0118}{\ogonek{E}}%
! 10758: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0119}{\ogonek{e}}%
! 10759: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011A}{\v{E}}%
! 10760: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011B}{\v{e}}%
! 10761: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011C}{\^G}%
! 10762: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011D}{\^g}%
! 10763: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011E}{\u{G}}%
! 10764: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011F}{\u{g}}%
! 10765: %
! 10766: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0120}{\dotaccent{G}}%
! 10767: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0121}{\dotaccent{g}}%
! 10768: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0122}{\cedilla{G}}%
! 10769: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0123}{\cedilla{g}}%
! 10770: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0124}{\^H}%
! 10771: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0125}{\^h}%
! 10772: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0126}{\missingcharmsg{H WITH STROKE}}%
! 10773: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0127}{\missingcharmsg{h WITH STROKE}}%
! 10774: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0128}{\~I}%
! 10775: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0129}{\~{\dotless{i}}}%
! 10776: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012A}{\=I}%
! 10777: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012B}{\={\dotless{i}}}%
! 10778: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012C}{\u{I}}%
! 10779: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012D}{\u{\dotless{i}}}%
! 10780: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012E}{\ogonek{I}}%
! 10781: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012F}{\ogonek{i}}%
! 10782: %
! 10783: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0130}{\dotaccent{I}}%
! 10784: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0131}{\dotless{i}}%
! 10785: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0132}{IJ}%
! 10786: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0133}{ij}%
! 10787: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0134}{\^J}%
! 10788: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0135}{\^{\dotless{j}}}%
! 10789: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0136}{\cedilla{K}}%
! 10790: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0137}{\cedilla{k}}%
! 10791: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0138}{\ensuremath\kappa}%
! 10792: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0139}{\'L}%
! 10793: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{013A}{\'l}%
! 10794: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{013B}{\cedilla{L}}%
! 10795: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{013C}{\cedilla{l}}%
! 10796: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{013D}{L'}% should kern
! 10797: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{013E}{l'}% should kern
! 10798: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{013F}{L\U{00B7}}%
! 10799: %
! 10800: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0140}{l\U{00B7}}%
! 10801: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0141}{\L}%
! 10802: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0142}{\l}%
! 10803: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0143}{\'N}%
! 10804: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0144}{\'n}%
! 10805: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0145}{\cedilla{N}}%
! 10806: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0146}{\cedilla{n}}%
! 10807: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0147}{\v{N}}%
! 10808: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0148}{\v{n}}%
! 10809: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0149}{'n}%
! 10810: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014A}{\missingcharmsg{ENG}}%
! 10811: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014B}{\missingcharmsg{eng}}%
! 10812: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014C}{\=O}%
! 10813: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014D}{\=o}%
! 10814: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014E}{\u{O}}%
! 10815: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014F}{\u{o}}%
! 10816: %
! 10817: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0150}{\H{O}}%
! 10818: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0151}{\H{o}}%
! 10819: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0152}{\OE}%
! 10820: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0153}{\oe}%
! 10821: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0154}{\'R}%
! 10822: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0155}{\'r}%
! 10823: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0156}{\cedilla{R}}%
! 10824: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0157}{\cedilla{r}}%
! 10825: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0158}{\v{R}}%
! 10826: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0159}{\v{r}}%
! 10827: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015A}{\'S}%
! 10828: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015B}{\'s}%
! 10829: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015C}{\^S}%
! 10830: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015D}{\^s}%
! 10831: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015E}{\cedilla{S}}%
! 10832: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015F}{\cedilla{s}}%
! 10833: %
! 10834: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0160}{\v{S}}%
! 10835: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0161}{\v{s}}%
! 10836: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0162}{\cedilla{T}}%
! 10837: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0163}{\cedilla{t}}%
! 10838: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0164}{\v{T}}%
! 10839: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0165}{\v{t}}%
! 10840: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0166}{\missingcharmsg{H WITH STROKE}}%
! 10841: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0167}{\missingcharmsg{h WITH STROKE}}%
! 10842: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0168}{\~U}%
! 10843: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0169}{\~u}%
! 10844: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016A}{\=U}%
! 10845: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016B}{\=u}%
! 10846: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016C}{\u{U}}%
! 10847: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016D}{\u{u}}%
! 10848: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016E}{\ringaccent{U}}%
! 10849: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016F}{\ringaccent{u}}%
! 10850: %
! 10851: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0170}{\H{U}}%
! 10852: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0171}{\H{u}}%
! 10853: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0172}{\ogonek{U}}%
! 10854: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0173}{\ogonek{u}}%
! 10855: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0174}{\^W}%
! 10856: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0175}{\^w}%
! 10857: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0176}{\^Y}%
! 10858: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0177}{\^y}%
! 10859: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0178}{\"Y}%
! 10860: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0179}{\'Z}%
! 10861: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017A}{\'z}%
! 10862: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017B}{\dotaccent{Z}}%
! 10863: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017C}{\dotaccent{z}}%
! 10864: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017D}{\v{Z}}%
! 10865: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017E}{\v{z}}%
! 10866: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017F}{\missingcharmsg{LONG S}}%
! 10867: %
! 10868: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C4}{D\v{Z}}%
! 10869: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C5}{D\v{z}}%
! 10870: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C6}{d\v{z}}%
! 10871: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C7}{LJ}%
! 10872: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C8}{Lj}%
! 10873: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C9}{lj}%
! 10874: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CA}{NJ}%
! 10875: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CB}{Nj}%
! 10876: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CC}{nj}%
! 10877: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CD}{\v{A}}%
! 10878: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CE}{\v{a}}%
! 10879: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CF}{\v{I}}%
! 10880: %
! 10881: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D0}{\v{\dotless{i}}}%
! 10882: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D1}{\v{O}}%
! 10883: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D2}{\v{o}}%
! 10884: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D3}{\v{U}}%
! 10885: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D4}{\v{u}}%
! 10886: %
! 10887: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E2}{\={\AE}}%
! 10888: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E3}{\={\ae}}%
! 10889: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E6}{\v{G}}%
! 10890: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E7}{\v{g}}%
! 10891: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E8}{\v{K}}%
! 10892: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E9}{\v{k}}%
! 10893: %
! 10894: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F0}{\v{\dotless{j}}}%
! 10895: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F1}{DZ}%
! 10896: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F2}{Dz}%
! 10897: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F3}{dz}%
! 10898: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F4}{\'G}%
! 10899: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F5}{\'g}%
! 10900: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F8}{\`N}%
! 10901: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F9}{\`n}%
! 10902: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FC}{\'{\AE}}%
! 10903: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FD}{\'{\ae}}%
! 10904: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FE}{\'{\O}}%
! 10905: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FF}{\'{\o}}%
! 10906: %
! 10907: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{021E}{\v{H}}%
! 10908: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{021F}{\v{h}}%
! 10909: %
! 10910: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0226}{\dotaccent{A}}%
! 10911: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0227}{\dotaccent{a}}%
! 10912: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0228}{\cedilla{E}}%
! 10913: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0229}{\cedilla{e}}%
! 10914: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{022E}{\dotaccent{O}}%
! 10915: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{022F}{\dotaccent{o}}%
! 10916: %
! 10917: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0232}{\=Y}%
! 10918: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0233}{\=y}%
! 10919: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0237}{\dotless{j}}%
! 10920: %
! 10921: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{02BC}{'}%
! 10922: %
! 10923: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{02DB}{\ogonek{ }}%
! 10924: %
! 10925: % Greek letters upper case
! 10926: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0391}{{\it A}}%
! 10927: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0392}{{\it B}}%
! 10928: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0393}{\ensuremath{\mit\Gamma}}%
! 10929: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0394}{\ensuremath{\mit\Delta}}%
! 10930: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0395}{{\it E}}%
! 10931: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0396}{{\it Z}}%
! 10932: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0397}{{\it H}}%
! 10933: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0398}{\ensuremath{\mit\Theta}}%
! 10934: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0399}{{\it I}}%
! 10935: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{039A}{{\it K}}%
! 10936: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{039B}{\ensuremath{\mit\Lambda}}%
! 10937: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{039C}{{\it M}}%
! 10938: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{039D}{{\it N}}%
! 10939: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{039E}{\ensuremath{\mit\Xi}}%
! 10940: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{039F}{{\it O}}%
! 10941: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A0}{\ensuremath{\mit\Pi}}%
! 10942: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A1}{{\it P}}%
! 10943: %\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A2}{} % none - corresponds to final sigma
! 10944: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A3}{\ensuremath{\mit\Sigma}}%
! 10945: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A4}{{\it T}}%
! 10946: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A5}{\ensuremath{\mit\Upsilon}}%
! 10947: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A6}{\ensuremath{\mit\Phi}}%
! 10948: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A7}{{\it X}}%
! 10949: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A8}{\ensuremath{\mit\Psi}}%
! 10950: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A9}{\ensuremath{\mit\Omega}}%
! 10951: %
! 10952: % Vowels with accents
! 10953: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0390}{\ensuremath{\ddot{\acute\iota}}}%
! 10954: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03AC}{\ensuremath{\acute\alpha}}%
! 10955: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03AD}{\ensuremath{\acute\epsilon}}%
! 10956: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03AE}{\ensuremath{\acute\eta}}%
! 10957: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03AF}{\ensuremath{\acute\iota}}%
! 10958: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B0}{\ensuremath{\acute{\ddot\upsilon}}}%
! 10959: %
! 10960: % Standalone accent
! 10961: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0384}{\ensuremath{\acute{\ }}}%
! 10962: %
! 10963: % Greek letters lower case
! 10964: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B1}{\ensuremath\alpha}%
! 10965: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B2}{\ensuremath\beta}%
! 10966: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B3}{\ensuremath\gamma}%
! 10967: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B4}{\ensuremath\delta}%
! 10968: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B5}{\ensuremath\epsilon}%
! 10969: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B6}{\ensuremath\zeta}%
! 10970: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B7}{\ensuremath\eta}%
! 10971: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B8}{\ensuremath\theta}%
! 10972: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B9}{\ensuremath\iota}%
! 10973: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03BA}{\ensuremath\kappa}%
! 10974: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03BB}{\ensuremath\lambda}%
! 10975: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03BC}{\ensuremath\mu}%
! 10976: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03BD}{\ensuremath\nu}%
! 10977: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03BE}{\ensuremath\xi}%
! 10978: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03BF}{{\it o}}% omicron
! 10979: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C0}{\ensuremath\pi}%
! 10980: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C1}{\ensuremath\rho}%
! 10981: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C2}{\ensuremath\varsigma}%
! 10982: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C3}{\ensuremath\sigma}%
! 10983: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C4}{\ensuremath\tau}%
! 10984: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C5}{\ensuremath\upsilon}%
! 10985: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C6}{\ensuremath\phi}%
! 10986: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C7}{\ensuremath\chi}%
! 10987: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C8}{\ensuremath\psi}%
! 10988: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C9}{\ensuremath\omega}%
! 10989: %
! 10990: % More Greek vowels with accents
! 10991: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03CA}{\ensuremath{\ddot\iota}}%
! 10992: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03CB}{\ensuremath{\ddot\upsilon}}%
! 10993: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03CC}{\ensuremath{\acute o}}%
! 10994: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03CD}{\ensuremath{\acute\upsilon}}%
! 10995: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03CE}{\ensuremath{\acute\omega}}%
! 10996: %
! 10997: % Variant Greek letters
! 10998: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03D1}{\ensuremath\vartheta}%
! 10999: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03D6}{\ensuremath\varpi}%
! 11000: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03F1}{\ensuremath\varrho}%
! 11001: %
! 11002: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E02}{\dotaccent{B}}%
! 11003: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E03}{\dotaccent{b}}%
! 11004: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E04}{\udotaccent{B}}%
! 11005: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E05}{\udotaccent{b}}%
! 11006: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E06}{\ubaraccent{B}}%
! 11007: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E07}{\ubaraccent{b}}%
! 11008: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0A}{\dotaccent{D}}%
! 11009: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0B}{\dotaccent{d}}%
! 11010: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0C}{\udotaccent{D}}%
! 11011: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0D}{\udotaccent{d}}%
! 11012: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0E}{\ubaraccent{D}}%
! 11013: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0F}{\ubaraccent{d}}%
! 11014: %
! 11015: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E1E}{\dotaccent{F}}%
! 11016: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E1F}{\dotaccent{f}}%
! 11017: %
! 11018: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E20}{\=G}%
! 11019: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E21}{\=g}%
! 11020: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E22}{\dotaccent{H}}%
! 11021: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E23}{\dotaccent{h}}%
! 11022: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E24}{\udotaccent{H}}%
! 11023: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E25}{\udotaccent{h}}%
! 11024: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E26}{\"H}%
! 11025: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E27}{\"h}%
! 11026: %
! 11027: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E30}{\'K}%
! 11028: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E31}{\'k}%
! 11029: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E32}{\udotaccent{K}}%
! 11030: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E33}{\udotaccent{k}}%
! 11031: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E34}{\ubaraccent{K}}%
! 11032: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E35}{\ubaraccent{k}}%
! 11033: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E36}{\udotaccent{L}}%
! 11034: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E37}{\udotaccent{l}}%
! 11035: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3A}{\ubaraccent{L}}%
! 11036: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3B}{\ubaraccent{l}}%
! 11037: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3E}{\'M}%
! 11038: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3F}{\'m}%
! 11039: %
! 11040: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E40}{\dotaccent{M}}%
! 11041: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E41}{\dotaccent{m}}%
! 11042: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E42}{\udotaccent{M}}%
! 11043: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E43}{\udotaccent{m}}%
! 11044: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E44}{\dotaccent{N}}%
! 11045: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E45}{\dotaccent{n}}%
! 11046: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E46}{\udotaccent{N}}%
! 11047: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E47}{\udotaccent{n}}%
! 11048: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E48}{\ubaraccent{N}}%
! 11049: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E49}{\ubaraccent{n}}%
! 11050: %
! 11051: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E54}{\'P}%
! 11052: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E55}{\'p}%
! 11053: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E56}{\dotaccent{P}}%
! 11054: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E57}{\dotaccent{p}}%
! 11055: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E58}{\dotaccent{R}}%
! 11056: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E59}{\dotaccent{r}}%
! 11057: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5A}{\udotaccent{R}}%
! 11058: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5B}{\udotaccent{r}}%
! 11059: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5E}{\ubaraccent{R}}%
! 11060: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5F}{\ubaraccent{r}}%
! 11061: %
! 11062: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E60}{\dotaccent{S}}%
! 11063: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E61}{\dotaccent{s}}%
! 11064: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E62}{\udotaccent{S}}%
! 11065: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E63}{\udotaccent{s}}%
! 11066: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6A}{\dotaccent{T}}%
! 11067: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6B}{\dotaccent{t}}%
! 11068: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6C}{\udotaccent{T}}%
! 11069: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6D}{\udotaccent{t}}%
! 11070: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6E}{\ubaraccent{T}}%
! 11071: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6F}{\ubaraccent{t}}%
! 11072: %
! 11073: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7C}{\~V}%
! 11074: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7D}{\~v}%
! 11075: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7E}{\udotaccent{V}}%
! 11076: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7F}{\udotaccent{v}}%
! 11077: %
! 11078: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E80}{\`W}%
! 11079: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E81}{\`w}%
! 11080: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E82}{\'W}%
! 11081: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E83}{\'w}%
! 11082: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E84}{\"W}%
! 11083: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E85}{\"w}%
! 11084: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E86}{\dotaccent{W}}%
! 11085: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E87}{\dotaccent{w}}%
! 11086: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E88}{\udotaccent{W}}%
! 11087: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E89}{\udotaccent{w}}%
! 11088: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8A}{\dotaccent{X}}%
! 11089: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8B}{\dotaccent{x}}%
! 11090: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8C}{\"X}%
! 11091: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8D}{\"x}%
! 11092: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8E}{\dotaccent{Y}}%
! 11093: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8F}{\dotaccent{y}}%
! 11094: %
! 11095: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E90}{\^Z}%
! 11096: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E91}{\^z}%
! 11097: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E92}{\udotaccent{Z}}%
! 11098: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E93}{\udotaccent{z}}%
! 11099: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E94}{\ubaraccent{Z}}%
! 11100: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E95}{\ubaraccent{z}}%
! 11101: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E96}{\ubaraccent{h}}%
! 11102: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E97}{\"t}%
! 11103: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E98}{\ringaccent{w}}%
! 11104: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E99}{\ringaccent{y}}%
! 11105: %
! 11106: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EA0}{\udotaccent{A}}%
! 11107: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EA1}{\udotaccent{a}}%
! 11108: %
! 11109: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EB8}{\udotaccent{E}}%
! 11110: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EB9}{\udotaccent{e}}%
! 11111: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EBC}{\~E}%
! 11112: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EBD}{\~e}%
! 11113: %
! 11114: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECA}{\udotaccent{I}}%
! 11115: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECB}{\udotaccent{i}}%
! 11116: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECC}{\udotaccent{O}}%
! 11117: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECD}{\udotaccent{o}}%
! 11118: %
! 11119: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EE4}{\udotaccent{U}}%
! 11120: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EE5}{\udotaccent{u}}%
! 11121: %
! 11122: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF2}{\`Y}%
! 11123: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF3}{\`y}%
! 11124: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF4}{\udotaccent{Y}}%
! 11125: %
! 11126: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF8}{\~Y}%
! 11127: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF9}{\~y}%
! 11128: %
! 11129: % Exotic spaces
! 11130: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2007}{\hphantom{0}}%
! 11131: %
! 11132: % Punctuation
! 11133: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2013}{--}%
! 11134: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2014}{---}%
! 11135: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2018}{\quoteleft{}}%
! 11136: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2019}{\quoteright{}}%
! 11137: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201A}{\quotesinglbase{}}%
! 11138: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201C}{\quotedblleft{}}%
! 11139: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201D}{\quotedblright{}}%
! 11140: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201E}{\quotedblbase{}}%
! 11141: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2020}{\ensuremath\dagger}%
! 11142: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2021}{\ensuremath\ddagger}%
! 11143: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2022}{\bullet{}}%
! 11144: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{202F}{\thinspace}%
! 11145: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2026}{\dots{}}%
! 11146: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2039}{\guilsinglleft{}}%
! 11147: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{203A}{\guilsinglright{}}%
! 11148: %
! 11149: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{20AC}{\euro{}}%
! 11150: %
! 11151: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2192}{\arrow}%
! 11152: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21D2}{\result{}}%
! 11153: %
! 11154: % Mathematical symbols
! 11155: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2200}{\ensuremath\forall}%
! 11156: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2203}{\ensuremath\exists}%
! 11157: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2208}{\ensuremath\in}%
! 11158: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2212}{\minus{}}%
! 11159: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2217}{\ast}%
! 11160: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{221E}{\ensuremath\infty}%
! 11161: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2225}{\ensuremath\parallel}%
! 11162: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2227}{\ensuremath\wedge}%
! 11163: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2229}{\ensuremath\cap}%
! 11164: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2261}{\equiv{}}%
! 11165: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2264}{\ensuremath\leq}%
! 11166: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2265}{\ensuremath\geq}%
! 11167: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2282}{\ensuremath\subset}%
! 11168: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2287}{\ensuremath\supseteq}%
! 11169: %
! 11170: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2016}{\ensuremath\Vert}%
! 11171: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2032}{\ensuremath\prime}%
! 11172: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{210F}{\ensuremath\hbar}%
! 11173: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2111}{\ensuremath\Im}%
! 11174: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2113}{\ensuremath\ell}%
! 11175: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2118}{\ensuremath\wp}%
! 11176: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{211C}{\ensuremath\Re}%
! 11177: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2135}{\ensuremath\aleph}%
! 11178: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2190}{\ensuremath\leftarrow}%
! 11179: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2191}{\ensuremath\uparrow}%
! 11180: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2193}{\ensuremath\downarrow}%
! 11181: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2194}{\ensuremath\leftrightarrow}%
! 11182: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2195}{\ensuremath\updownarrow}%
! 11183: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2196}{\ensuremath\nwarrow}%
! 11184: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2197}{\ensuremath\nearrow}%
! 11185: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2198}{\ensuremath\searrow}%
! 11186: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2199}{\ensuremath\swarrow}%
! 11187: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21A6}{\ensuremath\mapsto}%
! 11188: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21A9}{\ensuremath\hookleftarrow}%
! 11189: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21AA}{\ensuremath\hookrightarrow}%
! 11190: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21BC}{\ensuremath\leftharpoonup}%
! 11191: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21BD}{\ensuremath\leftharpoondown}%
! 11192: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21C0}{\ensuremath\rightharpoonup}%
! 11193: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21C1}{\ensuremath\rightharpoondown}%
! 11194: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21CC}{\ensuremath\rightleftharpoons}%
! 11195: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21D0}{\ensuremath\Leftarrow}%
! 11196: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21D1}{\ensuremath\Uparrow}%
! 11197: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21D3}{\ensuremath\Downarrow}%
! 11198: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21D4}{\ensuremath\Leftrightarrow}%
! 11199: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21D5}{\ensuremath\Updownarrow}%
! 11200: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2202}{\ensuremath\partial}%
! 11201: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2205}{\ensuremath\emptyset}%
! 11202: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2207}{\ensuremath\nabla}%
! 11203: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2209}{\ensuremath\notin}%
! 11204: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{220B}{\ensuremath\owns}%
! 11205: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{220F}{\ensuremath\prod}%
! 11206: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2210}{\ensuremath\coprod}%
! 11207: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2211}{\ensuremath\sum}%
! 11208: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2213}{\ensuremath\mp}%
! 11209: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2218}{\ensuremath\circ}%
! 11210: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{221A}{\ensuremath\surd}%
! 11211: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{221D}{\ensuremath\propto}%
! 11212: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2220}{\ensuremath\angle}%
! 11213: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2223}{\ensuremath\mid}%
! 11214: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2228}{\ensuremath\vee}%
! 11215: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{222A}{\ensuremath\cup}%
! 11216: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{222B}{\ensuremath\smallint}%
! 11217: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{222E}{\ensuremath\oint}%
! 11218: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{223C}{\ensuremath\sim}%
! 11219: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2240}{\ensuremath\wr}%
! 11220: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2243}{\ensuremath\simeq}%
! 11221: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2245}{\ensuremath\cong}%
! 11222: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2248}{\ensuremath\approx}%
! 11223: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{224D}{\ensuremath\asymp}%
! 11224: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2250}{\ensuremath\doteq}%
! 11225: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2260}{\ensuremath\neq}%
! 11226: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{226A}{\ensuremath\ll}%
! 11227: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{226B}{\ensuremath\gg}%
! 11228: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{227A}{\ensuremath\prec}%
! 11229: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{227B}{\ensuremath\succ}%
! 11230: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2283}{\ensuremath\supset}%
! 11231: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2286}{\ensuremath\subseteq}%
! 11232: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{228E}{\ensuremath\uplus}%
! 11233: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2291}{\ensuremath\sqsubseteq}%
! 11234: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2292}{\ensuremath\sqsupseteq}%
! 11235: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2293}{\ensuremath\sqcap}%
! 11236: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2294}{\ensuremath\sqcup}%
! 11237: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2295}{\ensuremath\oplus}%
! 11238: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2296}{\ensuremath\ominus}%
! 11239: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2297}{\ensuremath\otimes}%
! 11240: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2298}{\ensuremath\oslash}%
! 11241: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2299}{\ensuremath\odot}%
! 11242: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22A2}{\ensuremath\vdash}%
! 11243: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22A3}{\ensuremath\dashv}%
! 11244: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22A4}{\ensuremath\ptextop}%
! 11245: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22A5}{\ensuremath\bot}%
! 11246: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22A8}{\ensuremath\models}%
! 11247: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22C0}{\ensuremath\bigwedge}%
! 11248: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22C1}{\ensuremath\bigvee}%
! 11249: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22C2}{\ensuremath\bigcap}%
! 11250: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22C3}{\ensuremath\bigcup}%
! 11251: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22C4}{\ensuremath\diamond}%
! 11252: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22C5}{\ensuremath\cdot}%
! 11253: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22C6}{\ensuremath\star}%
! 11254: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22C8}{\ensuremath\bowtie}%
! 11255: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2308}{\ensuremath\lceil}%
! 11256: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2309}{\ensuremath\rceil}%
! 11257: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{230A}{\ensuremath\lfloor}%
! 11258: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{230B}{\ensuremath\rfloor}%
! 11259: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2322}{\ensuremath\frown}%
! 11260: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2323}{\ensuremath\smile}%
! 11261: %
! 11262: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{25B3}{\ensuremath\triangle}%
! 11263: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{25B7}{\ensuremath\triangleright}%
! 11264: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{25BD}{\ensuremath\bigtriangledown}%
! 11265: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{25C1}{\ensuremath\triangleleft}%
! 11266: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{25C7}{\ensuremath\diamond}%
! 11267: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2660}{\ensuremath\spadesuit}%
! 11268: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2661}{\ensuremath\heartsuit}%
! 11269: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2662}{\ensuremath\diamondsuit}%
! 11270: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2663}{\ensuremath\clubsuit}%
! 11271: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{266D}{\ensuremath\flat}%
! 11272: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{266E}{\ensuremath\natural}%
! 11273: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{266F}{\ensuremath\sharp}%
! 11274: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{26AA}{\ensuremath\bigcirc}%
! 11275: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{27B9}{\ensuremath\rangle}%
! 11276: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{27C2}{\ensuremath\perp}%
! 11277: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{27E8}{\ensuremath\langle}%
! 11278: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{27F5}{\ensuremath\longleftarrow}%
! 11279: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{27F6}{\ensuremath\longrightarrow}%
! 11280: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{27F7}{\ensuremath\longleftrightarrow}%
! 11281: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{27FC}{\ensuremath\longmapsto}%
! 11282: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{29F5}{\ensuremath\setminus}%
! 11283: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2A00}{\ensuremath\bigodot}%
! 11284: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2A01}{\ensuremath\bigoplus}%
! 11285: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2A02}{\ensuremath\bigotimes}%
! 11286: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2A04}{\ensuremath\biguplus}%
! 11287: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2A06}{\ensuremath\bigsqcup}%
! 11288: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2A3F}{\ensuremath\amalg}%
! 11289: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2AAF}{\ensuremath\preceq}%
! 11290: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2AB0}{\ensuremath\succeq}%
! 11291: %
! 11292: \global\mathchardef\checkmark="1370% actually the square root sign
! 11293: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2713}{\ensuremath\checkmark}%
! 11294: }% end of \unicodechardefs
! 11295:
! 11296: % UTF-8 byte sequence (pdfTeX) definitions (replacing and @U command)
! 11297: % It makes the setting that replace UTF-8 byte sequence.
! 11298: \def\utfeightchardefs{%
! 11299: \let\DeclareUnicodeCharacter\DeclareUnicodeCharacterUTFviii
! 11300: \unicodechardefs
! 11301: }
! 11302:
! 11303: % Whether the active definitions of non-ASCII characters expand to
! 11304: % non-active tokens with the same character code. This is used to
! 11305: % write characters literally, instead of using active definitions for
! 11306: % printing the correct glyphs.
! 11307: \newif\ifpassthroughchars
! 11308: \passthroughcharsfalse
! 11309:
! 11310: % For native Unicode handling (XeTeX and LuaTeX),
! 11311: % provide a definition macro to replace/pass-through a Unicode character
! 11312: %
! 11313: \def\DeclareUnicodeCharacterNative#1#2{%
! 11314: \ifnum"#1>"7F % only make non-ASCII chars active
! 11315: \catcode"#1=\active
! 11316: \def\dodeclareunicodecharacternative##1##2##3{%
! 11317: \begingroup
! 11318: \uccode`\~="##2\relax
! 11319: \uppercase{\gdef~}{%
! 11320: \ifpassthroughchars
! 11321: ##1%
! 11322: \else
! 11323: ##3%
! 11324: \fi
! 11325: }
! 11326: \endgroup
! 11327: }
! 11328: \begingroup
! 11329: \uccode`\.="#1\relax
! 11330: \uppercase{\def\UTFNativeTmp{.}}%
! 11331: \expandafter\dodeclareunicodecharacternative\UTFNativeTmp{#1}{#2}%
! 11332: \endgroup
! 11333: \fi
! 11334: }
! 11335:
! 11336: % Native Unicode handling (XeTeX and LuaTeX) character replacing definition.
! 11337: % It activates the setting that replaces Unicode characters.
! 11338: \def\nativeunicodechardefs{%
! 11339: \let\DeclareUnicodeCharacter\DeclareUnicodeCharacterNative
! 11340: \unicodechardefs
! 11341: }
! 11342:
! 11343: % For native Unicode handling (XeTeX and LuaTeX),
! 11344: % make the character token expand
! 11345: % to the sequences given in \unicodechardefs for printing.
! 11346: \def\DeclareUnicodeCharacterNativeAtU#1#2{%
! 11347: \def\UTFAtUTmp{#2}
! 11348: \expandafter\globallet\csname uni:#1\endcsname \UTFAtUTmp
! 11349: }
! 11350:
! 11351: % @U command definitions for native Unicode handling (XeTeX and LuaTeX).
! 11352: \def\nativeunicodechardefsatu{%
! 11353: \let\DeclareUnicodeCharacter\DeclareUnicodeCharacterNativeAtU
! 11354: \unicodechardefs
! 11355: }
! 11356:
! 11357: % US-ASCII character definitions.
! 11358: \def\asciichardefs{% nothing need be done
! 11359: \relax
! 11360: }
! 11361:
! 11362: % Define all Unicode characters we know about
! 11363: \iftxinativeunicodecapable
! 11364: \nativeunicodechardefsatu
! 11365: \else
! 11366: \utfeightchardefs
! 11367: \fi
! 11368:
! 11369:
! 11370: \message{formatting,}
! 11371:
! 11372: \newdimen\defaultparindent \defaultparindent = 15pt
! 11373:
! 11374: \chapheadingskip = 15pt plus 4pt minus 2pt
! 11375: \secheadingskip = 12pt plus 3pt minus 2pt
! 11376: \subsecheadingskip = 9pt plus 2pt minus 2pt
! 11377:
! 11378: % Prevent underfull vbox error messages.
! 11379: \vbadness = 10000
! 11380:
! 11381: % Don't be very finicky about underfull hboxes, either.
! 11382: \hbadness = 6666
! 11383:
! 11384: % Following George Bush, get rid of widows and orphans.
! 11385: \widowpenalty=10000
! 11386: \clubpenalty=10000
! 11387:
! 11388: % Use TeX 3.0's \emergencystretch to help line breaking, but if we're
! 11389: % using an old version of TeX, don't do anything. We want the amount of
! 11390: % stretch added to depend on the line length, hence the dependence on
! 11391: % \hsize. We call this whenever the paper size is set.
! 11392: %
! 11393: \def\setemergencystretch{%
! 11394: \ifx\emergencystretch\thisisundefined
! 11395: % Allow us to assign to \emergencystretch anyway.
! 11396: \def\emergencystretch{\dimen0}%
! 11397: \else
! 11398: \emergencystretch = .15\hsize
! 11399: \fi
! 11400: }
! 11401:
! 11402: % Parameters in order: 1) textheight; 2) textwidth;
! 11403: % 3) voffset; 4) hoffset; 5) binding offset; 6) topskip;
! 11404: % 7) physical page height; 8) physical page width.
! 11405: %
! 11406: % We also call \setleading{\textleading}, so the caller should define
! 11407: % \textleading. The caller should also set \parskip.
! 11408: %
! 11409: \def\internalpagesizes#1#2#3#4#5#6#7#8{%
! 11410: \voffset = #3\relax
! 11411: \topskip = #6\relax
! 11412: \splittopskip = \topskip
! 11413: %
! 11414: \vsize = #1\relax
! 11415: \advance\vsize by \topskip
! 11416: \txipageheight = \vsize
! 11417: %
! 11418: \hsize = #2\relax
! 11419: \txipagewidth = \hsize
! 11420: %
! 11421: \normaloffset = #4\relax
! 11422: \bindingoffset = #5\relax
! 11423: %
! 11424: \ifpdf
! 11425: \pdfpageheight #7\relax
! 11426: \pdfpagewidth #8\relax
! 11427: % if we don't reset these, they will remain at "1 true in" of
! 11428: % whatever layout pdftex was dumped with.
! 11429: \pdfhorigin = 1 true in
! 11430: \pdfvorigin = 1 true in
! 11431: \else
! 11432: \ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined
! 11433: \special{papersize=#8,#7}%
! 11434: \else
! 11435: \pdfpageheight #7\relax
! 11436: \pdfpagewidth #8\relax
! 11437: % XeTeX does not have \pdfhorigin and \pdfvorigin.
! 11438: \fi
! 11439: \fi
! 11440: %
! 11441: \setleading{\textleading}
! 11442: %
! 11443: \parindent = \defaultparindent
! 11444: \setemergencystretch
! 11445: }
! 11446:
! 11447: % @letterpaper (the default).
! 11448: \def\letterpaper{{\globaldefs = 1
! 11449: \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
! 11450: \textleading = 13.2pt
! 11451: %
! 11452: % If page is nothing but text, make it come out even.
! 11453: \internalpagesizes{607.2pt}{6in}% that's 46 lines
! 11454: {\voffset}{.25in}%
! 11455: {\bindingoffset}{36pt}%
! 11456: {11in}{8.5in}%
! 11457: }}
! 11458:
! 11459: % Use @smallbook to reset parameters for 7x9.25 trim size.
! 11460: \def\smallbook{{\globaldefs = 1
! 11461: \parskip = 2pt plus 1pt
! 11462: \textleading = 12pt
! 11463: %
! 11464: \internalpagesizes{7.5in}{5in}%
! 11465: {-.2in}{0in}%
! 11466: {\bindingoffset}{16pt}%
! 11467: {9.25in}{7in}%
! 11468: %
! 11469: \lispnarrowing = 0.3in
! 11470: \tolerance = 700
! 11471: \contentsrightmargin = 0pt
! 11472: \defbodyindent = .5cm
! 11473: }}
! 11474:
! 11475: % Use @afourpaper to print on European A4 paper.
! 11476: \def\afourpaper{{\globaldefs = 1
! 11477: \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
! 11478: \textleading = 13.2pt
! 11479: %
! 11480: % Double-side printing via postscript on Laserjet 4050
! 11481: % prints double-sided nicely when \bindingoffset=10mm and \hoffset=-6mm.
! 11482: % To change the settings for a different printer or situation, adjust
! 11483: % \normaloffset until the front-side and back-side texts align. Then
! 11484: % do the same for \bindingoffset. You can set these for testing in
! 11485: % your texinfo source file like this:
! 11486: % @tex
! 11487: % \global\normaloffset = -6mm
! 11488: % \global\bindingoffset = 10mm
! 11489: % @end tex
! 11490: \internalpagesizes{673.2pt}{160mm}% that's 51 lines
! 11491: {\voffset}{\hoffset}%
! 11492: {\bindingoffset}{44pt}%
! 11493: {297mm}{210mm}%
! 11494: %
! 11495: \tolerance = 700
! 11496: \contentsrightmargin = 0pt
! 11497: \defbodyindent = 5mm
! 11498: }}
! 11499:
! 11500: % Use @afivepaper to print on European A5 paper.
! 11501: % From romildo@urano.iceb.ufop.br, 2 July 2000.
! 11502: % He also recommends making @example and @lisp be small.
! 11503: \def\afivepaper{{\globaldefs = 1
! 11504: \parskip = 2pt plus 1pt minus 0.1pt
! 11505: \textleading = 12.5pt
! 11506: %
! 11507: \internalpagesizes{160mm}{120mm}%
! 11508: {\voffset}{-11.4mm}%
! 11509: {\bindingoffset}{8pt}%
! 11510: {210mm}{148mm}%
! 11511: %
! 11512: \lispnarrowing = 0.2in
! 11513: \tolerance = 800
! 11514: \contentsrightmargin = 0pt
! 11515: \defbodyindent = 2mm
! 11516: \tableindent = 12mm
! 11517: }}
! 11518:
! 11519: % A specific text layout, 24x15cm overall, intended for A4 paper.
! 11520: \def\afourlatex{{\globaldefs = 1
! 11521: \afourpaper
! 11522: \internalpagesizes{237mm}{150mm}%
! 11523: {\voffset}{4.6mm}%
! 11524: {\bindingoffset}{7mm}%
! 11525: {297mm}{210mm}%
! 11526: %
! 11527: % Must explicitly reset to 0 because we call \afourpaper.
! 11528: \globaldefs = 0
! 11529: }}
! 11530:
! 11531: % Use @afourwide to print on A4 paper in landscape format.
! 11532: \def\afourwide{{\globaldefs = 1
! 11533: \afourpaper
! 11534: \internalpagesizes{241mm}{165mm}%
! 11535: {\voffset}{-2.95mm}%
! 11536: {\bindingoffset}{7mm}%
! 11537: {297mm}{210mm}%
! 11538: \globaldefs = 0
! 11539: }}
! 11540:
! 11541: \def\bsixpaper{{\globaldefs = 1
! 11542: \afourpaper
! 11543: \internalpagesizes{140mm}{100mm}%
! 11544: {-6.35mm}{-12.7mm}%
! 11545: {\bindingoffset}{14pt}%
! 11546: {176mm}{125mm}%
! 11547: \let\SETdispenvsize=\smallword
! 11548: \lispnarrowing = 0.2in
! 11549: \globaldefs = 0
! 11550: }}
! 11551:
! 11552:
! 11553: % @pagesizes TEXTHEIGHT[,TEXTWIDTH]
! 11554: % Perhaps we should allow setting the margins, \topskip, \parskip,
! 11555: % and/or leading, also. Or perhaps we should compute them somehow.
! 11556: %
! 11557: \parseargdef\pagesizes{\pagesizesyyy #1,,\finish}
! 11558: \def\pagesizesyyy#1,#2,#3\finish{{%
! 11559: \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \hsize=#2\relax \fi
! 11560: \globaldefs = 1
! 11561: %
! 11562: \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
! 11563: \setleading{\textleading}%
! 11564: %
! 11565: \dimen0 = #1\relax
! 11566: \advance\dimen0 by 2.5in % default 1in margin above heading line
! 11567: % and 1.5in to include heading, footing and
! 11568: % bottom margin
! 11569: %
! 11570: \dimen2 = \hsize
! 11571: \advance\dimen2 by 2in % default to 1 inch margin on each side
! 11572: %
! 11573: \internalpagesizes{#1}{\hsize}%
! 11574: {\voffset}{\normaloffset}%
! 11575: {\bindingoffset}{44pt}%
! 11576: {\dimen0}{\dimen2}%
! 11577: }}
! 11578:
! 11579: % Set default to letter.
! 11580: %
! 11581: \letterpaper
! 11582:
! 11583: % Default value of \hfuzz, for suppressing warnings about overfull hboxes.
! 11584: \hfuzz = 1pt
! 11585:
! 11586:
! 11587: \message{microtype,}
! 11588:
! 11589: % protrusion, from Thanh's protcode.tex.
! 11590: \def\mtsetprotcode#1{%
! 11591: \rpcode#1`\!=200 \rpcode#1`\,=700 \rpcode#1`\-=700 \rpcode#1`\.=700
! 11592: \rpcode#1`\;=500 \rpcode#1`\:=500 \rpcode#1`\?=200
! 11593: \rpcode#1`\'=700
! 11594: \rpcode#1 34=500 % ''
! 11595: \rpcode#1 123=300 % --
! 11596: \rpcode#1 124=200 % ---
! 11597: \rpcode#1`\)=50 \rpcode#1`\A=50 \rpcode#1`\F=50 \rpcode#1`\K=50
! 11598: \rpcode#1`\L=50 \rpcode#1`\T=50 \rpcode#1`\V=50 \rpcode#1`\W=50
! 11599: \rpcode#1`\X=50 \rpcode#1`\Y=50 \rpcode#1`\k=50 \rpcode#1`\r=50
! 11600: \rpcode#1`\t=50 \rpcode#1`\v=50 \rpcode#1`\w=50 \rpcode#1`\x=50
! 11601: \rpcode#1`\y=50
! 11602: %
! 11603: \lpcode#1`\`=700
! 11604: \lpcode#1 92=500 % ``
! 11605: \lpcode#1`\(=50 \lpcode#1`\A=50 \lpcode#1`\J=50 \lpcode#1`\T=50
! 11606: \lpcode#1`\V=50 \lpcode#1`\W=50 \lpcode#1`\X=50 \lpcode#1`\Y=50
! 11607: \lpcode#1`\v=50 \lpcode#1`\w=50 \lpcode#1`\x=50 \lpcode#1`\y=0
! 11608: %
! 11609: \mtadjustprotcode#1\relax
! 11610: }
! 11611:
! 11612: \newcount\countC
! 11613: \def\mtadjustprotcode#1{%
! 11614: \countC=0
! 11615: \loop
! 11616: \ifcase\lpcode#1\countC\else
! 11617: \mtadjustcp\lpcode#1\countC
! 11618: \fi
! 11619: \ifcase\rpcode#1\countC\else
! 11620: \mtadjustcp\rpcode#1\countC
! 11621: \fi
! 11622: \advance\countC 1
! 11623: \ifnum\countC < 256 \repeat
! 11624: }
! 11625:
! 11626: \newcount\countB
! 11627: \def\mtadjustcp#1#2#3{%
! 11628: \setbox\boxA=\hbox{%
! 11629: \ifx#2\font\else#2\fi
! 11630: \char#3}%
! 11631: \countB=\wd\boxA
! 11632: \multiply\countB #1#2#3\relax
! 11633: \divide\countB \fontdimen6 #2\relax
! 11634: #1#2#3=\countB\relax
! 11635: }
! 11636:
! 11637: \ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined
! 11638: \ifx\luatexversion\thisisundefined
! 11639: \ifpdf % pdfTeX
! 11640: \mtsetprotcode\textrm
! 11641: \def\mtfontexpand#1{\pdffontexpand#1 20 20 1 autoexpand\relax}
! 11642: \else % TeX
! 11643: \def\mtfontexpand#1{}
! 11644: \fi
! 11645: \else % LuaTeX
! 11646: \mtsetprotcode\textrm
! 11647: \def\mtfontexpand#1{\expandglyphsinfont#1 20 20 1\relax}
! 11648: \fi
! 11649: \else % XeTeX
! 11650: \mtsetprotcode\textrm
! 11651: \def\mtfontexpand#1{}
! 11652: \fi
! 11653:
! 11654:
! 11655: \newif\ifmicrotype
! 11656:
! 11657: \def\microtypeON{%
! 11658: \microtypetrue
! 11659: %
! 11660: \ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined
! 11661: \ifx\luatexversion\thisisundefined
! 11662: \ifpdf % pdfTeX
! 11663: \pdfadjustspacing=2
! 11664: \pdfprotrudechars=2
! 11665: \fi
! 11666: \else % LuaTeX
! 11667: \adjustspacing=2
! 11668: \protrudechars=2
! 11669: \fi
! 11670: \else % XeTeX
! 11671: \XeTeXprotrudechars=2
! 11672: \fi
! 11673: %
! 11674: \mtfontexpand\textrm
! 11675: \mtfontexpand\textsl
! 11676: \mtfontexpand\textbf
! 11677: }
! 11678:
! 11679: \def\microtypeOFF{%
! 11680: \microtypefalse
! 11681: %
! 11682: \ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined
! 11683: \ifx\luatexversion\thisisundefined
! 11684: \ifpdf % pdfTeX
! 11685: \pdfadjustspacing=0
! 11686: \pdfprotrudechars=0
! 11687: \fi
! 11688: \else % LuaTeX
! 11689: \adjustspacing=0
! 11690: \protrudechars=0
! 11691: \fi
! 11692: \else % XeTeX
! 11693: \XeTeXprotrudechars=0
! 11694: \fi
! 11695: }
! 11696:
! 11697: \microtypeOFF
! 11698:
! 11699: \parseargdef\microtype{%
! 11700: \def\txiarg{#1}%
! 11701: \ifx\txiarg\onword
! 11702: \microtypeON
! 11703: \else\ifx\txiarg\offword
! 11704: \microtypeOFF
! 11705: \else
! 11706: \errhelp = \EMsimple
! 11707: \errmessage{Unknown @microtype option `\txiarg', must be on|off}%
! 11708: \fi\fi
! 11709: }
! 11710:
! 11711:
! 11712: \message{and turning on texinfo input format.}
! 11713:
! 11714: % Make UTF-8 the default encoding.
! 11715: \documentencodingzzz{UTF-8}
! 11716:
! 11717: \def^^L{\par} % remove \outer, so ^L can appear in an @comment
! 11718: \catcode`\^^K = 10 % treat vertical tab as whitespace
! 11719:
! 11720: % DEL is a comment character, in case @c does not suffice.
! 11721: \catcode`\^^? = 14
! 11722:
! 11723: % Define macros to output various characters with catcode for normal text.
! 11724: \catcode`\"=\other \def\normaldoublequote{"}
! 11725: \catcode`\$=\other \def\normaldollar{$}%$ font-lock fix
! 11726: \catcode`\+=\other \def\normalplus{+}
! 11727: \catcode`\<=\other \def\normalless{<}
! 11728: \catcode`\>=\other \def\normalgreater{>}
! 11729: \catcode`\^=\other \def\normalcaret{^}
! 11730: \catcode`\_=\other \def\normalunderscore{_}
! 11731: \catcode`\|=\other \def\normalverticalbar{|}
! 11732: \catcode`\~=\other \def\normaltilde{~}
! 11733:
! 11734: % Set catcodes for Texinfo file
! 11735:
! 11736: % Active characters for printing the wanted glyph.
! 11737: % Most of these we simply print from the \tt font, but for some, we can
! 11738: % use math or other variants that look better in normal text.
! 11739: %
! 11740: \catcode`\"=\active
! 11741: \def\activedoublequote{{\tt\char34}}
! 11742: \let"=\activedoublequote
! 11743: \catcode`\~=\active \def\activetilde{{\tt\char126}} \let~ = \activetilde
! 11744: \chardef\hatchar=`\^
! 11745: \catcode`\^=\active \def\activehat{{\tt \hatchar}} \let^ = \activehat
! 11746:
! 11747: \catcode`\_=\active
! 11748: \def_{\ifusingtt\normalunderscore\_}
! 11749: \def\_{\leavevmode \kern.07em \vbox{\hrule width.3em height.1ex}\kern .07em }
! 11750: \let\realunder=_
! 11751:
! 11752: \catcode`\|=\active \def|{{\tt\char124}}
! 11753:
! 11754: \chardef \less=`\<
! 11755: \catcode`\<=\active \def\activeless{{\tt \less}}\let< = \activeless
! 11756: \chardef \gtr=`\>
! 11757: \catcode`\>=\active \def\activegtr{{\tt \gtr}}\let> = \activegtr
! 11758: \catcode`\+=\active \def+{{\tt \char 43}}
! 11759: \catcode`\$=\active \def${\ifusingit{{\sl\$}}\normaldollar}%$ font-lock fix
! 11760: \catcode`\-=\active \let-=\normaldash
! 11761:
! 11762:
! 11763: % used for headline/footline in the output routine, in case the page
! 11764: % breaks in the middle of an @tex block.
! 11765: \def\texinfochars{%
! 11766: \let< = \activeless
! 11767: \let> = \activegtr
! 11768: \let~ = \activetilde
! 11769: \let^ = \activehat
! 11770: \setregularquotes
! 11771: \let\b = \strong
! 11772: \let\i = \smartitalic
! 11773: % in principle, all other definitions in \tex have to be undone too.
! 11774: }
! 11775:
! 11776: % Used sometimes to turn off (effectively) the active characters even after
! 11777: % parsing them.
! 11778: \def\turnoffactive{%
! 11779: \passthroughcharstrue
! 11780: \let-=\normaldash
! 11781: \let"=\normaldoublequote
! 11782: \let$=\normaldollar %$ font-lock fix
! 11783: \let+=\normalplus
! 11784: \let<=\normalless
! 11785: \let>=\normalgreater
! 11786: \let^=\normalcaret
! 11787: \let_=\normalunderscore
! 11788: \let|=\normalverticalbar
! 11789: \let~=\normaltilde
! 11790: \otherbackslash
! 11791: \setregularquotes
! 11792: \unsepspaces
! 11793: }
! 11794:
! 11795: % If a .fmt file is being used, characters that might appear in a file
! 11796: % name cannot be active until we have parsed the command line.
! 11797: % So turn them off again, and have \loadconf turn them back on.
! 11798: \catcode`+=\other \catcode`\_=\other
! 11799:
! 11800:
! 11801: % \backslashcurfont outputs one backslash character in current font,
! 11802: % as in \char`\\.
! 11803: \global\chardef\backslashcurfont=`\\
! 11804:
! 11805: % Print a typewriter backslash. For math mode, we can't simply use
! 11806: % \backslashcurfont: the story here is that in math mode, the \char
! 11807: % of \backslashcurfont ends up printing the roman \ from the math symbol
! 11808: % font (because \char in math mode uses the \mathcode, and plain.tex
! 11809: % sets \mathcode`\\="026E). Hence we use an explicit \mathchar,
! 11810: % which is the decimal equivalent of "715c (class 7, e.g., use \fam;
! 11811: % ignored family value; char position "5C). We can't use " for the
! 11812: % usual hex value because it has already been made active.
! 11813:
! 11814: \def\ttbackslash{{\tt \ifmmode \mathchar29020 \else \backslashcurfont \fi}}
! 11815: \let\backslashchar = \ttbackslash % \backslashchar{} is for user documents.
! 11816:
! 11817: % These are made active for url-breaking, so need
! 11818: % active definitions as the normal characters.
! 11819: \def\normaldot{.}
! 11820: \def\normalquest{?}
! 11821: \def\normalslash{/}
! 11822:
! 11823: % \newlinesloadsconf - call \loadconf as soon as possible in the
! 11824: % file, e.g. at the first newline.
! 11825: %
! 11826: {\catcode`\^=7
! 11827: \catcode`\^^M=13
! 11828: \gdef\newlineloadsconf{%
! 11829: \catcode`\^^M=13 %
! 11830: \newlineloadsconfzz%
! 11831: }
! 11832: \gdef\newlineloadsconfzz#1^^M{%
! 11833: \def\c{\loadconf\c}%
! 11834: % Definition for the first newline read in the file
! 11835: \def ^^M{\loadconf}%
! 11836: % In case the first line has a whole-line or environment command on it
! 11837: \let\originalparsearg\parsearg%
! 11838: \def\parsearg{\loadconf\originalparsearg}%
! 11839: %
! 11840: % \startenvironment is in the expansion of commands defined with \envdef
! 11841: \let\originalstartenvironment\startenvironment%
! 11842: \def\startenvironment{\loadconf\startenvironment}%
! 11843: }}
! 11844:
! 11845:
! 11846: % Emergency active definition of newline, in case an active newline token
! 11847: % appears by mistake.
! 11848: {\catcode`\^=7 \catcode13=13%
! 11849: \gdef\enableemergencynewline{%
! 11850: \gdef^^M{%
! 11851: \par%
! 11852: %<warning: active newline>\par%
! 11853: }}}
! 11854:
! 11855:
! 11856: % \loadconf gets called at the beginning of every Texinfo file.
! 11857: % If texinfo.cnf is present on the system, read it. Useful for site-wide
! 11858: % @afourpaper, etc. Not opening texinfo.cnf directly in texinfo.tex
! 11859: % makes it possible to make a format file for Texinfo.
! 11860: %
! 11861: \gdef\loadconf{%
! 11862: \relax % Terminate the filename if running as "tex '&texinfo' FILE.texi".
! 11863: %
! 11864: % Turn off the definitions that trigger \loadconf
! 11865: \everyjobreset
! 11866: \catcode13=5 % regular end of line
! 11867: \enableemergencynewline
! 11868: \let\c=\comment
! 11869: \let\parsearg\originalparsearg
! 11870: \let\startenvironment\originalstartenvironment
! 11871: %
! 11872: % Also turn back on active characters that might appear in the input
! 11873: % file name, in case not using a pre-dumped format.
! 11874: \catcode`+=\active
! 11875: \catcode`\_=\active
! 11876: %
! 11877: \openin 1 texinfo.cnf
! 11878: \ifeof 1 \else \input texinfo.cnf \fi
! 11879: \closein 1
! 11880: }
! 11881:
! 11882: % Redefine some control sequences to be controlled by the \ifdummies
! 11883: % and \ifindexnofonts switches. Do this at the end so that the control
! 11884: % sequences are all defined.
! 11885: \definedummies
! 11886:
! 11887:
! 11888:
! 11889:
! 11890: \catcode`\@=0
! 11891:
! 11892: % \realbackslash is an actual character `\' with catcode other.
! 11893: {\catcode`\\=\other @gdef@realbackslash{\}}
! 11894:
! 11895: % In Texinfo, backslash is an active character; it prints the backslash
! 11896: % in fixed width font.
! 11897: \catcode`\\=\active % @ for escape char from now on.
! 11898:
! 11899: @let\ = @ttbackslash
! 11900:
! 11901: % If in a .fmt file, print the version number.
! 11902: % \eatinput stops the `\input texinfo' from showing up.
! 11903: % After that, `\' should revert to printing a backslash.
! 11904: % Turn on active characters that we couldn't do earlier because
! 11905: % they might have appeared in the input file name.
! 11906: %
! 11907: @everyjob{@message{[Texinfo version @texinfoversion]}%
! 11908: @global@let\ = @eatinput
! 11909: @catcode`+=@active @catcode`@_=@active}
! 11910:
! 11911: {@catcode`@^=7 @catcode`@^^M=13%
! 11912: @gdef@eatinput input texinfo#1^^M{@loadconf}}
! 11913:
! 11914: @def@everyjobreset{@ifx\@eatinput @let\ = @ttbackslash @fi}
! 11915:
! 11916: % \otherbackslash defines an active \ to be a literal `\' character with
! 11917: % catcode other.
! 11918: @gdef@otherbackslash{@let\=@realbackslash}
! 11919:
! 11920: % Same as @turnoffactive except outputs \ as {\tt\char`\\} instead of
! 11921: % the literal character `\'.
! 11922: %
! 11923: {@catcode`- = @active
! 11924: @gdef@normalturnoffactive{%
! 11925: @turnoffactive
! 11926: @let\=@ttbackslash
! 11927: }
! 11928: }
! 11929:
! 11930: % Say @foo, not \foo, in error messages.
! 11931: @escapechar = `@@
! 11932:
! 11933: % These look ok in all fonts, so just make them not special.
! 11934: % @hashchar{} gets its own user-level command, because of #line.
! 11935: @catcode`@& = @other @def@normalamp{&}
! 11936: @catcode`@# = @other @def@normalhash{#}
! 11937: @catcode`@% = @other @def@normalpercent{%}
! 11938:
! 11939: @let @hashchar = @normalhash
! 11940:
! 11941: @c Finally, make ` and ' active, so that txicodequoteundirected and
! 11942: @c txicodequotebacktick work right in, e.g., @w{@code{`foo'}}. If we
! 11943: @c don't make ` and ' active, @code will not get them as active chars.
! 11944: @c Do this last of all since we use ` in the previous @catcode assignments.
! 11945: @catcode`@'=@active
! 11946: @catcode`@`=@active
! 11947:
! 11948: @c Local variables:
! 11949: @c eval: (add-hook 'before-save-hook 'time-stamp nil t)
! 11950: @c time-stamp-pattern: "texinfoversion{%Y-%02m-%02d.%02H}"
! 11951: @c page-delimiter: "^\\\\message"
! 11952: @c End:
! 11953:
! 11954: @newlineloadsconf
FreeBSD-CVSweb <freebsd-cvsweb@FreeBSD.org>
![[BACK]](/cvsweb/icons/back.gif){kind=icon}
Return to texinfo.tex CVS log ![[TXT]](/cvsweb/icons/text.gif){kind=icon}
![[DIR]](/cvsweb/icons/dir.gif){kind=icon}
Up to [Coherent Logic Development] / freem